Automation & Control Modicon Premium automation platform

Automation & Control Modicon Premium automation platform

Schneider Electric Industries SAS Headquarters

ART. 802625

89, bd Franklin Roosevelt F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex

Owing to changes in standards and equipment, the characteristics given in the text and images in this document are not binding us until they have been confirmed with us.

http://www.schneider-electric.com http://www.telemecanique.com

Production: Schneider Electric Industries Photos: Schneider Electric Industries Printed by: Pozzo Gros Monti - Italy July 2004

MKTED204072EN

Modicon Premium automation platform

07-04

Unity & PL7 Catalogue July

04

Art. 802731 - MKTED204073EN Art. 67341 - MKTED203111EN

Ethernet TCP/IP Transparent Factory

2004

Safety solutions using Preventa

2004 Art. 55053 - MKTED203041EN AS-Interface cabling system

2003

Human/Machine dialogue Communication Control and Protection, Detection, Automation, Human/Machine dialogue

Control and Protection, Detection, Automation, Human/Machine dialogue, Communication

An overview of the product range Control and protection, Detection, Automation,

Control and signalling units Art. 28697 - MKTED299014EN

Human/Machine dialogue, Communication,

Telemecanique Components for Human-Machine interfaces

2001

Supervision,

Terminals and display units Art. 96949 - MKTED2040401EN

Panel-building and cabling accessories

Automation and control Human/Machine interfaces

2004

To be issued Automation and control Mounting systems

2004

Art. 70263 - MKTED203113EN Automation and control Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies

Art. 70455 - MKTED204011EN

2003

Automation and control Automation and relay functions

2003 Human/Machine dialogue Supervision

Panel-building and cabling accessories Automation

AUTC201108140EN Distributed I/O Advantys STB

AUTC201104124EN

2003

Modicon Momentum automation platform

2002 2004

Art. 802621 - MKTED204071EN Automation and control Automation platform Modicon Quantum and Unity - Concept Proworx software

Art. 802625 - MKTED204072EN Automation and control Automation platform Modicon Premium and Unity - PL7 software

2004

Art. 70984 - MKTED204012EN Automation platform Modicon TSX Micro and PL7 software

2004

Art. 960015 - DIA1ED2040506EN Automation and control Telemecanique The essential

2004

Automation, Communication

Art. 66692 - DIA7ED20310006EN Motion control Lexium

Art. 61233 - DIA7ED2030902EN

2004

Twin Line Motion control

Art. 802660 - MKTED204091EN

2003

Soft starters and variable speed drives

Art. 27501 - MKTED201001EN

Motor starter solutions Control and protection components

Art. 54752 - MKTED203031EN Global Detection Electronic and electromechanical sensors

2004

2001

2003

Control and protection Detection

General contents

0


Welcome to the world of Telemecanique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6 New features in Unity Premium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8

1 – Premium processors 1-1 Unity selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2 Unity processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2 Unity slot-PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14 1-2 PL7 selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 1/24 PL7 processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26 PL7 Slot-PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32

2 – Racks, I/O architectures and power supplies Power supply and fan modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2 Single rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6 Multi-racks configuration without remote module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8 Multi-racks configuration with remote module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12

3 – Discrete and analog I/O 3-1 Discrete I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 3-2 Analog I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/20 3-3 IP 20 distributed I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/28 3-4 IP 65/67 distributed I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52 3-5 Tego Power installation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/74

4 – Application-specific modules and solutions 4-1 Preventa safety modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/2 4-2 Counter ans electronic cam modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/14 4-3 Motion control modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/28 4-4 Integrated weighing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/56 4-5 Warm Standby redundancy (PL7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4/62

5 – Communication Selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/2 5-1 Ethernet TCP/IP network - Transparent Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8 5-2 CANopen machine bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/52 5-3 AS-Interface sensor/actuators bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/56 5-4 X-Way bus and network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/64 5-5 Modbus Plus network and Profibus DP/INTERBUS buses . . . . . . . . page 5/88 5-6 Modbus SL, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. . . . page 5/98

6 – Software 6-1 Unity software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2 6-2 PL7 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/54

4

7 – Human/Machine Interfaces Magelis display units and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2 Magelis iPC industrial PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6 HMI software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8 OFS data server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10 Tego Dial for Homme/Machine Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/14

8 – Connection interfaces and power supplies 8-1 Telefast 2 pre-wired system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/2 8-2 Phaseo power supplies for d.C control circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/20

9 – Services Technical information Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/2 TSX PSY power supply module selection document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/4 Standards, certifications and environment conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/6 Optional conformal coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/9 Automation product certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/10 Schneider Electric worldwide Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/12 Index Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/18

5

Welcome

Modicon Quantum automation platform To the world of Telemecanique

Modicon automation platforms A family of specialist automation platforms

Process Applications

Discrete Automation

PC based control applications

Modicon is the family name for a set of complementary automation platforms. They are characterized by their extendable memory capacity and increasing execution speed.

Premium, an optimized platform for complex machinery, factory automation applications and infrastructure b b b b b b

Up to 7 Mb of program memory Compact size and high density I/O modules Extension racks for multirack architectures Extensive catalog of sensor/actuator buses, machine buses and fieldbuses Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port on many CPUs Motion control, electronic cam, weighing and machine safety modules

Quantum, an optimized platform for batch/process applications, with high levels of availability b b b b b b

Up to 7 Mb of program memory Powerful process control library Supports fieldbuses for batch/process applications Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port on new CPUs High performance Hot Standby solution Special treatment to resist corrosive atmospheres

Atrium, the slot PLC meeting PC Based requirements b All the functionality of a PLC integrated in a PC b No compromise of ruggedness or HMI integration

6

0

Welcome (continued)

Modicon Quantum automation platform

0

To the world of Telemecanique

Unity software

A new organizer environment for high end Modicon platforms To complement the existing software catalog, Unity offers a common environment for Modicon Premium, Quantum and Atrium platforms. Based on the best standards in existing software offers, Unity is a high performance programming tool that can significantly increase productivity by means of: b State-of-the-art functionality b Optimum standardization enabling re-use of developments b Numerous tools for testing the program and improving system operation b New integrated diagnostic services The Unity software catalog also offers specialist software representing another major step towards “Collaborative Automation”: b Management of distributed control architecture projects b Design and generation of batch/process applications with PLC/HMI integration b Openness to developments in C language or in VBA (Visual Basic for Applications)

Transparent Ready

Web technology serving automation solutions Let us introduce you to the world of Transparent Ready - a world where products are compatible, interoperable and easy to maintain. With Transparent Ready, you can: b Use Ethernet in infrastructures from field level to MES level b Gain competitive advantage through the adoption of tried and tested technology b Reduce downtime via Web-based diagnostics b Create secure inter-factory communication worldwide b Control costs through the use of standards

Collaborative Automation

The new world of automation b Rather than opting for proprietary systems, Telemecanique has adopted market standards such as IEC languages, Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus IDA, XML, OPC, IT standards, etc. b Partnerships with recognized leading hardware and software specialists have been developed within the scope of the Collaborative Automation Partner Program in an effort to share technology more effectively. b You will be assured of designing the best solution without compromising on ease of integration.

7

Welcome

Modicon Premium automation platform New features in Unity Premium

New Premium CPUs With Unity, the range has been complemented by new, faster CPUs with increased memory capacity.

Extension of the range

b New high-performance TSX P57 5p CPUs b New entry level CPUs with integrated CANopen b TSX P57 1p CPU now available with integrated Ethernet port

Improved execution speed

TSX P57 5p

b 32-bit architecture for TSX P57 0p and 1p CPUs b Significant improvement in processing of complex arithmetic and instructions on arrays b Optimum performance with TSX P57 5p CPUs: v 37 ns for a Boolean instruction (60 ns with PL7) v 45 ns for a numerical instruction (80 ns with PL7)

Memory enhancements

b The whole internal memory can now be used for data when the PCMCIA extension is used. b Customizable program download to the PLC (with or without source code) b More memory: v up to 7 Mb for the program (4 times more than with PL7) v up to 896 Kb for data (7 times more than with PL7)

Communication enhancements

b USB programming port for TSX P57 4p and TSX P57 5p CPUs b Integrated Ethernet port with active Web server and automatic E-mail transmission on event b Improved Ethernet performance, a true Plug and Play port b New master CANopen module supported by all CPUs b More INTERBUS and Profibus DP fieldbus connections.

Enhancements in the process control offer b Doubling of the number of analog I/O, up to 512 channels b New library of process control blocks

43128-EN_Ver1.0.fm/2

0

Welcome (continued)


0

New features in Unity Premium

New software

Unity Pro – a seamless continuation of PL7 Unity Pro has been designed primarily to ensure continuity with PL7 in order to cut training costs to a minimum. In addition, the PL7 application converter is included as standard in Unity Pro.

Unity Pro boosts software productivity by means of b v v v v b v v b v v b v v v b v v v

Standardization and reuse of: nested structured data unlocated symbolic data eliminating memory “mapping” libraries of customizable functions or function blocks function modules Increased productivity during the design process through simplicity of use: FBD language several SFC sections (Grafcet) Increased quality during testing and start-up phases: PLC simulator on PC (offline mode) new debugging tools Reduction in machine downtimes during use: simultaneous online modifications of variables and program sections tracking of operator actions troubleshooting Simplified integration of third-party tools: hyperlinks to any level of the project XML import/export on any project element access to the Unity Pro database and server

Advanced Unity Pro specialist software

b Unity Studio has the task of structuring distributed applications where several applications and devices communicate with one another via Ethernet. Unity Studio is particularly suitable for the needs of the manufacturing industry and infrastructure. b Unity Application Generator (UAG) is specialist software for developing and generating process control applications. Unity Application Generator is particularly suitable for the needs of continuous control in batch/process industries. b Unity Developer's Edition (UDE) is specialist software providing static or dynamic access to all Unity servers based on development in VBA, VB or C++. b Unity EFB Toolkit is specialist software for development in C language of tailor-made functions destined for integration in Unity Pro function libraries. b Unity SFC View is an Active X component designed for monitoring and diagnostics of SFC sequential applications from an HMI station.

43128-EN_Ver1.0.fm/3

1

1/0

Contents

1 - Modicon Premium processors

1

1.1 - Premium processors - Unity Processors and slot-PLCs selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/2 b Premium processors v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/4 v Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/5 v Memory structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/8 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/10 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/12 b Atrium slot-PLCs v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/14 v Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/16 v TCP/X-Way software gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/17 v Memory structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/18 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/20 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/21 b PCMCIA memory extension cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/22

1.2 - Premium processors - PL7 Processors and slot-PLCs selection guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/24

b Premium processors v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/26 v Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/27 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/28 v Memory structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/30 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/31 b Atrium slot-PLCs v Présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/32 v Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/33 v TCP/X-Way software gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/33 v Memory structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/34 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/35 b PCMCIA memory extension cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1/36

1/1

1

Selection guide


1

Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs Unity

Premium/Atrium platforms for Unity Pro software offer

TSX 57 Cp configuration

TSX 57 0p processor

TSX 57 1p processors

1 1.1 g Number of racks 4/6/8 slots (according to rack type) 12 slots “In-rack” inputs/outputs Discrete inputs/outputs (1) Analog inputs/outputs

1 (6 slots) 1 – 1 192 channels (module with 8, 256 channels (module with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 16, 32 or 64 channels) 12 channels (module with 4, 8 or 16 channels)

“In-rack” application-specific channels

4 1 module with 2 counter – channels max. 40 KHz Modules with 2/4 counter channels max. 1 MHz, single-channel electronic cam module Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2/3/4 axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels) TSX SCY “in-rack” communication modules (1 application-specific channel) RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 master/slave modules 1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 master/slave modules PCMCIA modules (4), max. 3 1 integrated RS 485 channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 modules 1 “in-rack” module 2 “in-rack” modules

Max. no. of channels Integrated counter Counter Motion (2)

Weighing Serial links Serial link connections Modbus Uni-Telway Jnet Character mode Bus connections

Network connections

AS-Interface actuator/sensor bus master V2 CANopen machine bus master V4.02 INTERBUS fieldbus master V2 (5) or Profibus DP fieldbus master V0 class 1 and 2 (5) Max. no. of networks Ethernet TCP/IP Fipway/Ethway/Modbus Plus modules

Integrated process control Number of channels Memory capacity

Configurable loops Programmable loops Without PCMCIA extension With PCMCIA extension Data storage

USB programming port Power supply

Premium processor

1 integrated PCMCIA module

1 PCMCIA module (3)

–

1 Multiprotocol “in-rack” modules (Modbus TCP, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast server or FactoryCast HMI server Fipway module (4), “in-rack” Ethway modules Modbus Plus (3), Fipway (3) (4) modules, “in-rack” Ethway modules – – 96 Kb program and data 96 Kb program and data 96 Kb data 96 Kb data 128 Kb program 224 Kb program 256 Kb (PCMCIA extension in upper slot on processor no. 0) – a 100…240 V or a 100…240 V, c 24 V non-isolated and c 24…48 V isolated c 24 V non-isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each power supply module rack.

TSX P57 104M TSX P57 1634M (7) g

Standard Integrated Ethernet Integrated CANopen Integrated Fipio

Atrium slot PLC

4 2 512 channels (module with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 24 channels (module with 4, 8 or 16 channels) 8

TSX P57 Cp 0244M

TSX P57 0244M TSX P57 154M (8)

Standard Integrated Fipio

Pages 1/13 1/12 (1) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O and analog I/O are cumulative. (2) 1 axis = 1 application-specific channel, except for SERCOS modules where, depending on the configuration, the module = 2…32 channels. (3) Insert the module into the lower PCMCIA slot on a processor (no. 1) or into the external PCMCIA slot on a slot PLC (no. 1). (4) Insert the module into the TSX SCY 21 601 “in-rack” communication module slot. (5) The INTERBUS and Profibus DP limits are not cumulative.

1/2

1

TSX 57 2p processors and slot PLCs TSX 57 3p processors and slot PLCs TSX 57 4p processors


1 1.1

16 8 1024 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 80 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 channels) 24 –

128 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 channels) 32

2048 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 256 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 channels) 64

512 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 channels)

Modules with 2/4 counter channels max. 1 MHz, single-channel electronic cam module Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2/3/4 axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link 2-channel modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels) TSX SCY “in-rack” communication modules (1 application-specific channel) RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 master/slave modules 1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 master/slave modules PCMCIA modules (4), max. 3 1 integrated RS 485 channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and “in-rack” RS 485 modules 4 “in-rack” modules

8 “in-rack” modules

1 PCMCIA module (3) 1 “in-rack” module




1 (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium 3 (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium 4 slot PLC) slot PLC) Multiprotocol “in-rack” modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast server or FactoryCast HMI server and via software gateway with Atrium slot PLCs Modbus Plus (3), Fipway (3) (4) module, “in-rack” Ethway modules

10 channels with max. 3 loops –

15 channels with max. 3 loops

20 channels with max. 3 loops Library of EFB control blocks

30 channels with max. 3 loops

160/192 Kb program and data (6) 192/208 Kb program and data (6) 320 Kb program and data 640 Kb program and data 768 Kb program 1.75 Mb program 2 Mb program 7 Mb program 160/192 Kb data 192/208 Kb data 440 Kb data 896 Kb data 8 Mb (PCMCIA extension in upper or lower processor slot no. 0 and/or no. 1) – 1 a 100…240 V, c 24 V non-isolated and c 24…48 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack.

TSX P57 204M TSX P57 2634M (7)

TSX P57 304M TSX P57 3634M (7)

TSX P57 4634M (7)

TSX P57 5634M (7)

TSX P57 254M TSX PCI 57 204M

TSX P57 354M

TSX P57 454M

TSX P57 554M

TSX PCI 57 354M 1/12 and 1/21 1/13 (6) The second value applies to the processor with integrated Fipio bus manager link. (7) The integrated Ethernet port requires 1 of the available network connections. (8) The TSX P57 154M processor does not support the CANopen bus PCMCIA module.

1/3

Presentation

Modicon Premium automation platform Unity processors

Presentation

1

Premium TSX P57 pp4M and TSX P57 pp34M automation platform processors manage the entire PLC station comprising: b b b b

1.1

Discrete I/O modules Preventa safety modules Analog I/O modules Application-specific modules (counter, motion, weighing, communication)

If the PLC station needs to extend across a certain distance, these modules can be distributed: b Either in several racks interconnected by Bus X (max. 700 m) b Or via one of the supported fieldbuses The processors are differentiated by their memory capacities, processing speeds, number of I/O, and number of communication ports. Depending on the model, they include: b 1 to 16 racks b 192 to 2040 discrete I/O b 12 to 512 analog I/O b 4 to 64 application-specific channels. Each application-specific module (counter, motion control, communication (1) or weighing) accounts for 1 or more application-specific channels. b 1 to 4 networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway), 1 to 8 AS-Interface buses b 0 or 1 Fipio bus, 0 or 1 CANopen or Modbus Plus bus and 0 to 5 INTERBUS or Profibus DP fieldbuses b 0 to 30 process control channels, with one channel able to have up to 3 loops Depending on the model, Premium processors also feature: b A 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP port (RJ45 connector) b Communication via 2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) using Uni-Telway protocol or character mode (typically a 19 or 115 Kbps programming terminal and an operator dialog terminal) b A USB type TER port (for the connection of a programming terminal) Each processor has 2 slots for a PCMCIA card: b An upper slot (no. 0) for memory extension cards (program, symbols, constants and/or data files) b A lower slot (no. 1) for a network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus) or bus (CANopen, Fipio Agent, Modbus, Uni-Telway and serial links). Memory extension cards specifically for data storage can also be inserted into this slot.

Premium application design and installation The installation of these Premium processors requires: b Unity Pro Medium, Large or Extra Large programming software. This is the same as the software used in the Quantum platform. b Optionally, depending on requirements: v The Unity Studio software suite used to design distributed applications v The Unity Application Generator (UAG) specialist software for modeling and generating process applications v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB function block libraries in C language v Unity SFC View software for visualizing and diagnosing applications written in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language

1/4

1


Description

1

Unity processors

Description of TSX P57pp4M processors without integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port

8 1 2 3 4

TSX P57 1p4M single-format processors and TSX P57 2p4/3p4M double-format processors feature the following on the front panel:

1

5 1 A display block with 5 indicator lamps:

6 7

1.1

v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) TSX P57 154M

TSX P57 104M

v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) v I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault

1 2 3 4 5

v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on TER or AUX terminal port v FIP lamp (red): Activity on integrated Fipio bus (depending on model) 2 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated

6 7

3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal (RS 485) TSX P57 204/304M

TSX P57 254/354/454M

4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal (RS 485)

7 3

5 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory card

4

6 A PCMCIA slot (no.1) for a communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data 7 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 154/254/354M models) for Fipio bus communication (Fipio manager port)

TSX P57 0244M

8 An air recirculating heatsink (on TSX P57 0244/1p4M models)

1

2

3 4 5

6

TSX P57 CA 0244M/CD 0244M

Description of the processor and configurations with integrated CANopen port The TSX P57 0244M processor and TSX P57 Cp 0244M configurations (built around the TSX P57 0244M processor) feature all or some of the following components: 1 A non-extendable 6-slot TSX RKY 6 rack 2 A standard-format c 24 V non-isolated TSX PSY 1610M or a 100…240 V TSX PSY 2600M power supply (see page 2/5). 3 A TSX P57 C024M processor with slot no. 1 for the PCMCIA CANopen master V4.02 card, complete with cable and tap junction (see page 5/55). 4 A slot (no. 0) for a PCMCIA format memory extension card 5 A 2-channel 40 kHz TSX CTY 2A counter module (see page 4/19). This module uses 2 of the 4 application-specific channels provided by the processor. 6 Three single-format slots for any I/O module or Premium module 7 An air recirculating heatsink 8 A TSX P57 C024M processor with slot no. 1 for the PCMCIA CANopen master V4.02 card, complete with cable and tap junction These configurations are supplied already mounted and their component parts cannot be detached.

1/5

Description (continued)

Modicon Premium automation platform Unity processors

Description of TSX P57pp34M processors with integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port

1 1.1

TSX P57 1634/2634/2834M double-format processors with integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port feature, on the front panel: 1 3

1 A display block with 5 indicator lamps:

2

4 5 6 7 8

TSX P57 1634/2634/3634M

v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) v I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on TER or AUX terminal port 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring 5 lamps: v v v v v

RUN lamp (green): Ethernet port ready ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault COL lamp (red): Collision detection STS lamp (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics Two TX and RX lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity

3 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated 4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal (RS 485) 5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal (RS 485) 6 A standard RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX network 7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory card 8 A PCMCIA slot (no.1) for a communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data

1/6

1



1

Unity processors

1 2

1 2

Description of TSX P57 4p4/5p4M high-performance processors

1

Premium TSX P57 454/554/4634/5634M double-format high-performance processors feature the following on the front panel: 3 4 5 6 7 8

TSX P57 454/554M

9

TSX P57 4634/5634M

1 A display block with 5 indicator lamps: b RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) b ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) b I/O lamp (red): Fault occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault b TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the AUX terminal port b FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus (on TSX P57 454/554M model) For the TSX P57 4634/5634M model (with integrated Ethernet port), this display block features 6 additional display lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Ethernet TCP/IP port ready v ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault v COL lamp (red): Collision detection v STS lamp (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics Two Tx and Rx lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity 2 A "Memory extract" button for extracting the PCMCIA memory extension card. The associated "Memory extract ready" display lamp indicates that this card can be extracted safely. 3 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated 4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a programming, adjustment or HMI terminal 5 A USB type connector marked TER for connecting a programming terminal (requires the PC compatible connection cable reference UNY XCA USB 033, length 3.3 m, to be ordered separately) 6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card 7 A PCMCIA slot (no.1) for a communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data 8 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 454/554Mmodels) for Fipio bus communication (Fipio manager port) 9 An RJ45 type connector (on TSX P57 4634/5634M models) for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX network USB type terminal port The USB terminal port 5 provides a useful data rate (12 Mbps) greater than that of the Uni-Telway terminal port available on Premium processors. The USB terminal port is compatible with Unity Pro programming software and OFS (OPC Factory Server) data server. TSX P57 4p4/5p4M processors can be connected to a USB bus comprising several peripheral devices. However: b Only one processor must be connected to the USB bus. b No device on the USB bus can be controlled by the PLC (modem, printer).

1/7

1.1


Memory structure

Unity processors

Processor without PCMCIA memory card

96 to 108

1 Internal RAM

1.1

Memory structure

Located data

1

Unlocated data

1

Program, symbols and 2 area for online program modification

Constants

3

Internal RAM

96 to 896 Kb

Processor with PCMCIA memory card in slot no. 0 Located data

1

Unlocated data

1

The application memory is divided into memory areas physically distributed in the internal RAM memory and on 0, 1 or 2 PCMCIA memory extension cards: 1 The application data area, which may be one of 2 possible types, is always in the internal RAM: b Located data corresponding to data defined by an address (e.g. %MW237) to which a symbol may be associated (e.g. Counting_rejects). b Unlocated data corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. This type of addressing removes the memory "mapping" managment constraints because addresses are assigned automatically.

2 Area in internal RAM or PCMCIA memory card for the program and symbols. In the event of this area being in internal RAM, it also supports the area for modifying the program in online mode (1). This area contains the program's executable binary code and IEC source code. The user selects the type of information to be stored in the PLC memory.

PCMCIA card (slot no. 0)

128 to 7168 Kb

3 Constants area in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 0) Program and symbols 2

4 Storage area for additional data (slot no. 0 or no. 1), e.g. for production data and manufacturing recipes

Constants

Two memory structures are possible depending on whether the Premium processor is fitted with 0, 1 or 2 memory extension cards:

Storage of additional data

3 4

b Application in PCMCIA card. In this case, the internal RAM is reserved for the application data. The PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 1) contains the program space (program, symbols and constants areas) (224 to 7168 Kb). Certain types of PCMCIA memory card also host the data storage area (max. 6976 Kb).

1/8

4096 or 8192 Kb

PCMCIA data storage card (slot no. 0)

96 to 640 Kb

Processor with data storage type memory card in slot no. 0

Internal RAM

b Application in internal RAM. In this case, the application is entirely loaded in the processor’s internal battery-backed RAM (2), the capacity of which depends on the processor model (96 to 640 Kb).

Located data

1

Unlocated data

1

Program, symbols and area for online program modification

2

Constants

3


4

The presence of the symbols area with the program area is optional. Having the application symbols database on the PLC means that, when connected to a programming terminal not containing any applications, all the elements needed to debug or upgrade this PLC are available within the PLC. (1) If a PCMCIA card has been inserted, the memory used by program modification in online mode is located in this memory card (outside zones 2, 3 and 4 opposite). (2) The internal RAM memory is backed up by an optional battery (3 years' battery life) located in the power supply module (see page 2/22).

1

Memory structure (continued) Modicon Premium automation

platform

1

Unity processors

Processor with mixed type memory cards in slot no. 0 and data storage type memory cards in slot no. 1 (1)

Memory structure (continued)

Internal RAM

96 to 896 Kb

Extension of the data storage area Located data

128 to 7168 Kb

Memory cards reserved for data storage (4096 or 8192 Kb) are used to:

Unlocated data

1 Program and symbols


Constants

b Access the data storage area when the application is entirely supported by the internal RAM. In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0. 2

3

Additional data storage (zone A)

4096 or 8192 Kb

4


1

1

Additional data storage (zone B)

(1) TSX P57 20 processors and higher.

b Free up memory space to provide additional program space when the application is in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0). In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 1 (a part of it can be supported by the memory card in slot no. 0). Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with the management of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium PLC. Protecting the application

4

Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect this in order to prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) by only loading the executable code on the PLC. A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads). Program modification in online mode This function is different from previous versions of Premium PLCs (with PL7 software) and now allows program code and data in different parts of the application to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process). This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume required. Any program modifications made in online mode require available program memory space at least equal in size to the combined size of all sections of the Unity Pro program affected by the same modification session. Depending on circumstances: b For a processor with memory extension card, the memory volume remaining available in the card for online modification is sufficient if the recommendations on page 2/22 are observed. b For a processor without memory extension card, users wishing to have the option of making modifications in online mode may select a processor according to: v The anticipated size of the application v The number and size of the program sections to be modified in online mode A memory extension card that only uses Flash Eprom technology (without additional SRAM) obviously cannot provide the function of program modification in online mode.

1/9

1.1


Characteristics

Unity processors

Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with major national and international standards on electronic industrial automation equipment. See pages 9/6 to 9/11 “Standards, certification and environmental conditions”.

1

Characteristics and performance Type of processor Maximum configuration

No. of racks

Functions

Max. no. in rack Discrete I/O of (3) Analog I/O Process control channels Application-specific channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) (5) Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP connections Fipio manager

1.1

TSX P57 0244M (1) 1 1 12

4/6/8 slots 12 slots Max. no. of slots for modules

Maximum capacity

AS-Interface bus CANopen or Modbus Plus bus INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus Without PCMCIA card Kb With PCMCIA card

Kb

Data storage

Kb

Maximum size Located internal bits bits of object zones (% of internal memory) Located internal data Kb

Application structure

Execution time Without for PCMCIA card one instruction

With PCMCIA card

TSX P57 1634M

TSX P57 154M

TSX P57 204M 16 8 128

TSX P57 2634M

192/256 (2) 512 12 24 –

1024 80 10 (up to 30 simple loops)

4

24

8

– –

Serial link Maximum no. of Network (Ethernet connections TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus)

Memories

TSX P57 104M 4 2 32

1

– 1 (63 agents) 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 19.2 Kbps 1 1, none if 1 integrated Ethernet is used 1 2 1 integrated 1 1 Modbus CANopen Plus only – 96 prog. + data 128 prog. 96 data 256

224 prog. 96 data

4096

1

– 1 (127 agents)

1, none if integrated Ethernet is used

1

–

4 1 1 160 prog. + data

192 prog. + data 768 prog. 768 prog. 160 data 192 data 16,384 (limited to 8192 with current PCMCIA cards) 8132

Unlocated internal data Master task Fast task Auxiliary tasks Event tasks Boolean On word or fixed-point arithmetic On floating points

Kb

64 for internal words %Mpi 64 for constant words %Kpi Unlimited (6)

µs µs

1 1 1 1 – – 32 (1 of which has priority) 0.19 0.19 0.25 0.25

1 1 – 64 (1 of which has priority) 0.19 0.25

1.75…2.60 (7)

1.75…2.60 (7)

Boolean On word or fixed-point arithmetic On floating points

µs µs

1.75…2.60 (7) 0.25 0.50

0.25 0.50

0.21 0.42

1.75…2.60 (7) 4.76

1.75…2.60 (7)

1.75…2.60 (7)

µs

µs

TSX P57 254M

Kinst/ 4.76 4.76 ms 65% Boolean and Kinst/ 3.71 3.71 3.71 35% fixed arithmetic ms Kinst/ 3.10 3.10 3.70 With PCMCIA 100% Boolean ms card 65% Boolean and Kinst/ 2.10 2.10 2.53 35% fixed arithmetic ms ms 1.00 1.00 1.00 System Master task overhead Fast task ms 0.30 0.30 0.30 (1) Identical characteristics for TSX P57 Cp0244M configuration. (2) The first value is valid for a TSX P57 Cp 0204M configuration, the second for a TSX P57 0244M processor. (3) Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O, application-specific channels, and process control channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or third-party bus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (4) Programmable loops using the CONT-CTL EFB control block library (in addition to configurable process control). (5) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. No. of Without Kinstructions PCMCIA card executed every ms

1/10

100% Boolean

1


Characteristics (continued)

1

Unity processors


1

Characteristics and performance (continued) Types of processor Maximum configuration Functions

TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 304M 3634M 354M 16 8 128 1024 128 15 (up to 45 simple loops)

No. of racks

4/6/8 slots 12 slots Max. no. of slots for modules Max. no. in rack Discrete I/O of (3) Analog I/O Process control channels Application-specific channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) (5) Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP connections Fipio manager

32

– –

Serial link Maximum no. of Network (Ethernet connections TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus)

Memories

Maximum capacity

AS-Interface bus CANopen or Modbus Plus bus INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus Without PCMCIA card Kb With PCMCIA card

Kb

Data storage Kb bits Maximum size Located internal bits of object zones (% of internal memory) Located internal data Kb

Application structure

Execution time Without for PCMCIA card one instruction With PCMCIA card

Typical Without program code PCMCIA card execution time for 1 Kinstruction With PCMCIA card

Unlocated internal data Master task Fast task Auxiliary tasks Event tasks

Kb

Boolean On word or fixed-point arithmetic On floating points Boolean On word or fixed-point arithmetic On floating points 100% Boolean 65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic 100% Boolean 65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic

System overhead

Master task Fast task

1

TSX P57 TSX P57 454M 4634M 16 8 128 2048 256 20 (4) (up to 60 simple loops) 64

– 1 (127 agents)

TSX P57 TSX P57 554M 5634M 16 8 128 2048 512 30 (4) (up to 90 simple loops) 64

– 1 (127 agents) 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 1 x 12 Mbps USB link (TER), 19.2 or 115 Kbps 1 x 19.2 Kbps (AUX) link 3 3, 3 4 4, 4 2 if 3 if integrated integrated Ethernet is Ethernet is used used 8 8 8 1 3

1 –

4

192 prog. + data

1 –

4, 3 if integrated Ethernet is used

5

208 prog. + 320 prog. + data data 1792 prog. 1792 prog. 2048 prog. 192 data 440 data 208 data 16,384 (limited to 8192 with current PCMCIA cards) 16,384 32,768

640 prog. + data

64 for internal words %Mpi 64 for constant words %Kpi Unlimited (6)

128 for int. words %Mpi 64 for const. words %Kpi

7168 prog. 896 data 32,768

1 1 – 64 (1 of which has priority)

1 1 – 64 (1 of which has priority)

µs µs

0.12 0.17

0.039…0.057 (7) 0.054…0.073 (7)

1 1 4 128 (1 of which has priority) 32 (timers) 0.0375...0.045 (7) 0.045...0.060 (7)

µs µs µs

1.75...3.00 (7) 0.17 0.32

0.55…0.63 (7) 0.048…0.057 (7) 0.054…0.073 (7)

0.48...0.56 (7) 0.0375...0.045 (7) 0.045...0.060 (7)

µs Kinst/ ms Kinst/ ms Kinst/ ms Kinst/ ms ms ms

1.75...3.00 (7) 6.72

0.55…0.63 (7) 15.75

0.48...0.56 (7) 20.26

5.11

11.40

14.00

4.59

15.75

20.26

3.11

11.40

14.00

1.00 0.35

1.00 0.08

1.00 0.07

(6) Within the processor's data memory capacity limit. (7) Threshold values limited according to the type of instruction.

1/11

1.1


References

1

Unity processors

Ready-assembled TSX P57 02 processor configurations with integrated CANopen port

1

These configurations, which are supplied already mounted, feature: b A non-extendable 6-slot TSX RKY6 rack b A TSX PSY 1610/2600M DC or AC power supply b A TSX P57 C024M processor with a TSX CPP 110 CANopen bus kit b A TSX CTY 2A 2-channel 40 kHz counter module

1.1 TSX P57 2634/3634M

I/O capacity (1) 192 discrete I/O 12 analog I/O channels 4 application-specific channels (1)

Capacity Memory 96 Kb integrated 128 Kb on PCMCIA

No. of bus/network modules

Power supply V

Reference (2)

Weight kg

1 integrated CANopen bus 1 network 1 AS-Interface bus

c 24

TSX P57 CD 0244M

2.940

a 100…240 TSX P57 CA 0244M

2.900

TSX 57 processors I/O capacity (2)

Capacity Memory

Process control channels

Maximum number of Integrated bus/network port modules

Reference (3)

Weight kg

1 network 1 AS-Interface bus

TSX P57 0244M

0.320

1 network – 2 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus

TSX P57 104M

0.380

2 AS-Interface buses Ethernet 1 CANopen bus TCP/IP

TSX P57 1634M

1 network Fipio 2 AS-Interface buses

TSX P57 154M

0.420

1 network – 4 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (5) 1 fieldbus (5) 4 AS-Interface buses Ethernet 1 CANopen bus (5) TCP/IP 1 fieldbus (5)

TSX P57 204M

0.520

TSX 57 0p 1 rack 256 discrete I/O 12 analog I/O 4 application-specific channels

TSX P57 154M

96 Kb integrated 128 Kb on PCMCIA

0

CANopen

TSX 57 1p 4 racks (4) 512 discrete I/O 24 analog I/O 8 application-specific channels

96 Kb 0 integrated Max. 224 Kb on PCMCIA

–

TSX 57 2p 16 racks (4)

TSX P57 204/304M

1024 discrete I/O 80 analog I/O 24 application-specific channels


TSX P57 2634M

–


1 network Fipio 4 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (5) 1 fieldbus (5)

TSX P57 254M

–

192 Kb integrated Max. 1792 Kb on PCMCIA

3 networks 8 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (5) 3 fieldbuses (5) 2 networks 8 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (5) 3 fieldbuses (5) 3 networks 8 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (5) 3 fieldbuses (5)

–

TSX P57 304M

0.520

Ethernet TCP/IP

TSX P57 3634M

Fipio

TSX P57 354M

TSX 57 3p 16 racks (4) 1024 discrete I/O 128 analog I/O 32 application-specific channels

15

TSX P57 2634/3634M 208 Kb integrated Max. 1792 Kb on PCMCIA

TSX P57 154/254/354M

1/12

15

–

0.560

(1) 2 of these channels are used by the TSX CTY 2A 2-channel 40 kHz counter module integrated into the configuration. (2) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the different buses is not taken into account. (3) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide: English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian. (4) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12 EX rack with 12 slots is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots. (5) Fieldbus: INTERBUS or Profibus DP.

References (continued)


1

Unity processors

TSX 57 processor (continued) I/O capacity (1)

Capacity Memory


Maximum number of Integrated bus/network port modules

Reference (2)

4 networks Ethernet 8 AS-Interface buses TCP/IP 1 CANopen bus (5) 4 fieldbuses (5)

TSX P57 4634M

4 networks Fipio 8 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (5) 4 fieldbuses (5)

TSX P57 454M

4 networks Ethernet 8 AS-Interface buses TCP/IP 1 CANopen bus (5) 5 fieldbuses (5)

TSX P57 5634M

4 networks Fipio 8 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (5) 5 fieldbuses (5)

TSX P57 554M

Weight kg

1

TSX 57-4p 16 racks (3) 2048 discrete I/O 256 analog I/O 64 application-specific channels

320/440 Kb integrated (4) Max. 2048 Kb on PCMCIA

20

TSX P57 454/5544M

–

1.1 0.560

TSX 57-5p 16 racks (3) 2048 discrete I/O 512 analog I/O 64 application-specific channels

TSX P57 4634/5634M

640/896 Kb 30 integrated (4) Max. 7168 Kb on PCMCIA

–

0.560

PCMCIA memory extension cards Premium processors can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the processor model. See pages 1/22 and 1/23. Connection cables for PC programming terminal Description Universal cable for terminal port/RS 232 port

Use from Micro/Premium/Atrium mini-DIN port or TSX P ACC 01 unit (TER or AUX)

to RS 232D port on a PC terminal (9-way SUB-D)

Length

Reference

2.5 m

TSX PCX 1031

Weight kg 0.170

Cable for terminal port/USB port

Micro/Premium/Atrium mini-DIN port (TER or AUX)

USB port on a PC terminal

2.5 m

TSX PCX 3030

–

USB cable for terminal port/PC

USB port Premium TSX 57 4p/5p Quantum 140 CPU 6p1

USB port on a PC terminal

3.3 m

UNY XCA USB 033

–

TSX PCX 1031

(1) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not counted. (2) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide. (3) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12 EX rack with 12 slots is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots. (4) The second value corresponds to the capacity of the integrated RAM when the application program is supported by the PCMCIA card. (5) Fieldbus: INTERBUS or Profibus DP.

1/13

Presentation

Modicon Premium automation platform Atrium slot PLCs Unity

Presentation

1

Atrium TSX PCI 57 pp4M slot PLCs are PC format cards (PCI 32-bit/25…33 MHz bus) to be integrated into a PC running under Windows 2000 or Windows XP. This combination of PLC and PC optimizes performance in applications requiring, for example, a higher level of communication, control or supervision functions. The slot PLC manages the entire PLC station, which comprises the same I/O modules as Premium processors (discrete, analog, application-specific and communication):

1.1 TSX PCI 57 pp4M

b Locally, in one or more racks connected to Bus X on the Atrium slot PLC b Using remote I/O via the same fieldbuses Two types of Atrium slot PLC are available. They can both accommodate: b A maximum of 16 extendable TSX RKY ppEX racks b A CANopen master bus function in their external PCMCIA slot Both have: b An internal PCMCIA slot (no. 0) to accommodate all types of memory extension card: program and symbols only, or mixed (program, symbols and data storage) b An external PCMCIA slot (no. 1) to accommodate the network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus) or bus (CANopen, Modbus, Uni-Telway, Fipio Agent and serial link) This slot can also accommodate the 4 or 8 MB SRAM memory extension card used to store additional data (see page 1/22). Their distinguishing characteristics are: b The short application program execution time b The program memory and data memory capacity b 80 or 128 "in-rack" analog I/O b 24 or 32 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter, motion control, serial link, or weighing) accounts for 1 or a number of application-specific channels. b 1 or 3 networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway types), 1 Ethernet TCP/IP network, 4 or 8 AS-Interface buses V2.1, 1 CANopen bus and 1 or 3 third-party fieldbuses (INTERBUS, Profibus DP) b 10 or 15 process control channels Integrated communication Six means of integrated communication (communication that does not require the external rack to be connected on the slot PLC Bus X) are possible: b CANopen master, via a PCMCIA card that is inserted into the external slot on the slot PLC b Fipio manager, via a 9-way SUB-D type connector on the faceplate of the TSX PCI 57 354M slot PLC b Ethernet TCP/IP, via the TCP/X-Way Windows-compatible gateway software, which communicates with the slot PLC via the PCI bus on the host PC (this software is either connected to an Ethernet port in the host PC, integrated into the motherboard or supplied on a PC format card) b INTERBUS master generation 4, via an additional PC format card, occupying an ISA bus slot and connected to the slot PLC via a ribbon cable that includes Bus X b Modbus Plus or Fipway, via a PCMCIA card that is inserted into the external slot on the slot PLC b Communication via a terminal port (TER) using Uni-Telway or character mode protocol, 19.2 or 115 Kbps (typically a programming terminal or an HMI terminal)

1/14

1

Presentation (continued)


1

Atrium slot PLCs Unity

Presentation (continued) TSX PSI 2010 standalone power supply In order to enable standalone operation in the event of a PC power outage, a standalone c 24 V TSX PSI 2010 power supply can be connected to a PCI or ISA bus slot to ensure continuity of service for the automation part of the system (only functions managed by the PC are disabled).

1 1.1

Design and installation of Atrium applications Installation of these new Atrium slot PLCs requires: b Unity Pro Medium, Large or Extra Large programming software. This is the same as the software used on the Quantum platform. b Optionally, depending on requirements: v The Unity Studio software suite used to design distributed applications v Unity Application Generator (UAG) specialist software for modeling and generating process applications v Unity EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB function block libraries in C language v Unity SFC View software for displaying and diagnosing applications written in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language The Atrium slot PLC is not supplied with any Windows driver or application type software programs. These are supplied with the Unity Pro, Unity Studio, Monitor Pro, Vijeo Look, OFS (OPC Factory Server), etc. software. They enable connection to the slot PLC via: b Uni-Telway and the TER port on the front panel b PCIway and the PC host's PCI bus b Ethernet TCP/IP (XIP)

Typical architecture Ethernet TCP/IP

Magelis IPC fitted with, for example: - Atrium TSX PCI slot PLC - Vijeo Look and Unity Pro software - TCP/X-Way gateway software - c 24 V standalone power supply

Premium I/O extension racks

Altivar

Momentum

By integrating an Atrium slot PLC card, the architecture shown opposite can be created using any compatible PC (equipped with PCI bus slots) and Magelis IPC industrial PC stations. This solution can provide a PLC architecture in which the I/O are: b Remotely located close to the machine or process via the fieldbus (1): v Ethernet TCP/IP via the TLX CD GTW 10M gateway software v CANopen with TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card v Fipio with the integrated port on the TSX PCI 57 354M slot PLC v Modbus Plus with TSX MBP 100 PCMCIA card v INTERBUS with PC format slot PLC card, TSX IBX 100 ISA bus (link to TSX PCI 57 pp4M slot PLC via ribbon cable) b And/or centralized in TSX RKY ppEX extendable racks. TSX RKY ppEX extendable racks connected on Bus X permit the use of application-specific modules and the setting up of AS-Interface bus segments. For example: v TCP/IP TSX ETY 4103 or TSX ETY 5103 Ethernet TCP/IP module (with Web server, FactoryCast server or TSX WMY 100 module (FactoryCast HMI server)) v INTERBUS TSX IBY 100 or Profibus DP TSX PBY 100 master module v TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface V2.1 master module v TSX CAY, TSX CFY or TSX CSY 84 (SERCOS) motion control modules

Ethernet TCP/IP, CANopen, Fipio, Modbus Plus, INTERBUS

(1) Corresponding to an integrated module solution on the host PC, without having to use modules on extension racks on Bus X.

1/15


Description


Description Description of slot PLCs

1

TSX PCI 57 pp4M slot PLCs mechanically occupy two consecutive slots on the PCI bus, but only use one electrically (1). They feature:

1

b On the faceplate:

2 3 4 5 6

1.1

1 A PCMCIA slot (no.1) for a communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data 2 A 9-way female SUB-D connector for connecting Bus X to the first rack supporting the I/O modules and application-specific modules

TSX PCI 57 pp4M

3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming terminal 4 A RESET button causing a cold restart of the slot PLC when it is activated 5 An ERR lamp (red); fault on the slot PLC or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory or communication cards) 6 A 9-pin male SUB-D connector (on TSX PCI 57 354M model) for Fipio bus manager communication. b On the components side of the card: v 4 or 5 LEDs indicating the operating status (RUN, TER, BAT, I/O and FIP on the TSX PCI 57 354M) v A slot for a backup battery for the slot PLC internal RAM memory v A slot (no. 0) for a PCMCIA format memory extension card v A Bus X line terminator circuit (type A) v A PCI bus connector for connection to the host PC Supplied with the slot PLC: 1 Bus X line terminator (type B) to be installed at the end of the last of the I/O and application-specific module support racks. Description of the additional TSX PCI ACC1 remote Bus X faceplate 7 An additional faceplate, TSX PCI ACC1, fitted with a 9-way male SUB-D connector, enabling the slot PLC Atrium to be located in the middle of its extension racks rather than at one end of them. Description of the c 24 V TSX PSI 2010 power supply

7

The c 24 V TSX PSI 2010 power supply is inserted into a PCI bus slot located next to the TSX PCI 57 pp4M slot PLC. It occupies one slot mechanically but no slots electrically. It can provide the power supply for one slot PLC. It features the following on the front panel:

TSX PCI ACC1

8 A 9-way female SUB-D connector enabling a second remote Bus X to be connected (instead of using the TSX PCI ACC1 faceplate) 8

9

TSX PSI 2010

1/16

9 A 3-way female SUB-D connector for connection to the c 24 V power supply (male connector supplied) This power supply includes two ribbon cables for connection to the slot PLC, one for the power supply to the slot PLC and the other to ensure Bus X continuity. (1) Atrium slot PLCs can also operate using just one PC slot: For this purpose, carefully unscrew and remove the external PCMCIA slot.

1


Gateway, setup

1


TCP/X-Way gateway

SCADA OFS server

Ethernet TCP/IP Modbus Uni-TE

1

The TCP/X-Way software gateway performs 2 main functions for Atrium slot PLCs: b Communication using the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol via the Ethernet TCP/IP card integrated in the PC b Data exchange in both directions with remote stations via the telephone modem in the PC This software interfaces with the Atrium slot PLC PCIway driver and automatically routes messages. The most common configurations are: v Via Ethernet network (diagram opposite). Access is made secure by checking incoming IP addresses, in a similar way to the Premium PLC Ethernet TSX ETY 4103 module. The Global Data and I/O Scanning services are not supported. v Via modem link. Incoming calls are checked via the standard Windows password checking mechanisms. In addition to remote access with Unity Pro, the TCP/IP gateway enables communication with other stations that can be connected to a local Ethernet network (RAS (Remote Access Server) function).

2 3 Premium

PC

Setup

Quantum

1 Atrium slot PLC 2 Ethernet TCP/IP card or integrated port 3 TCP/X-Way software gateway

Integration into the host PC To receive a TSX PCI 57 pp4M Atrium slot PLC, the host PC must: b Run under Windows 2000 or Windows XP b Have a 33-bit 33 MHz (c 5 or 3.3 V) PCI bus b Have two consecutive slots available on the PCI bus (of which at least one must be a PCI type slot) The maximum number of slot PLCs per PC depends on the number of available PCI/ISA slots, the PC power supply rating (when the TSX PSI 2010 power supply option is not used) and whether or not PCMCIA cards have been inserted into the slot PLC. The slot PLC is completely independent of the application running on the PC, in particular: b The standard PC command "Restart" (1) has no effect on the slot PLC operating modes (2). b Switching the PC off and then on again causes a warm restart of the application being managed by the slot PLC (restart without loss of application context). b The c 24 V standalone power supply allows the slot PLC to operate even in the event of a PC power supply outage. The host PC, equipped with Unity Pro software, can be used as a programming and setup terminal for the TSX PCI 57 Atrium slot PLC.

Magelis IPC or PC with Atrium slot PLC

Logical location on Bus X The Atrium TSX PCI 57 slot PLC logically occupies the same 2 slots as a Premium TSX P57 processor of the same type. The 2 slots in the TSX RKY rack with address 0 next to the TSX PSY power supply module must therefore remain unoccupied, see page 1/27.

Bus X

Premium extension

Premium extension

Bus X

Premium extension

The TSX PCI ACC1 faceplate or TSX PSI 2010 c 24 V power supply enables a second Bus X to be connected from Magelis IPC industrial PCs, thus forming a Y structure (see the diagram opposite, where the maximum length of each Bus X segment is 100 m). If they are not used, only one Bus X may be connected. (1) "Ctrl-Alt-Del" command, followed by "Restart" or pressing the "Reset" button on the PC (if there is one). (2) Causes the loss of the PCI bus connection.

1/17

1 1.1


Memory structure


Slot PLC without PCMCIA memory card

160 to 208 Kb

1 Internal RAM

1.1

Memory structure

Located data

1

Unlocated data

1

Program, symbols and area for online program 2 modification

Constants

3

128 to 7168 Kb

PCMCIA card slot no. 0

160 or 208 Kb

Internal RAM

1 The application data area, which may be one of 2 possible types, is always in the internal RAM: v Located data corresponding to data defined by an address (e.g. %MW237) to which a symbol may be associated (e.g. Counting_rejects). v Global unlocated data corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. This type of addressing removes memory "mapping" management constraints, as address are assigned automatically, and enables data to be structured. v DFB unlocated data, corresponding to data from DFB user function blocks. The size of this object zone is only limited by the size of the physical internal RAM memory available. 2 Area in internal RAM or PCMCIA memory card for the program and symbols. In the event of this area being in internal RAM, it also supports the area for modifying the program in online mode (1). This area contains the program's executable binary code and IEC source code. The user selects the type of information to be stored in the PLC memory.

Slot PLC with PCMCIA memory card in slot no. 0

Located data

The application memory is divided into memory areas physically distributed in the internal RAM memory and on 0, 1 or 2 PCMCIA memory extension cards:

1

3 Constants area in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 0)

Global unlocated data 1

4 Storage area for additional data (slot no. 0 or no. 1), e.g. for production data and manufacturing recipes

DFB unlocated data

Two memory structures are possible depending on whether the Atrium slot PLC is fitted with 0, 1 or 2 memory extension cards:

1

Program and symbols 2

b Application in internal RAM. In this case, the application is entirely loaded in the processor’s internal battery-backed RAM (2), the capacity of which depends on the processor model (160 or 208 Kb).

Constants

3

b Application in PCMCIA card. In this case, the internal RAM is reserved for application data. The PCMCIA memory card (slot no. 1) contains the program space (program, symbols and constants areas) (max. 768 or 1792 Kb). Certain types of PCMCIA memory card host the data storage area (max. 6976 Kb).


4

The presence of the symbols area with the program area is optional. Having the application symbols database on the PLC means that, when connected to a programming terminal not containing any applications, all the elements needed to debug or upgrade this PLC are available within the PLC.

(1) If a PCMCIA card has been inserted, the memory used by program modification in online mode is located in this memory card (outside zones 2, 3 and 4 opposite). (2) The internal RAM memory is backed up by an optional battery (3 years' battery life) located in the power supply module (see page 2/22).

1/18

1


platform

1


Slot PLC with data storage memory card in slot no. 0

Memory structure (continued) Extension of the data storage area

Located data


4096 or 208 Kb

160 or 208 Kb

Internal RAM

Global and DFB unlocated data

1

1

Memory cards reserved for data storage (4096 or 8192 Kb) are used to: 1

Program, symbols and area for online program 2 modification Constants

3


4

b Access the data storage area when the application is entirely supported by the internal RAM. In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0. b Free up memory space to provide additional program space when the application is in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0). In this case, the data storage memory card is inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 1 (a part of it can be supported by the memory card in the slot). Unity Pro programming software assists the application designer with the management of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium PLC.

Protecting the application


128 to 7168 Kb

Internal RAM

160 or 208 Kb

Slot PLC with mixed type memory cards in slot no. 0 and data storage type memory cards in slot no. 1 Located data

1

Global unlocated data 1 Unlocated DFB data

1

Program and symbols 2

Constants

3

4096 or 8192 Kb

Additional data storage 4 (zone A)


Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect this in order to prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) by only loading the executable code on the PLC. A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads).

Program modification in online mode This function is different from previous versions of Premium PLCs (with PL7 software) and now allows program code and data in different parts of the application to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process). This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume required. Any program modifications made in online mode require available program memory space at least equal in size to the combined size of all sections of the Unity Pro program affected by the same modification session. Depending on circumstances:

Additional data storage 4 (zone B)

b For a processor with memory extension card, the memory volume remaining available in the card for online modification is sufficient if the recommendations on page 1/22 are observed. b For a processor without memory extension card, users wishing to have the option of making modifications in online mode may select a processor according to: v The anticipated size of the application v The number and size of the program sections to be modified in online mode A memory extension card that only uses Flash Eprom technology (without additional SRAM) cannot provide the function of program modification in online mode.

1/19

1.1


Characteristics


Characteristics and performance

1 1.1

Type of processor Maximum No. of racks 4/6/8 slots configuration 12 slots Max. no. of slots for modules Functions Max. no. "in Discrete I/O rack" of (1) Analog I/O Process control channels Application-specific channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) (2) Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP connections Fipio manager Serial link

Memories

Maximum Network (Ethernet TCP/IP, no. of Fipway, Modbus Plus, connections Ethway) AS-Interface bus CANopen or Modbus Plus bus INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kb capacity With PCMCIA card Kb

Maximum size of object zones Application structure

Execution time for one instruction

Without PCMCIA card With PCMCIA card

Data storage Located internal bits (% of internal memory) Located internal data Global unlocated internal data Master task Fast task Auxiliary tasks Event tasks Boolean On word or fixed-point arithmetic On floating points Boolean On word or fixed-point arithmetic On floating points 100% Boolean

Kb bps Kb Kb

TSX PCI P57 354M

128 15 (up to 60 simple loops) 32

1 (uses the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated in the host PC via the TLX CD GTW 10M gateway software) – 1 (127 agents) 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX), 19.2 Kbps 19.2 or 115 Kbps 2 (including 1 Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into 4 (including 1 Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into PC) PC) 4 8 1 1, none if CANopen is used 3, 2 if CANopen is used 160 program and data 208 program and data 768 program 1792 program 160 data 208 data 16,384 (limited to 8192 with current PCMCIA cards) 8132 16 384

µs µs

64 for internal words %MpWi, 64 for constant words %KpWi Unlimited, within the limits of the memory capacity of the slot PLC 1 1 – 64 (1 of which has priority) 0.19 0.12 0.25 0.17

µs µs µs

1.75...2.60 (3) 0.21 0.42

0.17 0.32

1.75...2.60 (3) 4.76 without PCMCIA card, 3.70 with PCMCIA card 3.71 without PCMCIA card, 2.53 with PCMCIA card 1.00 0.30

6.72 without PCMCIA card 4.59 with PCMCIA card 5.11 without PCMCIA card 3.12 with PCMCIA card 1.00 0.25

µs Kinst/ ms 65% Boolean and 35% fixed Kinst/ ms arithmetic MAST task ms FAST task ms

Typical program code execution time for 1 Kinstruction System overhead

TSX PCI P57 204M 16 8 128 1024 80 10 (up to 30 simple loops) 24

(1) Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface/Uni-Telway/Fipio/Modbus Plus, etc.) or third-party bus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (2) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. (3) Threshold values according to the type of instruction.

Standalone power supply characteristics Type of power supply module Primary Voltage Nominal Limits (including ripple) Current Nominal input value 1 rms Initial 1 inrush power-up at I2t on triggering 25°C It on triggering Power line disturbance period Built-in protection Conformity to standards Insulation Dielectric Primary/secondary and strength primary/earth Insulation Primary/secondary and resistance primary/earth

1/20

V rms

TSX PSI 2010 c 24 c 19.2 … 30 (possible up to 36 V) y 1.1 at c 24 V 100 at c 24 V 3 0.04 y 7 at 24 V, y 1 at 19.2 V Via a 2 A time-delay fuse (complying with standards) IEC 1131-2 Non-isolated, internal 0 V connected to PC ground

MΩ

–

V V A A A2 As ms

1


References

1


TSX PCI 57 slot PLCs I/O capacity (1)

Capacities Memory


Maximum number Reference (2) of bus/network modules

Weight kg

1

TSX PCI 57 20 16 racks (3) 1024 discrete I/O 80 analog I/O 24 application-specific channels


10

TSX PCI 57 204M

1 network all types TSX PCI 57 204M 1 Ethernet TCP/IP network 4 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 1 fieldbus (4)

0.310

1 integrated Fipio TSX PCI 57 354M 3 networks all types 1 Ethernet TCP/IP network 8 AS-Interface buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 3 third-party buses (4)

0.340

1.1

TSX PCI 57 35 16 racks (3) 1024 discrete I/O 128 analog I/O 32 application-specific channels


15

Software options (5) When connected to an Atrium slot PLC, the TCP/X-Way gateway software offer (supplied on CD-ROM) enables communication under the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol using the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated into the host PC.

TSX PCI 57 354M

PCMCIA memory extension cards Atrium slot PLCs can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the slot PLC model. See pages 1/22 and 1/23. Description TCP/X-Way gateway software

Use

Site license

Reference

Weight kg –

Compatible with Windows 2000 or XP

Single-station

TLX CD GTW 10M

10 stations

TLX CD10 GTW 10M

–

200 stations

TLX CDUNT GTW 10M

–

Sold in lots of

Reference

–

TSX PCI ACC1

Separate parts Description

Use

Faceplate for remote Bus X Enables a second remote Bus X connection (9-way SUB-D connector)

c 24 V standalone power Enables the TSX PCI slot PLC to operate in – supply the event of a PC power supply outage Enables a second remote Bus X connection Batteries Internal RAM memory backup 1

Weight kg –

TSX PSI 2010

–

TSX PLP 01

0.010

TSX PLP 101

0.100

TSX PCI ACC1 10

(1) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not counted. (2) Product supplied with multilingual installation guide: English, French, German, and Spanish. Supplied without software drivers. (3) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12 EX rack with 12 slots is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots. (4) Fieldbus: INTERBUS or Profibus DP. (5) Other software compatible with Atrium slot PLCs: OFS data server software, Vijeo Look/Monitor Pro, supervisory software, see our catalog. TSX PSI 2010

1/21


Presentation

PCMCIA memory extension cards Unity

Presentation PCMCIA memory extension cards are used to extend the internal RAM capacity of Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs. Some of the cards can also be used on Quantum and Micro processors. Depending on the model, these cards can host: b Application program, symbols and constants b Additional application data b Or both

1 1.1

PCMCIA memory extension cards All the cards are inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0 on Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs, i.e.: b The upper slot on processors b The internal slot on slot PLCs Two of these SRAM data storage memory cards can also be inserted into slot no. 1, i.e.: b The lower slot on processors b The external slot on slot PLCs These cards support three types of data storage: b Application storage: Program, symbols and constants in a common space (128 Kb to 7168 Kb, depending on the card model): v TSX MRP PpppK for SRAM memories v TSX MFP PpppK/M for Flash EPROM memories b Storage of the application and additional data, with 192 Kb to 7 Mb of application space and 7 Mb to 0 Kb of data storage space for additional data. The limit between these 2 spaces is configurable. The configurable cards are: v TSX MRP CpppK/M for SRAM memories v TSX MCP CpppK/M for Flash EPROM and SRAM memories b Storage of additional data, provided by 4 Mb or 8 Mb TSX MRP F00pM SRAM memory cards These cards use 2 technologies: b Battery-backed SRAM Used in particular in the creation and debugging phases for the application program. These cards support: v All of the application's transfer and modification services in online mode v Additional data storage The memory is backed up by a removable battery integrated into the PCMCIA card. A second auxiliary battery is present to enable the main battery to be replaced without loss of data. b Flash EPROM Used once debugging of the application program is complete. It enables: v Backup battery life restrictions to be overcome v A global application transfer to be performed If it is used, the application cannot be modified in online mode. Program modification in online mode Only extension cards on which the program is stored in SRAM memory (TSX MRP PpppK/M. and TSX MRP CpppK/M) support online program modification. Users of processors fitted with memory extension cards who wish to modify or add program data in online mode must follow the two recommendations below: b Structure the application program in a number of sections of a reasonable size b Where possible, select one of the two extension cards recommended in the table below: Premium processors Atrium slot PLCs Cards recommended for program modification in online mode

1/22

TSX P57 Cp TSX P57 0p All TSX MRP PpppK and TSX MRP CpppK/M/7

TSX P57 1p TSX MRP P224K/P384K, all TSX MRP CpppK/M/7

TSX P57 2p TSX P57 3p TSX PCI 57 2p TSX PCI 57 3p All TSX MRP CpppK/M/7

TSX P57 4p TSX MRP C002M, TSX MRP C003M, TSX MRP C007M

TSX P57 5p

1


References

1

PCMCIA memory extension cards Unity

Reminder of the memory characteristics of processors and slot PLCs Memory capacities without PCMCIA extension card (data, program, symbols, and constants in internal RAM memory): Premium processors Atrium slot PLCs

1

TSX P57 Cp 0244/ 0244M 96 Kb

TSX P57 TSX 57 TSX PCI TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX PCI TSX P57 TSX P57 104/154M/ 204/ 57 204M 254 304/ 354M 57 354M 454/ 554/ 1634M 2634M 3634M 4634M 5634M 96 Kb 160 Kb 160 Kb 192 Kb 192 Kb 208 Kb 208 Kb 320 Kb 640 Kb In internal RAM Memory capacities with PCMCIA extension card(s) (data in internal RAM memory; program, symbols, constants, and data storage on PCMCIA card): Premium processors TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX 57 TSX PCI TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX P57 TSX PCI TSX P57 TSX P57 Atrium slot PLCs 0244M 104/154M/ 204/ 57 204M 254 304/ 354M 57 354M 454/ 554/ 1634M 2634M 3634M 4634M 5634M Data in internal RAM 96 Kb 96 Kb 160 Kb 160 Kb 192 Kb 192 Kb 208 Kb 208 Kb 440 Kb 896 Kb PCMCIA extension (program, symbols 128 Kb 224 Kb 768 Kb 768 Kb 768 Kb 1792 Kb 1792 Kb 1792 Kb 2048 Kb 7168 Kb and constants) Data storage on PCMCIA (1) 256 Kb 16,384 Kb, limited to 8192 Kb if the TSX MRP F008M PCMCIA card is used

1.1

References Premium TSX P57 Cp/0p/1p/2p/3p/4p/5p processors and Atrium TSX PCI 57 2p/3p slot PLCs support the memory extension cards listed below. There are two types of memory limit: b One associated with the type of processor or slot PLC (see above) b One associated with the model of PCMCIA memory card selected The lowest of these two limits defines the memory capacity available to the user for his/her application. PCMCIA memory extensions Use on processor

Slot

Memory size Application

SRAM application memory extensions Slot 0 TSX 57 Cp TSX 57 0p…57 4p TSX PCI 57 2p/3p

128 Kb 224 Kb 384 Kb Configurable SRAM application/file memory extensions Slot 0 96…448 Kb TSX 57 Cp TSX 57 0p…57 4p TSX PCI 57 2p/3p TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 192…768 Kb TSX 57 0p…57 5p 192…1024 Kb TSX PCI 57 2p/3p 192…1792 Kb 192…2048 Kb 192…3072 Kb 192…7168 Kb Flash EPROM application memory extensions TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 128 Kb TSX 57 0p…57 4p 224 Kb TSX PCI 57 2p/3p 384 Kb TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 512 Kb TSX 57 0p…57 5p 1024 Kb TSX PCI 57 2p/4p TSX 57 2p…57 5p, Slot 0 2048 Kb TSX PCI 57 2p/3p 4096 Kb Flash EPROM and SRAM application/file memory extensions TSX 57 0p…57 4p, Slot 0 224 Kb TSX PCI 57 2p/3p TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 512 Kb TSX 57 0p…57 5p, 2048 Kb TSX PCI 57 2p/3p SRAM file memory extensions TSX 57 2p…57 5p Slot 0 or 1 – TSX PCI 57 2p/3p (2) Flash EPROM backup card (3) TSX 57 Cp Slot 0 TSX 57 0p/1p

96 Kb

Reference Data storage

Weight kg

– – –

TSX MRP P128K TSX MRP P224K TSX MRP P384K

– – –

352…0 Kb

TSX MRP C448K

–

576…0 Kb 832…0 Kb 1600…0 Kb 1856…0 Kb 2880…0 Kb 6976…0 Kb

TSX MRP C768K TSX MRP C001M TSX MRP C01M7 TSX MRP C002M TSX MRP C003M TSX MRP C007M

– – – – –

– – – – –

TSX MFP P128K TSX MFP P224K TSX MFP P384K TSX MFP P512K TSX MFP P001Mr

– – – – –

– –

TSX MFP P002Mr TSX MFP P004Mr

– –

256 Kb

TSX MCP C224Kr

–

512 Kb 1024 Kb

TSX MCP C512Kr TSX MCP C002Mr

– –

4096 Kb 8192 Kb

TSX MRP F004Mr TSX MRP F008M

– –

–

TSX MFP B096K

–

Type

Reference

Replacement parts Description

Use

Weight kg Backup batteries PCMCIA SRAM memory card Main TSX BAT M02 0.010 Auxiliary TSX BAT M03 – Handle PCMCIA memory card TSX P CAP 0.030 (1) Intended for the storage of manufacturing recipes and production data. Capacity depending on PCMCIA card model. (2) Memory extension card for file storage to be inserted into slot no. 0 if free, otherwise into slot no. 1. In the latter case, an application memory type or application memory and file storage type memory extension card is inserted into slot no. 0. (3) This card is pre-loaded and can be used to update the application program on a Premium PLC without having to use a programming terminal (the entire program must be located in the internal RAM). r Due to be launched in November 2004

1/23

Selection guide

Modicon Premium automation platform Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs PL7

Premium/Atrium platforms for PL7 software offer


TSX 57 2p processors and T PCX 57 2p slot PLC

Number of racks (according to rack type)

4/6/8 slots 12 slots

4 2

16 8

"In-rack" I/O (1)

Discrete I/O

512 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 24 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 channels) –

1

1.2

Analog I/O Integrated process control "In-rack" application-specific channels

Max. no. of channels Counter Motion (2)

Weighing Serial links Serial link connections Modbus Uni-Telway Character mode

Bus connections

Network connections

Jnet AS-Interface actuator/sensor bus master V2 CANopen machine bus master V4.02 (5) INTERBUS fieldbus master V2 (5) or Profibus DP fieldbus master V0 class 1 and 2 (5) Max. no. of networks Ethernet TCP/IP Communication modules

Memory capacity

Without PCMCIA extension With PCMCIA extension Data storage Symbol storage

Standard

–

1 "in-rack" module

1

1 Global Data, I/O Scanning (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium slot PLC) Multiprotocol "in-rack" modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast service and Factory Cast HMI services Fipway (3) (4) and Modbus Plus (3) PCMCIA modules, "in-rack" Ethway modules 32 K words program and data 32 K words data 64 K words program 128 K words –

TSX P57 103M

Integrated Ethernet Integrated Fipio Integrated Ethernet and Fipio

Atrium slot PLC

1 PCMCIA module (3)

48/64 K words program and data (6) 48/64 K words data (6) 160 K words program 640 K words + 2048 K words 128 K words

a 100…240 V, c 24 V non-isolated and c 24…48 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack.

Power supply Type of processor and slot PLC

1024 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 80 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 channels) Configurable loops (10 channels with max. 3 loops) 8 24 Modules with 2/4 counter channels max. 1 MHz, single-channel electronic cam module Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2/3/4 axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels) "In-rack" communication modules (1 application-specific channel) RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 master/slave modules 1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 master/slave modules 1 integrated RS 485 channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 modules PCMCIA modules (4), 3 max. 2 "in-rack" modules 4 "in-rack" modules

Standard

TSX P57 153M (7)

TSX P57 203M Q TSX P57 2623M Q (8) TSX P57 253M Q TSX P57 2823M (8) T PCX 57 203M

Integrated Fipio Pages 1/31 (4) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and process control channels are cumulative. (5) 1 axis = 1 application-specific channel, except for SERCOS modules where, depending on the configuration, the module = 2…32 channels. (6) Insert the module into the lower PCMCIA slot on the processor (no. 1) or into the external PCMCIA slot on the slot PLC (no. 1). (7) Insert the module into the PCMCIA slot on the TSX SCY 21 601 "in-rack" communication module.

1/24

1

1

TSX 57 3p processors and T PCX 57 3p slot PLCs


1

1.2

16 8 1024 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 128 channels (modules with 4, 8 or 16 channels) Configurable loops (15 channels with max. 3 loops) 32 64 Modules with 2/4 counter channels max. 1 MHz, single-channel electronic cam module Modules with 1/2 axes for stepper motors, modules with 2/3/4 axes for analog control servomotors, modules with 8/16 axes with SERCOS digital link Modules for 8 load cells (2 application-specific channels) "In-rack" communication modules (1 application-specific channel) RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 master/slave modules 1 integrated RS 485 master/slave channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) master/slave PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 master/slave modules 1 integrated RS 485 channel, RS 232D, RS 485 or BC (3) (4) PCMCIA modules and "in-rack" RS 485 modules PCMCIA modules (4), 3 max. 8 "in-rack" modules 1 PCMCIA module (3) 2 "in-rack" modules

3 (+ 1 software gateway with Atrium slot PLC)

4

Multiprotocol "in-rack" modules (Modbus, Uni-TE, Global Data, I/O Scanning, TCP Open), Web server, FactoryCast service and Factory Cast HMI services Fipway (3) (4) and Modbus Plus (3) PCMCIA modules, "in-rack" Ethway modules 64/80 K words program and data (6) 80/96 K words data (6) 384 K words program 640 K words + 2048 K words 128 K words

96 K words program and data 176 K words data 512 K words program (992 K words with PL7 V4.4 or higher) 2048 Kwords (640 K words + 2048 K words with PL7 V4.4 or higher) 256 Kwords (384 K words with PL7 V4.4 or higher)

a 100…240 V, c 24 V non-isolated and c 24…48 V isolated power supply modules. A power supply is required for each rack.

TSX P57 303M Q TSX P57 3623M Q (8) TSX P57 353M Q

TSX P57 453M TSX P57 4823M (8)

T PCX 57 353M 1/31 (8) Reduce the number of modules permitted (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) by 1 when CANopen is used. (9) The second value corresponds to the processor with integrated Fipio bus manager link. (10)The TSX P57 153M processor does not support the CANopen bus PCMCIA module. (11)The integrated Ethernet port requires 1 of the available network connections. Q Processor able to migrate from PL7 to Unity Pro by means of a simple processor operating system update (included in the Unity Pro software CD-ROM).

1/25


Presentation

PL7 processors

Presentation

1

Premium TSX P57 pp3M and TSX P57 pp23M control system platform processors manage the entire PLC station comprising discrete or I/O modules, Preventa safety modules, analog I/O modules, and application-specific modules, which can be distributed over one or more racks connected on Bus X or on a fieldbus. TSX P57 processors The types of processor available are divided into various capacities according to memory, "in-rack" I/O, communication, and processing speed. According to the model: b 4 to 16 racks or steps. b 512 to 2040 discrete I/O b 24 to 256 analog I/O b 8 to 64 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter, motion control, communication or weighing) accounts for 1 or a number of application-specific channels. b 1 to 4 networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), 2 to 8 AS-Interface sensor/actuator buses, 1 to 2 fieldbuses (CANopen, INTERBUS, Profibus DP), 0 or 1 Fipio fieldbus, serial links (Modbus, Uni-Telway) b 10 to 20 process control channels

1.2

Integrated communication According to the model, Premium processors include: b A 10 or 100 Mbps TCP/IP Ethernet port (RJ45 connection) b A 1 Mbps Fipio bus link (bus manager) b Communication via 2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) using Uni-Telway or character mode protocol (typically a 19 or 115 Mbps programming terminal and an operator dialog terminal) Each processor has a slot for a type III PCMCIA card for accepting a network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus), bus (CANopen (1), Fipio Agent) or serial link (Modbus, Uni-Telway, character mode) Application design and installation Version V4.4 PL7 Junior/Pro software can be provided in a variety of versions according to requirements: b Single-station b Multistation in the form of independent stations (Junior/Pro), remote stations connected to a server via a network (Pro OpenTeam for 3 to 10 stations or Pro OpenSite for 10 or more stations), or as a client/server architecture via Thin Client type PC terminals (Pro Servi). These licenses are compatible with PC terminals running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating systems. Migration of Premium processors Some Premium TSX P57 pp3M processors compatible with PL7 software can migrate to become compatible with the Unity Pro software without the need for hardware modifications. This migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is achieved by means of the following software updates: b Processor operating system b Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port operating system This update is carried out using the OS-Loader tool, included in Unity Pro (see page 6/25). Once migrated, PL7 processors are equivalent to corresponding Unity processors. The following PL7 processors are able to migrate to Unity Pro (software migration): b TSX 57 2p: TSX P7 203/253/2623M become TSX P7 204/254/2634M respectively b TSX 57 3p: TSX P7 303/353/3623M become TSX P7 304/354/3634M respectively b TSX 57 4p: TSX P7 453 becomes TSX P57 454M Note: Processor migration requires the use of new PCMCIA TSX MRP P/C, TSX MFP P/C memory references. See the equivalence table on page 1/36.

(1) Not with TSX P57 153M processor.

Description: page 1/27

1/26

Characteristics: pages 1/28 and 1/29

Functions: page 1/30

References: pages 1/30 and 1/31

1

Presentation (continued), description


1

PL7 processors

Presentation (continued) Migration of Premium processors (continued) Migration offers involving the replacement of the processor are offered for other product references. Please contact your Regional Sales Office for more information about these offers, which are only available for a limited period of time. They concern the following PL7 processors: b TSX P57 2823M for migration to TSX P57 254M with TSX ETY 4103 (1) b TSX P57 453M for migration to TSX P57 454M b TSX P57 453M for migration to TSX P57 554M b TSX P57 4823M for migration to TSX P57 4634M b TSX P57 4823M for migration to TSX P57 5634M b TSX P57 4823M for migration to TSX P57 454M with TSX ETY 4103 (1) b TSX P57 4823M for migration to TSX P57 554M with TSX ETY 4103 (1)

TSX P57pp3M processors without integrated Ethernet port Single-format TSX P57 1p3M processors and double-format TSX P57 2p3/3p3/453M processors feature the following on the front panel:

1 2 3 4

1 A display block with 5 indicator lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) v I/O lamp (red): Faults occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the terminal port v FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus 2 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated 3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal 4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral device 5 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card 6 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a 4 MB SRAM communication or extension card for storing additional data 7 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 153/253/353/453M models) for Fipio bus manager communication

5 6 7 TSX P57 1p3M

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

TSX P57pp3M processors with integrated Ethernet port

TSX P57 2 p3/3p3/453M

Double-format TSX P57 2623/2823M and TSX P57 3623/4823M processors with integrated Ethernet port feature the following on the front panel:

(1) The proposed TSX ETY 4103 Ethernet TCP/IP module provides the same functions as the integrated Ethernet port on TSX P57 2823/4823M processors. However, the connection between the processor and the Ethernet module occupies one more slot than the PL7 processor to be migrated. Therefore, this type of migration requires a free slot in the Premium rack and modification of the converted Unity Pro application.

1 A display block with 5 indicator lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Processor in operation (program execution) v ERR lamp (red): Fault on the processor or its on-board devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card) v I/O lamp (red): Faults occurring on another module in the station or configuration fault v TER lamp (yellow): Activity on the terminal port v FIP lamp (red): Activity on the integrated Fipio bus 2 A display block relating to the integrated Ethernet port featuring 5 lamps: v RUN lamp (green): Ethernet port ready v ERR lamp (red): Ethernet port fault v COL lamp (red): Collision detection v STS lamp (yellow): Ethernet link diagnostics v Two TX and RX lamps (yellow): Transmission/reception activity 3 RESET button causing a cold restart of the PLC when it is activated 4 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal. 5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting a peripheral device 6 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet network 7 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card 8 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a 4 MB SRAM communication or extension card for storing additional data 9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 2823/4823/M models) for Fipio bus manager communication

Presentation: page 1/26


1 3

1 3

2

2

4 5 6 7 8 9

TSX P57 2623/3623M

TSX P57 2823/4823M



1/27

1

1.2

Characteristics

Modicon Premium automation platform PL7 processors

Premium PLCs have been developed to comply with major national and international standards on electronic industrial automation equipment.. See pages 9/6 to 9/11 “Standards, certification and environmental conditions”.

1

Characteristics and performance Types of processor Maximum configuration

1.2

Functions (1)

No. of racks

4/6/8 slots 12 slots

Max. no. of slots for modules Max. no. of Discrete I/O Analog I/O Process control channels Application-specific channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) (2) Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP connections Fipio manager Serial link Maximum no. of Networks (Ethernet connections TCP/IP, Fipway, Modbus Plus, Ethway)

TSX P57 103M 4 2 32

TSX P57 153M

TSX P57 203M 16 8 128

TSX P57 2623M

512 24 –

1024 80 10 (up to 30 simple loops)

8

24

– 1 – 1 (63 agents) – 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 19.2 Kbps 1 1 1, none if integrated Ethernet is used 2 4 1 – 1 – 1, none if CANopen is used

AS-Interface bus CANopen bus INTERBus or Profibus DP bus Memories Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kwords 32, program and data capacity Kwords 64, program With PCMCIA card 32, data Data storage Kwords 128 Maximum size Located internal bits bits 4096 of object zones (%Mi) Located internal data Kwords 30.5 for internal words %Mpi 32 for constant words %Kpi Application structure Master task 1 Fast task 1 32 (1 of which has priority) Event tasks Execution time Without Boolean µs 0.50 per instruction PCMCIA card On word or fixed-point µs 0.62 arithmetic On floating points µs 44 µs 0.60 With PCMCIA Boolean card On word or fixed-point µs 0.87 arithmetic On floating points µs 44 No. of Without 100% Boolean Kinst/ 1.52 Kinstructions PCMCIA card ms executed every Kinst/ 1.05 65% Boolean and ms ms 35% fixed arithmetic With PCMCIA 100% Boolean Kinst/ 1.18 card ms Kinst/ 0.85 65% Boolean and ms 35% fixed arithmetic System Master task ms 1.50 3.10 (2) overhead ms 0.80 Fast task

48, program and data 160, program 48, data 2688 8132

TSX P57 253M

TSX P57 2823M

– 1 1 (127 agents) 1

1, none if integrated Ethernet is used

64, program and data 160, program 64, data

1 1 64 (1 of which has priority) 0.19 0.25 2.6 0.21 0.42 2.6 4.76 3.57 3.70 2.50 1.00 0.35

1.2 (2)

(1) Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O, application-specific channels, and process control channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (2) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links.


1/28




1



1

PL7 processors


1

Characteristics and performance (continued) Type of processor Maximum No. of racks configuration

TSX P57 303M TSX P57 3623M TSX P57 353M TSX P57 453M TSX P57 4823M 4/6/8 slots 16 12 slots 8 Max. no. of slots for modules 128 Functions Max. no. in rack Discrete I/O 1024 2040 (1) Analog I/O 128 256 15 (up to 45 simple loops) 20 (up to 60 simple loops) Process control channels Application-specific 32 64 channels (counter, axis, weighing, and serial links) (2) Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP – 1 – 1 connections Fipio manager – 1 (127 agents) 1 link with 2 connectors (TER and AUX) 19.2 or 115 Kbps Serial link Maximum no. of Networks (Ethernet 3 3, 2 if integrated 3 4 4, 3 if integrated connections TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethernet is used Ethernet is used Modbus Plus, Ethway) AS-Interface bus 8 CANopen bus 1 INTERBus, Profibus DP 2, 1 if CANopen is used bus Memories Maximum Without PCMCIA card Kwords 64, program and data 80, program and 96, program and data capacity data Kwords 384, program 384, program 512/992 (3), program With PCMCIA card 80, data 96, data 176, data Data storage Kwords 640 + 2048 2048/640 + 2048 (3) bits 16 384 32 768 Maximum size Located internal bits of object zones (%Mi) Located internal data Kwords 30.5 for internal words %Mpi 32 for constant words %Kpi 1 Application structure Master task Fast task 1 Event tasks 64 (1 of which has priority) Execution time Without Boolean µs 0.12 0.06 for PCMCIA card On word or fixed-point µs 0.17 0.08 one instruction arithmetic µs 2.2 1.5 On floating points With PCMCIA Boolean µs 0.17 0.06 card On word or fixed-point µs 0.33 0.08 arithmetic µs 2.3 1.5 On floating points Typical Without 100% Boolean Kinst/ 6.66 14.28 program code PCMCIA card ms execution time 65% Boolean and Kinst/ 4.76 9.09 for 1 35% fixed arithmetic ms Kinstruction Kinst/ 4.55 14.28 With PCMCIA 100% Boolean ms card 65% Boolean and Kinst/ 3.12 9.09 35% fixed arithmetic ms ms 1.00 1.00 System Master task overhead Fast task ms 0.25 0.19 (1) Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O, application-specific channels, and process control channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (CANopen, AS-Interface, Uni-Telway, Fipio, Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (2) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. (3) The second value applies if PL7 Junior/Pro programming software V4.4 or higher is used.





1/29

1.2


Functions, references

1

PL7 processors

1

Internal RAM

Memory structure Data

1

Program

2

Constants

3

1 Application data (max. 30.5 Kwords) 2 Task descriptor and executable code 3 Constant words, initial values and configuration

30.5 Kwords 128/256 Kwords

128/640 Kwords


32 Kwords

Internal RAM

32 to 176 Kwords

Processor with PCMCIA card

64 to 512 Kwords

1.2

32 to 96 Kwords

Processor without PCMCIA card

1 2 3 4

Data

1

Program

2

Constants

3


4

The application memory is divided into memory areas distributed physically in the internal RAM memory and the PCMCIA memory extension card(s): b The application data area is always in the internal RAM. b The application program area is in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card. b The constants area is in the internal RAM or the PCMCIA memory card. There are two ways of organizing the application memory for TSX P57 1p3/2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823 processors with or without a memory extension fitted in the form of a PCMCIA format card: Application in internal RAM The application is completely loaded into the processor’s battery-backed internal RAM (1), the capacity of which depends on the processor model (32 to 96 K words). For example, the TSX P57 1p3 processor has 7.5 Kwords of application data and 24.5 Kwords of program, constants and system data (2). The memory space (32 Kwords) is shared between the application data, the program, the constants, and the system data (2). Application in the PCMCIA card (slot no. 0) The internal RAM is reserved for the application data. The PCMCIA card contains the program and constants (64 to 512 K words). The file storage area of 128 K or 640 Kwords (depending on the model of PCMCIA card) can be used in remote applications, for storing production data information, production recipes, etc. The symbols storage area of 128 K or 256 Kwords (depending on the model of PCMCIA card) enables the application symbols database to be stored on the PLC. Extension of the additional data storage area (slot no. 1) This area, containing 128 or 640 Kwords, can be extended to up to 2699 Kwords by using an SRAM TSX MRP DS 2048P/MFP 004M PCMCIA memory card. This card is inserted into the lower slot on TSX P57 2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823M processors and can be used in conjunction with memory extension cards (type 1 in the upper slot).

Symbol storage

4

Application data (max. 30.5 Kwords) Task descriptor and executable code Constant words, initial values and configuration Depending on the model of PCMCIA card

Data in internal RAM The data area can be extended to up to 30.5 Kwords. It is only supported by the PLC's internal RAM memory. The PL7 Junior/Pro memory assists the application designer with the management of the structure and the occupation of memory space on the Premium PLC. Protecting the application Regardless of the PLC memory structure (whether the application is located in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card), it is possible to protect the application in order to prevent it being accessed (read or modify program) in online mode under PL7 Junior/Pro. A memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any program modification (via the programming terminal or downloading).

Premium processor references TSX P57 p03/p53/p623/p823M processors are equipped with: b A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for memory extension or SRAM memory card for the storage of additional data b A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for communication card or memory card for the storage of additional data b Two terminal ports (8-way female mini-DIN type), Uni-Telway or character mode TSX P57 processors are double-format modules (except TSX P57 1p3, which are single-format). TSX P57 3p3/3623/453/4823M processors enable program loading, via the terminal port, at a maximum speed of 115 Kbps (limited to 19.2 Kbps for TSX P57 1p3/2p3/2p23M processors. The integrated Fipio link (bus manager) on TSX P57 253/2823/353/453/4823M processors supports a maximum of 127 connection points. The link on the TSX P57 153 processor is limited to 63 connection points. (1) The internal RAM is protected by an optional battery, with 3 years' battery life, located in the power supply module. (2) The system has a minimum reserve RAM memory area in the order of 5 Kwords. Please refer to the PL7 TSX Micro/Junior/Pro TLX DOC PL7 44M reference manual.


1/30





1

PL7 processors

TSX 57 processors I/O capacity (1)

Capacity Memory

Maximum number of bus/network modules

Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP

Reference (2)

1 network 2 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus

–

TSX P57 103M

0.380

1 integrated Fipio 1 network 2 AS-i buses

–

TSX P57 153M

0.420

1 network 4 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 1 fieldbus (4)

–

TSX P57 203M

4 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 1 fieldbus (4)

1 port

TSX P57 2623M

1 integrated Fipio 1 network 4 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 1 fieldbus (4)

–

TSX P57 253M

1 integrated Fipio 4 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 1 fieldbus (4)

1 port

TSX P57 2823M

64/80 15 integrated Kwords (5). Max. 384 K words on PCMCIA

3 network 8 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 2 fieldbuses (4)

–

TSX P57 303M

2 network 8 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 2 fieldbuses (4)

1 port

TSX P57 3623M

80/96 15 integrated Kwords (5). Max. 384 Kwords on PCMCIA

1 integrated Fipio 3 networks 8 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 2 fieldbuses (4)

–

TSX P57 353M

0.560

96/176 20 integrated Kwords (5). Max. 512/992 K words on PCMCIA

1 integrated Fipio 4 networks (7) 8 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 2 fieldbuses (4)

–

TSX P57 453M

0.560

1 port

TSX P57 4823M


Weight kg

1

TSX 57 10 4 racks (3) 512 discrete I/O 24 analog I/O 8 application-specific channels

TSX P57 103M

32 integrated Kwords. Max. 64 Kwords on PCMCIA

0

TSX P57 153M

1.2


48 integrated 10 Kwords. Max. 160 Kwords on PCMCIA

64 integrated 10 Kwords. Max. 160 Kwords on PCMCIA

TSX P57 203/303M

0.520

–

0.560

–


TSX P57 253/353/453M

0.520

–

TSX 57 40 16 racks (3) 2040 discrete I/O 256 analog I/O 64 application-specific channels TSX P57 2623/3623M

–

PCMCIA memory extension cards Premium processors can support up to 2 memory extension cards. However, useful memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the processor model. See pages 1/36 and 1/37. (1) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not included. (2) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide (processors and discrete I/O): English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian. (3) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12EX rack (12 slots) is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots. (4) Using the CANopen bus reduces the number of possible fieldbuses (INTERBus/Profibus DP) by 1. (5) The second value corresponds to the integrated memory capacity when the processor is equipped with a PCMCIA memory card. (6) 992 Kwords with PL7 Junior/Pro software V4.4 or higher. (7) 3 networks with TSX P57 4823M processor.

TSX P57 2823/4823M





1/31


Presentation, configuration

1

Atrium slot PLCs PL7

Presentation

1

Atrium T PCX 57 pp3M slot PLCs are PC format cards (16-bit ISA bus) to be integrated into a PC running under Windows 95/98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT. This combination of PLC and PC optimizes performance in applications requiring, for example, a higher level of communication, control or supervision functions. The slot PLCs manage the entire PLC station, which comprises the same I/O modules as Premium processors (discrete, analog, application-specific, and communication), and these modules can be distributed in one or more racks connected on the bus X. Two types of Atrium slot PLC are available to meet various user requirements: b Max. 16 racks b Max. 1024 discrete I/O b 80 or 128 analog I/O b 24 or 32 application-specific channels: Each application-specific module (counter, motion control, communication or weighing) accounts for 1 or a number of application-specific channels. b 1 or 3 networks (Ethernet TCP/IP, Fipway, Ethway, Modbus Plus), 4 or 8 AS-Interface buses and 1 or 2 fieldbuses (CANopen, INTERBUS, Profibus-DP) b 10 or 15 process control channels

1.2

Integrated communication Depending on the model, Atrium slot PLCs feature: b A 1 Mbps Fipio bus link (bus manager) for the T PCX 57 353M model b Communication via a terminal port (TER) using Uni-Telway or character mode protocol (typically a 19.2 or 115 Kbps programming terminal and an operator dialog terminal) Each processor has a slot for a type III PCMCIA card for accepting a network card (Fipway, Modbus Plus), bus card (CANopen, Fipio Agent) or serial link card (Modbus, Uni-Telway, character mode) Application design and installation Version V4.4 PL7 Junior/Pro software is available in a variety of versions according to requirements: b Single-station b Multistation in the form of independent local stations (Junior/Pro), remote stations connected to a server via a network (Pro OpenTeam for 3 to 10 stations or Pro OpenSite for 10 or more stations), or as a client/server architecture via Thin Client type PC terminals (Pro Servi). These licenses are compatible with PC stations running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating systems.

Typical architecture Ethernet TCP/IP

Magelis iPC "Atrium Pro" Type D CPU pack: - Atrium TPCX 57 203M slot PLC - Vijeo Look and PL7 Pro software

Premium I/O extension racks

Altivar

Momentum

1/32

b Remotely located close to the machine or process via the fieldbus (1): v Modbus Plus with TSX MBP 110 PCMCIA card v CANopen with TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card b INTERBUS with PC format card, TSX IBX 100 ISA bus (link to Atrium slot PLC via ribbon cable) b And/or centralized in TSX RKY ppEX extendable racks. TSX RKY ppEX extendable racks connected on the bus X allow the use of application-specific modules and the installation of AS-Interface bus segments. For example: v TSX ETY 4103 or TSX ETY 5103 Ethernet TCP/IP module (with Web server, FactoryCast server) or TSX WMY 100 FactoryCast HMI module v INTERBUS TSX IBY 100 or Profibus DP TSX PBY 100 master module v TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface V2.1 master module v TSX CAY, TSX CFY or TSX CSY 84 (SERCOS) motion control modules (1) Corresponding to an integrated module solution on the host PC, without having to use modules on extension racks on bus X.

Fipio/Modbus Plus

Characteristics: page 1/34

By integrating an Atrium coprocessor card, the architecture shown opposite can be created using any compatible PC (fitted with ISA bus slots) and Magelis IPC industrial PC stations. This solution can provide a PLC architecture in which I/Os are:

References: page 1/35


Description, installation

1


Description

1

T PCX 57 pp3M slot PLCs mechanically occupy two consecutive slots (standard pitch of 20.32 mm) on the ISA bus but only use one electrically.

2 3

1 A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for a memory extension card 2 A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for a communication card or SRAM memory extension card (4 MB) for storing additional data 3 A 9-way female SUB-D connector enabling the bus X to be connected remotely to an extendable rack 4 A TER terminal port for the connection of a programming terminal or adjustment of a peripheral device 5 A male 9-way SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus (with T PCX 57 353M) 6 An ISA bus connector for connection to the host PC 7 A slot for the slot PLC internal RAM backup battery 8 An additional plate (supplied as standard) fitted with a 9-way female SUB-D connector, enabling a second remote bus X to be connected

4 5

7

6

8

TCP/X-Way gateway

SCADA OFS server

The TCP/X-Way software gateway performs 2 main functions for Atrium slot PLCs: b Communication using the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol via the Ethernet TCP/IP card integrated in the PC b Data exchange in both directions with remote stations via the telephone modem in the PC

Ethernet TCP/IP

Modbus Uni-TE

1

1

2 3 Premium

PC

This software interfaces with the Atrium slot PLC ISAway driver and automatically routes messages. The most common configurations are: v Via Ethernet network (diagram opposite). Access is made secure by checking incoming IP addresses, in a similar way to the Premium PLC Ethernet TSX ETY 4103 module. Global Data and I/O Scanning services are not supported. v Via modem link. Incoming calls are checked via the standard Windows password checking mechanisms. In addition to remote access with Unity Pro, the TCP/IP gateway enables communication with other stations that can be connected to a local Ethernet network (RAS (Remote Access Server) function).

Setup Quantum

1 Atrium slot PLC 2 Ethernet TCP/IP card or integrated port 3 TCP/X-Way software gateway

Integration into the host PC To receive an Atrium T PCX 57 pp3M slot PLC, the host PC must: b Operate under Windows 95/98, Windows 2000 or Windows NT b Have a 16-bit 8 MHz ISA bus b Have two consecutive slots (standard pitch of 20.32 mm) available on the ISA bus A maximum of 2 T PCX slot PLCs can be connected to one PC. The slot PLC is completely independent of the application running on the PC, in particular: b The standard PC command "CTRL + ALT + DEL" has no effect on the slot PLC operating modes. b Switching the PC off and then on again causes a warm restart of the application being managed by the slot PLC. The installation of a communication driver (ISAway 95/NT) supplied with the slot PLC enables transparent communication between the host PC and the slot PLC. Equipped with PL7 Junior/Pro software, the host PC can be used as a programming terminal for the Atrium T PCX 57 slot PLC.

Magelis iPC or PC with an Atrium PCX slot PLC

Bus X

Premium extension


Logical location on the bus X The Atrium T PCX 57 slot PLC logically occupies 1 slot on the bus X rack. The slot in the TSX RKY rack with address 0 following the TSX PSY power supply module must therefore remain unoccupied (see page 2/9). A bus X line terminator is supplied with the PCX slot PLC. The additional plate 8 enables 2 X buses to be connected, creating a Y structure as shown opposite.

Bus X

Premium extension


1/33

1.2


Memory structure, characteristics


Memory structure

1

There are two ways of organizing the application memory for T PCX 57 203M/353M slot PLCs with or without memory extension in the form of a type 1 PCMCIA card:

Slot PLC without PCMCIA memory card Data Internal RAM

Program Constants

1 2 3

Slot PLC with PCMCIA memory card

1.2

Internal RAM

Data

PCMCIA card (2)

(slot no. 0)

1

Program

2

Constants

3

1 Application data (including internal words, system words, function blocks, DFBs, etc.) 2 Task descriptor and executable code 3 Constant words, initial values and configuration

Application in internal RAM The application is loaded entirely in the slot PLC internal RAM with battery back-up (3 years' battery life). For the maximum memory capacity of the internal RAM, see the characteristics below. Application in PCMCIA card The internal RAM is thus reserved for application data and system data (1). The PCMCIA memory card contains the program and constants. The PL7 Junior/Pro software assists the application designer with structure management and occupation of memory space for the Atrium slot PLC.

(1) The system reserves a minimum RAM memory zone in the order of 5 Kwords. Please refer to the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro TLX DOC PL7 44M reference manual. (2) In addition, there are certain models of PCMCIA card available, which provide memory zones for storing files and symbols (see page 1/37).

Characteristics Type of slot PLC Maximum configuration

Functions

Memory (4)

No. of racks 4/6/8 slots 12 slots Max. no. of slots per module Max. number Discrete I/O of channels Analog I/O Application-specific (counter, axis, (1) weighing, serial links) (2) Max. number Integrated Uni-Telway of (terminal port) connections Networks (Ethway, Fipway, Modbus Plus) CANopen INTERBUS or Profibus DP bus Fipio bus manager (integrated) AS-Interface bus Process control channels Real-time clock Maximum capacity

T PCX 57 203M

T PCX 57 353M

16 8 128 1024 80 24

128 32

1 2 (including 1 Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into PC) (3) 1 1, none if CANopen is used – 4 10 (up to 30 loops) Yes

4 (including1 Ethernet TCP/IP integrated into PC) (3)

80 program and data 384 program 96 data

2, 1 if CANopen is used 1 8 15 (up to 30 loops)

Without PCMCIA card With PCMCIA card

Kwords Kwords

Storage of additional data Internal words (% MWi/MDi/MFi) Constants (% KWi/KDi/KFi) Internal bits (%Mi) Master task Fast task Event-based processing

Kwords Kwords Kwords bits

48 program and data 160 program 48 data 2688 30.5 32 8132 1 1 64 (1 of which has priority)

Execution time per instruction

Boolean On word or fixed-point arithmetic On floating points

µs µs µs

0.19/0.21 (6) 0.25/0.42 (6) 2.6

0.12/0.17 (6) 0.17/0.33 (6) 2.2/2.3

No. of Kinstructions executed every ms

100% Boolean Kinst/ms 65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic Kinst/ms

4.76 3.57

6.66 4.76

100% Boolean Kinst/ms 65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic

3.70 2.50

4.55 3.12

MAST task FAST task

1 0.35

0.25

Maximum size of zones (5) Application structure

Without PCMCIA card With PCMCIA card System overhead

ms ms

16 384

(1) Only affects "in-rack" modules. The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and application-specific channels are cumulative. The remote I/O on the bus or network (AS-Interface/Uni-Telway/Fipio/Modbus Plus, etc.) or fieldbus (CANopen, INTERBUS or Profibus DP) are not included in this maximum number. (2) Serial links: Modbus, Uni-Telway, Jnet and asynchronous serial links. (3) With TCP/X-Way software gateway and Ethernet port on host PC (integrated motherboard or PC format card). (4) Memory capacity for storing data or symbols on a PCMCIA card, see page 1/36. (5) The sum of the program memory, data and constants zones is limited by the total memory capacity. (6) The second value corresponds to the execution time when the slot PLC is fitted with a PCMCIA memory card.


1/34


1


References

1


References PCX 57 slot PLCs

1

T PCX 57 pp3M slot PLCs are compatible with the PC ISA bus and have: b A PCMCIA slot (no. 0) for memory extension b A PCMCIA slot (no. 1) for communication card or memory extension card for storing additional data b A terminal port (8-way female mini-DIN), Uni-Telway or character mode b A remote bus X system for extendable racks b A male connector (9-way SUB-D) for Fipio bus link manager function (for model T PCX 57 353M) b A bus X end of line terminator b OFS data server software (see page 7/11) b ISAway 95/NT communication driver software (see page 6/57: X-Way communication drivers)

1.2

The slot PLC mechanically occupies 2 consecutive slots but only uses one slot electrically on the ISA bus (long slot). 16-rack PCX 57 20 (1) Capacities Memory Process control channels 1024 discrete I/O 48 10 80 analog I/O integrated 24 application-specific Kwords channels Max. 160 Kwords on PCMCIA I/O capacity (2)

Maximum number of bus/network modules 1 network 4 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 1 fieldbus

Reference (3)

T PCX 57 203M

Weight kg

0.310

16-rack PCX 57 30 (1) Capacities Memory Process control channels 1024 discrete I/O 80/96 15 128 analog I/O integrated 32 application-specific Kwords channels data (5) Max. 384 Kwords on PCMCIA I/O capacity (2)

T PCX 57 203M

Maximum Reference (3) number of bus/network modules 1 integrated Fipio T PCX 57 353M 3 networks 8 AS-i buses 1 CANopen bus (4) 2 fieldbuses

Weight kg

0.340

Memory extension cards T PCX 57 pp3 slot PLCs can receive 1 memory extension card. However, useful memory capacity is limited to the maximum size defined for the processor model. See pages 1/36 and 1/37. Software options When connected to an Atrium slot PLC, the TCP/X-Way gateway software offer (supplied on CD-ROM) enables communication under the Modbus or Uni-TE TCP/IP protocol using the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated into the host PC.

T PCX 57 353M

Description TCP/X-Way gateway software

Use

Site license

Reference

Weight Kg –

Compatible with Windows 2000 or XP

Single-station

TLX CD GTW 10M

10 stations

TLX CD10 GTW 10M

–

200 stations

TLX CDUNT GTW 10M

–

(1) Maximum number of TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX racks (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12 EX rack with 12 slots is the same as using 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots. (2) Cumulative maximum values. The number of remote I/O on the bus is not included. (3) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide (processors and discrete I/O): English, French, German, Spanish, and Italian. (4) Using the CANopen bus reduces the number of possible fieldbuses (INTERBUS or Profibus DP) by 1. (5) The second value corresponds to the integrated memory capacity when the processor is fitted with a PCMCIA memory card (type 1).



1/35


Presentation

PCMCIA memory extension cards PL7

Presentation

1

PCMCIA memory extension cards are used to extend the internal RAM capacity of Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs. Depending on the model, these cards are designed to: b Receive the application program and constants b Store additional application data b Store various application object symbols b Or all three New offer for Premium and Atrium under PL7 From November 2004, the old TSX MRP/MFP pppP PCMCIA memory extension cards offer, which was specific for Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs under PL7, will be replaced by a new offer. This offer is supported by: b TSX Micro PLCs under PL7 b Premium processors and Atrium slot PLCs under Unity Pro and PL7 b Quantum processors under Unity Pro The table below indicates equivalences between the old and new versions. If migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is envisaged, 1 or more new references may correspond to each old reference.

1.2

PCMCIA SRAM memory extension (slot no. 0) Use

All TSX 57 and PCX 57 types

Max. memory size PL7 Data application storage 32 Kwords – 128 Kwords 64 Kwords –

Symbol storage – – –

128 Kwords – TSX 57 20 TSX 57 30 TSX 57 40 PCX 57 20 PCX 57 30

128 Kwords –

–

Old reference (until the end of October 2004) TSX MRP 032P TSX MRP 232P TSX MRP 064P TSX MRP 264P TSX MRP 0128P

128 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 2128P 256 Kwords –

–

TSX MRP 0256P

640 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 3256P

384 Kwords 640 Kwords – TSX 57 40

512 Kwords –

TSX MRP 3384P

256 Kwords TSX MRP 0512P

992 Kwords 640 Kwords 384 Kwords –

Do you envisage migration from PL7 to Recommended new Unity Pro? reference (P indicates "PL7 program") (from November 2004) No No No – No – – No – No – – No – No – – – No – – No –

Yes TSX MRP P128K Yes TSX MRP P384K Yes, P < 52 Kwords TSX MRP P224K Yes, P > 52 Kwords TSX MRP P384K Yes (1) TSX MRP P384K Yes (1) TSX MRP C768K Yes, P < 64 Kwords TSX MRP P384K Yes, 64 Kwords < P < 104 Kwords TSX MRP C448K Yes, P > 104 Kwords TSX MRP C768K Yes (1) TSX MRP C768K Yes (1) TSX MRP C01M7 Yes, P < 104 Kwords TSX MRP C768K Yes, 128 Kwords < P < 208 Kwords TSX MRP C001M Yes, P > 208 Kwords TSX MRP C01M7 Yes TSX MRP C01M7 Yes (2) TSX MRP C002M Yes (3) TSX MRP C003M Yes (1) TSX MRP C01M7 Yes (1) TSX MRP C002M Yes, P < 256 Kwords TSX MRP C01M7 Yes, 256 Kwords < P < 384 TSX MRP C002M Kwords Yes, P > 384 Kwords TSX MRP C003M – TSX MRP C007M Yes Yes Yes, P < 52 Kwords Yes, P > 52 Kwords Yes Yes

TSX MFP P128K TSX MCP C224K TSX MFP P224K TSX MFP P384K TSX MCP C224K TSX MFP P384K

PCMCIA Flash EPROM memory extension (slot no. 0) All TSX 57 and PCX 57 types

TSX 57 20 TSX 57 30 TSX 57 40 PCX 57 20 PCX 57 30

32 Kwords – – 128 Kwords – 64 Kwords – –

TSX MFP 032P TSX MFP 232P TSX MFP 064P

128 Kwords – 128 Kwords – –

TSX MFP 264P TSX MFP 0128P

No No No – No No

TSX MRP DS 2048P

No

Yes

TSX MRP F004M

TSX MFP BAK032P

No

Yes

TSX MFP B096K

PCMCIA SRAM memory extension (slot no. 1) TSX 57 20 TSX 57 30 TSX 57 40

–

2048 Kwords –

Flash EPROM PCMCIA backup card (slot no. 0) TSX 57 10

32 Kwords –

–

(1) Selection based on the PL7 program memory volume in relation to the data storage memory volume. (2) If symbols do not need to be stored on the PCMCIA. (3) If data does not need to be stored on the PCMCIA.

1/36

1


Presentation, references

1

PCMCIA memory extension cards PL7

PCMCIA memory extension cards All memory cards (with the exception of TSX MFP P004M/TSX MRP DS 2048P for SRAM data storage) are inserted into PCMCIA slot no. 0 on Premium processors (upper slot) and Atrium slot PLCs (internal slot). The TSX MFP P004M/TSX MRP DS 2048P data storage card is inserted into slot no. 1 only on Premium processors (lower slot) and Atrium slot PLCs (external slot on faceplate). With PL7, these cards support four different types of storage: b Application storage: Program and constants in a common area of between 64 and 512 Kwords, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM memory. b Application and additional data storage, comprising an application area of between 64 and 384 Kwords and a data storage area of 128 or 640 Kwords designed for additional data, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM and SRAM. b Application, additional data and symbol storage, comprising an application area of between 32 and 512 Kwords, a data storage area of 128 or 640 Kwords designed for additional data, and a symbols area of 128 or 256 Kwords, in the SRAM or Flash EPROM and SRAM. b Additional data storage provided by an SRAM with a capacity of 2 M words. These cards use 2 technologies: b Battery-backed SRAM. Used in particular in the creation and debugging phases for the application program. These cards support all application transfer and modification services in online mode and the storage of additional data. The memory is backed up by a removable battery integrated into the PCMCIA card. A second battery, which acts as an auxiliary for the first, provides backup for the main battery should information be lost. b Flash EPROM. Used once debugging of the application program is complete. It enables restrictions in terms of the service life of backup batteries to be avoided and supports global application transfer. If a Flash EPROM is used, the application cannot be modified in online mode.

References If future migration from PL7 to Unity Pro is envisaged, see the equivalence table opposite for the new equivalent reference.

PCMCIA type I SRAM memory extension (slot no. 0) Use

TSX 57 10…40 PCX 57 20/30 TSX 57 20…40 PCX 57 20/30

TSX 57 40

Max. memory size Old reference (until the end of October PL7 Data Symbol 2004) application storage storage 32 Kwords – – TSX MRP 032P 64 Kwords – – TSX MRP 064P 128 Kwords – TSX MRP 232P/264P 128 – – TSX MRP 0128P Kwords 128 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 2128P 256 – – TSX MRP 0256P Kwords 640 Kwords 128 Kwords TSX MRP 3256P 640 Kwords – TSX MRP 3384P 384 Kwords 512 Kwords – 256 Kwords TSX MRP 0512P 992 Kwords 640 Kwords 384 Kwords –

New reference (from November 2004)

Weight kg

TSX MRP P128K TSX MRP P224K TSX MRP P384K TSX MRP C448K TSX MRP C768K TSX MRP C001M TSX MRP C01M7 TSX MRP C002M

– – – – – – – –

TSX MRP C003M TSX MRP C007M

– –

TSX MFP P128K TSX MFP P224K TSX MCP C224K TSX MFP P384K

– – – –

PCMCIA type I Flash EPROM memory extension (slot no. 0) TSX 57 10…40 PCX 57 20/30 TSX 57 20…40 PCX 57 20/30

32 Kwords – – 64 Kwords – – 128 Kwords – 128 – – Kwords

TSX MFP 032P TSX MFP 064P TSX MFP 232P/264P TSX MFP 0128P

PCMCIA type III Flash SRAM memory extension (slot no. 1) TSX 57 20…40

–

2048 Kwords

–

TSX MRP DS 2048P

TSX MRP F004M

–

–

TSX MFP BAK032P

TSX MFP B096K

–

Type

Reference

PCMCIA Flash EPROM backup card TSX 57 10

32 Kwords –

Replacement parts Description Backup batteries

Use

Weight kg 0.100 –

TSX MRP P/Cpppp Main battery TSX BAT M02 (2) TSX MFP P004M PCMCIA SRAM Auxiliary battery TSX BAT M03 memory Handle PCMCIA memory – TSX P CAP 0.030 (1) With PL7 Junior/Pro software V4.4 or higher. (2) Replace the old order reference for the TSX MRP pppP PCMCIA SRAM memory with order reference TSX BAT M01.

1/37

1

1.2

2

2/0

Contents

2 - Racks, I/O architectures and power supplies

2

Power supply and fan modules b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/2 b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/3 b Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/4 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5 b Dimensions and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/5

Single rack configuration b Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/6 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/7 b Dimensions and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/7

Multi-racks configuration without remote module b Presentation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/8

b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/9 b Racks addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/9 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/10 b Dimensions and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/11

Multi-racks configuration with remote module b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/12 b Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/13 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2/13

2/1

2


Description

Power supply and fan modules

Description of power supply modules TSX PSYppp0M power supply modules provide the power supply for each rack and the modules installed on it.

1

The power supply module is selected according to:

2

b The mains electrical supply: c 24 V, c 24...48 V, a 100...120, a 200...240 V b The required power: standard format or double format model.

3 4

2

TSX PSYppp0M power supply modules comprise: 5

7

1 v v v

6

TSX PSY 2600M

Display block comprising: OK lamp (green), on if voltages are present and correct. BAT lamp (red), on if the battery is faulty or missing. 24 V lamp (green), on when the sensor voltage is present (according to model).

2 RESET pencil-point pushbutton causing a warm restart of the application. 8

3 Slot for a battery which protects the internal RAM memory of the processor. 4 Cover to protect the front panel of the module. 1

5 v v v

2 3

Screw terminal for connecting: To mains supply. The alarm relay contact. The sensor power supply for a.c. supplies (according to model).

4

6 Opening for cable clamp. 5

7

7 Fuse located beneath the module and protecting: v 24 VR voltage on the non-isolated d.c. supply with TSX PSY 3610. v Primary voltage on the other power supplies.

6

8 110/220 voltage selector (according to model).

TSX PSY 5500M

Description of fan modules TSX FAN ppP fan modules installed above the racks of Premium PLCs provide forced air convection, in order to maintain an even ambient temperature inside the enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist. Fan modules are required whenever the ambient temperature is between 60 °C and 70 °C (forced ventilation enables the ambient temperature in the enclosure to be lowered by 10 °C) (1). Three types of fan module are available: c 24 V, a 110 V and a 220 V. According to the modularity of the racks used: b One fan module for a 4 or 6 position rack, b Two fan modules for an 8 position rack, b Three fan modules for a 12 position rack.

3

3

1

4

2

TSX FAN ppP fan modules comprise: 1 Connection terminal for the fan module power supply, the internal temperature probe and the associated LED or preactuator. 2 Earth terminal. 3 Two mounting holes for the fan module. 4 Shuttered air outlets. (1) For an ambient temperature between 25 °C and 60 °C, the use of fan modules increases the MTBF.


2/2

Functions: page 2/4


2


Characteristics

2


Characteristics Type of power supply module Primary Voltage Nominal Limit (ripple included) Frequency Currency

Nominal/limit Nominal input 1 rms

Initial start up 1 inrush at 25 °C (2) I²t on activation It on activation Duration of Main supply (accepted) micro breaks Integrated protection Secondary

Power Total useful (typical) Output c 5 V Nominal voltage Nominal current Power (typical) Output Nominal voltage c 24 VR (3) Nominal current Power (typical) Output c 24 V sensors Integrated protection on outputs (4) Conformity to standards Isolation Dielectric Primary/secondary and withstand primary/earth Insulation Primary/secondary and resistance primary/earth Type od power supply module Primary Voltage Nominal Limit (ripple included) Frequencys Nominal/limit Current Nominal input 1 rms Initial start up I inrush current at 25 °C (2) I²t on activation It on activation Duration of Mains supply (accepted) micro breaks Integrated protection Secondary Power Total useful (typical) Output c 5 V Nominal voltage Nominal current Power (typical) Output Nominal voltage c 24 VR (3) Nominal current Power (typical) Output Sensors c 24 VC Integrated protection on outputs (4) Conformity to standards Isolation Dielectric Primary/secondary and withstand primary/earth Insulation Primary/secondary and resistance primary/earth

Hz A

TSX PSY 1610M TSX PSY 3610M c 24 c 24 c 19.2...30 (1) (possible up to 34 V for 1 h in evry 24 h) – – ≤ 1.5 at c 24 V ≤ 2.7 at c 24 V

A

100 at c 24 V

150 at c 24 V

A ²s

12.5

20

As

0.2

0.5

ms

≤1

≤1

V V

TSX PSY 5520M c 24...48 c 19.2...60 – ≤ 3 at c 24 V ≤ 1.5 at c 48 V 15 at c 24 V 15 at c 48 V 50 at c 24 V 55 at c 48 V 7 at c 24 V 6 at c 48 V ≤1 By fuse 5 x 20, time-delayed 5 A 50 5 7 35 24 0.8 19 –

V eff

By fuse 5 x 20, No time-delayed 3.5 A 30 50 5 5 3 7 15 35 U mains - 0.6 U mains - 0.6 0.6 0.6 15 19 – – Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages IEC 1131 2 Non isolated, internal 0 V connected to PLC earth

MΩ

–

≥ 10

W V A W V A W

2000 - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

ms

TSX PSY 2600M a 100...240 a 85...264 50…60/47…63 0.5 at a 100 V 0.3 at a 240 V 37 at a 100 V 75 at a 240 V 0.63 at a 100 V 2.6 at a 240 V 0.034 at a 100 V 0.067 at a 240 V ≤ 10

W V A W V A W A

By fuse 5 x 20, time-delayed, 4 A 26 50 5 5 5 7 25 35 24 24 0.6 0.8 15 19 0.5 0.8

77 (5) 5 15 75 – – – 1.6 (TBTS)

V eff

Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages IEC 1131 2 2000 - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

3000 - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

MΩ

≥ 100

V V Hz A A A²s As

2

TSX PSY 5500M a 100...120/200...240 a 85...140/190...264

TSX PSY 8500M

1.7 at a 100 V 0.5 at a 240 V 38 at a 100 V 38 at a 240 V 4 at a 100 V 2 at a 240 V 0.11 at a 100 V 0.11 at a 240 V ≤ 10

1.7 at a 100 V 0.5 at a 240 V 30 at a 100 V 60 at a 240 V 15 at a 100 V 8 at a 240 V 0.15 at a 100 V 0.15 at a 240 V ≤ 10

a 85...140/170...264

(1) When supplying modules with relay outputs, the range is reduced to 21.6…26.4 V. (2) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously and for sizing protection devices. (3) Output c 24 V for supplying relays of modules with relay outputs. (4) Output c 24 VR, cannot be accessed by the user and is protected by a fuse located beneath the module (5 x 20, 4 A, type Medium) (5) 77 W at 60 °C, 85 W at 55 °C, or 100 W at 55 °C using TSX FAN fan modules.


Functions: page 2/4


2/3


Functions


Functions Alarm relay The alarm relay located in each power supply module has a volt-free contact which can be accessed on the connection screw terminal of the module. The operating principle is as follows: b Module alarm relay located on the processor rack (rack 0): in normal operation, PLC in RUN, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1). Whenever the application stops, even partially, occurrence of a blocking fault, incorrect output voltages or loss of mains power, the relay de-energizes and the associated contact opens (state 0).

2

b Alarm relay of power supply modules located on other racks (racks 1 to 7): when the module is powered up and if the output voltages are correct, the relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1). When the mains power is lost or if the output voltages are incorrect, the relay de-energizes (state 0). Back-up battery Each power supply module has a slot reserved for a battery which provides the power supply to the internal RAM memory located in the processors, in order to ensure that data is saved when the PLC is switched off. The duration of data back-up is one year. The battery must be changed as soon as the BAT lamp (red) on the front panel lights up. RESET pushbutton Pressing this pushbutton, which is located on the front panel of the power supply module, triggers a sequence of service signals which is the same as that for: b A power break when the pushbutton is pressed b A power up when the pushbutton is released These operations are expressed by the application as a warm restart. Sensor power supply The TSX PSY 2600M/5500M/8500M a.c. power supply modules have an integrated power supply which provides a voltage of c 24 V to supply the input sensors. Connection to this sensor power supply can be accessed via the module screw terminal. The available power on c 24 V depends on model (0,5/0,8/1,6 A), see characteristics page 2/3.


2/4



2


References, dimensions, mounting

2


References Each TSX RKY p/pEX rack must be equipped with a single or double format power supply module (slot marked PS). The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number of modules installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to establish a power consumption table rack by rack in order to determine the TSX PSY power supply module most suitable for each rack. Power supply module Power supply c 24 V non isolated (3)

c 24...48 V isolated a 100…240 V a 100…120 V a 200…240 V

TSX PSY 2600M

Available power (1) c5V c 24 VR c 24 VC Total 15 W 15 W – 30 W

Format

Reference (2)

Weight kg

Standard TSX PSY 1610M

0.540

35 W

19 W

–

50 W

Double

TSX PSY 3610M

0.780

35 W

19 W

–

50 W

Double

TSX PSY 5520M

0.890

25 W

15 W

12 W

26 W

Standard TSX PSY 2600M

0.510

35 W

19 W

19 W

50 W

Double

TSX PSY 5500M

0.620

75 W

–

38 W (SELV)

77 W

Double

TSX PSY 8500M

0.740

Accessories Description Use Battery

Quantity Reference

Internal RAM memory backup (position 1 battery TSX PLP 01 in power supply modules) 10 batteries

TSX PSY 5500M

TSX PLP 101

Weight kg 0.010

0.100

Fan modules Description Use

Weight kg Fan modules For TSX RKY p or c 24 V TSX FAN D2P 0.500 (4) TSX RKY pEX racks a 100…120 V TSX FAN A4P 0.500 a 200…240 V TSX FAN A5P 0.500 (1) Voltages c 5 V and c 24 VR for power supply to Premium modules, voltage c 24 VC for supplying power to input sensors. The sum of absorbed power on each voltage (c 5 V, c 24 VR and c 24 VC) should not exceed the total power of the module. (2) Product supplied with a RAM memory backup battery and multilingual installation guide (racks and power supplies) English, French, German, Spanish and Italian. (3) The internal 0 V of the module is connected to the PLC earth. (4) One fan module for rack with 4 or 6 positions, two fan modules for rack with 8 positions and three fan modules for rack with 12 positions. Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.

TSX FAN ppP

Power supply

Reference

Dimensions/mounting TSX FAN pP Side view

Front view

Fan module mounting

146

88,9

110

58,3

58

54

138



Functions: page 2/4

2/5

2


Presentation, description

Single rack configuration

Presentation TSX RKY ppp racks form the basic elements of the Premium control system platform with a single rack (6, 8 or 12 positions). These racks provide the following functions: b Mechanical function: they enable all the modules of a PLC station (power supply, processor, discrete I/O, analogue I/O, application-specific modules) to be fitted. b Electrical function: they enable connection to the bus (Bus X) and provide distribution of: v power supplies required for each module in the same rack, v data and service signals for the entire PLC station where this has several racks.

2

TSX FAN ppP fan modules installed above the racks of Premium PLCs provide forced air convection, in order to maintain an even ambient temperature inside the enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist (voir page 2/2).

Description TSX RKY ppp racks comprise:

1

5 9

8

3

7

6

4

2

2/6

1 Metal frame. 2 Slots for anchoring the module pins. 3 48-way female 1/2 DIN connectors for module-rack connections (the first connector is reserved for the power supply module). 4 Locating slot for the power supply module. 5 Tapped holes for fixing the module. 6 Four holes for mounting the rack. 7 Position for rack address label. 8 Position for station network address label. 9 Two earth terminals for earthing the rack.

2


References, dimensions, mounting

2

Single rack configuration

Non-extendable racks Description Non-extendable racks, for single rack configuration

Type of modules to be Capacity installed TSX PSY power supply, 6 positions TSX P57 processor, 8 positions I/O modules, 12 positions application-specific modules

Reference TSX RKY 6 (1) TSX RKY 8 (1) TSX RKY 12

Weight kg 1.470 1.750 2.310

Connection accessories Description

TSX RKY 6

Use

Protective covers Unoccupied position on (Sold in lots of 5) TSX RKY p or TSX RKY pEX racks Mountingscrews Mounting for TSX RKY p or M6 x 25 (Sold in lots of 50) TSX RKY pEX racks

Comprising

Unit reference

5 screw-on covers

TSX RKA 02

Captive screw TSX ACC VA625 and washer with hexagonal slotted head

Weight kg 0.050

0.350

(1) Limits of electromagnetic emissions, see (3) page 9/7.

Dimensions, mounting TSX RKY Front view : TSX RKY 6 exemple

165 (1)

151,5

Common side view

160 (1)

TSX RKY 6 TSX RKY 8 TSX RKY 12

a 261.6 335.3 482.6

(1) With screw terminal bloc (2) With HE 10 or SUB-D type connectors

a

200 (2) Mounting of racks on AM1 PA perforated plate

Installation rules

≥150 (3)

31,3

4 trous (1)

88,9

a

≥100

(4)

(2)

151,5

AF1-EA6

≥100

≥150

a

8,75

b

a

a

(1)

(2)

a

8,75

a

≥150 (3)

16

31,3

(2) a

on AM1 ED profiles

=

88,9

=

AF1-CF56

a

a b TSX RKY 6 244.1 261.6 TSX RKY 8 317.8 335.3 TSX RKY 12 465.1 482.6 (1) For mounting on panel: the diameter of the fixing holes must be sulficient for an M6 screw

a≥ (1) (2) (3) (4)

50 mm Equipment or enclosure Cable ducting or clip ≥ 130 mm with TSX FAN ppP fan module TSX RKY 6 TSX RKY 8 TSX RKY 12

1 fan module per rack 2 fan module per rack 3 fan module per rack

2/7

2


Presentation

2

Multi-racks configuration without remote module

1

Composition of a PLC station

2

3 5

100 m max. (without bus X remote) 4

2

Using TSX RKY 6/8/12 standard racks, it is possible to constitute a PLC station with Premium processors, with just a single rack. Using 1 TSK RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX/12EX (1) extendable racks, a PLC station can be constituted which comprises up to: b 4 racks for a station with TSX 57 10 processor, b 16 racks for a station with TSX 57 20, 57 30, 57 40, 57 50 Premium processor or Atrium slot-PLCs. The racks are connected to each other by bus X extension cables 2. Bus X The racks distributed on bus X are connected to each other via bus X extension cables whose total length is 100 m maximum. Using TSX REY 200 bus X remote modules enables the length of bus X to be increased to a maximum of 2 x 350 m (see page 2/12). The racks are connected to each other using TSX CBY pp0K bus X extension cables which are connected to one of the two 9-way SUB-D connectors on each extendable rack. The incoming cable from another rack can be connected to either the right 4 or left-hand 3 connector. Line terminations The two extendable racks located at the ends of the line must have a TSX TLY EX line terminator 5 fitted on the unused 9-way SUB-D type connector, except when using PCX 57 coprocessors where the line terminator is supplied with the coprocessor module.

Presentation of extentable racks TSX RKY ppEX racks form the basic elements of the Premium control system platform. These racks provide the following functions: b Mechanical function: they enable all the modules of a PLC station (power supply, processor, discrete I/O, analogue I/O, application-specific modules) to be fitted. b Electrical function: they enable connection to the bus (bus X) and provide distribution of: v power supplies required for each module in the same rack, v data and service signals for the entire PLC station where this has several racks. To meet user requirements, several types of rack are available in order to make up PLC stations comprising 1 to 16 racks maximum distributed over bus X with a maximum cumulative length of 100 meters. TSX FAN ppP fan modules installed above the racks of Premium PLCs provide forced air convection, in order to maintain an even ambient temperature inside the enclosure and to eliminate the various hot spots that may exist (see page 2/2).

2/8


Description, functions

2


Description TSX RKY ppp racks comprise:

1

1 Metal frame. 2 Slots for anchoring the module pins. 3 48-way female 1/2 DIN connectors for module-rack connections (the first connector is reserved for the power supply module). 4 Locating slot for the power supply module. 5 Tapped holes for Mounting the module. 6 Four holes for mounting the rack. 7 Position for rack address label. 8 Position for station network address label. 9 Two earth terminals for earthing the rack. 10 Microswitches for coding the rack address (on extendable racks). 11 Two 9-way female SUB-D connectors for the remote connection of bus X to another rack (on extendable racks).

5

10 9 8

3

11

11

7

6

4

2

Rack addresses

Address rack n (with power supply standard format) “less-significant” “most-significant” PS

00

01

02

03

04

PS

PS

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

PS

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

PS

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

PS

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

08

09

10

2

11

12

Address 0: this address is always assigned to the rack which holds the processor. This rack can be located in any position on the line. Addresses 1 to 7: these can be assigned in any order to all the other extendable racks of the station. As the two racks with 4,6, or 8 slots which make up each pair can have the same address on the bus X, position numbers are defined as follows: b Rack n “less-significant”: position 00 to xx (02, 04 or 06); rack n “most-significant”: position 08 to yy (10, 12 or 14). b Each rack with 12 slots holds an address (with position 00 to 10). Installing the various modules on the standard or extendable rack with address 0 The rack with address 0 must contain a power supply module and the processor module. For Premium PLCs which have two types of power supply (standard or double format), the position of the processor (standard or double format) will depend on the type of power supply used. Using a standard format power supply module: b The power supply module systematically occupies position PS. b The processor module must be installed in position 00/01 (00 with standard format processor). b The other modules are installed from position 02 (01 with standard format processor). Using a double format power supply module: b The power supply module systematically occupies positions PS and 00. b The processor module must be installed in position 01/02 (01 with standard format processor). b The other modules are installed from position 03 (02 with standard format processor). Installing the various modules on extendable racks with addresses 1 to 7 Each rack must have either a standard format or double format power supply module. Using a standard format power supply module: b The power supply module systematically occupies position PS. b The other modules are installed from position 00 onwards. Using a double format power supply module: b The power supply module systematically occupies positions PS and 00. b The other modules are installed from position 01 onwards.

2/9

References


2


Extendable racks Description

Type of modules to be installed Extendable racks TSX PSY power for multi-racks supply, configuration TSX P57 processor (maximum 16 racks) (main rack), (1) I/O modules, application-specific modules

2

Capacity

Reference

4 positions 6 positions 8 positions 12 positions

TSX RKY 4EX TSX RKY 6EX TSX RKY 8EX TSX RKY 12EX

Weight kg 1.160 1.500 1.780 2.340

Connection accessories TSX RKY 6EX

Description

Use

Comprising Length

Unit reference

Daisy chaining cables Bus X (total length 100 m maxi mum) (2)

Between TSX RK Y pEX racks

2 x 9-way SUB-D connectors

Cable on reel

Length to be fitted with TSX CBY K9 connectors Compulsory on the 2 TSX RKY pEX end racks Unoccupied position on TSX RKY p or TSX RKY pEX racks For TSX CBY 1000 cable ends Mounting of TSX CBY K9 connectors Mounting for TSX RKY p or TSX RKY pEX racks

Cable with free ends, 2 line testers

TSX CBY 010K TSX CBY 030K TSX CBY 050K TSX CBY 120K TSX CBY 180K TSX CBY 280K TSX CBY 380K TSX CBY 500K TSX CBY 720K TSX CBY 1000K TSX CBY 1000

Line terminators (sold in lots of 2) TSX TLY EX Protective covers (Sold in lots of 5)

Bus X connectors (Sold in lots of 2) Installation of connectors Mounting screws M6 x 25 (Sold in lots of 50)

1m 3m 5m 12 m 18 m 28 m 38 m 50 m 72 m 100 m 100 m

Weight kg 0.160 0.260 0.360 1.260 1.860 2.860 3.860 5.060 7.260 10.060 12.320

2 x 9-way SUB-D connectors labelled A and B

TSX TLY EX

0.050

5 screw-on covers

TSX RKA 02

0.050


TSX CBY K9

0.080

2 crimping pliers, 1 pen (3)

TSX CBY ACC 10

Captive screw and washer with hexagonal slotted head

TSX ACC VA625

–

0.350

(1) 16 racks TSX RKY 4EX/6EX/8EX maximum (4, 6 or 8 slots). Using the TSX RKY 12EX (12 slots) is the same as occupying 2 racks with 4, 6 or 8 slots. (2) 2 x 350 m maximum when using the TSX REY 200 bus X remote module (see page 2/12). (3) Installation of connectors on the cable also requires a wire stripper, a pair of scissors and a digital ohmmeter.

2/10


Dimensions, mounting

2


TSX RKY Front view : TSX RKY 6EX example

165 (1)

151,5

Common side view

160 (1)

TSX RKY 4EX TSX RKY 6EX TSX RKY 8EX TSX RKY 12EX

a 187.9 261.6 335.3 482.6

a

2

200 (2) (1) With screw terminal bloc (2) With HE 10 or SUB-D type connectors Mounting of racks on AM1 PA perforated plate

Installation rules

≥150 (3)

31,3

4 trous (1)

88,9

a

≥100

(4)

(2)

151,5

AF1-EA6

≥100

≥150

a

8,75

b

a

a

(1)

(2)

a

8,75

a

≥150 (3)

16

31,3

(2) a

On AM1 ED profiles

=

88,9

=

AF1-CF56

a

a b TSX RKY 4EX 170.4 187.9 TSX RKY 6EX 244.1 261.6 TSX RKY 8EX 317.8 335.3 TSX RKY 12EX 465.1 482.6 (1) For mounting on panel: the diameter of the fixing holes must be sulficient for an M6 screw

a≥ (1) (2) (3) (4)

50 mm Equipment or enclosure Cable ducting or clip ≥ 130 mm with TSX FAN ppP fan module TSX RKY 4EX/6EX TSX RKY 8EX TSX RKY 12EX

1 fan module per rack 2 fan module per rack 3 fan module per rack

2/11


Presentation

2

Multi-racks configuration with remote module

Presentation Bus X for Premium PLCs can be used to connect eight 12 position racks or sixteen 4, 6 or 8 position racks, distributed over a maximum length of 100 metres (see page 2/9). For applications requiring longer distances between racks, the bus X remote rackmaster module: TSX REY 200 can be used to increase this distance up to a maximum of 350 metres without reducing performance. The bus X remote system is electrical. Using the bus X remote rackmaster module will not result in any loss of performance in reading or controlling I/O. The bus X remote system comprises: b One TSX REY 200 module called the “master” 1 located on the rack at address 0 (rack supporting the processor 2 and the main bus X 3). This module has 2 channels used to locate 2 bus X segments 5 remotely at a maximum distance of 250 metres. b One or two TSX REY 200 modules 4 called “slaves” located on each extendable rack. b Each slave module is connected to the master module by a TSX CBRY 2500 cable 5, which the user should cut and fit with TSX CBRY K5 connectors as required (cabling does not require any special equipment). Each end of the bus should be fitted with a TSX TLY EX line terminator 6.

2

3 4 Bus X 100 m

6

6

5 2 Remote location of bus X at 250 m max.

3

6

Bus X 100 m

6

Remote location of bus X at 250 m max.

1 5 Bus X 100 m

6

6

3 4

Implantations The rules for installing the bus X remote rackmaster module, TSX REY 200, are as follows : b Bus X remote rackmaster module acting as a master. It is installed on the rack at address 0 supporting the processor with : v The power supply module systematically occupying position(s) PS (and 00). The processor module must be installed in position 01 (and 02 if it is a double format processor). v The bus X remote rackmaster module, TSX REY 200, can be installed in any position after 02 (or 03 if it is a double format processor). b Bus X remote rackmaster module acting as a slave. It is installed in an extendable rack (located on an extendable bus X segment) in any position apart from the positions dedicated to the power supply module.


2/12



Description, references

2

Multi-racks configuration with remote module

Maximum distances for remote location From one remote system, the maximum permitted distances from the processor are shown in the table below: Types of modules

References

Discrete inputs (a) Discrete outputs Preventa safety module Discrete I/O (b) Analogue I/O (c) Counting/motion modules (d) Weighing module AS-Interface bus module SERCOS motion module Communication module Ethernet modules Fieldbus modules (a) (b) (c) (d)

TSX DEY ppp TSX DSY ppp TSX PAY ppp TSX DMY TSX AEY ppp/ASY ppp TSX CTY pA/CTY 2C/CAY 21/CAY41/ CFY p1 TSX ISP Y101/Y111 TSX SAY 100/1000 TSX CSY 84/164 TSX SCY 21601/11601 TSX ETY pppp TSX IBY 100/PBY100 TSX DEY 16FK (version ≥ 06) TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK TSX AEY 810/1614 TSX ASY 410 (version ≥ 11) TSX CTY 2C/CCY 1128 TSX CAY 22/42/33

Bus X remote system 5 250 m

2

175 m less then the lenght of bus X

Remote location of bus X not permitted

225 m less then the lenght of bus X

Description 1

2

3

The front panel of the bus X remote rackmaster module TSX REY 200 comprises: 1 A display block with 6 indicator lamps: v RUN indicator: module running v ERR indicator: module has internal fault v I/O indicator: module has external fault v MST indicator: module acting as master or slave v CH0 indicator: channel 0 operating v CH1 indicator: channel 1 operating 2 5-way SUB-D 9 connector for the connection of channel 0. 3 5-way SUB-D 9 connector for the connection of channel 1.

References Description Extendable racks

Operation –

Bus X remote Master/slave rackmaster module

Number of channels Reference (1) 4/6/8/12 positions See page 2/10 2

Weight kg

TSX REY 200

–

Connection cables and accessories Description

Use

Bus X cables Connection of two supplied on a drum TSX REY 200 modules Class C1 flame resistance

5-ways SUB-D 9 connectors (sold in lots of 5) Description

Length

Reference

250 m

TSX CBRY 2500

Cable for daisy chain 250 m mounting (2)

TSX CBRY 2500F

–

Connections for bus X cable

–

TSX CBRY K5

–

Use

Composition

Reference

Must be fitted on eachTSX RKY pEX end rack


TSX TLY EX

TSX REY 200 Line terminators (sold in lots of 2)

Weight kg –

Weight kg 0.050

(1) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide. (2) Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 472, part 603/H: - for use on cable drag chain with minimum bend radius of 75 mm, - for use on gantry crane (strikethrough: portal support), subject to compliance with conditions for use such as acceleration, speed, length etc: contact our regional branch office for further information. - not authorized for use on robots, or multi-axis applications. Presentation: page 2/12

2/13

3

3/0

Contents

3 - Discrete and analog I/O

3

3.1 - Discrete I/O modules Selection guide: Input and input/output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/2 Selection guide: Output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/4 b Discrete I/O modules v Principle, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/6 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/9 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/14 v Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/17

3.2 - Analog I/O modules Selection guide: Input and output modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/20

3

b Analog I/O modules v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/22 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/23 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/24 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/26

3.3 - Distributed I/O systems Selection guide: IP 20 inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/28 Selection guide: IP 20 TBX discrete I/O on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/30 b TBX distributed discrete I/O modules v Presentation, functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/32 v Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/34 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/36 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/40 v Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/42 v Dimensions and mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/45 Selection guide: IP 20 TBX analog I/O on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/46 b TBX distributed analog I/O modules v Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/48 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/50 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/51 v Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/51

Selection guide: IP 65/67 splitter boxes and modules . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/52 b TBX discrete I/O IP 65 modules on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/54 b Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/60 b Discrete I/O IP 65 modules on INTERBus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/70

3.4 - Specialized I/O b Tego Power installation system v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/74 v Associations with Modicon automation platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3/76

3/1

Selection guide

Modicon Premium automation platform Discrete I/O modules

Applications

Connecting inputs to screw terminal blocks for bare wires fitted with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags

Type Voltage Modularity

c 24 V

(Number of channels)

8 isolated channels

Connection

Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 01

3 3.1

Isolated inputs

Isolated outputs

Compatibility with Telefast pre-wired system

Type of passive connection sub-bases

100…120V

16 isolated channels

–

Logic Sensor compatibility acc. to IEC 947 5 2 standard

Positive 2 wire c/a, 3 wire PNP c any type

Negative 2 wire c/a, 3 wire NPN c any type

– 2 wire c/a

TSX DEY 08D2

TSX DEY 16A2

TSX DEY 16A3

Fallback

Tego Dial

3/12 –

Tego Power

–

Connection sub-bases

–

Input adaptor sub-bases

–

Maniature (55 or 72 mm)

Large width (194 mm) Solid input relays Plug-in relays Type of cables fitted with HE10 connectors

3/2

a 48 V

Type 2

Standard (106 or 113 mm)

Type of adaptor sub-base

c or a 24 V

IEC 1131 2 conformity

IEC 1131 2 conformity Protection Logic Type of discrete input and I/O modules Pages Compatibility with Tego installation system

48 V

TSX DEY 16D2

TSX DEY 16D3

TSX DEY 16A4

3

3

Connecting inputs to screw terminal blocks for bare wires fitted with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags

Connecting inputs to HE 10 connectors with preformed cables with flying leads, rolled ribbon cables or multicore cables

Connecting inputs to HE 10 connectors with preformed cables with flying leads, rolled ribbon cables or multicore cables

3 3.1

a 200…240 V

c 24 V


16 fast isolated channels

Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 01 –

Via 20-way HE 10 connectors

– 2 wire c/a

Positive 2 wire c/a , 3 wire PNP c any type

48 V




Type 1

24 V 16 isolated inputs and 12 isolated outputs 0.5 A Event-triggered fast Programmable inputs reflex inputs and outputs

Type 1

Output fallback may be configured, with continuous monitoring of output control and output reset in case of internal fault Yes Protected Positive

TSX DEY 16A5

TSX DEY 16FK

3/12 –

Tego Dialbase 8I/8O APE 1B24M (see page 3/76)

–

TSX DEY 32D2K

TSX DEY 64D2K

TSX DEY 32D3K

TSX DMY 28FK

TSX DMY 28RFK

3/14 –

–

Communication module APP 1CH, control and power splitters – APP 2R4H2 8 ou 16 channels, with or without LED, with commom or 2 terminals per channel passive connection sub-bases

–

16 channels c 5 V TTL, c 24 V, c 48 V, a 115 V or 230 V, 2 terminals per channel adaptor sub-bases ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21, ABE 7H16R50, ABE 7H20Eppp

ABE 7H16S21, ABE 7H16R23, ABE 7H16R1p, ABE 7H16R2p, ABE 7H16R3p, ABE 7H16Cpp

ABE 7H16S43

ABE 7H16R20

ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21, ABE 7H16R50, ABE 7H20Eppp, ABE 7H12R50 ABE 7H16R1p, ABE 7H16R2p, ABE 7H16R3p, ABE 7HCpp, ABE 7H16S21, ABE 7H16R23, ABE 7H12Rpp ABE 7H16S43

ABE 7S16E2pp ABE 7P16F3pp TSX CDP pp3 ou ABF H20pp0

3/3

Discrete output selection guide


3

Discrete I/O modules

Applications

Connecting ouptuts to screw terminal blocks for bare wires or wires fitted with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags (minimum cross-section 0.28 mm2, maximum 1.5 mm2)

Type

c transistor

Voltage

24 V

Current

0.5 A

Modularity (number of channels)

8 channels, protected

3 3.1

Connection Isolated outputs

0.25 A




8 channels not protected

16 channels not protected

Protected

Not protected

Logic

Positive

–

Tego Dial

–

Tego Power

–

Connection sub-bases

–

Input adaptor sub-bases

–

Maniature (55 or 72 mm)

Standard (106 or 113 mm)

Large width (194 mm) Solid input relays Plug-in relays Type of cables fitted with HE10 connectors

3/4

1A

Protection

3/13

Type of adaptor sub-base

0.5 A


Pages

Type of passive connection sub-bases

2A

c 24 V, a 24…240 V 3 A (lth)

Output fallback may be configured

TSX DSY 08T2

Compatibility with Telefast pre-wired system

48 V

Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 01 Output fallback may be configured, with continuous monitoring of output control and output reset in cse of internal fault Yes

Fallback

Types of discrete output module

Compatibility with Tego installation system

c our a relay

TSX DSY 08T22

TSX DSY 16T2

TSX DSY 08T31

TSX DSY 16T3

TSX DSY 08R5

TSX DSY 16R5

3

Connecting ouptuts to screw terminal blocks for bare wires or wires fitted with either cable ends or open/closed cable tags (minimum cross-section 0.28 mm2, maximum 1.5 mm2)

Connecting outputs to HE 10 connectors with preformed cables with flying leads (cross-section 3.324 mm2), rolled ribbon cables (cross-section 0.08 mm2) or multicore cables (cross-section 0.324 mm 2)

3 3.1

c our a relay c 24…48 V a 24…240V 5 A (lth)

c relay

a triac

24…120 V 5 A (lth)

48…240 V 2 A per channel

c transistor 24 V


1 A per channel 16 channels, protected

24…120 V 1 A per channel 16 channels, not protected

Via 20-way screw terminals: TSX BLY 01 Output fallback may be – configured Yes



Via 20-way HE 10 connectors Output fallback may be configured, with continuous monitoring of output control and output reset in case of internal fault

Protected

Not protected

–

TSX DSY 08R5A

0.1 A per channel

Protected Positive

TSX DSY 08R4D

TSX DSY 08S5

TSX DSY 16S5

TSX DSY 16S4

TSX DSY 32T2K

TSX DSY 64T2K

3/13 –

Tego Dialbase 8I/8O APE 1B24M (see page 3/76)

–

Communication module APP 1CH, control and power splitters APP 2R4H2

–

8 or 16 channels, with or without LED, with common or 2 terminals per channel 8 or 16 relay channels with 1 “N/O”, 1 or 2 “C/O” or transistor, c 5…48 V, c 24 V, a 24…240 V 1 or 2 terminals per channel ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21

–

ABE 7H16S21

ABE 7H16F43 ABE 7S08S2pp, ABE 7R08Sppp, ABE 7S16Sppp, ABE 7R16Sppp ABE 7P08T330, ABE 7R16Tppp, ABE 7P16Tppp TSX CDP pp3 ou ABF H20pp0 ABE 7H08Rpp, ABE 7H08S21

3/5


Principle


Connecting modules with screw terminal blocks Discrete I/O module terminal blocks have a device for automatically transferring the coding when first used. This prevents manipulation errors when a module is replaced. This coding ensures electrical compatibility for the type of module. Each terminal can accept bare wires or wire with cable ends with open tags. The capacity of each terminal is: b Minimum: 1 x 0.2 mm2 wire (AWG 24) without cable end. b Maximum: 1 x 2 mm2 wire (AWG 14) without cable end or 1 x 1.5 mm2 wire (AWG 15) with cable end. Screw connection terminal blocks are equipped with captive screws. The maximum terminal block capacity is 16 x 1 mm2 (AWG 17) wires + 4 x 1.5 mm2 (AWG 15) wires.

Connecting modules with HE 10 connectors Preformed cable with 20 wires, 22-gauge (0.324 mm2)

3

Used for simple and direct wire to wire connection of the I/O of the module with connectors 1 to the sensors, preactuators or terminals. This preformed cable 3 comprises: b An insulated HE10 2 connector at one of the ends, with 20 x 0.34 mm2 cross-section sheathed wires. b At the other end 4, flying leads differentiated by a colour code conforming to standard DIN 47100.

1

2

3.1

3

TSX CDP 301: 3 metres long, TSX CDP 501: 5 metres long, TSX CDP 1001: 10 metres long. Rolled ribbon cable with sheath, 28-gauge (0.08 mm2) Used for connecting I/O of modules with HE 10 connectors 1 to Telefast 2 fast wiring 2 connection and adaptation interfaces. This cable 3 has 2 HE 10 connectors 4 and a rolled ribbon cable with sheath with 0.08 mm2 cross-section wires. Given the small cross-section of the wires, it is recommended for use with low current I/O only (100 mA maximum per output).

Preformed cable

1

TSX CDP 102: 1 metre long, TSX CDP 202: 2 metres long, TSX CDP 302: 3 metres long.

4

Connection cable, 22-gauge (0.324 mm2) 3 1

Used for connecting the I/O of modules with HE 10 connectors 1 to Telefast 2 fast wiring 2 connection and adaptation interfaces. This cable 5 has 2 insulated HE 10 connectors 6 and a cable for carrying higher currents (500 mA maximum).

6

2

5 4 6

TSX CDP 053: 0.5 metres long, TSX CDP 103: 1 metre long, TSX CDP 203: 2 metres long, TSX CDP 303: 3 metres long, TSX CDP 503: 5 metres long. TSX CDP 1003: 10 metres long.

Rolled ribbon and connection cable

Characteristics: pages 3/9 to 3/12

3/6


Connections: pages 3/15 to 3/17

3


Principle (continued), description

3


Connection to Tego Dial and Tego Power systems TSX DEY 16FK/32D2K/64D2K input modules and TSX DSY 32T2K/64T2K output modules 1 are specially designed for use in conjunction with Tego Dial and Tego Power systems (1). The modules are easily connected using a TSX CDP pp3 connecting cable 2 to the Dialbase sub-base APE 1B24M 3 installed on the Dialpack terminal 4 equipped with a panel 5 which enables operator dialogue.

1

3

2

4

5

3 3.1

(1) See pages 3/70 and 7/14.

Description Discrete I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). They have a plastic case which ensures IP 20 protection of the electronics. I/O modules with screw terminal connection

1 2

1 A display block for channels and module diagnostics. 2 A removable screw terminal for direct connection of the I/O to the sensors and preactuators, TSX BLY 01 (connectors to be ordered separately).

3 4

3 A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws and holding the identification label. 4 A rotating support containing the module locating device.

I/O modules with connection via HE 10 connector 1

1 A display block for channels and module diagnostics. 2

2 HE 10 connectors, protected by a cover. They are used to connect the I/O to sensors and preactuators either directly, or via Telefast 2 connection sub-bases.




3/7


Functions

3


Functions I/O assignment Each module is functionally organised into groups of 8 channels. Each group of channels can be assigned a specific application task. Reactivation of outputs If a fault has caused an output to trip, the output can be reactivated if no other terminal fault is present. The reactivation command, defined during configuration, can be automatic (reactivation every 10 seconds) or controlled via the program. Reactivation is carried out in groups of 8 channels. This function can be accessed on modules with solid state d.c. outputs. For relay and triac output modules protected by fuse, the same type of reactivation (automatic or via program) is necessary after replacement of one or more fuses. RUN/STOP command An input can be configured to control the RUN/STOP mode for the PLC. The command is accepted on a rising edge. A STOP command via an input takes priority over a change to RUN via the terminal or via a network command.

3

Output fallback When an application is placed in STOP mode, outputs must be set to a state which is not harmful to the application. This state, known as the fallback position, is defined for each module when its outputs are configured. This configuration enables the choice between: b fallback: channels are set to state 0 or 1 depending on the fallback value entered. b maintain: outputs retain the state they were in before the PLC stopped.

3.1

Diagnostic functions b module diagnostics: any exchange fault preventing normal operation of an output module or fast input module is signalled. Similarly, any internal module fault is signalled. b process diagnostics: sensor/preactuator voltage check, terminal block presence check, short-circuit and overload check, sensor voltage check, preactuator voltage check. Specific functions of the TSX DEY 16FK and TSX DMY 28 FK module inputs b Latching: accepts particularly short pulses with a duration of less than the PLC scan time. b Event input: enables events to be accepted and ensures their immediate processing (processing on interrupt). These inputs are associated with event processing (EVTi) and defined in configuration mode where: i = 0 to 31 for TSX P57 10 processors, i = 0 to 63 for TSX P57 20/30/40 and coprocessors Atrium T PCX. b Event processing can be triggered on a rising edge (0→1) or falling edge (1→0) of the associated input. A masking/unmasking function for TSX DEY 16FK/DMY 28FK inputs is available in online mode. b Programmable input filtering: inputs are equipped with filtering which can be configured for each channel. Inputs are filtered by a fixed analogue filter which ensures a maximum immunity of 0.1 ms for filtering line interference and by a digital filter which can be configured from 0.1 to 7.5 ms in increments of 0.5 ms. Reflex and timer functions for the TSX DMY 28RFK module Can be used to create applications which require a faster response time than the FAST task or event processing (< 500 µs). These control system functions are executed in the module and are independent of the PLC task. They are programmed using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software in configuration mode. Removal when powered up Due to their integrated devices, I/O modules (including application-specific modules) can be removed and connected while powered up.


3/8




Functions (continued), characteristics

3


Functions (suite) 2/3 wire compatibility c 24 V type 1 positive logic

Type of input

c 24/48 V type 2 positive logic

c 24 V

a 24/48 V a 100…120 V type 2

negative logic

a 200…240 V type 2

All 3 wire c sensors, PNP All 3 wire c sensors, NPN Telemecanique 2-wire c sensor or others with the following characteristics: - residual voltage, closed < 7 V - minimum switching current < 2.5 mA - residual current, open < 1.5 mA 2-wire c/a sensor

(1)

2-wire a sensor

(1)

3

(1) In nominal voltage range a 220…240 V. Compatible

Characteristics Environment Conformity to standards Temperature derating

3.1

NFC 63 850, IEC 664, IEC 1131 2, UL 508, UL7 46C, CSA 22 2 n° 142 Characteristics at 60 °C are ensured for 60 % of inputs and 60 % of outputs at state 1

Characteristics of input modules c 24/48 V Type of module Number of inputs Connections

TSX DEY TSX DEY 08D2/16D2 16D3 8/16 16

TSX DEY 16A2 16

TSX DEY 16FK 16

TSX DEY 32D2K 32

TSX DEY 64D2K 64

TSX DEY 32D3K 32

Screw terminal c 24 (pos. logic)

Screw terminal c48 (pos. logic)

Screw terminal c 24 (neg. logic)

HE 10 connector c 24 (pos. logic)



3.5

3.5

7

Voltage

V

Current

mA

7

7

16

HE 10 connector c 24 (pos. logic) Fast inputs 3.5

Sensor supply (ripple included)

V

19…30

38…60

19…30

19…30

19…30

19…30

38…60

Voltage

V

≥ 11

≥ 30

≤ Ual-14 V

≥ 11

≥ 11

≥ 11

≥ 30

Current

mA

≥ 6,5

≥ 6.5

≥ 6.5

≥3

≥3

≥3

Voltage

V

≤5

≤ 10

≥ Ual-5

≤5

≤5

≤5

≥ 6.5 (pour U = 30 V) ≤10

Current

mA

≤2

≤2

≤2

≤ 1.5

≤ 1.5

≤ 1.5

≤2

Impédance d'entrée à l'état 1

KΩ

4

7

1.6

6.3

6.3

6.3

4

Temps de réponse

Typique

ms

4

4

10

4

4

Maximum

ms

7

7

20

Configurable 4 from 0.1 to 7.5 7

7

7

Type 1 Type 1 See table on page 3/9

Type 1

Type 2 IEC 947 5 2

Nominal input values

Input limit values

At state 1

At state 0

Conformité IEC 1131 2 Compatibility 2-wire/3-wire prox. sensor Isolation resistance Dielectric strength Type of input Consumption Dissipated power No. = No. of channels


MΩ Veff

W

Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 IEC 947 5 2 IEC 947 5 2 IEC 947 5 2 >10 at c 500 V 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute Current sink Resistive See page 9/4 1 + 0.15 Nb 1 + 0.3 Nb 1 + 0.4 Nb

Current sink 1.2 + 0.1 Nb 1 + 0.1 Nb

1.5 + 0.1Nb 2+ 0.1 Nb


3/9




Characteristics of a.c. input modules Type of module

TSX DEY 16A2

TSX DEY 16A3

TSX DEY 16A4

TSX DEY 16A5

16

16

16

16

V mA Hz V

a 24 15 47…63 20…26

a 48 16 47…63 40…52

a 110 12 47…63 85…132

a 220 15 47…63 170…264

V mA V mA

10 6 5 4

29 6 10 4

74 6 20 4

159 6 40 4

Input impedance at state 1 for 24 V

KΩ

1.6

3.2

9.2

20

Response time

Typical

ms

15

10

10

10

Maximum

ms

20

20

20

20


Type 2

Type 2

Type 2

Type 2

Compatibility 2-wire/3-wire prox. sensor

IEC 947 5 2

0.86

0.83

0.97

Number of inputs Nominal input values

Input limit values

At state 1 At state 0

3 3.1

Voltage Current Frequency Sensor supply (ripple included) Voltage Current Voltage Current

Isolation résistance

MΩ

> 10 at c 500 V

Dialectic strength

Veff

1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute

Type of input

Resistive

Consumption

See page 9/4

Dissipated power

W

0,89

Capacitive

Characteristics of solid state modules with terminal block Type of module Output nominal values

Voltage

V

TSX DSY 08T2/16T2 c 24

TSX DSY 08T22 c 24

TSX DSY 08T31 c 48

TSX DSY 16T3 c 48

Current

A

0.5

2

1

0.250

Voltage

V

19…30

19…30

38…60

38…60

Current/channel

A

0.625

2.5

1.25

0.31

Current/module

A

4/7

14

7

4

At state 0

mA

< 0.5

10 at c 500 V

Dielectric strength

Veff

2000 - 50/60 Hz

Consumption

See page 9/4

Dissipated power

0.5 W + 1 W/A per output

3/12


1 A per channel - 12 A per module

Non interchangeable fireproof protection per common, 10 A

See page 9/4 0.85 W + 1 W/A per output

(1) For 0.1 x 106 operating cycles. (2) For 0.15 x 106 operating cycles. (3) For 0.3 x 106 operating cycles. (4) For 0.5 x 106 operating cycles. (5) For 0.7 x 106 operating cycles. (6) For 1 x 106 operating cycles. (7) For 1.5 x 106 operating cycles. (8) For 2 x 106 operating cycles. (9) For 3 x 106 operating cycles. (10)For 5 x 106 operating cycles. (11)For 10 x 106 operating cycles. Characteristics: pages 3/9 to 3/12

TSX DSY 16S4 a 24…120

0.85 W + 1 W/A per output

3



3


Characteristics of solid state output modules with connector Type of module Logic Operating voltage d.c. (ripple included)

Nominal Limit

Permissible current Filament lamp max power Residual voltage Response time Paralleling of outputs Leakage current Compatibility with d.c. inputs Built-in Against overvoltages protection Against overloads and short-circuits Against polarity inversion Load impedance At state 1 Isolation resistance Dielectric strength Consumption Dissipated power

V V A W V ms mA

W MΩ Veff W

TSX DSY 32T2K TSX DSY 64T2K Positive c 24 c 19…30, possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period 0.1 A per channel, - 3.2 A per module 0.1 A per channel, - 5 A per module 1.2 < 1.5 for I = 0.1 A 1.2 Yes: 3 max < 0.1 for U = 30 V IEC 1 and 2 Yes, transil diode Automatic trip after 15 ms Reverse diode (place a 3 A fuse on the 24 V) > 220 > 10 at c 500 V 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute See page 9/4 1.6 W + 0.1 W/output 2.4 W + 0.1 W/output

3

Characteristics of I/O mixed modules with connector Type of module Nominal values

Voltage Current

Filament lamp max power Output limit At state 1 values

Voltage Current At state 0 Voltage Current Sensor power supply (ripple included) Output limit values

Voltage Current/channel Current/module Leakage current At state 0 Residual voltage At state 1 Minimum load impedance Filter time Default Configurable Response time (2) Type of input Paralleling of inputs (3) Switching frequency on IEC 1131-2 conformity Built-in Against overvoltages protection Against inversions

Compatibility

Against short-circuits and overloads 2-wire proximity sensor

V mA W V mA V mA V V A A mA V W ms ms ms

Hz

– ms

3-wire proximity sensor Preactuator voltage detection threshold Isolation resistance Dielectric strength Consumption Dissipated power Temperature Characteristics at 60 °C derating


TSX DMY 28FK/TSX DMY 28RFK Fast inputs c 24 V c 24 3.5 – ≥ 11 ≥3 ≤5 ≤ 1.5 19…30 (possible up to 30 V, limited to 1 in every 24 hours) – – – – – – 4 0.1…7.5 (at intervals of 0.5) – Current sink Yes – Yes type 1 –

V MΩ Veff W

– Yes (Telemecanique sensor and < 1.5 mA leakage current) Yes – > 10 at c 500 V 1500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute See page 9/4 1.2 + 0.1 x no. of inputs at 1 Ensured for 60 % of inputs at state 1

3.1 Solid state outputs c 24 V c 24 500 6 – – – – – 19…30 (1) 0.5 4 15 blanc marron

3

Inputs

A 1

4

FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse TSX DEY 16A2 (negative logic)

38

c UV

14

c

36 5

12

13

19

34 3

11

15

Sensor 33

5

10

FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse

32

2

8

9

Inputs

1

11

3

6

17

17

C

8

16

16

Sensor

9

1

4

5

15

15

c + 24 V

6

14

14

+ –

7

0

2

3

12

12

0V

4

10

10

FU1

5

8

7

8

2

6

5

6

1 3

Capteurs Sensor

Inputs 1

4

3

4

Sensor

0

2

1

2 3

Inputs

Sensor

TSX DEY 16FK

0V

+ –

0V

FU1: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse TSX DEY 32D2K DEY 32D3K DEY 64D2K

UV c 24V c 48V c 24V

A I00 V 15 I00 V 15 I00 V 15

B I16 V 31 – I16 V 31

C – I32 V 47 I32 V 47

D – – I48 V 63

20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp1: correspondence between HE 10connector pin and colored of wire, see table on page 3/19.



3/17


Connections (continued)

3


TSX DSY 08T2

TSX DSY 08T22

Preactuors 0

1 1

2

3

4

5

6

2

3

4

5

6

7 7

8

Outputs 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Preactuors 0

2

7

3

3

9

4 5

9

4

11

5

6

15

7

13

6

12

15

7

14

16

20

C 2

3

4

35 5

6

7

8

37 39 9

10

11

12

41 43 44

14

13 45

16

15

46

Outputs 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

19

FU2 c

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

53 55 56

5

6

7

8

5 6 7 8

9

10

11

12

9 10 11 12

14

13 13

16

15

14

20

51

54

4

3

+

49 50

3

2

0V

D 1

52

2

1

18

+ 24 V

48

A 1

0

Outputs 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63

B

Preactuors 16

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

10 12

13

14

15

16

15

16

0V

17

18

0V

17

18

+-

19

20

+

19

20

59 61 62

25 26

11

12

13

14

27 28 29 30

63

FU2 c

16

0

2 3 4

2 4 5 6

5

FU

7 8

7

9 10 11

8 9

12

11

14

13

10

FU

15 16 13

FU

Outputs 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

17 18

14

2

7

3

9

4

5

11

5

13

6

15

7

12 6 14 7 16 17 18 19 20

FU2

FU2: 10 A fast-blow fuse

TSX DSY 08R5A/08R4D

3

6

5

10

Preactuors

Outputs

4

1

8

– +

1

3

3

6

0V

20

2

FU

Outputs 0

4

19

0 1

1 2

1

18

UV

12

+ 24 V

9

60

15

Preactuors

20

11

57 58

Outputs 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

18

17 19

FU2 c

Preactuors

13

UV: c 24 V for TSX DSY 16T2 c 48 V for TSX DSY 16T3 FU2: fast-blow fuse 6.3 A for TSX DSY 16T2 10 A for TSX DSY 16T3

15 17

+

14

– + FU2

Preactuors

47

0V

13

11

TSX DSY 08R5/16R5

1

42

12

Preactuors

Outputs 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

17


33

40

11

9

0V

TSX DSY 32T2K/64T2K

38

10

19 20

– + FU2

FU2: 6.3 A fast-blow fuse

36

9

7

18

3.1

34

8

17

0V

19

32

7

5

15

17 18

Preactuors

6

10

14

16

5

3

8

12

13

4

6

8

11

2

3 4

10

0V

3

2

6

14

FU2

5

1 2

4

12

+

1

3

1

0

2 1

TSX DSY 08T31

Preactuors

Outputs 0

1

10

–

TSX DSY 16T2/16T3

19

15 20

Outputs T0

Q0 1 2 3 C0-3 4 5 6 7 C4-7 8 9 10 11 C8-11 12 13 14 15 C12-15

1

R0

2 T1

3

R1

4 5

(1)

7 8

R2

9 10 11

T3 R3

12 13 4

14 15

5

16 17

6

18 19

7

20

Q1 C0-1

FU

(1)

6

T2

Q0

C2-3

FU

Q2 Q3

(1) Q4 C4-5 Q5

FU

(1) Q6 C6-7 Q7

FU

a 19…240V ou c 24 V

UV

FU: fuse to be rated according to load For protection of integrated outputs, see page 43520/5

UV: a 19…240 V or c 19…60 V for TSX DSY 08R5A c 24…130 V for TSX DSY 08R4D FU: 6.3 A fast-blow fuse (1) Connection must be made for c 24 V or a 24 V power supply

31

+ 24 V

FU2 c

+ 24 V

FU2: 2 A fast-blow fuse TSX DSY 32T2K TSX DSY 64T2K

A Q00 V 15 Q00 V 15

B Q16 V 31 Q16 V 31

C – Q32 V 47

D – Q48 V 63

20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp1: correspondence between HE 10connector pin and colored of wire, see table on page 3/19.


3/18




3


TSX DSY16S4

TSX DSY 16S5

TSX DSY 08S5

Outputs

Preactuors 0

1 1

2

3

4

2

3

FU

5

4

6

6

8

7

5 7

FU

9 10 11

8 9

12 13

10 11

FU

14 15

12

16

14

18

17

13 15

FU

PN

19 20

Preactuors

Q0 1 2 3 C0-3 4 5 6 7 C4-7 8 9 10 11 C8-11 12 13 14

Outputs

0

1 1

2

2

3 3

4

4

6

6

8

5 7

5

9

7 10

11

8 9

12 13

10 11

14 15 12

16

14

18

17

13

15 C12-15

19

15 20

NP 48… 240 V

FU: Fusible 6.3 A fast-blow fuse

Q0 1 2 3 C0-3 4 5 6 7 C4-7 8 9 10 11 C8-11 12 13 14

Preactuors

Outputs 0

1 2

1

3 4 5

FU 2

6

3

8

7 9 10

FU

11

4 12

13

5 14

15

FU 6

16

7

18

17

15 C12-15

19 FU

FU: interchangeable 5 A fast-blow fuse

PN 48…240 V

20

Q0 1 C0-1 FU 2 3 C2-3 FU 4 5 C4-5 FU 6 7

3

C6-7 FU

FU: interchangeable 5 A fast-blow fuse

3.1

TSX DMY 28FK/28RFK Préactionneurs Preactuors blanc marron

16 17

vert jaune

18 19

gris rose

20 21

bleu rouge

22 23

noir violet

24 25

gris-rose rouge-bleu

26 27

blanc-vert marron-vert

0V

–

+

FU2

blanc-jaune jaune-marron blanc-gris gris-marron blanc-rose rose-marron

Sorties Q16 -> 27 Outputs Q16 17 1 2 18 19 3 4 20 21 5 6 22 23 8 7 24 25 9 10 26 27 12 11

Entrées I00->15 Inputs

Capteurs Sensor blanc marron vert jaune

8

15

16

blanc-jaune jaune-marron 24 V blanc-gris gris-marron blanc-rose rose-marron

19

20

FU1

+

+ 24 V

–


4 6

blanc-vert marron-vert

3

4

7

gris-rose rouge-bleu

+

3 5

14

18

2

bleu rouge noir violet

1

2

gris rose

13

17

0 1

5 6 7 8

9

9

10 10

11

11

12 12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

13 14 15

0V

FU1: Fusible 0.5 A fast-blow fuse

20-wire preformed cable TSX CDP pp1: correspondence between HE 10 connector pin and colored of wire, see table on page 3/19. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20


white brown green yellow grey rose blue red black violet grey/rose red/blue white/green brown/green white/yellow yellow/brown white/grey grey/brown white/rose rose/brown


3/19

Selection guide


3

Analog I/O modules

3

Applications

Analog inputs

Type of I/O

Low level isolated inputs, thermocouples, temperature probes

Thermocouple inputs

High level inputs with common

Type

Multirange

Multrange

Voltage/current

± 10 V, ± 5 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V 4…20 mA, 0…20 mA, external shunt supplied B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000, 2 or 4 -wire temperature probes

- 80…+ 80 mV

± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA

Modularity

4 channels

16 channels

8 channels

Isolation

Between channels: a 2830 V rms Between bus and channels: a 1780 V rms Between channels and earth: a 1780 V rms

Between channels: ± c 100 V Between bus and channels: a 1000 V rms Between channels and earth: a 1000 V rms

Between channels: common point Between bus and channels: a 1000 V rms Between channels and earth: a 1000 V rms

Read time

550 ms

1120 ms (normal scan) 70 ms/channel used (fast scan)


Response time

User-definable filtering 0 to 68.5 s

User-definable filtering 0.04 Te to 0.012 Te (Te: module scan time)


Resolution

16 bits

16 bits

12 bits

Connection

20-way screw terminal: TSX BLY 01

Two 25-way SUB-D connectors

25-way SUB-D connector

or 2 Telefast 2 sub-bases (ABE 7CPA12)

or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base (ABE 7CPA02/03)

TSX AEY 1614

TSX AEY 800

Range

Voltage Current Thermocouple, temperature probes

3.2

Type of module

TSX AEY 414

Pages

3/26

3/20

– Thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U

3

Analog outputs

point

High level isolated inputs between channels

High level input with common point

Isolated outputs between channels

Outputs with common point

3

Voltage/current ± 10 V 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA

3.2

16 channels

8 channels

4 channels

8 channels

Between channels: common point. Between bus and channels: a 1000 V rms Between channels and earth: a 1000 V rms

Between channels: ± c 200 V Between bus and channels: a 1000 V rms Between chanenls and earth: a 1000 V rms

Between channels: common point Between bus and channels: a 1000 V rms Between channels andearth: a 1000 V rms

Between channels: a 1500 V rms Between bus and channels: a 1500 V rms Between channels and earth: a 1500 V rms

Between channels: common point Between bus and channels: a 1000 V rms Between channels and earth: a 1000 V rms


126.4 ms (normal scan) 3.3 ms/channel used (fast scan)

1 ms

–

–



–

2.5 ms

5 ms

12 bits

16 bits

11 bits + sign

13 bits + sign for voltage 13 bits for current

Two 25-way SUB-D connectors



20-way screw terminal: TSX BLY 01


or via 2 Telefast 2 sub-bases (ABE 7CPA02/03)



TSX AEY 1600

TSX AEY 810

TSX AEY 420

or 1 Telefast 2 sub-base (ABE 7CPA02)

TSX ASY 410

TSX ASY 800

3/26

3/21



Analog I/O modules

Presentation Analog I/O modules for Premium PLCs are equipped with : b Either one 25-way SUB-D connector (TSX AEY 420/800/810 and TSX ASY 800) b Or two 25-way SUB-D connectors (TSX AEY 1600/1614) b Or a screw terminal block (TSX AEY 414, TSX ASY 410) They can be installed in any position in TSX RKY ppp racks except for the positions reserved for power supply modules. Analog I/O modules can be removed while the PLC is powered up. The maximum number of analog channels in a Premium configuration depends on the processor used, see pages 1/20, 1/21, 1/28 and 1/34.

Description The front panels of TSX AEY/ASY analog I/O modules comprise:

3

1 A display and module diagnostics block.

1

2 A connector for receiving the screw terminal block. 3 A rotating support containing the module locating device.

2

4 A removable screw terminal for direct connection of the I/O to the sensors and preactuators TSX BLY 01 (to be ordered separately).

3.2 3 7

4 5 Connection using screw terminal block

6

Connection using SUB-D connector

5 A pivoting cover for accessing the terminal block screws and holding the identification label. 6 A screw terminal block encoder. 7 A 25-way SUB-D connector for connecting the sensors. Nota : The TSX ASY 800 modules have on the front panel a screw terminal for external 24 VR connection. See page 3/26.

Connection principle for TSX AEY/ASY modules with SUB-D connector The Telefast 2 pre-wired system simplifies the installation of modules by providing access to the inputs (or outputs) at the screw terminals. Connection is via a TSX CAP 030 3 metre shielded cable equipped with SUB-D connectors at either end. Premium (extension rack) + + Ð Ð

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

GND GND N1 N1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

TSX CAP 030

ABE 7CPA02 + + Ð Ð

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31

GND GND N1 N1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

TSX CAP 030

ABE 7CPA03/31

b The Telefast ABE 7CPA02 sub-base enables 8 channels to be connected. b The Telefast ABE 7CPA03/31 sub-base enables the connection of 8 channels and: v provides channel by channel supply for 2 and 4-wire sensors with c 24 V (for sub-base ABE 7CPA03), v channel by channel isolated supply for 2 and 4-wire 24 V sensors (for sub-base ABE 7CPA31), v ensures continuity of current loops when the SUB-D connector is removed, v protects the current shunt within the modules against overvoltages. b The Telefast ABE 7CPA12 sub-base enables 16 thermocouples to be connected. The terminal block is fitted with a temperature probe for cold junction compensation.


3/22


3


Functions

3

Analog I/O modules

TSX AEY 420, 800/810, 1600 analog input modules TSX AEY ppp modules are high level analog input modules with 4 inputs for the TSX AEY 420 module, 8 inputs for TSX AEY 800/810 modules and 16 inputs for the TSX AEY 1600 module. Used with sensors or transmitters, they perform monitoring, measurement and process control functions for continuous processes. Depending on the choice made during configuration, TSX AEY 420/800/810/1600 modules offer the following ranges for each of their inputs ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA. Functions b Scanning of input channels, protection against overvoltages, adaptation of signals by analog filtering, scanning by solid state multiplexing. b Adaptation to input signals: gain selection, drift compensation. b Digitisation of signals: 12-bit analog/digital conversion for TSX AEY 800/1600 and 16 bit analog/digital conversion for TSX AEY 420/810. b Converting input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient, filtering, scaling. b Module monitoring: conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence test, “watchdog” test. b Isolation of input channels on TSX AEY 810. b Fast processing of inputs (1 ms) on TSX AEY 420.

3

TSX AEY 414/1614 analog input modules The TSX AEY 414 module is a multirange input module with 4 channels isolated from each other. Depending on the choice made during configuration, the following ranges are available for each of its inputs: b thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T, U or - 13…+ 63 mV electrical range. b 2 or 4-wire Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 temperature probe, or ohmic range: 0…400 ohms, 0…3850 ohms. b High level ± 10 V, 0…10 V, ± 5 V, 0…5 V (0…20 mA with external shunt) or 1…5 V, 4…20 mA (4…20 mA with external shunt). b The TSX AEY 1614 module is an analog input module with 16 thermocouple inputs. Depending on the selections made during configuration, the following range is available for each of the input channels (supporting a common mode between them of c 250 V or a 280 V): b Thermocouples B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U, or electrical range - 80 mV… + 80 mV Functions b Scanning of input channels, gain selection according to input signals, multiplexing. b Digitisation of input signals. b Converting input measurements to user format: recalibration coefficient, linearisation, cold junction compensation, filtering, scaling. b Module monitoring: conversion circuit test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence test, sensor link test, “watchdog” test.

TSX ASY 410, 800 analog output modules The TSX ASY 410 module has 4 analog outputs isolated from each other, and the TSX ASY 800 module has 8 outputs with common point. Depending on the choice made during configuration, the modules offer the following range for each of its outputs: ± 10 V, 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA without external supply. Functions b Protection of the module against overvoltages. b Adaptation to the different actuators: voltage or current output. b Conversion of digital signals to analog signals (11 bits + sign for TSX ASY 410 and 13 bits + sign for TSX ASY 800). b Transforming application data into data which can be used by the digital/analog converter. b Module monitoring and fault indication to the application: converter test, range overshoot test, terminal block presence test, “watchdog” test. Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software performs configuration and debugging functions: b Choice of modules used. b Configuration of channels according to the type of module: scanning (normal or fast), cold junction compensation (internal or external), range, filtering, display format, task (MAST or FAST), detection of terminal block presence, wiring check. b Debugging, access to certain parameter settings, module/channel diagnostics, forcing, calibration. Characteristics: pages 3/24 and 3/25


3/23

3.2


Characteristics

3

Analog I/O modules

Characteristics of analog input modules Type of input module Number of channels

TSX AEY 800 8

Input range

± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA

Analog/digital conversion

12 bits

16 bits

27 51 3 x (no. of channels used + 1)

29.7 1 3.3 x (no. of channels used – + 1)

± 10 V 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V

0…20 mA 4…20 mA

± 10 V 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V

0.19/0.1 0.15/0.1 (1) (1) 0.22/ 0.22/0.13 (1) 0.13 (1) 1000 1000 Common point

0.25/ 0.244 0.16 (1) 0.41/ 0.305 0.32 (1)

Read time

Normal scan Fast scan

ms ms

Max.error

3 Isolation

3.2

At 25 °C

%FS

0…60 °C

%FS

Betw. ch. and bus Betw. ch. and earth Between channels

V rms V rms cV

TSX AEY 1600 16

Common mode between channels

None

Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on the inputs

± 30 V voltage ± 30 mA en current IEC 1131

Standards Consumption

mA

TSX AEY 810 8

TSX AEY 420 4

0…20 mA 4…20 mA

± 10 V 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V

0…20 mA 4…20 mA

0.13

0.142

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.191

0.12

0.2

0.4

0.4

± 200

Common point

± 200

None

See page 9/4

Type of input module Number of channels

TSX AEY 414 4

Input range

b B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples or electrical range : - 13…+ 63 mV b Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 2 or 4-wire temperature probes, or ohmic range: 0…400 Ω, 0…3850 Ω b ± 10 V, 0…10 V, ± 5 V, 0…5 V (0…20 mA with external shunt) or 1…5 V, 4…20 mA (4…20 mA with external shunt)

b B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouples or electrical range: - 80...+ 80 mV


16 bits

16 bits

16

Read time

Normal scan Fast scan

ms ms

550 –

70 ms/channel –

Max. error

At 25 °C 0…60 °C

%FS %FS

See page 3/25 See page 3/25

See page 3/25 See page 3/25

Isolation

Betw. ch. and bus Betw. ch. and earth Between channels

V rms V rms V rms

1780 1780 2830

1000 1000 –

V

a 240 or c 100 between channels and earth a 415 or c 200 between channels

c 250 between channels and earth c 250 between channels or a 280

± 30 V powered up without 250 Ω external resistance

c ± 30 V in differential mode

Common mode

Max. overvoltage/overcurrent on the inputs

± 15 V powered down without 250 Ω external resistance ± 25 mA powered up/down without 250 Ω external shunt Standards

Consumption

Sensor: IEC 584, IEC 751, DIN 43760, DIN 43710, NFC 42 330 PLC: IEC 1131 mA

See page 9/4

(1) The 1st value corresponds to the max. error of the TSX AEY 800 module, the 2d, to the TSX AEY 1600.


3/24



3

Analog I/O modules

Input range for TSX AEY 414 Voltage/current range Max. error at 25 °C

%FS (1) %FS (1)

Max. error at 0…60 °C Temperature probe range

± 10 V

0…10 V ± 5 V

0…5 V

1…5 V 0.27

0…20 mA 0.36

4…20 mA 0.45

13…63 mV 0.19

0… 0… 4000 Ω 3850 Ω 0.13 0.22

0.27

0.16

0.27

0.22

0.50

0.39

0.50

0.45

0.56

0.69

0.86

0.44

0.27

0.48

Pt 100

Pt 1000

Ni 1000

Max. error at 25 °C

°C

1.2

2.5

1

Max. error at 0…60 °C

°C

2.4

5

2

Thermocouple range Max. error at 25 °C

Max. error at 0…60 °C

B

E

J

K

L

N

R

S

T

U

CI (2)

°C

3.5

6.1

7.3

7.8

7.5

6

6

6.6

6.6

5.4

CE (3)

°C

1.5

1.5

1.8

2.3

2

2

3.2

3.4

1.5

1.5

CI (2)

°C

8.1

8.1

9.5

10.5

9.8

8.7

11

12

8.8

7.3

CE (3)

°C

3.5

3.2

3.8

4.7

4.1

4.3

7.7

8.5

3.2

3.1

B

E

J

K

L

N

R

S

T

U

Input range for TSX AEY 1614 Thermocouple range Max. error at 25 °C (4)

°C

2.5

0.8

0.9

1

0.9

1.1

2.1

2.2

1

1

Max. error at 0…60 °C (4)

°C

4

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.4

1.7

2.4

3.7

1.3

1.3

Characteristics of analog output modules Type of output module Number of channels Output range

TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800 4 8 ± 10 V, 0…20 mA and 4…20 mA, output supplied by PLC (or 24 V SELV external on TSX ASY 800, see page 8/31)


11 bits + sign

13 bits + sign (voltage), 13 bits current

2,5

5

Conversion time

ms

Voltage output 5.12 mV (5), current output 10.25 µA (6) Voltage output 1.28 mV, current output 2.56 µA Voltage output, impedance > 1 kΩ, load < 0.1 µF, current output, impedance < 600 Ω, load < 300 µH

Maximum resolution Output load Measurement error as a % of FS Voltage output, FS = 10 V Current output, FS = 20 mA Isolation between channels and bus

%FS

0.45 to 25 °C, 0.75 from 0 to 60 °C

%FS

0.52 to 25 °C, 0.98 from 0 to 60 °C

V rms

1500

± 0.14 to 25 °C, ± 0.28 from 0 to 60 °C ± 0.21 to 25 °C, ± 0.52 from 0 to 60 °C 1000

c 500 V

1000 V rms

1500

Common point

Isolation between channels and earth Isolation between channels

V rms

Type of protection Max. voltage without damage

Short-circuits and overload V

Standards Consumption

± 30 IEC 1131

mA

See page 9/4 (1) %FS: error as a % of full scale. (2) IC: with internal cold junction compensation. (3) EC: with external cold junction compensation (with class A Pt 100 probe on channel 0). (4) Max. errors, regardless of type of internal or external cold junction compensation (via Telefast sub-base or with class A Pt 100 probe). (5) Value given for TSX ASY 410 (software version: II > 10), for TSX ASY 410 (software version: II ≤ 10). This value is 4.88 mV. (6) Value given for TSX ASY 410 (software version: II > 10), for TSX ASY 410 (software version: II ≤ 10). This value is 9.77 µA.


3/25

3

3.2


References

3

Analog I/O modules

Analog input modules Type of inputs Analog, high level with common point

TSX AEY 800/420

3 TSX AEY 1600/1614

Input signal range ± 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA

Resolution Connection 16 bits

No. of channels 1 x 25-way SUB-D 4 fast connector channels

Reference (1) TSX AEY 420

Weight kg 0.330

Analog, low level isolated ± 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V, ± 5 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, - 13...+ 63 mV, 0...400 Ω, 0...3850 Ω, temperature probe, thermocouple

16 bits

Screw terminal block (2)

4 channels

TSX AEY 414

0.320

Analog, high level with common point

± 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA

12 bits

1 x 25-way SUB-D 8 channels connector

TSX AEY 800

0.310

Analog, low level isolated ± 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V 0...20 mA 4...20 mA

16 bits

3.2

Thermocouple TSX ASY 410/AEY 414

16 bits ± 63 mV, (B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U)

2 x 25-way SUB-D 16 channels TSX AEY 1600 connectors

0.340

1 x 25-way SUB-D 8 channels connector

0.330

TSX AEY 810

2 x 25-way SUB-D 16 channels TSX AEY 1614 connectors

0.350

Analog output modules Type of outputs Analog, isolated

Output signal range ± 10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA

Analog with common point ± 10 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA

Resolution Connection

No. of channels 4 channels

Reference (1) TSX ASY 410

Weight kg 0.350

13 bits + sign 1 x 25-way SUB-D 8 channels connector

TSX ASY 800 (3)

–

11 bits + sign Screw terminal block (2)

TSX ASY 800 (1) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) TSX BLY 01 screw terminal block not supplied. To be ordered separately. (3) The number of TSX ASY 800 modules is limited to 1 per rack with standard format power supply, to 2 per rack with double format power supply (when this supplies the c 24 V voltage required by outputs).


3/26



3

Analog I/O modules

Connection accessories Description Telefast 2 sub-bases

ABE-7CPA0p

Compatible Use with module TSX AEY 800 Distribution of 8 channels on TSX AEY 810 screw terminals TSX AEY 1600 TSX ASY 800 (2)

Weight kg 0.290

TSX AEY 420 Distribution of 8 channels with Screw TSX AEY 800 common point on screw TSX AEY 1600 terminals, protected sensor supply, continuity of current loops during disconnection, protection against overvoltages

ABE 7CPA03

0.330

TSX AEY 810

ABE 7CPA31

0.410

Distribution of 8 isolated Screw channels on screw terminals, channel by channel sensor supply (without common point), protection against overvoltages

TSX AEY 1614 Distribution of 16 channels on screw terminals, integrates temperature probe for external cold junction compensation

Connection cables

Type of Reference (1) terminal block Screw ABE 7CPA02

TSX AEY 420 TSX ASY 410 (3) TSX AEY 420 TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 1614 (4) TSX ASY 800 TSX ASY 410

3

Screw

ABE 7CPA12

0.360

Spring

ABE 7CPA31E

0.410

Distribution of 4 channels on screw terminals

Screw

ABE 7CPA21

0.200

Link between 25-way SUB-D connectors of analog I/O modules and ABE 7CPAppsub-bases Length 3 m

–

TSX CAP 030

0.670

1.5 m

–

ABF Y25S150

0.500

2m

–

ABF Y25S200

0.560

3m

–

ABF Y25S300

0.740

5m

–

ABF Y25S500

0.920

Link between module and ABE 7CPA21 sub-bases (5)

Screw terminal 20-way

TSX AEY 414 TSX ASY 410

To be ordered separately with Screw each I/O module for connection via screw terminal block

TSX BLY 01

0.100

Set of 4 resistors

TSX AEY 414

Adaptation for current range (supplied with TSX AEY 414)

TSX AAK2

0.020

–

TSX BLY 01 (1) Product supplied with a bilingual quick reference guide: French and English. (2) Can be used with TSX AEY 420 module. (3) Can be used with TSX ASY 410 module by using the ABF Y25Spp0p cables. (4) Necessity to use two TSX CAP 030 cables to connect the ABE 7CPA12 sub-base. (5) Includes the TSX BLY 01 20-way screw terminal block.


3/27

3.2

Selection guide

Modicon Premium automation platform Distributed I/O systems

3

Applications

TBX distributed I/O

Type of bus or network

Fipio

Max. nunber per connexion points

1 monobloc module

Max. number of connexion points

127

Discrete inputs/outputs

Number of channels

16 I et 16 O

16 I, 12 O, 16 O, 8 I/8 O et 8 I/2 O

Input voltage

c 24 V

c 24 V, c 48 V

Output voltage

c 24 V and relay

c 24 V, a 120 V and relay

Analogue inputs/outputs

–

Base units 4 I, 2 O et 6 I/2 O

Counting

–

Other types

–

Type of distributed I/O

TBX CpP

Pages

3/40

2 base units

3.3

3/28

TBX DpS

3

3

Momentum distributed I/O

Advantys OTB distributed I/O

Advantys STB distributed I/O solution

Ethernet Modbus Plus Fipio DeviceNet Profibus DP INTERBUS

Ethernet CANopen Modbus SL (RS 485)

Ethernet CANopen Modbus Plus Fipio DeviceNet Profibus DP INTERBUS

1 base

1 module + 7 Twido I/O expansion module

32 modules

3

126 to 512 points depending on the type of bus or network

3.3

16 I, 32 I, 8 O, 16 O, 32 O, 10 I/8 O, 16 I/8 O, 16 I/12 O et 16 I/16 O

12 I/8 O, 8 I, 16 I, 8 O, 16 O, 4 I/4 O et 16 I/8 O

2 I, 4 I, 6 I, 2 O, 4 O, 6 O

c 24 V, a 120 V and a 230 V

c 24 V, a 120 V

c 24 V, a 115 V and a 230 V

c 24 V, a 120 V and a 230 V and relaiy

c 24 V and relay

c 24 V, a 115/230 V and relay

Bases 4 I, 8 I, 16 I and 4 O

Modules 4 I, 8 I, 2 O et 2 I/1 O

Modules 2 I and 2 O

Base 2 channels 10 kHz/200 kHz

–

Module 1 channel 40 kHz

6 I/3 O a 120 V and 1 Modbus port module M1 processeur module (programming under Concept or ProWORX)

–

Parallel interface module for Tego Power applications Parallel interface module for TeSys modèle U starter-controllers

170 ADp

OTB 1pO DM9LP r

STB Dpp/App

Consult our catalogue “Momentum automation platform”

Consult our catalog “Advantys OTB distributed I/O”

Consult our catalogue “Advantys STB distributed I/O”

r Available later

3/29

Selection guide

Modicon Premium automation platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules

Applications

Distributed discrete inputs on Fipio bus

Degree of protection

IP 20

Voltage

c 24 V

Output current

–

Modularity

16 channels

Possible extension

–

32 channels maximum per connection point

Proximity sensor compatibility IEC 1131

Type 1

Type 2

3 c 48 V

16 channels (transistors)

3.3

Protection against overloads

Additional functions

Wiring check

–

Integrated

–

Output fallback

–

–

–

Programmable filter

–

–

Integrated

–

Latching states

–

–

Integrated

–

TBX DES 16C22

TBX DES 16F22

TBX DES 1633

Type of modules

TBX CEP 1622

Pages

3/40

3/30

TBX DES 1622

3

3

Distributed discrete outputs on Fipio bus

Distributed discrete I/O on Fipio bus

3 c 24 V

a 24/240 V

Inputs c 24 V Outputs c 24 V

c 24 V

c 24/48 V

c 24 V

0.5 A

16 “F” 50 VA

12 “F” 100 VA

16 “F” 50 VA

0.5 A

16 channels (transistors)

16 channels (Relay)

12 channels (Relay)

16 channels (Relay)

8 channels Inputs/ 8 channels Outputs (transistors)

–

24 ou 32 channels maxi per connection point

–

32 channels maxi per connection point

2A

Inputs c 24 V Outputs a 24/240 V, c 24 V 0.5A

2 “F” 50 VA

8 “F” 50 VA

Inputs a120 V Outputs a120 V 8 “F” 100 VA

16 channels I/O programmables

8 Inputs channels 2 Outputs channels (Relay)



32 ou 20 channels maxi per connection point

Type 2

Protected

– –

Integrated

Not Protected

Protected

Not Protected

Integrated –

–

Integrated

–

TBX DSS 16C22

TBX CSP 1625

Protected

Integrated

– –

TBX CSP 1622

TBX DSS 1622

TBX DSS 1235

TBX DSS 1625

TBX DMS 16C22

TBX DMS 16C222

TBX DMS 16P22

TBX DMS 1025

TBX DMS 1625

TBX DMS 16S44

3/31

3.3


General, functions

3

TBX distributed discrete I/O modules

General, functions Decentralising I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure: b The volume of wiring associated with discrete and analog sensors and actuators is reduced. b Mechanical constraints associated with wiring ducts are eliminated. b The time required for designing and testing connections is reduced. b Machine or plant availability is maximised. b Installations are more flexible and meet requirements more closely due to the number and type of modules. b Protection for use in harsh environments, TBX IP 65 dust and damp proof models.

3

Dust and damp proof TBX

Premium

Fipio

TBX

TBX AS-Interface bus

ATV

TBX

3.3

TBX distributed I/O modules, dust and damp proof or not, are a simple response to control system architectures distributed on a fieldbus. They are integrated into Schneider Electric PLC X-Way communication architectures by means of the Fipio fieldbus, which conforms to the Fip standard. TBX distributed I/O modules are addressed by the Unity Pro or PL7 application program as “In-rack” I/O, with which they can coexist. TBX distributed I/O modules are connected to Premium bus manager processors or Atrium PCX coprocessors via the Fipio fieldbus (maximum number of modules per Fipio bus, see page 5/72). The range of TBX distributed I/O modules includes the following modules: b Monobloc or modular discrete I/O modules (IP 20), see page 3/40. b Dust and damp proof monobloc discrete I/O modules (IP 65), see page 3/58. b Dust and damp proof discrete I/O modules (IP 67), see page 3/68. b Modular analog I/O modules (IP 20), see page 3/50.

TBX monobloc and modular modules IP 20 Protection of transistor and triac outputs All transistor outputs have a protection mechanism which detects an overload or a short-circuit on the load when an output is active. This type of fault is displayed and deactivates the output. This fault is accessible to the application program when testing the fault bits. Reactivating transistor and triac outputs When an output is no longer active following a fault, it must be reset in order to reactivate it. It can be reactivated automatically or via a command from the application program, depending on the selection made during the software configuration.


3/32




Functions (continued)

3


TBX modular modules IP 20 TBX modular discrete modules have many functions, which are defined in the table below: TBX reference

DES 16C22

DSS 16C22

DES 16F22

DMS 16P22

DSS 1622 DSS 1235/1625 DMS 1025/1625 DMS 16S44

DMS 16C22 DMS 16C222

Wiring check Programmable filtering Latching states Configuration of channels as I or O Output fallback Assignment of channels to application tasks Function available

Input wiring check The input wiring check function continuously checks the quality of the connection between the sensor and the distributed I/O module and discriminates between a closed or open state of the sensor and a short-circuit or open circuit. When a fault appears, the fault bit for the channel is activated before changing the input to state 0. After the fault has disappeared, if the sensor is closed, the input changes to state 1 before the fault bit is deactivated. The input wiring can be enabled as required for each channel during software configuration. Output wiring check The output wiring check function continuously checks the quality of the connection between the actuator and the module and detects a faulty actuator or its connection (open circuit or short-circuit). The output wiring check can be enabled as required for each channel during software configuration. Programmable filtering This function offers the possibility to choose, during software configuration, the filtering to be assigned to the inputs : normal or fast. Filtering can be configured for groups of 8 channels (channels 0 to 7 or channels 8 to 15). Fast filtering is analog, with a typical value of 0.7 ms. Normal filtering is provided by a digital filter of 5 ms in conjunction with an analog filter of 0.7 ms. By default, inputs are configured for fast filtering. Latching stats This function enables pulses lasting more than 2 ms on a rising edge to be recognised. This information is latched during a PLC scan in order to be processed in the Unity Pro or PL7 application program. Configuring the channels as input or output This function enables the channels to be defined as input channels or output channels. This can be: 16 inputs maximum and 0 output (this is the default configuration), 15 inputs and 1 output, 8 inputs and 8 outputs. Output fallback All modular TBX module outputs can be set to a specific state on a fault. Several choices are possible: Fallback to 0 (default fallback position), Fallback to 1, Maintain state: the output maintains the state (1 or 0) which it was at when the fault occurred, Fallback value defined by the user program. This choice is made for groups of 8 channels (channels 0 to 7 or channels 8 to 15) during software configuration. Assigning module channels to several tasks Each base unit is functionally divided into groups of 8 consecutive channels (channels 0 to 7 and channels 8 to 15), called functional channel groups. Each channel group in a TBX module can be assigned, during software configuration, to a specific application task (fast, master or auxiliary task). Characteristics: pages 3/36 to 3/39



3/33

3

3.3


Description

3


Monobloc distributed I/O modules IP 20 TSX CEP/CSP monobloc I/O modules comprise:

5

12

3

4

1 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus via a TBX BLP 01 connector. 2 5 dip switches for coding the Fipio address together with an address coding label. 3 A location for the user's module/connection point identification label. 4 An I/O display window. 5 A screw clamp for earthing the module. 6 A removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the sensors, preactuators and power supplies.

6

Modular distributed I/O modules IP 20 Base units

3

The base units are designed to be used with: b A TBX LEP 020/030 communication module to constitute a base module. b A TBX CBS 010 cover and cable to constitute an extension module. They enable direct connection of sensors and preactuators. They are available as input base units, reference TBX DES ppp, output base units, reference TBX DSS ppp and mixed base units, reference TBX DMS ppp. 3 4

1

2

5

TBX DES/DSS/DMS modular I/O base units comprise: 1 A female 1/2 DIN connector for connection to the TSX LEP 020/030 communication module. 2 A removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the sensors, preactuators and power supplies. 3 A screw clamp for earthing the base unit. 4 A location for the user's station/module identification label. 5 An access flap to 2 dip switches for adjusting the leakage current for the wiring check and the filter times (slow or fast).

3.3

Fipio bus communication modules

12

3

4

5

The TBX LEP 020/030 communication modules enable dialogue with the PLC via the Fipio bus. They are fixed to the base unit by 4 screws. A female 1/2 DIN connector, protected by a flap, is used for connection to the extension base unit. The Fipio address is assigned using 6 dip switches. An I/O display window indicates locally the state of the module and of the base unit and the extension I/O. TBX LEP 020/030 communication modules comprise: 1 A 9-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the Fipio bus via a TBX BLP 01 connector. 2 5 dip switches for coding the Fipio address together with an address coding label. 3 A location for the user's module/connection point identification label. 4 An I/O display window. 5 An access flap for the female 1/2 DIN connector for connecting the extension base unit.


3/34





3


1

I/O display window

2

RUN DEF COM I/0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Each monobloc I/O module and communication module has an I/O display window which contains all the information to be displayed:

4 3

1 A RUN lamp (green), device operating.

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

2 A DEF lamp (red), steady if the device is faulty, flashing if there is a communication fault on the Fipio bus. 3 A COM lamp (yellow), Fipio frame sent and received. 4 An I/O lamp (red), sensor or preactuator fault (short-circuit, open circuit, loss of voltage).

6

5

5 Sixteen lamps 0 to 15 (red), steady when channel active, flashing if channel faulty. 6 Sixteen lamps 0 to 15 (red), steady when channel active, flashing if channel fault (corresponds to extension module channels).

3

Cover and cable for extension base units The TBX CBS 010 comprises a cover and a connecting cable. The cable connects the extension base unit to the communication module. The cover, attached to the base unit by 4 screws, protects the connector and gives the extension module (base unit and cover) a similar size and shape to that of the base module. 1

3

2

The TBX CBS 010 cover and cable unit comprises:

3.3

1 A flexible connecting cable with two male 1/2 DIN moulded connectors for connecting theTBX LEP 020/030 communication module to the base unit. 2 A cover to be fixed to the base unit. 3 A location for the user's module/connection point identification label.




3/35

Characteristics of modules Modicon Premium automation and input base units platform TBX distributed discrete I/O modules

Type of modules Modularity

TBX DES 1622 16

TBX DES 16C22 16

TBX DES 16F22 16

V mA V V mA V mA kΩ

c 24 15 c 19…30 ≥ 11 ≥ 6 for 11 V 10 at c 500 V

Nominal input values

Voltage Current Sensor supply (ripple included) Input limit values At state 1 Voltage Current At state 0 Voltage Current Input impedance Logic Response time

3

Module supply Sensor supply

Type of input

3.3

Dielectric strength between inputs and earth Insulation resistance

Type of modules Modularity Nominal input values

Voltage Current Sensor supply (ripple included) Input limit values At state 1 Voltage Current At state 0 Voltage Current Input impedance Logic Response time

V mA V V mA V mA kΩ

TBX CEP 1622 16

TBX DES 1633 16

c 24 7 c 19…30 > 7 ≥ 2 for 11 V < 5 ≤ 1.4 3.4

c 48 7 c 38…60 > 30 ≥ 6 for 30 V < 10 ≤ 2 6.7

Positive 5…11 5…13 Series diode Reverse parallel diode

Positive 5…11 5…13 –

Change from 0 to 1 Change from 1 to 0 Protection against polarity Module supply inversion Sensor supply

ms ms

Dissipated power Per module (with 60 % load)

W

3.9

4.3

Typical current consumed

mA mA

90 70 (with 60 % load)

20

Resistive, conforms to IEC 1131 type 1 To “+ve” of supply TBX transistor outputs < 500 with V-free contact > 50 with V-free contact > 200 with 2-wire prox. sensor 1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min

Current sink, conforms to IEC 1131 type 2

Module supply Sensor supply

Type of input Sensor common Compatible output modules External line Line resistance Open line leakage resistance

W kΩ

Isolation

Veff



3/36


MΩ

< 100 with 2-wire prox.sensor > 30 with V-free contact, > 100 with 2-wire prox. sensor

>10 at c 500 V (1) Normal or fast programmable filter. (2) Only with transistor outputs having wiring check function.

3

Characteristics of modules Modicon Premium automation and output base units platform

3


Type of modules Modularity

TBX CSP 1622 16

TBX DSS 1622 16

TBX DSS 16C22 16

Loads

Voltage Nominal current Tungsten filament lamp

V A W

c 24 0.5 8

c 24 0.5 8

c 24 0.5 8

Limit values

Voltage (ripple included)

V

c 19…30

c 19…30

c 19…30

Logic Response time

Positive outgoing current Change from 0 to 1 Change from 1 to 0

ms ms

≤1 ≤1

≤1 ≤1

≤1 ≤1

Leakage current

At state 0

mA

< 0.5

< 0.5

50

> 50

50 < z < 3000

Veff

1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min

MΩ

> 10 at c 500 V TBX CSP 1625 16

TBX DSS 1235 12

TBX DSS 1625 16

a 24…264 c 24…48 50…24 V 0.25x106 manœuvres 50…48 V 0.5x106 manœuvres 25…24 V 0.25x106 manœuvres 25…48 V 0.15x106 manœuvres 2-110/220 V 0.5x106 man. 1-110/220 V 1.5x106 man. 2-24/48 V 0.5x106 man. 4-24 V 0.15x106 manœuvres 1-24/48 V 106 manœuvres 0.5-48 V 2x106 manœuvres (1) 7

a 24…264 c 24 24 0.2x106 manœuvres

Type of modules Modularity Loads

3

Yes (thermal)

DC-12 resistive

W

a 24…264 c 24 24 0.2x106 manœuvres

DC-13 inductive

W

10 106 manœuvres

AC-12 resistive

A

AC-15 inductive

A

Voltage

V

Permissible d.c. power

10 106 manœuvres

Thermal current

A

1-110/220 V 0.2x106 man. 0.5-110/220 V 2x106 man. 1-24/48 V 0.5x106 man. 2-24 V 0.2x106 manœuvres 0.5-24/48 V 106 manœuvres 1-24 V 0.2 106 manœuvres 3

Typical current consumed

Module supply (with 60 % load)

mA

195

130…24 V 70…48 V

125

Response time

Change from 0 to 1 Change from 1 to 0

ms ms

< 10 < 20

< 10 < 20

< 10 < 20

Built-in protection

Against overloads and short -circuits Against inductive overvoltage

No No (for a use an RC or GMOV, and for c use a reverse diode)

Compatibility input modules Isolation

d.c.

Yes

Permissible a.c. current


Veff

1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min

MΩ

> 10 at c 500 V

3.3

1-110/220 V 0.2x106 man. 0.5-110/220 V 2x106 man. 1-24/48 V 0.5x106 man. 2-24 V 0.2x106 manœuvres 0.5-24/48 V 106 manœuvres 1-24 V 0.2 106 manœuvres (2) 3

(1) 100 VA - 110/240 V 106 operations, 20 VA - 110/240 V 5X106 operations. (2) 50 VA - 110/220 V 106 operations, 10 VA - 48/220 V 107 operations.



3/37

Characteristics of I/O base Modicon Premium automation units platform

3


Type of modules Input modularity

TBX DMS 16S44 8

V mA V

c 24 15 19.2…30

c 24 15 19.2…30

a 120 15 92…132

Input limit values

Voltage

V

≥ 11

≥ 11

> 74

Current

mA

≥ 6 for 11 V

≥ 6 for 11 V

6

Voltage

V

100 with 2-wire proximity sensor

W

Triac Relay

W

< 500 with volt-free contact, < 100 with 2-wire proximity sensor

d.c.

Dielectric strength between Veff inputs and earth Insulation resistance MΩ

manœuvres

–

No (for a use RC or GMOV, and for c use a reverse diode) Yes

No

1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min > 10 at c 500 V (1) 50 VA - 110/220 V 106 operating cycles, 10 VA - 48/220 V 107 operating cycles.


3/38


Characteristics of I/O base Modicon Premium automation units (continued) platform

3


Type of modules Input modularity Nominal input values

Input limit values

TBX DMS 16C222 8

TBX DMS 16P22 8…16

Voltage Nominal current Sensor supply (ripple included) At state 1 Voltage Current

V mA V

c 24 7 c 19.2…30

c 24 7 c 19.2…30

c 24 15 c 19.2…30

V mA

≥7 ≥ 6 for 7 V

≥7 ≥ 6 for 11 V

≥ 11 ≥ 6 for 11 V

At state 0

V mA

50

Dielectric strength between inputs and earth Veff

1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min

Insulation resistance

> 10 at c 500 V

MΩ

(1) Temperature derating: total output current per base unit 16 A at 30 °C, 8 A at 60 °C. References: pages 3/40 and 3/41


3/39


References

3


Monobloc input module (IP 20) Type of current c

Input voltage 24 V

Modularity IEC 1131 2 (no. of chan.) conformity 16 Type 1

Reference TBX CEP 1622

Weight kg 0.820

Modularity Channel Reference (no. of chan.) characteristics 16 0.5 A protected TBX CSP 1622

Weight kg 0.880

Monobloc output modules (IP 20) Type of current c transistor a ou c relay

TBX CpP 16pp

Output voltage 24 V

a 24/240 V c 24 V

16

50 VA not protected

TBX CSP 1625

0.960

Input base units (IP 20) (1) Type of current c

3

Input voltage

Reference

24 V

Modularity IEC 1131 2 (no. of chan.) conformity 16 Type 2

TBX DES 16C22

0.510

TBX DES 16F22

0.510

48 V

16, contrôle de Type 2 filerie 16, filtrage Type 2 progr. 16 Type 2

TBX DES 1633

0.510

Modularity Channel Reference (no. of chan.) characteristics 16 0.5 A protected TBX DSS 1622

Weight kg 0.580

TBX DES 16pp

TBX DES 1622

Weight kg 0.510

Output base units (IP 20) (1) Type of current c transistor

3.3

a ou c relay

TBX DSS 16pp

Output voltage 24 V

a 24/240 V c 24/48 V

12

a 24/240 V c 24 V

16

0.5 A protected wiring check 100 VA not protected 50 VA not protected

TBX DSS 16C22

0.580

TBX DSS 1235

0.610

TBX DSS 1625

0.610

I/O base units (IP 20) (1) Type of current c transistor

Input voltage c 24 V

Output voltage c 24 V

Modularity IEC 1131 2 (no. of chan.) conformity 8 E/8 S 0.5 A Type 2 protected

8 E/8 S 2 A protected

a ou c relay

a triac

TBX DMS 16C22

Weight kg 0.530

TBX DMS 16C222

0.530

Programmable Type 2 de 16 E/0 S à 8 E/8 S 0.5 A protected 8 E/2 S (2) Type 2

TBX DMS 16P22

0.530

TBX DMS 1025

0.540

8 E/8 S (2)

Type 2

TBX DMS 1625

0.570

a 120 V a 120 V 8 E/8 S (3) 50/60 Hz

Type 2

TBX DMS 16S44

0.570

c 24 V

a 24/240 V c 24 V

Type 2

Reference

(1) Requires the TBX LEP 020/030 communication module to constitute a base, requires the TBX CBS 010 cover and cable unit to constitute an extension. (2) 50 VA outputs, not protected.


3/40

Dimensions: page 3/45



3


Fipio communication modules Description Communication modules for I/O base units TBX LEP 020/030

Connection terminal block

Connection

Reference

Fipio fieldbus on TBX discrete or analog IP 20 I/O base units

TBX LEP 030

Weight kg 0.280

Fipio fieldbus on TBX discrete IP 20 I/O base units

TBX LEP 020

0.280

Tap link or daisy-chained on Fipio bus

TBX BLP 01

0.080

Use

Unit Reference

Accessories (1) TBX BLP 01

Description

TBX CBS 010

TBX GND 015

TBX RV 015

Sold in lots of

Cover and connecting cable

For extension on TBX 1 base units

TBX CBS 010

Weight kg 0.100

Earthing strip

For connecting cable 5 shielding on TBX terminal block

TBX GND 015

0.060

Inter-terminal Channel commons on 5 connection comb TBX terminal block (9 terminals per comb)

TBX RV 015

0.020

8-channel simulator 8 inputs displayed with/without line check function

1

TBX SEP 08

0.120

8 inputs displayed

1

TBX SSP 08

0.140

(1) For Fipio bus connection accessories, see pages 5/86 and 5/87.



3/41

3

3.3


Connections


Monobloc I/O modules TBX CEP 1622 input c 24 V

TBX CSP 1622 output c 24 V 40

40

+IS ÐIS I15 +CS I14 -CS I13 +CS I12 -CS I11 +CS I10 -CS I9 +CS I8 -CS I7 +CS I6 ÐCS I5 +CS I4 ÐCS I3 +CS I2 ÐCS I1 +CS I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV

3

3.3

39 38 37 36 35 34 32 30

For 3-wire prox. sen.

29 28 27 26


25 24 23 22

For 3-wire prox. sen. –

21 20

+ +

18

–

3-wire prox. sen.

19 17 16

For 3-wire prox. – sen. +

14

2-wire prox. sen.

+ –

15


13 12 11 10


9 8 7 6 5 4

For 3-wire prox. sen. + –Sensor supply

2 A fuse

c 24 V Module supply – c 24 V

+

3 2

ÐSV


33 31

1

TBX CSP 1625 relay output

+OS ÐOS O15 +CA O14 -CA O13 +CA O12 -CA O11 +CA O10 -CA O9 +CA O8 -CA O7 +CA O6 -CA O5 +CA O4 -CA O3 +CA O2 -CA O1 +CA O0 ÐCA +OS ÐOS +SV

40

39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

12 A fuse

8 7 6 5 4

+

3 2

ÐSV

–

1

Preactuator + supply – c 24 V (1) Module supply c 24 V

Input base units TBX DES 1622/16C22/16F22 input c 24 V

TBX DES 1633 input c 48 V

40


40

39 38 37 36 35 34


33 32 31 30


29 28 27 26


25 24 23 22


21 20

+ +

18

–

19 17 16

For 3-wire prox.– sen. +

15 14 13


Volt-free contact (2)

12 11 10 9

2-wire prox. sen.

+ –


8 7 6 5 4

For 3-wire prox. Sensor supply sen. + c 24 V 2 A fuse –

+ Module supply

3 1

39 38 37 36 35 34

–

32 31 30 28 27 26

3/42


25 24 23 22


21 20

+ +

18

–

19 17 16

For 3-wire prox.– + sen. + –

15 14 13

3-wire prox. sen. 2-wire prox. sen.


12 11 10


9 8 7 6 5 4

For 3-wire prox. sen. Sensor supply + c 48 V – +

3 2

ÐSV



29

1

(1) Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to sensor supply. (2) With TBX DES 16C22. Characteristics: pages 3/36 to 3/39


33

c 24 V

2

ÐSV

3-wire prox. sen.



–

Module supply c 48 V

NC NC O15 C14,15 O14 NC O13 C12,13 O12 NC O11 C10,11 O10 NC O9 C8,9 O8 NC O7 C6,7 O6 NC O5 C4,5 O4 NC O3 C2,3 O2 NC O1 C0,1 O0 N1 NC N1 +SV

39

Preactuator supply 1

38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29


28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8


7 6 5 4

+ Module supply

3

c 24 V

2

ÐSV

1

–

3



3


Output base units TBX DSS 1622/16C22 output c 24 V

TBX DSS 1235 output relay

40

+OS ÐOS O15 +CA O14 -CA O13 +CA O12 -CA O11 +CA O10 -CA O9 +CA O8 -CA O7 +CA O6 -CA O5 +CA O4 -CA O3 +CA O2 -CA O1 +CA O0 ÐCA +OS ÐOS +SV

40

39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

12 A fuse 6

+ Preactuator – supply

5 4 +

3 2

ÐSV

1

–

c 24 V (1) Module supply c 24 V

NC NC

39

O11,NC C11 O11,NO NC O10,NC C10 O10,NO NC O9,NC C9 O9,NO NC O8,NC C8 O8,NO NC O7 C6,7 O6 NC O5 C4,5 O4 NC O3 C2,3 O2 NC O1 C0,1 O0 N1 NC N1 +SV

37

38 36 35

Supply. 1 Preactuator N Ph

34 33 32 31 30 29

4 relay outputs N/O and N/C

28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

8 relay outputs N/O

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

Ph Preactuator supply 0 N

+

3 2

ÐSV

TBX DSS 1625 output relay

1

Module supply

–c 24 V or 48 V

NC NC O15 C14,15 O14 NC O13 C12,13 O12 NC O11 C10,11 O10 NC O9 C8,9 O8 NC O7 C6,7 O6 NC O5 C4,5 O4 NC O3 C2,3 O2 NC O1 C0,1 O0 N1 NC N1 +SV

40


38

N

36

Ph

39 37 35 34 33 32 31 30


28

Ph

26

N

29 27 25 24 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Ph

6


7 5 4

1

N +

3 2

ÐSV

3

23

Module supply

–c 24 V

(1) Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to preactuator supply.




3/43

3.3



3


I/O base units TBX DMS 16C22 c 24 V 0.5 A I/O

TBX DMS 16C222 c 24 V 2 A I/O 40

40

3

3.3

+OS ÐOS O15 +CA O14 -CA O13 +CA O12 -CA O11 +CA O10 -CA O9 +CA O8 -CA I7 +CS6,7 I6 ÐCS I5 +CS4,5 I4 ÐCS I3 +CS2,3 I2 ÐCS I1 +CS0,1 I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV

+ –

39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

–

20

+ +

21 19 18 17 16


14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

1 A fuse

+ –

4 +

3 2

ÐSV

–

+ –

15

5

1

Module supply c 24 V –

TBX DMS 1025 relay I/O

NC ÐOS O15 +OS14,15 O14 NC O13 +OS12,13 O12 NC O11 +OS10,11 O10 NC O9 +OS8,9 O8 NC I7 +CS6,7 I6 ÐCS I5 +CS4,5 I4 ÐCS I3 +CS2,3 I2 ÐCS I1 +CS0,1 I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV

37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23

–

ÐSV

36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27

Preactuator supply

26 25 24 23 22 21 20


17

+ +

16 15 13 12


–

+ –

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1

–

20

+ +

19

3/44

– + + –

16 15

2-wire pro sen.

14 13

Volt-free contact

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

1 A fuse + Sensor supply – c 24 V (1) +

3

–

1

Module supply c 24 V

For 3-wire prox. sen. + Sensor supply – c 24 V

40

Preactuator supply

38

N

36

Ph

35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22

–

20

+ +

21 19 17 16

3-wire prox. sen.

–

+ –

2-wire prox. sen.


13 12 11 10


9 8 7 6 5 4

For 3-wire prox. sen. + Sensor supply – c 24 V +

3 2



15 14

1


39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

28 27


26 25 24 23


22 21 20 19


18

–

17

+ +

16 15


12

+ –

11 10

3-wire prox. sen.

–

14 13

2-wire prox. sen.


9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

ÐSV

0 to 8 outputs max.

30 29

1

For 3-wire prox. sen. 6 A fuse + Preactuator and – sensor supply c 24 V (1) + Module supply – c 24 V

40

N

39 38

37

18

+S ÐS I/O15 +C I/O14 -C I/O13 +C I/O12 -C I/O11 +C I/O10 -C I/O9 +C I/O8 -C I7 +C I6 ÐC I5 +C I4 ÐC I3 +C I2 ÐC I1 +CS I0 ÐC +S ÐS +SV

TBX DMS 16S44 triac I/O

39

(1) Fast-blow fuse must be fitted to preactuator and sensor supplies. (2) 7 A fuse included in the base unit.


3-wire pro sen.

–

18 17

2

ÐSV

22 21

ÐSV

+

37

14

supply + c 24 V (1) 20 A fuse

2

NC NC O15 C14,15 O14 NC O13 C12,13 O12 NC O11 C10,11 O10 NC O9 C8,9 O8 NC I7 +CS I6 ÐCS I5 +CS I4 ÐCS I3 +CS I2 ÐCS I1 +CS I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV

38

18

– Preactuator

38

TBX DMS 1625 relay I/O

39

19

40

39

40

NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC O9 C8,9 O8 NC I7 +CS I6 ÐCS I5 +CS I4 ÐCS I3 +CS I2 ÐCS I1 +CS I0 ÐCS +IS ÐIS +SV

TBX DMS 16P22 programmable c 24 V 0.5 A I/O

Module supply – c 24 V

O15 C15 O14 C14 O13 C13 O12 C12 O11 C11 O10 C10 O9 C9 O8 C8 I7 C I6 C I5 C I4 C I3 C I2 C I1 C I0 C

Supply a 120 V Preactuator (2) Ph

37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Sensor supply a 120 V Module supply a 120 V

Modicon Pemium automation platform

Dimensions, mounting

3


Dimensions TBX CEP/CSP modules TBX DES/DSS/DMS base units with TBX LEP 020/030 or TBX CBS 010 module

235

87

54

33

6

221

72

210

3

Mounting TBX CEP/CSP/DES/DSS/DMS on AM1 PA/PB/PC perforated mouting plate

TBX CEP/CSP/DES/DSS/DMS on AM1 DP200 or AM1 DE200 rail

54

27

221

3.3 72

81,5

AF1-EA4

Fixed by 3 screws with captive washer M4 x 16 AF1-VA416 Nota : In order to ensure correct operation of TBX modules in severe electromagnetic conditions, the modules must be mounted on metal supports correctly connected to earth. The base module and the extension module must be installed on the same plate, or the same rail, or on rails connected to each other by a metal crossbar. Mounting vertically

Mounting side by side

13 mini 25 maxi Mounting one above by other

13 mini 25 maxi

40 mini 80 maxi




3/45

Selection guide

Modicon Premium automation platform TBX distributed analog I/O modules

Applications

Distributed analog inputs on Fipio bus

Type of I/O

High level inputs

Type

Voltage

Range

±5V ± 10 V

Modularity

4 channels

Isolation

a 500 V ms between channels a 500 V ms between channels and earth a 1500 V ms between supply and channels a 1500 V ms between supply and earth

Acquisition period for the complete module

400 ms in 50 Hz mode (4 channels) 340 ms in 60 Hz mode (4 channels)

Resolution

12 bits + sign

Temperature probe inputs

Thermocouple inputs

Current

Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000

B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T

0…20 mA 4…20 mA

–

± 20 mV ± 50 mV ± 200 mV ± 500 mV

3

3.3

Restitute time

Input filtering

1st order with user-definable time constant

Fallback position

Type of module

TBX AES 400

Pages

3/51

3/46

3

3

Distributed analog I/O on Fipio bus

Voltage/current inputs

Distributed analog outputs on Fipio bus

Voltage/current outputs

Voltage/current outputs

Voltage

Current

Voltage

Current

Voltage

Current

0…5 V ± 10 V

0…20 mA 4…20 mA

± 10 V

4…20 mA 0…20 mA

± 10 V

4…20 mA 0…20 mA

3

6 channels

2 channels

No isolation between input channels a 1500 V ms between output channels a 1500 V ms between input channels and output channels a 1500 V ms between supply and channels a 1500 V ms between supply and earth

3.3

42.4 ms

12 bits (including sign)

11 bits + sign

11 bits

11 bits + sign

11 bits

4 ms

At zero value on internal module fault At the last value or at a value defined by the user on Fipio communication fault

TBX AMS 620

TBX ASS 200

3/47


Description

TBX distributed analog I/O modules

Decentralising the I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure. Distributed analog I/O modules complete the TBX range of distributed I/O modules. They provide general discrete I/O module functions with the benefit of: b Connection to the Fipio fieldbus. b Wiring system. b Size. Distributed analog I/O base units offer a wide range of analog inputs for acquisition of high and low level measurements, both voltage and current. Three modular base units are available: b 4 multi-range inputs, TBX AES 400. b 6 high level inputs (voltage/current), 2 outputs (voltage/current), TBX AMS 620. b 2 outputs (voltage/current), TBX ASS 200.

3

A TBX LEP 030 communication module is required when 1 or 2 analog base units (base or extension) are connected at any Fipio fieldbus connection point. The number of analog channels for TBX base units of the same type is limited to1008.

Description Modular analog base units 1

Distributed analog I/O base units comprise: 1 32-way female 1/2 DIN connector for connecting to the TBX LEP 030 communication module.

3.3

2 Removable screw terminal block (with terminal label) for wiring the analog sensors and actuators. 2

3

3 Screw clamp for earthing the base unit. 4 Location for user's identification label.

4

Fipio communication module The TBX LEP 030 communication module comprises:

2

1 9-way male SUB-D type connector for connecting to the Fipio fieldbus.

5

2 Five dip switches for setting the Fipio address together with an address coding label. 3 Location for the user's module/connection point identification label. 4 I/O display window.

1

3

5 Access cover for 32-way female 1/2 DIN connector for connecting the Extension base unit.

4

Cover and cable for extension modules 1

The TBX CBS 010 cover and cable unit comprises: 1 Flexible connecting cable with two 32-way male 1/2 DIN moulded connectors for connecting the base unit to the TBX LEP 030 communication module. 2

2 Cover to be fixed to the discrete or analog I/O base unit. 3 Location for the user's module/connection point identification label.

3


3/48



Connections: page 3/51

3


Functions

3


Modular TBX base unit combinations Analog base units require a TBX LEP 030 communication module for connecting the connection point to the Fipio fieldbus. As they are modular in structure, discrete and analog base units can be used in the following combinations: Mix of modules (1)

Base

Base Communicator

Base unit

TBX LEP 030 TBX LEP 030 TBX LEP 030 TBX LEP 030

TBX TBX TBX TBX

ApS ppp ApS ppp (1) ApS ppp DpS ppp (1)

Extension Base unit

Cover

– TBX DpS ppp (1) TBX ApS ppp TBX ApS ppp (1)

– TBX CBS 010 TBX CBS 010 TBX CBS 010

Extension

3 (1) In the case of the Premium automation platform, the combinations of base units and extensions on any one Fipio connection point must be of the same type (it is not possible to mix discrete I/O and analog I/O).

Functions TBX AES 400 analog modules, with 4 high level (voltage or current) or low level (temperature probe or thermocouple) isolated inputs, TBX AMS 620, with 6 high level isolated inputs (voltage or current) / 2 isolated outputs (voltage or current), and TBX ASS 200, with 2 isolated outputs (voltage or current) offer the following functions: Input channels b Measurement acquisition v selection of the input range for each channel and first order filtering with user-configurable time constant. b Processing v automatic linearization (TBX AES 400), v integral cold junction compensation for thermocouples (TBX AES 400). b Operation v conversion of measurements into standard units or temperatures whose parameters can be defined by the user. b Checks v recalibration and self-calibration of each channel in relation to an internal reference (TBX AMS 620), v checking input value overruns (± 5% of the selected range), v checking the sensor link. Output channels b Output range selection v voltage or current for each module channel. b Output fallback On a communication fault with the PLC, the user can select: v fallback of the output to a defined value, v to maintain the output at its previous value, v On an internal module fault, all the outputs on the same module fall back to zero. b Output protection Output modules are protected against: v open circuit overloads, v short-circuits. All these parameters are selected during software configuration.





3/49

3.3


Characteristics


Type of base unit Analog input modularity Input ranges

3

TBX AES 400 4 channels ± 20 ± 50 ± 200 ± 500 ±5 ± 10 0…20 4…20 Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T

TBX AMS 620 6 channels – – – – 0…5

– –

TBX ASS 200 – – – – – – – – – – –

No Yes 12 bits + sign For 4 channels: 400 (50 Hz mode) 340 (60 Hz mode) 50 > 130 for ± 20 mV > 90 for ± 10 V 0.23/0.99 0.23/0.99 0.23/0.99 0.23/0.99 0.90/1.69 (1) 250 at 0.1% parallel on the input

Yes Yes 12 bits For 6 channels: 42.4

– – – –

– – – 0.20/0.29 0.15/0.22 0.25/0.43 0.25/0.43 – –

– – – – – – – – –

V mA V rms V rms V rms V rms V rms V V rms

± 30 ± 25 500 – 500 1500 1500 c ± 100 75

± 30 ± 30 Non-isolated 1500 1500 1500 – – 150

± 30 ± 30 – 1500 1500 1500 – – –

°C °C

0…55 - 25…+ 70

V

TBX AMS 620 2 channels ± 10

TBX ASS 200

Voltage

TBX AES 400 – –

Current

mA

–

4…20, 0…20

Voltage

–

11 bits + sign

Current

–

11 bits

mV mV mV mV V V mA mA

Temperature probes Thermocouples Special characteristics Self-calibration Automatic linearization Resolution Acquisition For entire module period Rejection (50 Hz)

Serial mode Common mode

Maximum error at 25 °C/60 °C

± 10 V 0…5 V 0…20 mA 4…20 mA Low level Use as 4…20 or 0…20 mA

3.3

External resistors (supplied with TBX AES 400 module) Permitted overload

Voltage Current Isolation (2) Between input channels Between output channels Between channels and earth Between channels and supply Between supply and earth Common mode voltage (2) permitted during operation between channel and earth and between channels Temperature Operation Storage Type of base unit Analog output modularity Output ranges

Resolution

ms

dB dB dB % FS % FS % FS % FS % FS Ω

Refresh period

Per channel

ms

–

5

Load impedance

Voltage

Ω

–

≥ 1000

Current

Ω

–

≤ 600

Leakage current

Current

µA

–

50 (0…20 mA)

Maximum error at 25 °C/60 °C

Voltage

% FS

–

0.45/0.75

Current

% FS

–

0.52/0.98

(1) Accuracy at low level covers the whole ± 20 mV, ± 50 mV range, the middle of the range for Pt 100, Pt 1000 and Ni 1000, with any orientation, and the middle of the range for B, E, J, K, N, R, S and T thermocouples. (2) Voltage in volts rms 50/60 Hz for 1 minute. Description: page 3/48

3/50




3


References, connections, dimensions

3


References Analog base units (1) Type of input/output Input 12 bits + sign

Number of channels 4 channels (2)

Ranges

Isolated output 11 bits

2 channels

± 5 V, ± 10 V, ± 20 mV, ± 50 mV, ± 200 mV TBX AES 400 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA, Low level ± 500 mV Thermocouples B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T Temp.probes Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 1000 ± 10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA TBX ASS 200

High level input 12 bits isolated output 11 bits

6 channels

± 10 V, 0…5 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA

2 channels

± 10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA

TBX ApS pp0

Reference

TBX AMS 620

Weight kg 0.280

0.280 0.280

Communication module and accessories Description

Connection

Reference

Weight kg 0.280

Fipio communication module Fipio fieldbus on TBX base units

TBX LEP 030

Cable connector

Tap link or daisy chain to Fipio fieldbus

TBX BLP 01

0.080

Adaptation for TBX AES 400 current range

TSX AAK2

0.100

3

Replacement part TBX LEP 030

Set of 4 resistors 250 Ω ± 0.1 %

(1) Requires TBX LEP 030 communication module to constitute a base unit, requires TBX CBS 010 cover and cable unit to constitute an extension. (2) Set of 4 resistors TSX AAK2 for adaptation to current range supplied.

Connections, dimensions (1) TBX AES 400 input

TBX AMS 620 input/output (3)

TBX ASS 200 output

3.3 40

NC -R3 NC +R3 NC -R2 NC +R2 NC -R1 NC +R1 NC -R0 NC +R0 NC NC NC -IS -I3 2/3 +I3 2/3 -I2 1/2 +I2 1/2 -I1 0/1 +I1 0/1 -I0 +IS -I0 NC +SV

39 38

ch. 3-

37 36

ch. 3+

34

ch. 2-

32

ch. 2+

30

ch. 1-

35 33 31 29 28

Terminals for connecting 250 Ω resistor when using the channel in 0…20 mA or 4…20 mA current range

ch. 1+

27 26

ch. 0-

24

ch. 0+

25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

–SV

40

1

Terminal - current source (2) channel 3Channels 2 to 3 daisy chained(2) channel 3+ Channels 2 to 3 daisy chained(2) channel 2Channels 1 to 2 daisy chained (2) channel 2+ Channels 1 to 2 daisy chained (2) channel 1Channels 0 to 1 daisy chained (2) channel 1+ Channels 0 to 1 daisy chained (2) channel 0+ Terminal + current source (2) channel 0+ –

NC NC NC NC NC Com7 Com7 O7i O7u NC NC Com6 Com6 O6i O6u Com Com R5 I5 R4 I4 Com Com R3 I3 R2 I2 Com Com R1 I1 R0 I0 NC NC NC +SV

39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

Output voltage reference Channel 7 Channel 7, current output Channel 7, voltage output

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7

Output voltage reference Channel 6 Channel 6, current output Channel 6, voltage output Input voltage reference Channel 5, current input Channel 5, voltage input Channel 4, current input Channel 4, voltage input Input voltage reference Channel 3, current input Channel 3, voltage input Channel 2, current input Channel 2, voltage input Input voltage reference Channel 1, current input Channel 1, voltage input Channel 0, current input Channel 0, voltage input

6 5 4 3 2

–SV

40

1

+ Power supply 24/48 V –

NC NC NC NC NC Com1 Com1 O1i O1u NC NC Com0 Com0 O0i O0u NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC +SV

39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25

Voltage reference channel 0 Channel 0, current output Channel 0, voltage output

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

–SV

Voltage reference Channel 1 Channel 1, current output Channel 1, voltage output

1

+ Base unit Power supply 24/48 V –

Power supply 24/48 V

(1) Dimensions the same as for TBX discrete I/O module: see page 3/45. (2) Inputs to be used for wiring temperature probes. (3) To use an input channel as a current input, link terminals li and Ri of the corresponding channel.




3/51


Selection guide

IP 65/67 splitter boxes and modules

Monobloc I/O splitter boxes and modules

Telefast, ABE9 splitter boxes

Advantys, FTB splitter boxes

TBX, I/O modules

108733

Passive splitter boxes

108737

Splitter box and module type

3

Fielbus type

–

CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP INTERBUS

Fipio

Number of inputs/outputs

8 I/O, 16 I/O

16 I, 8 I + 8 O, 12 I + 4 O, 16 I/O, 8 I + 8 I/O

8 I, 16 I, 8 O and 16 O

Type of signal

c 24 V digital

Functions

Connection of 1 to 16 sensors/actuators

Type of input/output connectors

M12


IP 67

Housing type

Plastic

Plastic and metal

Zamac

ABE 9

FTB 1

TBX EEP/ESP

3.4

IP 65

Module type

Pages

3/52

Consult our catalogue “IP 67 splitter boxes”

3/56

3

3

Modular I/O splitter boxes 170 EDp, I/O modules

Modules on AS-Interface cabling system

Advantys, FTM splitter boxes

540351

540334

108735

TSX EpF, I/O modules

Fipio

8 I, 16 I, 8 I/O and 8 O

INTERBUS

16 I or 16 O

AS-Interface

4 I or 2 I 4I 4 O or 2 O

108741

108743

3

CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP

4 I or 2 I 4 O or 2 O

3.4

8 I, 16 I, 8 I/O and 16 I/O discrete 4 I or 4 O analogues

c 24 V discrete and analogue

Connection of 1 to 8 sensors/actuators M8

M12

Connection of 1 to 256 sensors/actuators per bus module M8

M8 and M12

XZ SpA

FTM 1r

IP 67

IP 65

IP 67

Plastic

Metal

Plastic

TSX EpF

170 EDI/EDO

ASI MEp ASI + ASI Bp MMOp

3/68

3/73

Consult our catalogue “AS-Interface cabling system”

Consult our catalogue “IP 67 splitter boxes” r Available 1st half 2004

3/53


General, functions

TBX discrete I/O IP 65 modules on Fipio bus

General Decentralising the I/O meets the requirement of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure. In the same way as distributed I/O modules, TBX dust and damp proof modules are used to create distributed control systems, which offer increased availability of installations. They also offer the possibility of locating the I/O interfaces close to the process or machines, in harsh environments (water jets, dust, etc). TBX modules are addressed by the application program as “In rack” I/O, with which they can coexist. TBX dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are connected to Premium processors via the Fipio fieldbus (maximum number of modules per Fipio bus, see page 5/80). TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules offer: b Compact interface elements. b Easy setup and connection: v sensors and actuators are directly connected to dust and damp proof standard connectors, v tools are available for local testing and diagnostics of both the interfaces and those devices which are connected to them.

3

TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules with IP 65 protection conform to the following test standards: v UL, NEMA, v CSA, v IEC 65A, v NFC 63850, v to the CNOMO EO3 40 50 recommendation, v to the NF 46 604 FIP standard.

Functions

3.4

TBX dust and damp proof distributed discrete I/O modules offer identical functions to those of the modular TBX I/O modules: Reference Wiring check

TBX EEP 08C22 TBX EEP 1622

TBX ESP 08C22 TBX ESP 1622

Outputs fallback

Assignment of I/O channels to application tasks Function available

TBX EEP 08C22/1622 dust and damp proof distributed input modules The TBX EEP 08C22 input module (8 channels c 24 V) and the TBX EEP 1622 input module (16 channels c 24 V) have the following functions: b Wiring check providing line check via short-circuit, open circuit or earth line detection. b Assignment of each group of 8 input channels (channels 0 to 7 or 8 to 15) to a specific application task (fast, master or auxiliary task). TBX ESP 08C22/1622 dust and damp proof distributed output modules The TBX ESP 08C22 output module (8 channels c 24 V) and the TBX EEP 1622 output module (16 channels c 24 V) have the following functions: b Transistor output protection, detection of overloads or short-circuits which can be used by the user program (channel by channel or for all 8 or 16 module channels). b Reactivation of transistor outputs, choice of automatic reactivation or by user program. b Wiring check providing line check via short-circuit, open circuit or earth line detection. b Output fallback state: on module fault, maintains the state of the outputs at their last value or at a configured value (state 0 or 1) channel by channel. b Assignment of each group of 8 output channels (channels 0 to 7 or 8 to 15) to a specific application task (fast, master or auxiliary task).


3/54



3


Description

3


Description TBX EEP/ESP 08C22 modules Dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 65 casing and comprise: 1 8 female M12 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors or preactuators. 1

2 8 channel status indicator lamps.

3

3 4 status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. 4

4 A dust and damp proof connector for connection to the Fipio bus, and to the c 24 V power supply. 5 For output modules, a c 24 V preactuator power supply connector. 5

3

Connector to be ordered separately:

2

b TBX BLP 10 dust and damp proof connector which can also be used for coding connection points. b For output modules, a TBX BAS 10 dust and damp proof power supply connector. TBX EEP/ESP 1622 modules Dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 65 casing and comprise:

1 3

1 8 female M12 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors or preactuators (1 connector for 2 channels). 2 16 channel status indicator lamps (yellow lamps for even channels and green lamps for odd channels).

4

3 4 status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. 4 A dust and damp proof connector for connection to the Fipio bus, and to the c 24 V power supply. For output modules, a c 24 V preactuator power supply connector on the left side.

2

Connector to be ordered separately: b TBX BLP 10 dust and damp proof connector which can also be used for coding connection points. b For output modules, a TBX BAS 10 dust and damp proof power supply connector.




3/55

3.4


Connection principles

3


Connection principles TBX dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules require a c 24 V power supply. This supply can be provided: b Via a TBX FP ACC 10 dust and damp proof network junction box 1. In this case, the TSX FP CFp00 tap link cable 2 is required which is a screened twisted pair 150 W with 2 conductors carrying the c 24 V supply for the modules. The mechanical and chemical resistance characteristics for this cable are suitable for use in harsh environments. Directly to the TBX BLP 10 connector on the dust and damp proof TBX module 5. In this case, a tap link off the trunk cable is made using the TSX FP ACC 4 T-junction box 3 with the TSX FP CCp00 tap link cable 4 (double twisted pair 150 Ω).

3

Dust and damp proof TBX

5

Premium

2 a 24 V

1

Fipio 3

a 24 V

a 24 V

TBX

4

3

2

5

3.4

Daisy chaining dust and damp proof distributed I/O modules using a TBX FP ACC 10 T-junction box Using a TBX FP ACC 10 junction box 1 up to 10 TBX dust and damp proof modules can be daisy chained. Since power is carried to the TBX dust and damp proof I/O modules via the TSX FP CFp00 tap link cable 2, the length of the tap links depends on the type of c 24V power supply and the number of TBX dust and damp proof modules daisy chained on the same tap link. The lengths in metres are given in the table below: Number of TBX dust and damp proof modules in daisy chain c 24 V ± 3% supply c 24 V ± 5% supply c 24 V ± 10% supply


3/56



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

263 232 154

131 116 77

87 77 51

65 57 38

51 45 30

42 37 24

36 31 20

31 27 17

27 24 15

24 21 13


Characteristics

3


Type of inputs module Modularity

TBX EEP 08C22 8

TBX EEP 1622 16

Voltage Current Sensor supply (ripple included) At state 1 Voltage Current At state 0 Voltage Current

V mA V

c 24 7 c 19.2…30

V mA V mA kΩ

Change from 0 at 1 Change from 1 at 0 Sensor supply

ms ms

≥ 11 ≥ 6 for 11 V 30 with volt-free contact, > 100 with 2-wire priximity sensor

V eff

1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min

MΩ °C °C

> 10 at c 500 V 5…60 - 25…+ 70 TBX ESP 08C22 8

Voltage Nominal current Tungsten filament lamp Voltage (ripple included)

V A W V

c 24 0.5 8 c 19.2…30

Leakage current

Change from state 0 to 1 Change from state 1 to 0 At state 0

ms ms mA

Positive outgoing current ≤1 ≤1 < 2

Residual voltage

At state 1

V

< 0.4

Built-in protection

Against overloads Against overvoltages Against inverse polarity

Yes (thermal) Zener Diode Reverse mounted parallel diode To “–ve” of supply

Module supply mA Preactuator supply mA Per module (with 60 %load) W d.c.

30 45 (except actives outputs ) 4.3 Yes

Limit values Logic Response time

Load common Typical currents consumed Dissipated power Compatible input modules Load impedance Isolation

Temperature


At state 1

Ω

50 < Z < 3000

Dielectric strength between inputs and earth Insulation resistance Operation Storage

V eff

1500 at 50/60 Hz for 1 min

MΩ °C °C

> 10 at c 500 V 0…60 - 25…+ 70


5…11 5…13 Series diode

Ω kΩ

Type of outputs module Modularity Loads

≤ 1.4

3

3.4 TBX ESP 1622 16

Series diode

107 (at 24 V) 51 (at 24 V) 3.7 (at 24 V)


3/57


References

3


Dust and damp proof monobloc discrete I/O modules Type of module Input

Operating voltage c 24 V

Modularity Characteristics Reference (no. of channels) 8 Conforming to TBX EEP 08C22 IEC 1131 type 2 Wiring check function

Weight kg 0.510

TBX EEP 08C22

Output

c 24 V

16

Conforming to TBX EEP 1622 IEC 1131 type 2

0.510

8

0.5 A protected TBX ESP 08C22 Wiring check function 0.5 A protected TBX ESP 1622

0.580

16

0.580

Accessories (1)

3

Type of module

TBX ESP 1622

Characteristics

Dust and damp proof junction Tap link off trunk cable box Holds 1 female 9-way SUB-D connector Zamac casing

Reference TSX FP ACC 4

Tap link off trunk cable including TBX FP ACC 10 wires for c 24 V supply. Holds 1 female 9-way SUB-D connector Zamac casing

0.680

Dust and damp proof connector for TBX modules

Tap link or daisy chaining with adress coding

TBX BLP 10

0.320

Dust and damp proof supply connector for TBX output modules

c 24 V preactuator power TBX BAS 10 supply for TBX ESP 08C22/1622 output modules

0.120

TSX FP ACC 4

(1) For other Fipio accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/86 et 5/87.

3.4 TBX BLP 10


3/58

TBX BAS 10


Weight kg 0.660



Connections, dimensions, mounting

3


Connections TBX EEP 08C22 inputs Mechanical contacts 3

2-wire prox.sen. 3

4

4

-

3

-

4

5

5 2

3-wire prox.sen.

5

2

1

+

1

+ 2

1

TBX EEP 1622 inputs Mechanical contacts

3

2-wire prox.sen. 3

4

4

-

3

2

1

-

4

5

5 2

3-wire prox.sen.

3

5

+

+

1

2

1

+

-

TBX ESP 08C22 outputs Direct wiring

Wiring with amplification -

3

4 5

3

+

4 5

2

-

1

2

1

+

3.4

Outputs TBX ESP 1622 Direct wiring

Wiring with amplification

Preactuator supply via TBX BAS 10 connector

3

3

4 5

2

1

-

4

3

2

5

+ 2

-

1

a 24 V

+

4

1

+

+

Dimensions, mounting TBX EpP pp22 inputs/outputs 193,15

69,1 (3)

125

57,9

52

80

(2)

113 210,3 (1) (1) For TBX ESP 08C22/1622 (2)TBX BLP 10 connector (3) 2 holes Ø 4.4 General: page 3/54



3/59


Presentation, architecture

Discrete I/O IP 67 modules on Fipio bus

Presentation Decentralising the I/O meets the requirements of both users and machine manufacturers while maintaining performance comparable with that of a centralised structure. Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O modules are used to create distributed control systems by removing the need for enclosures, improving connections and thus increasing the availability of installations. These IP 67 protection modules also offer the possibility of locating the standard I/O interfaces used in the processes or machines in harsh environments (oil jets, water jets, dust etc). Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro programming software is used for the software configuration and installation of the dust and damp proof I/O modules on the Fipio bus.

3

There are 4 types of Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O module: b Input module, 8 channels, c 24 V IEC type 2: TSX EEF 08D2. b Input module, 16 channels c 24 V IEC type 2: TSX EEF 16D2. b Mixed module, 8 IEC type 2 inputs/8 x 0.5 A transistor outputs, c 24 V: TSX EMF 16DT2. b Output module, 8 channels, 2 A transistor outputs, c 24 V: TSX ESF 08T22. Furthermore, this new module design offers a number of special functions: b Remote power supply: the Fipio modules, inputs, and Fipio communication power supplies are provided using a single cable. Each remote power supply can be used to power up to 31 modules. b A daisy-chained module can be changed without interrupting the bus. b An operator terminal can be connected at any point on the bus. b Short-circuits in the sensor power supply can occur without causing the bus to malfunction. b A Fipio bus fast connection system using cables and M23 connectors. b A sensor/preactuator fast connection system using an M12 connector.

3.4

The Fipio bus dust and damp proof I/O modules conform to the following standards and approvals: b IEC 1131. b CNOMO. b Fipio certification. b DIN. b UL certification. b CSA certification. b e mark.

Architecture

Premium

Fipio

TBX

c 24 V

c 24 V TSX EF ACC 99

TSX EpF

TSX EpF

Momentum Fipio


3/60


Dimensions, mounting: page 3/65


c 24 V preactuator

3

Architecture (continued), description


3


Architecture (continued) The Fipio fieldbus is a standard relating to communication between different automation components where the IP 67 dust and damp proof I/O are located remotely. 6

Each segment supports up to 31 IP 67 I/O modules over a maximum distance of 1000 meters. Because the IP 67 I/O modules have a remote power supply, the voltage drops caused by the connected modules limit the maximum distances between each T-junction box (from the one which provides the c 24 V power supply) and the remote powered IP 67 I/O modules. For the calculation of these distances, see page 3/66. The use of electrical or electrical/fiber optic repeaters allows the connection of up to 98 IP 67 I/O modules on 5 segments over a maximum distance of 15,000 meters.

7 2

3

1

Description 5 4

TSX EEF 08D2 and TSX EEF 16D2 modules Dust and damp proof input modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and comprise:

8

1 8 female M12 type fast connectors for connecting the sensors (2 input channels per connector for the 16-channel model). 2 8 or 16 channel status indicator lamps. 3 3 status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. 4 Dust and damp proof male M23 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus, the c 24 V power supply for the sensor and the internal electronics of the module. 5 Access to the addressing micro-switch. 6 1 or 2 sensor power supply fault indicators. 7 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (10 labels supplied).

2

Two sealing plugs for M12 connectors are supplied with every module.

7

7 6

3

TSX ESF 08T22 module Dust and damp proof output modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and comprise:

1 6

1 2 3 4

5 4

8

5 6 7 8

8 female M12 type fast connectors for connecting the preactuators. 8 channel status indicator lamps. 3 status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. Dust and damp proof male M23 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus and the power supply for the internal electronics of the module. Access to the addressing micro-switch. 2 preactuator power supply presence indicators. A male 7/8” type connector for connecting the two c 24 V preactuator power supplies. 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (10 labels supplied).

7

Two sealing plugs for M12 connectors are supplied with the module.

6 8 9 2

TSX EMF 16DT2 module Dust and damp proof I/O modules are monobloc type in an IP 67 casing and comprise: 1 8 female M12 type fast connectors of which 4 are for connecting the sensors and 4 for the preactuators (2 input channels or 2 output channels per connector). 2 16 channel status indicator lamps. 3 3 status indicator lamps for module operation and integrated communication. 4 Dust and damp proof male M23 type connector for connection of the Fipio bus, the c 24 V power supply for the sensor and the internal electronics of the module. 5 Access to the addressing micro-switch. 6 2 preactuator power supply presence indicators. 7 A male 7/8” type connector for connecting the two c 24 V preactuator power supplies. 8 1 sensor power supply fault indicator. 9 9 slots for channel and module referencing labels (10 labels supplied).

3

1 6 5 4

9

Two sealing plugs for M12 connectors are supplied with the module.





3/61

3

3.4



3


2

TSX EF ACC 2ppp Fipio bus connecting cables

3

TSX EF ACC 2ppp cables are used to carry Fipio bus signals and the c 24 V power supply for the sensors and the internal electronics of TSX EEF/ESF/EMF modules. They comprise: 2

4

1 A trunk cable, with a 150 Ω shielded twisted pair and a 1.5 mm power supply pair, 0.2, 1, 3, 7, 12 or 25 m long depending on the model (radius of curvature 30 mm, Ø 9.5 mm).

1

At one end: 2 An insulated IP 67 male connector, with M23 type ring, 6-way for Fipio connection to the preceding module n-1 (or to the upstream T-junction box). At the other end: an insulated double connector comprising : 3 An IP 67 female connector, with M23 type ring, 6-way for connection to module n. 4 An IP 67 female connector, with M23 type thread, 6-way for an outgoing cable of the same type for connection to the next module n+1 (or to the downstream T-junction box).

3

Use of this cable on the dust and damp proof I/O modules: b Locks access to the module's Fipio addressing microswitch. b Ensures continuity of the Fipio bus even if the module is disconnected (when replacing a module, for example). Patented system. TSX EF ACC 99 T-junction box The IP 65 T-junction box comprises: 1 A male M23 type soldering connector for connecting the Fipio bus (incoming and outgoing).

3.4 1

2 4

2 A male 7/8” type connector for connecting the c 24 V power supply for the remote powered modules, fitted with a protective plug. 3 A female M23 type connector for connecting the Fipio bus (outgoing), fitted with a sealing plug. 4 An access cover for the 9-way femaleSUB-D connector used for connecting an operator terminal.

3


3/62





Functions, characteristics

3


Functions Remote dust and damp proof I/O modules integrate the following monitoring devices : b Inputs: v power supply fault monitoring in groups of 8 channels. Indicated on the front panel by the SF1 and SF2 indicator lamps (red). v module fault monitoring. Indicated on the front panel by the ERR indicator lamp (red). One fault bit for the whole module is available at PLC processor level for use by the user program. b Outputs: v preactuator power supply presence monitoring in groups of 4 channels. Indicated on the front panel by the US1 and US2 indicator lamps (green). A power supply presence bit is associated with each indicator lamp. v short-circuit monitoring for each channel. Indicated on the front panel by an indicator lamp for each channel (red). There is one fault bit per channel (for 8 channel modules) or per group of 2 channels (for mixed modules). In addition, there is one bit per group of 4 channels which can be used to reset the channels remotely. v module fault monitoring. Indicated on the front panel by the ERR indicator lamp (red). One fault bit for the whole module is also available.

3

In the case of the TSX EMF 16DT2 mixed module, a diagnostic bit allows the origin of the power supply fault to be determined (input or output power supply).

Environmental characteristics Type of module Temperature Operation Storage

°C °C

Degree of protection Altitude

m

TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 16D2/ESF 08T22/EMF 16DT2 0...60 0...60

TSX ACC 99

IP 67

IP 65

0...2000

Vibration resistance

Testing in progress

Protection against shocks

15 gn/11 ms

Operating positions

All positions

3.4

Input characteristics Type of module Inputs channels Number

TSX EEF 08D2 8 inputs

TSX EEF 16D2 16 inputs

Groups of channels Conforms to IEC 1131 2

1 Yes, type 2

2

Proximity sensor 2-wire/3-wire compatibility Nominal values Voltage Current Sensor power supply (ripple included) Inputs limit Voltage At state 0 values At state 1 Current At state 0 At state 1

Yes V mA V V V mA mA

c 24 (positive logic) 7 c 19.2...30 6 (for U = 11 V) 18 < 14 >1 < 30

Resistive – –

Current sink Type 2 2-wire/3-wire Brake outputs (1 per axis) Open collector, PNP

Sensor power supply check

Input characteristics Inputs Logic Nominal values Voltage Current Limit values Voltage At state 1

Voltage Current Voltage Current

At state 0 Input impedance for nominal U Input immunity

Monitoring of external power supply for sensors and preactuators

Voltage for OK state Voltage for fault state Immunity OK V fault Immunity fault V OK

Type of input IEC 1131 conformity Sensor compatibility

Output characteristics Outputs Type of output Output differential voltage Short-circuit current Permissible common mode voltage Permissible differential voltage Voltages Nominal Limit

V mA V V V V

Amplifier outputs RS 422, TTL 5 V open collector NPN compatible ± 2 (load resistance ≤ 100 Ω) < 150 ≤7 ≤ 12 – –

Currents

mA mA mA

– – –

– – – – c 24 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period) 500 < 0.3 625 (for U = 30 or 34 V)

Maximum voltage drop when ON

V

–

c 3.7 (for U = 2.4 V) ≤ 1.2 < 1 (for U = 1.2 V) Presence check 270 Resistive – – –

Auxiliary inputs (homing, event, recalibration, Emergency stop) Positive Positive 24 24 8 8 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period) limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period) ≥ 11 (OK state) ≥ 11 > 3.5 (for U = 11 V) > 6 (for U = 11 V) ≤ 5 (fault state) ≤5 < 1.5 (for U = 5 V) < 2 (for U = 5 V) – – 3000 3000 Resistive Current sink Type 1 Type 2 – Yes (all prox. sens. 24 V) – Yes (all prox. sens. 24 V)

Analog outputs (1 per axis) ± 10.24 13 bits + sign 1.25 – –

Drive enable (1 relay output per axis) – – – c 24 5…30

– 1.5 – – – – –

– 200 (resistive load at 30 V) 1 V/1 mA – – < 5 ms –

IEC 1131 compliance Protections against overload and short-circuits Protection against channel overvoltage

– –

– –

–

–

Protection against polarity inversions

–

–

Logic Nominal values Voltage Current Limit values Voltage

V mA V

At state 1

Voltage Current Voltage Current

At state 0

4.2

Voltage/encoder feedback check Input impedance for nominal U Type of input IEC 1131 compliance 2-wire sensor compatibility 3-wire sensor compatibility

V mA V mA Ω

Positive 5 18 ≤ 5.5

Output characteristics Type of output Range Resolution Value of LSB Nominal voltage Voltage limit

V

Current Maximum current Minimum permitted load Maximum voltage drop when ON Leakage current Switching time Compatibility with DC inputs

mA mA


4/40

mV V V


V mA


High speed outputs (1 per axis) – – – c 24 19...30 (up to 34 V possible, limited to 1 hr per 24 hr period) 500 nominal 625 (for U = 30 or 34 V) – 1

Minimum voltage division

4.2

See page 1/28 The weighing module associated with its weight indicator conforms to OIML recommendations. It is e approved for class III (up to 6000 divisions) and class IIII (up to 1000 divisions) weighers in accordance with European circular 90 384 of 20th June 1990.

Weights and measures

µV

e certification

1 SDM n° 97.06 - Revision of 15 june 1999

Characteristics of weight indicator TSX XBT H100 Display

Alimentation

Environment

Function

Type of screen

LCD back-lit

Number of lines

1 line used for weighing applications

Number of characters

20 per line

Character size (height)

mm

9

Nominal voltage

V

c 24 non isolated

Limit voltages

V

c 18…30

Consumption

W

10

Conforming to standards

IEC 1131 2, EN 61131 2, UL 508, CSA C22 2 n° 14

Temperatures

Operation: 0…50 °C. Storage: - 20…+ 60 °C


Front face : IP 65. Back: IP 20, conforming to IEC 529 and NF C 20 010

Signalling

1 signal lamp

4

4/59

References


4

ISP Plus integrated weighing system

ISP Plus weighing module Description ISP Plus weighing modules (1 weigher per module) (2) TSX ISP Y101

Composition

Reference (1) TSX ISP Y101

Weight kg 0.420

- Module TSX ISP Y101. TSX ISP Y111 - Indicator XBT H100 (LCD back-lit, preconfigured display). - Module/weight indicator connecting cable (length 3 m)

1.020

Standard format module (sealable) - Load cell input 50 meas./s (for 1 to 8 load cells), - 2 reflex discrete outputs (for threshold detection), - RS 485 output (for display)

Accessories for maintenance test (supplied with a 4 m cable) Function

For use with

Mounting

Reference

Separated

SM1 PS371

Weight kg 0.520

ISP Plus and ISP7 A Separated

SM1 PS381

0.100

Load cell simulation ISP Plus all models TSX ISP Y111

Test circuit (voltage)

Junction boxes for load cells Material

4

Metal (3)

Number of load cells

Reference

4

SF2 PY3504

Weight kg 0.800

Intrinsically safe junction box (4)

SM1 PS371

4.2

This box is installed in the weighing system between the weighing indicator and the junction box in which the load cells are grouped. Its function is to limit any peak voltages and to limit the current to 100 mA in the event of a short circuit. The load cells and junction box are the only devices located in the explosive environment; the weighing indicator is located in a safe environment. Description Zener barrier box

For use with

Marking

All types of load cells EEx ib II B and weighing EEx ib II C indicators

Reference SM1 PY52

Weight kg 2.800

Remote weight indicator Description Weight indicator for connection to the weighing module Description

SF2 PY3504

SM1 PY52

TSX XBT H100

4/60

Reference (1) TSX XBT H100

Weight kg –

Length Reference Weight m kg Module/weight indicator connecting 5 SF3 CPY005 0.500 cable 10 SF3 CPY010 1.100 15 SF3 CPY015 1.700 20 SF3 CPY020 2.200 25 SF3 CPY025 2.800 30 SF3 CPY030 3.400 (1) Supplied with multilingual Installation manual as standard: French and English. (2) The setup of weighing modules requires of Unity Pro V2.0 or PL7 Junior/Pro V4.1min. software. (3) When a weighing system is located in an explosive environment, a metal junction box must be used. (4) Equipment approved by the Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques (LCIE) (Central Laboratory for the Electric Industries).

References (continued) dimensions


4

ISP Plus integrated weighing system

References (continued) Descritpion

For connection to Length m Indicator cable: Junction box 3 6-core with SF2 PY3504 10 1 SUB-D type 20 15-way connector 30 for ISP Plus 40 50 60 80 120 200 300

SF3 PY32ppp

Reference SF3 PY32003 SF3 PY32010 SF3 PY32020 SF3 PY32030 SF3 PY32040 SF3 PY32050 SF3 PY32060 SF3 PY32080 SF3 PY32120 SF3 PY32200 SF3 PY32300

Weight kg 0,300 1,100 2,200 3,400 4,500 5,600 6,900 9,000 13,500 22,500 33,500

Dimensions Junction boxes SF2 PY3504

Zener barrier box SM1 PY52

94 80 52

99,7 75

52,5

84

6

14

(2)

110

76,3

250

238

4

4.2

35,5

6,5

5

(3)

(1) Flush mounting Fixing by 4 or 6 press-in fasteners (supplied) (on 1 to 6 mm thick panel)

Zener barrier box panel mounting SM1 PY52

183,8

5,85

7

6,2

102

89,6

6,2

12,35

4,5

50

Weight indicator TSX XBT H100

6,5

202 60

4/61


Presentation

Premium Warm Standby redundancy

Presentation The Premium Warm Standby redundancy offer ensures continuity of operation for a control system based on a Premium platform in the event of failure of: b Central processing and communication functions. b All or part of the I/O system. It is based on the “Normal/Backup” redundancy principle with complete redundancy of the main processing and communication functions, the use of simple I/O shared on a Fipio bus and/or redundancy of in-rack I/O. It covers all availability requirements when the purpose of the PLC is to monitor an installation in continuous operation, signal incidents to a control station, and transmit command instructions from the supervision manager to various locations on an extensive site. It is aimed at processes which can tolerate a lack of control on the part of the PLC lasting 1 to 2 s (average time for changeover from the “Normal” to the “Backup” unit). Areas of application: b In the commercial sector: v centralised technical management of a public facility (tunnel, airport, etc), v control/monitoring of a water treatment or distribution station, v electrical technical management. b In the industrial sector: v food and beverage processing, v slow chemical processes, v level/temperature monitoring, etc.

4

Operational safety and availability The Warm Standby architecture ensures that the control system functions are available, irrespective of the failure of any system component. Operational safety in control systems:

V

Safety: capacity of an entity to present no danger to people, goods and the environment

Capacity to provide a specific service during the cycle

V

Availability: capacity of an entity to be operational, at any given moment or for a given period of time

4.5

V

Reliability: capacity of an entity to perform a service within a given time

V

Ease of maintenance: capacity of en entity to be maintained or returned to operational state within a given time

V

Maintenance logistics : capacity of an organisation to provide the necessary maintenance resources

Safety

Safety PLCs

Standard PLCs

Premium Warm Standby solution

Availability


4/62


4


Principle

4


Principle The Premium Warm Standby architecture combines physical redundancy of the PLC with “Normal/Backup” type operation. Only the “Normal” PLC processes the application and generates the outputs. The “Backup” PLC applies the outputs generated by the “Normal” PLC, performs self-diagnostics and permanently diagnoses the “Normal” PLC. In event of a malfunction on the “Normal” PLC, the “Backup” PLC takes control and then becomes the “Normal” PLC (the faulty PLC, previously “Normal”, becomes the “Backup”). Optimum availability of the application is ensured by: b Automatic or manual “Normal/Backup” changeover. b Smooth changeover on the actuators. b Updating of the “Backup" PLC on each cycle. b Signalling of the faulty component. b Online repair. b Transparent supervision (SCADA). Ethernet TCP/IP network Modbus bus

1 2

4 3 4 5

Essential elements for redundancy 1

TSX PSY power supply

2

TSX P57 353M/453M processor

3

TSX ETY 110 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module

6

7

Optional elements for redundancy 4

TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module

5

TSX SCY 21601 communication module with TSX SCP 114 Modbus protocol PCMCIA card

6

TSX PSY power supply

7

TSX DpY discrete I/O modules

TBX TSX Micro

Momentum

4.5

Premium Fipio bus

Shared elements on the Fipio bus

Elements which can be redundant are: b The main rack. b The main rack power supply. b The processor. Possibly accompanied by: b Discrete input modules. b Discrete output modules. b One or more extendable racks with their power supply. b One or more Ethernet TCP/IP network or Modbus bus communication modules. Elements of the Fipio bus shared between the “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs are: b Discrete or analog input modules (Momentum or TBX). b Discrete or analog output modules (Momentum or TBX). b One or more TSX Micro/Premium agent PLCs (these can support the entire range of I/O: discrete, analog or application-specific).



4/63


Functions


Functions “Normal” and “Backup” PLC functions The “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs are physically and functionally identical, but their role is differentiated according to their status: “Normal” or “Backup”. The “Normal” Premium PLC: b Executes the application. b Updates the outputs and inputs (in-rack and on the Fipio bus). b Provides communication functions with peripheral devices. b Sends its database to the “Backup” PLC. b Recovers diagnostic information from the “Backup” PLC. b Generates its own diagnostic information as well as that of the Premium Warm Standby architecture. The “Backup” Premium PLC: b Executes part of the application. b Reads the state of the in-rack inputs. b Updates its in-rack and Fipio outputs according to the state of those of the “Normal” PLC. b Provides communication functions with peripheral devices. b Recovers diagnostic information from the “Normal” PLC. b Generates its own diagnostic information as well as that of the Premium Warm Standby architecture. Management of shared I/O on Fipio bus The Fipio bus manages I/O exchanges on Fipio devices. The “Normal” PLC is an arbitrator for the active Fipio bus while the “Backup” PLC is an arbitrator for the passive Fipio network. Due to the characteristics of the Fipio bus, only the “Normal” PLC reads the physical inputs on the Fipio bus and controls the physical outputs on the Fipio bus. The “Backup” PLC does not access the Fipio bus. During each cycle, the “Backup” PLC receives the values of the I/O on the Fipio bus from the “Normal” PLC via the inter-PLC Ethway link (TSX ETY 110 module) and applies them to its own outputs. This updating of the memory enables smooth “Normal/Backup” changeover by maintaining the state of the I/O during changeover.

4

Management of “Normal/Backup” states Malfunction of one of the following elements automatically causes a “Normal/Backup” changeover: b Main rack power supply. b PLC processor. b TSX ETY 210 communication module. b Fipio bus connected to the integrated processor port. For all other elements, “Normal/Backup” changeover can be customised (manual changeover). Management of optional redundant I/O For redundant inputs, the sensor information is transmitted simultaneously to the “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs via the 2 input modules placed in each PLC. Two Telefast 2 16-channel sub-bases, ABE 7ACC10 with redundant inputs and ABE–7ACC11 with redundant outputs, can be used to perform this double wiring easily using preformed HE 10 connector connection cables, (see page 4/67, refs. 14, 15, 20 and 21). The output values are only generated by the application processing of the “Normal” PLC. This sends its commands to the corresponding output modules. During each cycle, the “Backup” PLC receives the “Normal” PLC output values via the inter-PLC Ethway link (TSX ETY 110 module) and applies them to its own outputs. This updating enables smooth “Normal/Backup” changeover by maintaining the state of the outputs during changeover.

4.5

Management of supervision transparency (SCADA) Transparent communication with level 2 (supervisor, third-party device, etc) during changeover of the PLC in “Normal” mode to the PLC in “Backup” mode is provided by the TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP modules, using a unique IP address. Communication with a redundant architecture is therefore similar to that for a simple architecture. This transparency is identical in Modbus with the use of the TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card (Modbus protocol in RS 485) installed in the TSX SCY 21601 communication module.


4/64


4

Functions (continued), software setup


4


Functions Ring topology for shared equipment on the Fipio bus To improve the availability of shared equipment on the Fipio bus, it is possible to create a Fipio redundant ring using fibre optics. The fibre optic ring can then be used to: b Maintain normal operation in the event of a break at some point on the fibre optic medium. b Increase the immunity of the Fipio bus in environments with high levels of electromagnetic interference. Ethernet TCP/IP network

1

Optical fibre

4

1

Premium

Momentum

Premium

1 OZD FIP G3 fibre optic transmitter (see page 5/83).

Software setup A Premium Warm Standby redundant architecture is set up using PL7 Pro software (1), in exactly the same way as a standard non-redundant process is set up. It is, however, necessary to apply the rule that the application program of both the “Normal” and “Backup” PLCs must be completely identical. Redundancy entails certain special features which, if taken into account at the start of the development task, are very simple to set up using the additional Premium Warm Standby application design software TLX CD/CD3 WSBY P40E. This software can be perform the following functions: b Taking account of Normal/Backup states during program execution. b Sharing the database between the 2 PLCs via DFB user function blocks and EF elementary function blocks. b Management of redundant in-rack I/O. b Management of shared I/O on the Fipio bus. (1) Warm Standby non compatible with Unity Pro software.



4/65

4.5


References

4


References Description

Type

Software packages for setting Equipment with 1 station (equiped with PL7 Pro) up a Warm Standby redundant Equipment with 3 stations (equiped with PL7 Pro) architecture on Premium Designation Type Ethernet TCP/IP communication module for Premium Warm Standby architecture

Identical to those of the TSX ETY 110 module (see page 5/40). For the Warm Standby architecture, this module also provides: - transparent addressing during changeover - diagnostics of the architecture (self-tests, state of the Ethernet link and of the TSX ETY 210 dual module), - la maintenance with access to the "backup" PLC

Reference (1) TLX CD WSBY P40E TLX CD3 WSBY P40E

Weight kg – –

Reference

Weight kg 0.270

TSX ETY 210

Additional compatible elements The Warm Standby architecture presented on page 4/63 shows, among other things, the essential elements for redundancy. Compatible standard modules can be added to this minimum configuration according to the requirements of the process being automated. Elements for redundancy (sold in lots of 2) (2)

4

b Bus X remote system: v TSX REY 200 Bus X remote module, for increasing the length of Bus X to 2 x 350 m. b Communication: v TSX ETY 210 Ethernet TCP/IP communication module, for communication with level 3, v TSX SCP 114 Modbus communication PCMCIA card, for Modbus Slave communication with transparent addressing for third-party devices. This card should be inserted in the slot in the TSX SCY 21601 communication module. b Discrete and analog I/O: v TSX DEY ppK discrete input modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE 7ACC11 Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases, v TSX DSY ppK discrete output modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE 7ACC10 Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases, v TSX DMY ppK discrete mixed I/O modules with HE 10 connectors with ABE 7ACC11/10 Telefast 2 redundant sub-bases, v TSX AEY/ASY analog,TSX CTY/CCY counter, TSX CAY/CSY/CFY axis control and TSX ISP weighing modules. These modules cannot be used as elements for redundancy, but can be used as elements shared via the Fipio agent Premium PLCs.

4.5

Shared elements on the Fipio bus b TBX distributed I/O modules: v TBX LEP 030 Fipio communication module for base units, v TBX DES/DSS/DMS discrete I/O base units, v TBX AES/ASS/AMS analog I/O base units, v TSX EEF/ESF/EMF dust and damp proof discrete I/O base units. b Momentum I/O modules: v 170 FTN 110 01 Fipio communication module, v 170 ADI/ADO/ADM discrete I/O base units, v 170 AAI/AAO/AMM analog I/O base units. b Fipio agent PLCs: v Premium PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules, v TSX Micro PLC, can take all I/O and application-specific modules . b Other shared elements: v OZF FIP G3 fibre optic transmitter, can be used to create a Fipio bus fibre optic ring, v TSX FP ACC 6 Fipio electrical repeater, increases the length of the bus by the creation of segments, each 1000 m maximum. (1) Product supplied with setup manual in English. (2) The TSX AEY/ASY I/O analog modules, the TSX CTY/CCY/CAY/CSY/CFY/ISPY application-specific modules are no redundancy elements. They can be used as shared elements with Fipio agent Premium PLCs.


4/66

Connections


4


Example of architecture with redundant I/O and shared I/O on Fipio bus Ethernet TCP/IP network

12 3 45 6

12 3 45 6 16

17

17

1

1

18 19

7 8 9

10

10

7 8 11

20

20 14

TBX

12

15

4

13 21 Momentum

TSX RKY pEX: Premium extendable rack. TSX PSYppppM: power supply module. TSX P57 353M/453M: Premium processor with integrated Fipio link. TSX ETY 110: Ethernet TCP/IP network module. TSX ETY 210: Ethway/Ethernet TCP/IP network module. TSX SCY 21601: communication module for type III PCMCIA card. TSX DSYppK: discrete output modules, for redundancy. TSX DEYppK: discrete input modules, for redundancy. TSX LEP 030: Fipio communication module for TBX base units with TSX BLP 01 connector. 10 TBX DES 16pp: distributed discrete output TBX base units, shared. 11 TBX DSS 16pp: distributed discrete output TBX base units, shared with TBX CBS 010 cache/cable. 12 170 FNT 110 00: Fipio communication module for Momentum base unit with TSX FPP ACC2 connector. 13 170 ADI/AAI/ADMppp: discrete or analog I/O Momentum base unit. 14 ABE 7ACC11/10: Telefast 2 sub-bases for redundant I/O. 15 ABE 7p16ppp: Telefast 2 connection sub-bases. 16 LA4 DT2U: time-delay relay designed to desynchronise starting of the “Normal” PLC and the “Backup” PLC during simultaneous power-up. 17 TSX SCP 114: type III PCMCIA card for Modbus Slave communication. 18 490 NTW 000pp: preformed connection cable with RJ 45 connector, for interconnecting TSX ETY 110 modules (shielded twisted pair). 19 TSX FP CAp00: Fipio bus trunk cable, shielded twisted pair. 20 TSX CDPp53: preformed connection cable with HE 10 connector (length = 0.5, 1, 2, 3, or 5 m). 21 ABF H20H008: preformed connection cable with HE 10 connector (length = 0.08 m). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


4/67

4.5

Contents

5 - Communication

5

Selection guide: networks, buses and serial links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 5/2

5.1 - Ethernet TCP/IP network - Transparent Ready b Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/8 b Embedded Web servers v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/10 v Standard Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/12 v FactoryCast Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/14 v FactoryCast HMI Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/16 b Ethernet TCP/IP communication services v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/22 v Standard Ethernet services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/23 v I/O Scanning service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/26 v FDR replacement service for faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/27 v Global Data service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/28 v NTP time synchronization service (Unity Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/29 v SMTP electronic mail notification service (Unity Pro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/30 v SNMP service protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/31 v TCP Open optional service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/32 b Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/34 b Processors with integrated Ethernet port and Ethernet modules . . . . . . . . . page 5/38 b Ethernet infrastructure ConneXium wiring system

5

v Presentation, installation principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/40 v Hubs, transceivers, switches, gateways and cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/46

5.2 - CANopen machine bus b CANopen PCMCIA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/52

5.3 - AS-Interface sensor/actuator bus b AS-Interface master module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/56 b Phaseo regulated power supplies for AS-Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/60

5/0

5.4 - X-Way bus and networks b Communication architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/66 b Fipio bus manager function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/70 b Fipio bus Agent function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/74 b Fipway network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/78 b Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/82 b Fipio/Fipway wiring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/84 b Ethernet TCP/IP network (10BASE5 interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/88

5.5 - Network and fieldbus b Modbus Plus network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/90 b Profibus DP fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/94 b INTERBUS fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/96

5.6 - Serial links b Modbus SL serial link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/100 b Uni-Telway serial link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/104 b Jnet serial link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/108 b Asynchronous serial links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 5/110 b Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports . . . . . . . . page 5/112

5/1

5

Selection guide

Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet CPUs and modules Transparent Ready

Applications Network type

Processors with built-in TCP/IP Ethernet port (heterogeneous industrial local area network)

Type of network

Ethernet TCP/IP

Structure

Physical interface Method of access Data rate

Medium

Configuration

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) CSMA-CD 10/100 Mbit/s

Double twisted pair Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system

Maximal number of devices Maximum length Number of networks/station

Maximum of 64 stations per network 100 m max. between hub and terminal device 0 (1)

2 (1)

3 (1)

Other built-in port

–

–

Fipio bus manager function

Basic services

Services TCP/IP Services X-Way Ethway

Uni-TE/Modbus message handling Inter-network X-Way routing, X-Way/Uni-Telway routing, module diagnostics –

Embedded Web serverservices

Basic services FactoryCast services

"Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics "Data Editor" access to PLC variables and data –

Factory Cast HMI services

–

5


Transparent Ready communication services

I/O Scanning (64 stations) Global Data Network management (SNMP) FDR server for automatic reconfiguration (BOOTP/DHCP protocols) –

Type of processor

–

Module format

Double format processor

Type of module

TSX P57 1634M TSX P57 2623M TSX P57 2634M

Page

5/2

TSX P57 2823M

5/38 (1) Excluding embedded Ethernet port.

TSX P57 3623M TSX P57 3634M

TSX P57 4823M TSX P57 4634M TSX P57 5634M

5

5

Ethernet TCP/IP modules (heterogeneous industrial local area network)

10BASE5 (AUI), 10BASE-T (RJ45) CSMA-CD 10 Mbit/s

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (RJ45)

Triaxial cable or double twisted pair Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system

Double twisted pair Fiber optic, via Ethernet ConneXium wiring system

10/100 Mbit/s

1 to 4 depending on processor or slot-PLC used

5

–

Uni-TE message handling, common words, application to application –

–

"Rack Viewer" PLC diagnostics "Data Editor" access to PLC variables and data “Alarms viewer” – “Graphic Data Editor” Display of user Web pages (1.4 Mb available)

“Alarms viewer” alarm display “Graphic Data Editor” graphic object editor Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available) FactoryCast HMI services (2)

– – – TCP Open

I/O Scanning (64 stations) Global Data

– –

FDR server for automatic reconfiguration (BOOTP/DHCP) – TCP Open

– –

All types of Premium processors TSX P57 1p/57 2p/57 3p/57 4p and Atrium slot-PLC T PCX/TSX PCI 57 2p/57 3p

Standard format module

TSX ETY 110

TSX ETY 110 WS

TSX ETY 4103

TSX ETY 5103

TSX WMY 100

5:39 5/19 (2) FactoryCast HMI services : HMI database, E.mail with automatic sending on events, interpreted math and logic functions, connection to relational databases and simulator tool.

5/3

Selection guide (continued)

Modicon Premium automation platform Network and bus modules

Applications

Local area network conforming to Modbus Plus standard

Local area network conforming to Fip

Type of network or bus

Modbus Plus

Fipway

Physical interface

Modbus Plus standard

Fip standard

Method of access Data rate

Rotating token 1 Mbit/s

Bus managed by bus arbitrator 1 Mbit/s

Twisted pair

Twisted shielded pair Fibre optic via transceivers or repeaters

Maximal number of devices

32 per segment 64 on all segments

32 per segment 128 on all segments

Maximal length

450 m per segment 1800 m with 3 repeaters

1000 m per segment 5000 m maxi with 3 repeaters

Number of links/station

1 max.

1 to 4 depending on the model of processeur

Message handling

- Write/read varaibles - Global database - Peer Cop service

-

Structure

Medium

5

Configuration

Services

Uni-TE COM/shared table Application-to-application Telegram

Type of processor

All type of Premium processor and Atrium slot-PLC

Nature of module

PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-PLC

PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-PLC and on TSX SCY 21601 module

Type of module

TSX MBP 100

TSX FPP 20

Pages

5/91

5/79

5/4

5

5

CAN fieldbus

Open industrial sensor/actuator bus conforming to AS-Interface standard

Modbus open industrial bus

1

Bus CANopen V4.02

AS-Interface

Modbus

ISO 11898

V2 AS-Interface standard

RS 232D RS 485 isolated 20 mA CL

CSMA/CA, multi-master 20 Kbit/s...1 Mbit/s according to distance

Master/slave 167 Kbit/s

Master/slave 19.2 Kbit/s max.

Twisted shielded pair

2-wire AS-Interface cable


127 slaves

31 + 31 discrete, analog or security devices

32 devices max. 48 slave addresses max.

From 20 m (1 Mbit/s)…2500 m (20 Kbit/s)

100 m 200 m with repeaters

1 max.

2 to 8 depending on the model of processor

15 m in RS 232D 1300 m 1000 m in RS 485 1300 m in 20 mA CL or intégrated link According to power consumption (see page 9/2)

- Implicit PDO exchange - Explicit SDO exchange or CAN function block - Explicit PDU CAN exchange

Transparency of exchanges with sensor/actuator devices

All type of Premium processor (except TSX P57 153/154) and Atrium slot-PLC


PCMCIA type III card on processor/slot-PLC


PCMCIA type III card inserted on (1)


TSX CPP 110

TSX SAY 1000

TSX SCP 11p (2) built-in link 1

TSX SCY 11601

RS 485 isolated

32 devices max. 247 slave addresses max.

Modbus master/slace RTU or ASCII 13 Modbus functions (read/write bits and words, diagnostic…)

TSX SCY 21601 5/53 5/57 (1) Premium processor/Atrium slot-PLC and TSX SCY 21601 communication module. (2) At the end of reference, replace p by 1: RS 232D, by 2: 20 mA CL or by 4: isolated RS 485.

5/100

5/5

5



5

Network, bus and serial link modules

Applications

Local area network conforming to Fip

Uni-Telway multicomponent industrial bus

2

2

1 Type of network or bus

Structure

Fipio (Agent)

Configuration

Fip standard

RS 485 non-isolated

Method of access Data rate

Bus managed by bus arbitrator 1 Mbit/s

Master/slave 19,2 Kbit/s max. (1)

Twisted shielded pair Fibre optic via transceivers or repeaters


32 per segment, 128 on all segments (limited to 64 with TSX P57 153M processor ) From 1000 m to 15 000 m (depending on the medium use) with repeaters

5 (excluding programming terminal) 10 m

28, (96 slaves addresses max.)

Number of links/station

1 max.

1 max.

According to power

Message handling

-

- Uni-TE Client/Server 240 bytes (128 bytes on - Application-to-application 240 bytes (128 bytes - Transparency of all devices on X-Way architecture

Maximal number of devices

Maximal length

Services

Bus Uni-Telway

Physical interface

Medium

5

Fipio (gestionnaire de bus)

Uni-TE Periodic data exchange Application-to-application Transparent exchange of remote I/O

RS 485 isolated

1000 m 15 m in 20 mA CL

Type of processors


TSX P57 p53/p54M TSX P57 p823M T PCX 57 353M TSX PCI 57 354M


Nature of module

PCMCIA type III card on processor or slot-PLC

Built-in on the processor or slot-PLC

Uni-Telway built-in link

Type of module

TSX FPP 10

Pages

5/6

5/75

2

5/71

Built-in link on processor

1

AUX terminal port

5/105


2

TSX SCY 21601

5

RS 232 RS 485 isolated 20 mA CL

2 in RS 232D, 28 in RS 485, 16 in 20 mA CL

Jnet proprietary industrial local network

INTERBUS industrial fieldbus

Profibus industrial fieldbus

Jnet

INTERBUS

Profibus DP

RS 485 isolated

RS 485

Rotating token 19,2 Kbit/s

Master/slave generation 4 500 Kbit/s

Master 9,6 Kbit/s...12 Mbit/s according to lenght of bus


Twisted shielded pair, Fiber optic, infra-red ...

Twisted shielded pair, Fiber optic or infra-red

32 (16 if SMC PLC in the network)

512 slaves max. with 254 bus terminal blocks max.

126 slaves

1300 m

400 m max. (inter-station bus)

RS 485 isolated

20 mA CL

200 m depending on network topology

consumption(see page 43900/2)

3 maxi

terminal port) on terminal port) via the master

Shared table pwith a total of 128 words (64 words if SMC PLC in the network)

5

1200 m (9,6 Kbit/s), 4800 m with 3 repeaters 100 m (12 Mbit/s), 400 m with 3 repeaters 1 ou 2 depending on the type of Premium processor/Atrium slot-PLC

-

Data process implicit exchange Pre-processing Logical addressing Segmentation

- Read/write access for DP slave I/O data - Data transfer for slave diagnostics - Parametering and monitoring requests - Inter-master dialog not supported

All type of Premium processor(except TSX 57 1p) and Atrium slot-PLC

PCMCIA type III card on processor or slot-PLC and on TSX SCY 21601 module

PCMCIA type III card on TSX SCY 21601 module


PC card on ISA bus


TSX SCP 11p (1)

TSX JNP 112

TSX IBY 100

TSX IBX 100

TSX PBY 100

TSX JNP 114

5/107 5/97 (1) At the end of reference, replace p by 1: RS 232D, by 2: 20 mA CL or by 4: isolated RS 485.

5/93

5/7


Architecture

5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Logical Ethernet communication architecture

Company Intranet Internet Site 3 Site 2

Enterprise

MES

Unix

Site 1

ERP

Windows

Linux

Factory

Industrial PC

Workshop Quantum

5

Quantum

Quantum

Premium

5.1

Dialog terminal Quantum

PLC Momentum M1E

Robot Distributed I/O

Servodrive Gateway

Inputs/outputs

Workshop 1

Workshop 2

MES: Manufacturing Execution System (production management system) ERP: Enterprise Resource Planning (integrated management software packages) HMI/SCADA: Human/Machine Interface/Supervision Control And Data Acquisition Gateway: Bridge to sensor/actuator bus, to installed base network, field bus, etc.

5/8

ETHERNET TCP/IP

HMI + SCADA


Architecture (continued)

5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Physical Ethernet communication architecture

Site 3 Router Site 2

Router Internet Provider

WAN Provider

Public telecommunications network, ADSL

Specialized link Frame Relay ATM

Router

Site 1

RAS

Firewall

Switches (VLAN) or routers

(max. 50 switches)

Switch Switch

Switch 100BASE-FX Full Duplex

100 m max.

Collision domain 2

ERP

Redundant optical ring Switch

3,100 m max.

Half Duplex 100 m max.

MES

Fiber optics Hub

Switch

Quantum

5

100 m max. Quantum

Premium

100BASE-TX

Hub

5.1

Hub Transceiver

Momentum M1E

Third-party device Hub Gateway 210 m maximum 100 m max. TSX Micro Collision domain 1

Magelis iPC VijeoLook Robot

Momentum 100 m max.

ATV58

Premium AS-Interface bus

Collision domain 3 (1)

(1) In general, several collision domains should be defined in order to increase the architecture surface and improve performance. See pages 5/34 to 5/45.

5/9

Presentation

Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers Presentation

FactoryCast HMI Web server user

FactoryCast Web server

Standard Web server

Ethernet TCP/IP PLC module services

5

In line with the Transparent Ready approach, TSX Micro, Premium, Quantum, Momentum, Advantys STB distributed I/O and ATV drive automation platforms provide transparent access to data in realtime using Web-based technologies via their Ethernet TCP/IP or FactoryCast communication module. The Transparent Ready communication modules in automation platforms integrate Ethernet TCP/IP services (Modbus TCP/IP messaging, SNMP network management functions, etc.) and provide the following Web functions: b Standard Web server b FactoryCast Web server b FactoryCast HMI Web service

Standard Web server Standard Web services can be used to execute diagnostic and maintenance functions on automation system installations locally or remotely using a simple Internet browser: b PLC system and I/O module diagnostics, PLC error display (“Rack Viewer” pages ready to use) b Display and adjustment of PLC variables (“Data Editor” pages ready to use) The embedded Web server is a realtime PLC data server. All the data can be presented in the form of standard Web pages in HTML format and can therefore be accessed using any Internet browser that supports the integrated Java code. The standard functions provided by the Web server are supplied “ready to use” and therefore do not require any programming at either PLC level or at the level of the PC device supporting the Internet browser. FactoryCast Web server In addition to providing standard Web services, the FactoryCast Web server can be used to control and monitor automation system installations both locally and remotely. The following functions are available: b Management of system alarms and PLC application with partial or global acknowledgment (“ready to use” pages for the “Alarm Viewer” function) b Application graphics diagnostics (customized graphical views created by the user using the “Graphic Data Editor” function) b Graphics control via animated Web pages created by the user and stored in the FactoryCast module

5.1

FactoryCast Web servers can also be used to customize control, diagnostics and maintenance interfaces via user-defined Web pages and Web pages transferred to the module using FactoryCast configuration software (maximum available memory required is 8 Mb).

FactoryCast HMI Web server In addition to the FactoryCast Web functions, the FactoryCast HMI Web server provides HMI Web functions, which are executed in the module itself: b Realtime HMI database management, independent of the PLC processor b Arithmetic and logical calculations based on HMI data b Connectivity with relational databases b Transmission of electronic messages (e-mail) FactoryCast HMI is an active Web server, which can be used to execute HMI functions integrated in a PLC module. This eliminates the need for communication via polling to update the HMI/SCADA database. In FactoryCast HMI modules, the HMI functions are executed without affecting the PLC application program and therefore the cycle time.

5/10

5


Selection

5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers

Selection of Telemecanique Transparent Ready modules Products

Quantum automation platform

Reference

Processors

(1)

Web server integrated Standard Class B20

FactoryCast Class C20/C30

FactoryCast HMI Class D10

140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60

Modules

140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11 140 NWM 100 00

Premium automation platform

Processors

TSX P57 2623 M TSX P57 2823 M TSX P57 3623 M TSX P57 4823 M TSX P57 1634 M TSX P57 2634 M TSX P57 3634 M TSX P57 4634 M TSX P57 5634 M

Modules

5

TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 110WS TSX ETY 5103

5.1

TSX WMY 100 TSX Micro automation platform

Modules

TSX ETZ 410 TSX ETZ 510

Momentum automation platform

M1E processors

171 CCC 960 20 171 CCC 960 30 171 CCC 980 20 171 CCC 980 30

Modules

170 ENT 110 01 170 ENT 110 02

Advantys STB distributed I/O Altivar ATV 38/58 variable speed drive

Network interface module Card

STB NIP 2212

VW3 A58310

FactoryCast is a range of PLC modules associated with their configuration software and combines the following features: b Realtime communication functions based on Ethernet TCP/IP b Predefined Web pages, which enable advanced installation diagnostics b The capacity to store dynamic user-defined Web pages (1) Electrical Distribution products of Merlin Gerin.

5/11

Functions

Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, standard Web services

Standard Web services Remote Web clients “Thin Client” PC Web client

Internet Magelis Smart iPC

Intranet

Firewall

“Thin Client” Web client

TSX Micro + Web server

Premium + Web server Quantum + Web server

“Rack Viewer” and “Data Editor” functions are supported by the Ethernet TCP/IP modules of the following: b TSX Micro platform b Premium platform b Quantum platform b Momentum platform b Advantys STB distributed I/Os b FactoryCast modules See module reference on page 5/7.

5 5.1

These functions can be accessed using a standard Internet browser connected to the network. They are “ready to use” and secure (password-protected). They can be used locally or remotely via: b Intranet b A modem and RAS server b Internet.

5/12

5



5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, standard Web services

“Rack Viewer” PLC diagnostics function The “Rack Viewer” function (PLC rack display) can be used for PLC system and I/O diagnostics. It displays the following in realtime: b LED status on the front panel of the PLC b The PLC version b The hardware configuration of the PLC including the status of the system bits and words b Detailed diagnostics of all I/O module channels or application-specific channels in the configuration

Quantum hardware configuration

“Data Editor” read/write function for PLC data and variables The “Data Editor” function can be used to create tables of animated variables for realtime read/write access to lists of PLC data. The variables to be displayed can be entered and displayed either symbolically (S_Pump 234) or by their address (%MW99). These variables only support write access if this option has been enabled using the FactoryCast configuration software. A second password must be entered and verified when writing a value to a variable.

5

Various animation tables containing specific application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by the user and saved in the Ethernet TCP/IP module.

5.1 Premium main rack hardware configuration

Variables table

5/13

Functions

Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast Web server

FactoryCast Web server

Remote Web client

Modem + RAS server

Internet Magelis Smart iPC

Firewall

“Thin Client” Web client Intranet

TSX Micro + Web server


In addition to standard Web services, FactoryCast modules (see selection table on page 5/11) support the following functions: b Alarm Viewer b Creation and display of graphical views via an online graphics editor (Graphic Data Editor supplied) b Hosting and display of Web pages created by the user

5 5.1

FactoryCast configuration software (supplied with FactoryCast modules) is required for the last 2 functions. Alarm Viewer function “Alarm Viewer” is a ready-to-use password-protected function. Based on the diagnostics buffer managed in the PLCs (specific memory area used to store all diagnostic events), this function is available with the Premium/Atrium platforms (with PL7 or Unity software) and the Quantum platform (with Unity software). This function can be used to process alarms (display, acknowledgment and deletion) managed at PLC level by the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as DFBs (system-specific diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic function blocks created by the user). Alarm Viewer page The diagnostics viewer is a Web page comprising a list of messages, which displays the following information for each alarm: b Its state b The type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB) b Its geographical area b The dates and times of the occurrence/removal of a fault.

5/14

5



5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast Web server

FactoryCast Web server (continued) Graphic Data Editor function This function can be used to create graphical views online, animated by PLC variables. These views are created using a library of graphic objects, which are predefined by simple copy/paste operations. The object parameters are set according to user requirements (color, PLC variables, labels, etc.). The graphic objects provided, which are the basic elements of the view, are as follows: b Analog and digital indicators b Horizontal and vertical bar charts b Boxes for displaying messages and entering values b Pushbutton boxes b Functions for recording trends b etc. The views created can be saved in the FactoryCast modules. These customized graphic objects can be reused in user Web pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages. Function for hosting and displaying user Web pages In addition, FactoryCast Web modules have 8 Mbytes of memory (1), which is accessed in the same way as a hard drive and can be used to host user-defined Web pages. These Web pages can be created using any standard tool (2) that enables creation and editing in HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are provided in the Graphic Data Editor supplied with FactoryCast.

5

The Web pages created can be used, for example, to: b Display and modify all PLC variables in realtime b Create hyperlinks to other external Web servers (documentation, suppliers, etc.)

5.1

This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic screens used for the following purposes: b Display, monitoring, diagnostics b Generation of realtime production reports b Maintenance help b Operator guides Configuration software for FactoryCast Web servers The configuration software for FactoryCast Web servers is supplied on CD-Rom with every FactoryCast module (TSX Micro, Premium or Quantum). The software is used for the configuration and administration of the Web server embedded in these modules. The software is compatible with Windows 95/98, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0 and Windows XP operating systems. It offers the following functions: b Access security management b Definition of user names and associated passwords for accessing Web pages b Definition of access to variables authorized for modification b Saving/restoration of an entire website b Transfer of Web pages created locally by the user on their PC workstation to the FactoryCast module and vice versa. (1) Memory is not affected in the event of power outages or if the PLC is reinitialized. (2) For example, Microsoft FrontPage.

5/15


Presentation

5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server

FactoryCast HMI Web services The FactoryCast HMI range comprises two Web server modules embedded in the PLC (one for the Premium platform and one for the Quantum platform) and FactoryCast HMI application development software (to be ordered separately). These modules have the same Web functions as FactoryCast modules, namely: b Ethernet TCP/IP communication functions: v TCP/IP messaging service with Modbus TCP and Uni-TE TCP protocols v SNMP agent for standardized network management, which supports standard MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB. b v v v v v

Standard Web and FactoryCast services: “Rack Viewer” PLC diagnostics functions, see page 5/13, “Data Editor” read/write functions for PLC variables, see page 5/13, “Alarm Viewer” alarm display functions, see page 5/14, “Graphic Data Editor” online graphical editor functions, see page 5/15, Function for hosting and displaying user Web pages, see page 5/115.

FactoryCast HMI modules also provide the following specialized HMI Web services: b Realtime database management specific to the module, combining PLC data acquisition and the management of local internal variables. b Arithmetic and logical calculations for pre-processing data. b E-mail with automatic transmission triggered by a specific process event. b Connection to the SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle relational databases for archiving data for tracking or logging.

5

By simply setting parameters, the FactoryCast HMI application development software can be used to set up these functions in an intuitive and user-friendly way. A simulation mode, which is integrated in the software, can be used to test the operation of the FactoryCast HMI application without a module and without the need for a physical connection to a PLC, thereby simplifying debugging.

5.1

Functions: Pages 5/14 to 5/16

5/16

Description: Page 5/17

Characteristics: Page 5/17

References: Page 5/17



5


Architectures FactoryCast HMI Web servers can be integrated in various architectures: b Installations that require a flexible and cost-effective HMI solution. b “Hybrid” architectures supplementing conventional SCADA systems. b Architectures where a direct link is required between automation systems and information management levels (IT link).

Flexible Web HMI solution

Relational database Thin Client

The use of Web-based technologies means that FactoryCast HMI can replace conventional HMI or SCADA solutions in applications where architectures require a flexible multistation HMI, thus providing a temporary “nomadic” remote control function.

IPC

Ethernet TCP/IP

Premium + Web server

These architectures consist of: b Several PLCs networked on Ethernet, which have FactoryCast HMI Web server modules. b One or more PC terminals with “Thin Client” interface equipped with a simple Web browser. b If necessary, a relational database in which FactoryCast HMI can archive data directly from the automation system. Quantum + Web server

FactoryCast HMI modules read PLC data and execute HMI services (E-mail, interpreted calculations, connection to relational databases, updating Web pages) at source in the PLC, without affecting the PLC program or the scan time.

Premium

This solution provides: b A reliable HMI application, which is executed at source in a robust PLC device. b An integrated multistation interface and remote access that is easy and cost-effective to set up (“Thin Client” terminal). b An HMI application that is easy to maintain (the application is housed in a single location on the server side). b Preventive maintenance via E-mail. b Greater availability of data archiving done from source.

TSX Micro

Nomad HMI SCADA Vijeo Look

In this type of architecture, FactoryCast HMI supplements conventional SCADA systems. SCADA Vijeo Look or Monitor Pro software meets the requirement for centralizing information for global supervision from a central site.

MIS IT links

Intranet

Premium + Web server


Hybrid architectures

Combining a FactoryCast HMI solution and a conventional SCADA solution enables: b Simplification of the SCADA application by locating some of the SCADA processing at source, at PLC level. b Increased availability of the traceability function due to the direct connection between FactoryCast HMI modules and relational databases. b Powerful “ready to use” remote diagnostics capacities. b “Nomadic” stations to be connected to the Intranet or Internet via “Thin Client” PC or PDA devices.

Quantum + Web server




5/17

5 5.1


Functions

5


Nomad HMI

MIS IT links

Intranet

Direct links with the information management levels In this type of architecture FactoryCast HMI eliminates the need for intermediate devices (gateways), which are expensive to install and maintain, by establishing a direct link between the automation levels and the global information management levels (MES, ERP, etc). The PLC directly archives information from the automation system in relational databases, which allows a “collaborative” automation system to be set up, making it easier to share data in real time. This solution results in: b Simplified architectures b Lower installation, development and maintenance costs b Increased reliability of information (the data is collected at source) b Greater availability of data archiving


Thin Client

Specialized HMI services

Relational database Magelis Smart iPC

Database connection

5

Web page display

FactoryCast HMI realtime database

Interpreted calculations

PLC acquisition and realtime database With an internal architecture similar to that of an HMI/SCADA system, FactoryCast HMI modules manage their own variable database in realtime, independently of the PLC program. It is this variable database that is used to execute various functions, including internal processing, archiving, alarm, E-mail, etc. Variables in this realtime database are updated using the automation system data acquisition service. This service becomes operational once the following parameters have been set in the FactoryCast HMI software: b Direct import of PLC variable/symbol databases (no double entry). b Definition of the frequency of acquisition (period at which this variable is updated).

PLC data

5.1

Transmission of E-mail

FactoryCast HMI modules


5/18


Note: A FactoryCast HMI application running in a Premium configured FactoryCast HMI module can access also the remote PLC variables in the architecture via a transparent network (X-Way/Uni-TE transparent protocols).

Characteristics: b Maximum number of I/O variables per application: 1000 variables from PLCs b Maximum number of internal variables per application: 100 b Acquisition frequency: 500 ms, minimum




5


Specialized HMI services (continued) E-mail transmission The FactoryCast HMI module can, on a specific event, send E-mail completely autonomously to a predefined list of E-mail addresses. This function is executed independently of the PLC program. The event that triggers the E-mail may be associated with the following: b A PLC variable (I/O, internal variable) b An alarm, a threshold overshoot b A machine or process state b An operator action, etc. When an E-mail is sent to a destination E-mail address, it must pass through an SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server. This server receives the E-mail and waits for the recipient to acknowledge it. The E-mail service is compatible with all SMTP servers. A return address can be defined should delivery to the destination address fail. Characteristics: b Configuration of the SMTP server: Compatible with all SMTP servers b Maximum number of E-mail: 100 b Contents of E-mail messages: Free text with embedded dynamic variable values (from the PLC) and hypertext links (unlimited) Connection to relational databases The FactoryCast HMI module can be connected directly and completely autonomously to the following remote relational databases: b SQL Server b MySQL b Oracle

5

This connection enables all internal or process data to be archived so that it can be logged and traced. The data can be archived (written) periodically and/or on a specific event. These variables can either be from PLCs (I/O bits, internal bits, internal words and registers) or local to the module. The FactoryCast HMI “Roll Over” function checks the size of tables by managing the maximum number of records. This circular data archiving function automatically deletes the oldest data and can be accessed by simply setting parameters in the FactoryCast HMI software. Characteristics: b Number of databases that can be connected: 3 b Number of tables that can be written per database: 10, maximum b Number of columns per table: 50, maximum b Type of database supported: Oracle, SQL Server and MySQL b Automatic table creation: The FactoryCast HMI server automatically creates a table in the database if one does not already exist Calculation functions The FactoryCast HMI server can carry out various arithmetic and logical operations on a combination of variables from the HMI database and does this independently of the PLC processor. These calculations include, for example, scaling, formatting, logic processing for event triggering, etc. This calculation function is provided in the form of spreadsheets where the formulae are defined in cells. The spreadsheets are interpreted and processed by the server. The result of each formula is associated with a new internal variable. The processing of each spreadsheet is initiated by a trigger.

Presentation: Pages 5/12 to 5/14




5/19

5.1


Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Embedded Web servers, FactoryCast HMI Web server

FactoryCast HMI application development software FactoryCast HMI application development software, referenced TLX CD FCHMI V1M, provides multiproject management and complete control of FactoryCast HMI applications, during both the development and the debugging phases, thanks to the online mode and simulation mode (operational when the system is offline) options. This software enables the intuitive and user-friendly setup of HMI functions by simply setting parameters using a tree structure of the application and can be used for complete management of the Web site: b Setting parameters for HMI functions: v Configuration of PLC interfaces: Import symbol databases and set parameters for the acquisition period v Configuration of spreadsheets v Configuration of E-mail v Configuration of connections to databases b Management of the Web site: v Management of the Web site tree structure (creation/deletion of HTML folders and files) v Management of default Web site pages v Management of user Web site pages (1) v Graphic object editor for animating Web pages v Launch of the system editor for HTML pages (FrontPage or similar) v Up/downloading/comparison of Web pages in online mode v Debugging of Web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including animations and Java beans) b Simulation mode The application and the Web site (including animations and Java beans) can be debugged in either online or simulation mode, which enables operation to be tested without a FactoryCast HMI module and without a physical connection to a PLC, thus simplifying debugging.

5 5.1

An integrated graphics editor in the FactoryCast HMI software can be used to easily customize the following graphic objects: bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc. User Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (FrontPage or similar, not supplied). FactoryCast HMI includes a plug-in for FrontPage 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to set up animations, which enable PLC variables to be accessed in realtime in the HTML pages created by the user. They are created in the HTML editor by simply inserting customized graphic objects (FactoryCast Java beans).

(1) Creation of user Web pages: User Web pages created in the FactoryCast HMI environment are actual animated supervision screens and can be used to monitor your process. Based on HMI Web technology, they enable realtime access to PLC variables thanks to the FactoryCast graphic objects library (FactoryCast Java beans).

Presentation: Pages 5/12 to 5/14

5/20




5


Description, characteristics, references

5


Description The TSX WMY 100 (for Premium platform) and 140 NWM 100 00 (for Quantum platform) modules are equipped with the following on the front panel:

1

1 A display block, which indicates the module status and the transmission status of the Ethernet TCP/IP network. 2 An RJ45 connector (with Premium/Quantum) and an MTRJ connector for a 100BASE-FX interface (with Quantum).

2

To be ordered separately: Accessories and connecting cables, see Ethernet ConneXium wiring system (see page 5/40). TSX WMY 100

140 NWM 100 00

Characteristics FactoryCast HMI module type Modicon automation platform

TSX WMY 100

140 NWM 100 00

Premium

Quantum

Communication services Interface Connection type

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 100BASE-TX and 100BASE-FX Point-to-point connection (via a standard RJ45 connector), which enables the formation of a (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) star network (the stations are linked to ConneXium hubs or switches). 64 stations maximum per network 10/100 Mbit/s with automatic speed recognition

Number of stations Transmission speed

Ethernet communication services Network management TCP/IP services

Uni-TE

Modbus X-Way services

SNMP agent, supports standard MIB II and private Transparent Ready MIB v Client/server mode – v Client/server requests of 256 bytes (synchronous mode) v Client/server requests of 1 K byte (asynchronous mode) v Client/server mode v Asynchronous requests of 256 bytes v X-Way inter-network routing – v X-Way/Uni-Telway routing v Module diagnostics

5 5.1

Web server services Embedded Web server

Standard services FactoryCast services

FactoryCast HMI services

v v v v v v v v

“Rack Viewer” PLC diagnostics “Data Editor” access to PLC data and variables “Alarm Viewer” alarm display “Graphic Data Editor” graphic object editor Display of user Web pages (8 Mb available) HMI database (1000 variables, maximum) E-mail transmission (100, maximum) Connection to SQL Server, MySQL and Oracle databases: connection to 3 databases max., 10 tables maximum in write mode per database; v Interpreted arithmetic and logical calculations v Simulator for debugging the HMI application offline

References Ethernet TCP/IP Transparent Ready modules Embedded Web server FactoryCast HMI

Name and description FactoryCast HMI Premium module FactoryCast HMI Quantum module

Speed

Reference

10/100 Mbit/s

TSX WMY 100

100 Mbit/s

140 NWM 100 00

Weight kg 0.340 -

FactoryCast HMI installation software (to be ordered separately) Name and Use description Multilingual Development and FactoryCast HMI (1) debugging of the HMI application

TSX WMY 100

Operating system Windows 2000, Windows XP

Reference

Weight kg TLX CD FCHMI V1M 0.340

(1) Includes documentation in electronic format. 140 NWM 100 00 Presentation: Pages 5/12 to 5/14


5/21


Presentation

5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service

Presentation Transparent Ready products allow transparent communication on a single Ethernet TCP/IP network.

Network management

Applications

SNMP

Transport

Link

Physical

Time synchronization NTP

Global Data RTPS

Automatic FDR reconfiguration

DHCP

TFTP

FTP

Web server

E-mail

HTTP

SMTP

UDP

TCP Open

Modbus I/O Scanning

Modbus

TCP

IP

Message handling

MIB Transparent Ready

Services

Ethernet 802.3 and Ethernet II

In addition to universal Ethernet services (HTTP, BOOTP/DHCP, FTP, etc), the Transparent Ready device communication services designed for use in automation applications include: b Modbus TCP messaging for class 10, 20 or 30 devices. b I/O Scanning service for class 30 devices. b FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) for class 10, 20 or 30 devices. b SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) network administration for class 20 or 30 devices. b Global Data, for class 30 devices. b Pass band management for class 30 devices (see performance levels on pages 5/34 to 5/37). b NTP (Network Time Protocol) time synchronization for class 30 devices. b Notification of SMTP events via E-mail for class 30 devices. b TCP Open, optional, for class 30 devices.

5 5.1

The following pages present the various options available through all of these services in order to facilitate the optimum choice of solutions when defining a system integrating Transparent Ready devices.

5/22

Functions


5


Functions Standard Ethernet services HTTP “Hypertext Transfer Protocol” (RFC1945) The HTTP protocol (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is used for transmitting Web pages between a server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since 1990. Web servers embedded into Ethernet TF devices are at the heart of the Transparent Ready concept, and are used to provide easy access to devices anywhere in the world from a standard browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. BOOTP/DHCP (RFC1531) BOOTP/DHCP is used to automatically provide the devices with the IP parameters. This avoids having to manage the addresses of each device individually. Management is instead performed in a dedicated IP address server. DHCP protocol (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used to automatically assign the devices their configuration parameters. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP. DHCP protocol is made up of 2 components: b One for providing the IP network address, b One for providing the IP parameters specific to the device from a DHCP server. Telemecanique devices can be: b BOOTP clients allowing automatic recovery of an IP address from a server, b BOOTP servers enabling a device to distribute IP addresses to the network stations. Telemecanique uses standard BOOTP/DHCP protocols for its Faulty Device Replacement service (FDR). FTP “File Transfer Protocol” (RFCs 959, 2228, et 2640)

5

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides basic file sharing elements. Many systems use FTP protocol to exchange files between devices. Transparent Ready devices implement FTP for transferring certain data to or from devices, in particular when downloading firmware or user Web pages.

5/23

5.1


Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Ethernet TCP/IP communication service

Functions (continued) Standard Ethernet services (continued) NTP “Network Time Protocol” (RFC 1305) NTP (Network Time Protocol) is used to synchronize the time of a client or server device from a time server. Depending on the network used, it provides the following time precisions based on the UTC: b Several milliseconds on a local area network (LAN). b Several tens of milliseconds on a wide area network (WAN). SMTP “Simple Mail Transfer Protocol” (RFC 0821) SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is an E-mail transmission service. It is used to send E-mail between a sender and a recipient via an SMTP E-mail server. SNMP “Simple Network Management Protocol” (RFCs 1155, 1156 et 1157) The Internet community developed standard SNMP for managing the different components of a network through a single system. The network management system can exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function enables the manager to view the status of the network and devices, modify their configuration and feed back alarms in the event of failure. Transparent Ready devices are SNMP-compatible and can be integrated naturally in a network managed via SNMP. COM/DCOM “Distributed Component Object Model” COM/DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) or OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) is the name of the technology used in Windows components. This enables Windows applications to communicate transparently.

5

These technologies are used in the OFS Data server software.

5.1

5/24

5



5


Modbus TCP/IP function codes dec hexa Bits access Read of n input bits 02 02 Read of n output bits 01 01 Exceptional read status 07 07 Write 1 output bit 05 05 Write of n output bits 15 0F Read of 1 input word 04 04 Read of n input words 03 03 Write 1 output word 06 06 Write of n output words 16 10 Read device ID 43/14 2B/0E Example of Modbus TCP/IP function codes supported for accessing data and diagnostics

Functions (continued) Modbus communication standard Modbus, the industrial communication standard since 1979, has been combined with Ethernet TCP/IP, which supports the Internet revolution, to make Modbus TCP/IP, a completely open Ethernet protocol. The development of a connection to Modbus TCP/IP requires no proprietary component or license purchase. This protocol may be easily combined with any device supporting a standard TCP/IP communication stack. Specifications can be obtained free of charge from the website: www.modbus-ida.org. Modbus TCP, simple and open The Modbus application layer is very simple and universally recognized. Thousands of manufacturers are already implementing this protocol. Many have already developed a Modbus TCP/IP connection and many products are currently available. The simplicity of Modbus TCP/IP enables any small field team, such as an I/O module, to communicate over Ethernet without the need for a powerful micro-processor or a lot of internal memory. Modbus TCP, high-performance Because of the simplicity of its protocol and the high speed of 100 M bits/s Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP delivers excellent performance. This means it is possible to use this type of network in real-time applications such as I/O Scanning. Modbus TCP/IP, one standard An identical application protocol is used for Modbus serial link, Modbus Plus or Modbus TCP. This therefore makes it possible to route messages from a network to another without changing protocol. As Modbus is implemented above the TCP/IP layer, users can also benefit from the IP routing which enables devices located anywhere in the world to communicate without having to worry about the distance between them. Schneider offers an entire range of gateways for interconnecting a Modbus TCP/IP network to already existing Modbus Plus or Modbus serial link networks. For further details, consult our regional sales office. The IANA institute (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) has assigned Schneider port TCP 502 (Well known port), which is reserved for the Modbus protocol. This protocol will shortly be also subject to an RFC (Request For Comments), documents which form standard references within the Internet community. Modbus TCP/IP characteristics Maximum size of data: b Read: 125 words or registers. b Write: 100 words or registers.

5/25

5 5.1



Functions (continued) I/O Scanning service Word table Read

Write

INPUT

OUTPUT + –

A

B

INPUT

OUTPUT + –

A

B

Ethernet TCP/IP

Input words Output words of devices

The I/O Scanning service can be used to manage the exchange of distributed I/Os on the Ethernet network after a simple configuration operation, with no need for special programming. The I/Os are scanned transparently by means of read/write requests according to the Modbus Master/Slave protocol on the TCP/IP profile. This principle of scanning via a standard protocol enables communication with any device which supports a Modbus server on TCP/IP. This service can be used to define: b An %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs. b An %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs. b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan. During operation, the module: b Manages the TCP/IP connections with each of the distributed devices. b Scans the devices and copies the I/Os into the configured %MW word zone. b Feeds back status words so that correct operation of the service can be monitored from the PLC application. b Applies the preconfigured fallback values in the event of a communication problem.

5 5.1

An offer of hardware and software products which enable the I/O Scanning protocol to be implemented on any type of product which can be connected to the Ethernet network (please consult: www.modbus-ida.org). Characteristics: b Each station can exchange a maximum of 120 words. b Maximum size in the PLC managing the service: v 2 K words %MW in inputs and 2 K words %MW in outputs with manager PLC (64 stations max.), v 4 K words %MW in inputs and 4 K words %MW in outputs with manager PLC (128 stations max.). I/O Scanning service diagnostics I/O Scanning service diagnostics can be performed in 3 ways: b By the application program from a data field specific to the PLC. b From the debugging screen in the installation software. b From the PLC system diagnostics function viewed with the Internet browser on a PC station.

5/26

5



5


Functions (continued) Replacement service for faulty devices (Faulty Device Replacement) The Faulty Device Replacement service uses the standard BOOTP, DHCP, file management and TFTP technologies with the objective of simplifying Ethernet device maintenance. It enables a faulty device to be replaced by a new product while guaranteeing its detection, reconfiguration, and automatic restart by the system, without difficult manual intervention. The principal steps are: b A device using the FDR service is faulty. b Another similar device is taken from the maintenance pool, preconfigured with the “role_name” (or identifier) of the device that is out of service, then reinstalled on the network. b The FDR server can be: v Premium processor with embedded Ethernet, v Quantum processor with embedded Ethernet, v Premium Ethernet module: TSX ETY, v Quantum Ethernet module: 140 NOE 771, detects the new addition, configures its IP address and transfers all configuration parameters to it. The substituted device verifies if all the parameters are indeed compatible with its own characteristics, then switches to operating mode.

5 5.1

5/27



5


Functions (continued) Global Data service

Distribution group 1 Data exchange of 4 Ko max. IP multicast 239.255.255.251

Ethernet TCP/IP

INPUT

OUTPUT + –

A

B

INPUT

OUTPUT + –

The Global Data service ensures data exchanges in real time between stations belonging to the same distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote applications, or share a common database among several distributed applications. The exchanges are based on a standard producer/consumer protocol, guaranteeing optimal performance while maintaining a minimum network load. This RTPS (Real Time Publisher Subscriber) protocol is promoted by the IDA (Interface For Distributed Automation) organization, and has already been adopted as a standard by several manufacturers.

A

B

IP multicast 239.255.255.250 Data exchange of 4 Ko max. Distribution group 2

Characteristics: A maximum of 64 stations can participate in Global Data within the same distribution group. Each station can: b Publish one 1024-byte variable. The publication period can be configured from 1 to n periods of the MAST task of the processor. b Subscribe to between 1 and 64 variables. Validity for each variable is controlled by Health Status Bits, linked to a refresh timeout configurable between 50 ms and 1 s. Access to a variable element is not possible. The total size of the subscribed variables reaches 4 K contiguous bytes. In order to optimize Ethernet network performance further still, Global Data can be configured with the “multicast filtering” option, which together with switches in the ConneXium range, perform data broadcasting only on Ethernet ports, where there is a Global Data service subscriber station. If these switches are not used, Global Data is transmitted in “multicast” on all switch ports

5 5.1

Global Data service diagnostics The diagnostics screens use a color code to show Global Data status: b Configured/not configured/faulty. b Published/subscribed. Unity Studio software suite: single Global Data entry point The Unity Studio software suite is the key component required on design office workstations used for designing and structuring distributed industrial automation projects. The Unity Studio Global Data view enables the definition of Global Data distribution groups and the configuration of settings for published and subscribed station variables. During generation at each station level, this setting configuration is saved automatically to station files, thereby ensuring:

Editeur de Global Data

5/28

b Guaranteed consistency of communication between the distributed applications in question. b Maximum productivity with respect to station configuration tasks. b Minimized risk of errors.



5


Functions (continued) NTP time synchronization service Presentation

Power supply

Processor

NTP server

Ethernet module

Internal clock

NTP request (S)NTP client

Ethernet network NTP response

Premium/Quantum

The time synchronization service is based on the NTP (Network Time Protocol) which is used to synchronize the time of a client or a server on Ethernet TCP/IP from a server or another reference time source (radio, satellite, etc). Operation The Ethernet TCP/IP communication modules in the Modicon Quantum Unity V2 and Premium Unity V2 automation platforms have an NTP client component. These modules can connect to an NTP server using a client request (unicast), in order to update their local time. The module clock is updated periodically (1 to 120 seconds) with an error of less than 10 ms for standard processors and less than 5 ms for high performance processors. If the NTP server cannot be reached, the Ethernet TCP/IP module switches to a standby NTP server. Unity module and processor used Ethernet modules Ethernet modules with Unity processor TSX ETY 4103 TSX P57 0244M TSX ETY 5103 TSX P57 1p4M TSX P57 2p4M TSX P57 3p4M TSX P57 4p4M TSX P57 5p4M

Predicted typical time service precision Clock synchronisation (1) Event synchronisation

140 NOE 771 01 140 NOE 771 11

± 1 ms typical ± 10 ms max.

140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 651 50 140 CPU 651 60 140 CPU 671 60




Time stamping (2)

= Clock synchronisation precision

= Clock synchronisation precision

+

+

Fast task time

I/O time

+ I/O time

(1) Time difference between field input and central NTP server. (2) Assuming input connected to the interrupt module.

The PLC processor clock is therefore itself updated with a precision of 5 ms for standard processors and 1 ms for high performance processors. A function block is available for reading this clock. In each PLC application, events or variables can be time-stamped. The Ethernet module is configured via a Web page. The time zone can be configured. A time synchronization service (NTP) diagnostic Web page is also available. Information on the time synchronization service (NTP) is also available in the Transparent Ready private MIB, which can be accessed via the SNMP network management service (see above).

5/29

5 5.1



Functions (continued) Electronic mail notification SMTP service Introduction This simple mail notification service is a programmed service that allows PLC applications to report by exception conditions monitored by the PLC. The automation controller can automatically and dynamically create electronic mail to alert specified users with data, alarms and events - whether the recipients are local or remote. Note: This service is available on the latest Premium and Quantum Ethernet modules & CPUs, when operating with Unity Pro software. A more comprehensive mail service, independent of the PLC application, is available on the FactoryCast HMI active web server modules (see page 5/15). Usage A simple yet powerful mechanism is used. Predefined email headers are linked together with the body of the mail which is created dynamically from the latest information in the automation application. The user logic program can trigger the message based on a predefined event or condition. Using a function block, one of 3 predefined headers is selected and an email message with variable information and text (up to a maximum of 240 bytes) is created and sent directly from the PLC. Each of the three mail headers contains these common predefined items –email recipient list, sender name and subject. This information can be defined and updated by an authorized administrator using the configuration web pages. Message creation and delivery The PLC application selects the appropriate header. The system architect may define the mail headers to indicate differing importance levels. For example : b Header 1 could be “URGENT problem reported by PLC 10”, b Header 2 might be “WARNING at substation 10”, b Header 3 could be “INFO message from water system”.

5 5.1

Differing lists of recipients between the three headers help to ensure that the right information quickly flows to the right recipients. The application can then add pertinent information to the body of the mail message such as the specific device, process or location. Completed mail is then sent to an electronic mail server for expeditious distribution to the interested parties. These recipients could be engineers, managers, process owners etc. Security Each mail message can be protected by an optional login and password that is authenticated by the SMTP mail server. If, for additional security, the site’s mail installation has changed the TCP port number from the default of 25, the port number can be changed in the PLC email configuration (via secured web page access). Configuration An authorized administrator can use a web page to easily configure the mail service. For each of the three mail headers, the sender; recipient list and subject message can be defined. The electronic mail server connection information such as IP address and security information can also be set from the web page. Diagnostics As all other Ethernet services in Premium and Quantum systems, the Mail Service has a Diagnostic Web page showing the complete, up to the second, status. Remote Monitoring These products provide diagnostic information for remote management applications following the SNMP network management standard. Information for the mail service is included in the Schneider Electric private MIB which is publicly available.

5/30

5



5


Functions (continued) SNMP service protocol The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) protocol is used, from a network management station, to monitor and control all Ethernet architecture components and thus ensure rapid diagnostics if a problem occurs. It is used to: b Query devices such as computer stations, routers, switches, bridges or terminal devices (DTE) in order to view their status. b Obtain statistics for the network on which the devices are connected. This management software respects the traditional Client/Server model. However, in order to avoid confusion with other communication protocols using this terminology, we prefer to use the expression: b Network manager for the Client application running on the computer station. b SNMP agent for the server application that runs on the device. Transparent Factory can be managed by any SNMP network manager, including HP Openview or IBM Netview. Standard SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used to access configuration and management objects included in the MIB (Management Information Base) for the devices. These MIBs must comply with certain standards in order to be accessed by all managers on the market. However, depending on the device complexity, manufacturers can add certain objects to the private databases. The Transparent Factory private MIB includes management objects specific to the Telemecanique offer. These objects simplify installation, implementation, and maintenance for Transparent Factory products in an open environment using standard network management tools. The Transparent Factory products support 2 SNMP network management levels: b Standard MIB II, a first level of network management, can be accessed via this interface. It lets the manager identify the devices forming the architecture and retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of the Ethernet TCP/IP interfaces. b MIB Transparent Factory interface; management of the Transparent Factory devices is improved via this interface. This MIB includes a set of data that enables the network management system to supervise all the Transparent Factory services. The Transparent Factory private MIB can be downloaded from the Web server from any Ethernet Transparent Factory module in a PLC.

5/31

5 5.1


Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready

TCP Open optional service Presentation TSX ETY 110 WS/5103 Premium platform Ethernet modules support a number of communication protocols based on the TCP/IP standard. Among these, the Modbus protocol has public specifications and its simplicity recommends it for the needs of communication with third-party devices. Ethernet TCP/IP profile Modbus protocol Direct Socket access (TCP Open) Modbus

TCP

IP

ISO 8802.2-ISO 8802.3

5

ISO 8802.3 Ethernet 10/100 M bit/s

However, for certain applications, it may prove necessary to use other protocols. This is the case when, for example, users wish to integrate Premium platforms into existing architectures which use a particular communication protocol, possibly a proprietary one. To meet these needs for open access, 2 interface levels are included in the Telemecanique offer: b A library of basic functions, which can be used in C language, enables direct access to the socket interface on TCP. The user can thus create his own communication functions using SDKC development software and take advantage of the ease of use which this program offers in terms of development and debugging. Once generated, these function blocks are used in the application like any standard PL7 programming software function block. b A library of basic function blocks known as EFs, which can be used directly in the application programs with PL7 language. These are the same as functions developed in C language seen earlier, but are designed for use by non-computer specialists. These EF function blocks are not modifiable.

5.1

Functions Operating in TCP connection client/server mode, the basic functions on the Berkeley socket interface enable: b Management of 16 connections on the Open profile out of a maximum of 32 b Creation of sockets and their attachment to any TCP port. b Switching of these sockets to "listen for a connection request from a remote client" mode. b Opening of a connection. b Transmission and reception of data on these connections (8 bytes max.). b Closing this connection.

5/32


Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready

TCP Open optional service (continued) Description The TCP Open offer consists of a CD-ROM containing the TCP/IP function libraries. Open access on TCP is only possible via TSX ETY 110WS (1) and TSX ETY 5103 Ethernet modules. With open access on TCP, all the basic functions of these modules can be used. The TCP/IP TLX CD TCP 50M function library comprises: b The SDKC program enhancement library that provides access to the module TCP/IP socket functions b The user's manual in English (no printed version) b EF elementary communication function blocks (Socket/Bind/Listen/Accept/ Shutdown/Close/Send/Receive/Select/Set_Socket Option/Connect) for installation using PL7 software (version u V3.3) b Higher level EF function blocks, provided by way of example, which can perform more advanced functions such as the complete sequence for establishing or closing a connection, or sending or receiving data. The source files for all these EF blocks are also supplied b An example of a PL7 application communicating with a TELNET application on a PC If customised function blocks are needed both the SDKC program for C language TLX L SDKC PL741M (with PL7) or UNY SPU ZU CD 20E (with Unity Pro) and the library of function blocks TCP Open TLX CD TCPA33E should be installed on the development station. Setup precautions The development of C language functions requires compliance with certain setup precautions: b To set up these services, the user should be familiar with the TCP/IP profile b In addition, since the SDKC program enables access to all the PLC internal resources, all the necessary precautions should be taken when developing EF communication blocks to avoid endangering the PL7 application, especially on the commonly fragile operating modes such as cold/warm restarts, response to a fault, etc b The user should also take care to maintain the requests from the different communication profiles at a level compatible with the performance required by the application b Finally, it is the responsibility of the client application software (PL7 or C program) to manage the operating modes for communication which may be specific to the application, for example the behavior if a remote device fails to respond or in the event of a break in connection For these different reasons, we recommend that you consult your Regional Sales Office to ensure that your TCP protocol open access project is feasible. (1) Open access on TCP requires TSX ETY 110 WS modules, version u PV 03 and SV 2.9. In addition, it should be integrated on a configuration with a TSX P57 pp3 processor (or TSX P57 pp2 version > V3.3).

5/33

5 5.1

Performances


5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready Performances

Selecting the communication architecture When selecting an architecture, it is advisable to take performance into account at the earliest possible stage. For this, the designer must: 1 Have a clear idea of his needs as regards: v quantity and type of devices to be interconnected, v volume and type of exchanges, v expected response times, v environment. 2 Compare his needs with the characteristics of the offers available and be aware that the precise performance level between any 2 points on an architecture is dependent on the weakest link in the chain, which can be: v a function of the hardware, v but also a function of the applications (size, architecture, OS, machine power, etc.) which are often poorly defined at this stage of project. 3 Select the most suitable architecture. The objective of the following pages is to answer the second point by explaining the performance of the different components which constitute an Ethernet architecture, concentrating on the following 2 aspects: b Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges (see pages 5/29 and 5/30). b Application response time (see page 5/31).

Introduction As in any communication system, the performance of an Ethernet architecture is linked to numerous parameters which depend on the: b Hardware used: v network bandwidth, v resources of module or CPU with Ethernet embedded, v processor resources (PLC, PC or other CPUs). b Application services used: v Modbus (or Uni-TE) industrial messaging handling service, v Global Data service, data scanning between PLC, v I/O Scanning service, data scanning of distributed I/O, v Others (Web access, TCP Open communication). The difficulty in determining the correct size of an architecture is due to the fact that the majority of these parameters are linked.

5 5.1

Nota : For purposes of simplification, the values shown in the tables which follow have been reduced. If these are adhered to, correct operation of the architecture is ensured. If the performance levels obtained are not sufficient, please consult our Regional Sales Office for a more detailed study. Nota : The performance levels indicated depend relatively little on the size of messages. Limiting factors have much more to do with the number of messages. It is therefore necessary to group as much useful information as possible within the same message using the most suitable Modbus request.

Processing capacity in terms of volume of exchanges The methodology presented below in 4 steps can be used to determine the message processing capacity on Ethernet TCP/IP. Step 1: calculation of exchanges necessary for the application Using the tables below, calculate the exchanges necessary for the application, i.e. for each station on the architecture and for each service used, the number of messages to be transmitted and received per second. Messages transmitted per second from Total number Station A Station B Station N of messages received per station Messages per Station A R1 second sent to R2 Station B Station N Ri Total number of messages E1 transmitted per station Not applicable

5/34

E2

Ei

Network load Cru = Σ [R1…Ri, E1…Ei]

Performances (continued)


5


Step 2: station processor processing capacity, system requests Using the table below, compare the total number of messages received via the Modbus and Uni-TE service for each station (value R1, R2 or Ri) with the station processor processing capacity. If the result of this initial calculation is positive, go to step 3. Premium or Atrium platform

Messages being received Messages being transmitted Communication by EFs or EFBs (PL7 or Unity Pro) Modbus requests TSX 57 10 4 mes/cyc Does not constitute a (1) limiting factor TSX 57 20 8 mes/cyc TSX 57 30 TSX 57 40 TSX 57 50 (2) Quantum platform

12 mes/cyc 16 mes/cyc 16/20 mes/cyc Messages being received Messages being transmitted Communication by EFs or EFBs (Concept, ProWORX or Unity Pro) Modbus requests CPU 113 02/03 (3) 1 mes/cyc 4 mes/cyc (1) CPU 311 10 (2) 1 mes/cyc 4 mes/cyc CPU 434 12p 1 mes/cyc 4 mes/cyc 1 mes/cyc 4 mes/cyc CPU 534 14p CPU 651 p0 (2) 16 mes/cyc (4) 4 mes/cyc CPU 671 60 (2) 16 mes/cyc (4) 4 mes/cyc mes/cyc: number of messages being received per cycle from the PLC master task (typical cycle from 50 to 100 ms).

Step 3: bus or network module processing capacity For each station, compare the total number of messages received (Σ [values Ri, Rj] and the total number of messages transmitted (Σ [values Ei, Ej] for station N, for example) with the bus or network processing capacity shown below. If the result of this second calculation is positive, go to step 4. Processing capacity of Ethernet connections

Message transactions

Premium Ethernet TCP/IP TSX ETY 110/210 TSX ETY 4103/5103 TSX ETY 110WS TSX WMY 100 (5) TSX P57 10/20/30/40 60 transactions/s 450 transactions/s

Scanning I/O polling

Service not available

Global Data subscriptions

TSX P57 50

Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP 140 NOE 771 pp 140 CPU 65 150/160 140 NWM 100 00 (5) 140 CPU 67 160

500 transactions/s

350 transactions/s

350 transactions/s

2000 transactions/s

2000 transactions/s

2000 transactionsIs

2000 transactions/s

800 transactions/s

800 transactions/s

800 transactions/s

800 transactions/s

Characteristics summary b Modbus requests: v 125 words or registers in read access, v 100 words or registers in write access. b Global Data: 1024-word published variable, subscription to a maximum of 64 variables, with a maximum size of 2 K %MW. b I/O Scanning with maximum size in the PLC managing the service: v 2 K %MW in input and 2 K %MW in output with manager PLC limited to 64 stations, v 4 K %MW in output and 4 K %MW in output with manager PLC limited to 128 stations (TSX P57 50, 140 CPU 65 150/160 and 140 CPU 67 160).

(1) A temporary overload on several PLC cycles, due, for example, to an adjustment terminal or the temporary connection of an Internet browser, is acceptable. (2) Only with Unity Pro. (3) Only with Concept/ProWORX. (4) With Unity Pro version V2.0, 1 message/cycle with version V1.0. (5) I/O Scanning and Global Data services are not available for TSX WMY 100 and 140 NWM 100 00.

5/35

5 5.1



5


Step 3: bus or network module processing capacity (continued) Network bandwidth management in the Ethernet TCP/IP modules The bandwidth management service shows load level for the Ethernet module. This enables the user to monitor any drift and anticipate possible problems. Ethernet module load is indicated in 3 ways: b Anticipated load in the PL7 configuration screen. b Actual load in the PL7 diagnostics/debugging screen, as well as in Web diagnostics pages. The load is displayed as a bar graph, animated in real time. b In the SNMP interface for access to the SNMP network manager. The bandwidth is shown as a percentage for each of the following services: b Modbus (and Uni-TE) message handling. b I/O Scanning. b Global Data. b Other.

Step 4: network load In spite of the large bandwidth of an Ethernet Network (100 Mbit/s), the user must ensure that the actual application load does not exceed 25 to 30 % of the hypothetical network capacity. If this should occur, this load must be reduced via a switched architecture (use of switches). See page 5/38.

Application response time Event

Report

For the Modbus (or Uni-TE) messaging handling service

TT CT1 CT1

5

Station 1

CT1 CT1

NAT

NAT

CT2 CT2

5.1

Station 2

PLC-module processor exchanges are synchronous with the PLC cycle, in the same manner as the input/output exchanges. When an event appears, (input switching to 1 for example), a message can only be transmitted after this input has been taken into consideration (start of the following cycle) and the PLC program has been executed, i.e. approximately 1.5 cycles after the event has appeared. Network access time (NAT) shown in the table below as ms, totals the module transit time and the delay before the message can be transmitted across the network.

Action

Processing Modbus message Premium Ethernet TCP/IP TSX ETY 110/210 requests TSX ETY 110WS < 25 ms

Network access time NAT

TSX ETY 4103/5103 TSX WMY 100 TSX P57 10...57 50 < 10 ms

Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP 140 NOE 771 pp 140 CPU 113/311 pp 140 CPU 434/534 1p < xx ms

140 CPU 65 150/160 140 CPU 67 160 < 10 ms

Transaction time TT includes the delay between the transmission of a message from a client station 1, its reception by a server station 2, processing the request, sending back the response and its acceptance by station 1 (update of an output for example). As the block diagram above shows: b The duration of the transaction will be between: TT = 2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT < TT < 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT b Average duration is: TTave = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT For the Global Data service Top synchro

Return synchro Transaction time TT

CT

CT Publication NAT

5/36

Station 1

NAT

Subscription CT

CT

Publication CT

Station 2

The transaction time (TT) includes the delay between publication of a Global Data by station 1, its reception and processing by remote station 2 and its retransmission to the initial station 1: For an exchanged variable: TT = 5 to 6 x CT b If CT < 5 ms, transaction time: b If CT u 10 ms, transaction time: TT = 3 x CT



5


Application response time (continued) I/O Scanning service Manager

CT

The RT application response time include the delay between getting data from a remote input and up dating remote output. It includes PLC application treatment time.

Ethernet TCP/IP RT Hub

This RT response time is composed of following parameters: Device 1 Output

Device 2

Input TMod In

TIOS In TNet NxCycleT TIOS Out TNet TMod Out

Response time (RT)

Output

b TMod In and TMod Out: response time of the read/written device excluding the input circuit transition (TMod depends of the device, but commonly between 1 to 8 ms). b TIOS In and TIOS Out: time between two scanning of the same read device (0.3 ms x number of device scanned and at least the pooling rate configured. TIOS is executed in parallel of the CPU cycle time, so could be hidden for the RT response time). b N: number of PLC CPU cycles. b CycleT: CPU cycle time. b Tnet: propagation time on the network (depending of the application, but commonly Tnet is 0.05 ms at 10 Mbit/s and 0.005ms at 100 Mbit/s).

5

The RT response time could be estimated using the following formulas: b TRmin, minimal response time with TIOS hidden and 1 CycleT: TRmin = Tmod In + 0 x TIOS In + Tnet + 1 x CycleT + 0 x TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out b TRtypic, typical response time (with 0,5 TIOS hidden and 2 CycleT: TRtypic = TMod In + 0.5 x TIOS In + Tnet + 2 x CycleT + 0.5 x TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out b TRmax, maximal response time with TIOS not hidden and 3 CycleT: TRmax = TMod In + TIOS In + Tnet + 3 x CycleT + TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out The TMod In and TMod out response time are shown below: Type of distributed I/O Momentum 170 ENT 110 02

Response time TMod In TMod Out TMod In or TMod Out TMod In or TMod Out

Momentum 170 ENT 110 01 Advantys STB NIP 2212

Mini 1 ms 5 ms 4 ms 2 ms

Typical 1 ms 5 ms 6 ms 3 ms

Maxi 1 ms 5 ms 8 ms 4 ms

The TIOS In and TIOS Out times mesured between two scanning are shown below: Mesured TIOS (Network with switches)

25 20 Time (ms)

Input

15 10 5 0

1

5

10

20

30

40

50

60

Number of scanning products

5/37

5.1


Description, characteristics, references

Processors with integrated Ethernet port

Description 7 1

2

12

3

7 5 4 6 8 9

TSX P57 1634M, TSX P 26pp/2823/36pp/4634/4823/5634M double format processors (1) with built-in Ethernet port include the following on the front panel: 1 A display block with 5 LEDs relating to the processor. 2 A display block relating to the built-in Ethernet port. 3 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal. 4 A USB connector marked TER for connecting a programming or adjustment terminal. 5 An 8-way female mini-DIN connector marked AUX for connecting an RS 485 peripheral device. 6 A standard (RJ45) connector for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface. 7 A slot for a PCMCIA memory extension card. 8 A slot for a PCMCIA communication or data storage memory extension card. 9 A 9-way SUB-D connector (on TSX P57 2823/4823M models) for Fipio bus manager link.

Characteristics Type of module

Unity Pro software PL7 Pro software

Transparent Class Ready Standard Web server services

5 Structure

5.1

Premium processor

Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced communication Global Data services FDR server SMTP E-mail notification SNMP network administrator Pass band management Physical interface Data rate Medium No. of discrete I/O No. of analog I/O No. of application-specific channels Max. no. of network connections (including integrated link) Other TCP/IP Uni-TE TCP communication X-Way service Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards LED indicators

TSX P57 1634M TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 3634M TSX P57 4634M TSX P57 5634M – TSX P57 2p23M TSX P57 3624M TSX P57 4823M – B30 “Rack Viewer” access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics “Data editor” access to the configuration functions and PLC variables Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words) Yes (between 64 stations) Yes (128 stations) Yes Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters Yes Yes Yes 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair 512 1024 2048 24 80 128 256 512 8 24 32 64 1 3 4 5 Client/server requests: 128 bytes in synchronous mode and 1 Kb in asynchronous mode Yes 0…+ 60°C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e Ethernet network status (RUN), transmission/reception activity (TX/RX) Collision detection (COL), Ethernet link diagnostics (STS), Ethernet port fault (ERR) 5 LEDs specific to the operation of the processor (RUN, ERR, I/O, TER and FIP)


Discrete I/O Reference Analog I/O App-sp. chann. Unity software Processors with 512 / 24 / 8 TSX P57 1634M integrated 1024 / 80 / 24 TSX P57 2634M Ethernet link – 1024 / 128 / 32 TSX P57 3634M Class B30 2048 / 256 / 64 TSX P57 4634M 2048 / 512 / 64 TSX P57 5634M (1) Except TSX P57 1634M processor, single format. (2) Also has an integrated Fipio bus manager link.

TSX P57 4634/5634M

5/38

TSX P57 26/28/36/48ppM

Weight kg PL7 software – TSX P57 2623M TSX P57 2823M TSX P57 3623M TSX P57 4823M –

0.042 0.042 (2) (2)

0.042 0.042


Presentation, description, characteristics, references

Ethernet network module

Presentation TSX ETY ppp modules are single format modules which are installed in a rack slot on Modicon Premium PLC stations or Modicon Atrium coprocessors. A configuration can take from 1 to 4 network modules, depending on the type of processor. TSX ETY 110/110 WS/4103/5103 Ethernet modules route X-Way and Uni-TE messages transparently from a TCP/IP network to an X-Way network and vice versa.

1 2

Description The front panel of TSX ETY ppp modules comprises: 1 A display block indicating the state of the module. 2 A standard connector for 100BASE-TX and/or /100BASE-T interface (RJ45) depending on the model. 3 A standard connector for 10BASE5 interface (AUI). 4 Four thumbwheels for defining the station number and network number.

3 4

Characteristics Type of module Transparent Class Ready Standard Web server services FactoryCast configurable Web server User Web pages (available size) FactoryCast HMI active Web server Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced Global Data communication FDR server services NTP time synchronization SMTP e-mail notification SNMP network administrator TCP Open Pass band management Structure

Network module

Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Other TCP/IP Uni-TE TCP communication service Ethway/X-Way Conformity to standards LED indicators

TSX ETY 110 A10 –

TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 5103 TSX WMY 100M C10 B30 C30 D10 “Rack Viewer” access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics “Data editor” access to the configuration functions and variables – Yes – Yes – Yes (1.4 Mb) – Yes (8 Mb) – Yes (1) Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words) – – –

Yes (between 64 stations) Yes Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters Yes Yes

– – –

5

– – – – SNMP agent – Option – Option – – Yes – 10BASE-T (RJ45)/10BASE5 (AUI) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10 Mbps 10/100 Mbps with automatic recognition Twisted pair/AUI cable Twisted pair 0…+ 60°C 10...95% non condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor Client/server requests: 128 bytes in synchronous mode and 1 Kb in – asynchronous mode Uni-TE, common words – IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 1010-1, FM Class 1 Division 2 Group A/B/C/D, e Ethernet network status (RUN), transmission/reception activity (TX/RX) Collision detection (COL), Ethernet port fault (ERR)

5.1


Data rate

Ethernet TCP/IP 10 Mbit/s modules 10/100 Mbit/s

FactoryCast HMI software TCP Open software (2) TSX ETY 110/110 WS

Transparent Ready class A10 C10 B30 C30 D10

HMI application development and debugging in TSX WMY 100 SDKC, C language development TCP Open function block library

Reference TSX ETY 110 TSX ETY 110 WS TSX ETY 4103 TSX ETY 5103 TSX WMY 100

Weight kg 0.370 0.370 0.340 0.340 0.340

TLX CD FCHMI V1M

–

TLX LSDKC PL741M TLX CD TCPA33E

– –

TSX ETY p103/WMY 100 (1) Database management, arithmetic and logic calculations, automatic e-mail transmission on process event, connection to relational databases. (2) With TSX ETY 110 WS and TSX ETY 5103 modules.

5/39


Presentation, characteristics

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system

Presentation Industrial Ethernet networks can use various standards. In each case, a set of rules must be respected when determining what topology will be produced and with what performance level. The ConneXium offer comprises a complete family of industrial products used to build a network architecture: hubs, switches, transceivers and cables. Wiring rules pertaining to the ConneXium offer are described on pages 5/34 to 5/39.

Characteristics General characteristics for industrial Ethernet standards Standard

Date rate (Mbit/s)

Medium

Type of connector

Advantages

15-way SUB-D (AUI)

Useable bandwidth (on automation network) 8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s

10BASE5

10

Thick coaxial cable (yellow)

10BASE-T

10

Twisted shielded pair (SFTP) (1)

RJ45

8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s

Cost

10BASE-FL

10

Fibre optic (generally 62.5/125 multimode 1300 µm (2)

ST or MT-RJ

8 %, i.e. 800 Kbit/s

Immunity, confidentiality

100BASE-TX

100

Shielded twisted pair (SFTP)

RJ45

40 %, i.e. 40 Mbit/s

Data rate (x 50)

100BASE-FX

100

Fibre optics

SC or MT-RJ

40 %, i.e. 40 Mbit/s

Immunity

5

Cost, Ethway compatibility

(1) SFTP cables (Shielded and Foiled Twisted Pair) are available in 2 versions: v UL 1581 vertical tray, NFC 32070 level C1, IEC 332-1. v Reaction to fire compliant with NFC 32 070 # class C2 and IEC 332-1, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) and UL 1581 VW1. (2) The mutimode fiber is Low Smoke Zero Halogen as per HD.624-7, with reaction to fire complying with NFC 32 070 # class C2 and IEC 332-1.

5.1

Installation principles The Ethernet 802.3 Link Layer is based on a collision detection mechanism (CSMA CD). Each station (DTE, Data Terminal Equipment) sends its data when necessary and verifies if the frame has been correctly propagated. If a collision with a frame sent by another station is detected, the station repeats the message after a timeout, which increases the network load and thus the probability that another collision will occur. The transceivers or hubs (repeaters) are used to regenerate the signal once the physical limits of the medium have been reached. They also propagate collisions, if there are any. Because of the transmission time needed to send data from one end of the network to the other, a maximum network length exists, beyond which collisions might not be detected by the sender. For this reason, and for each technology, a network size limit has been set. This is described as the “maximum network diameter” within a same collision domain.


5/40

Installation rules: pages 5/40 to 5/45

Installation rules

Modicon Premium automation platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system

Architectures in a same collision domain Various architectures may exist, depending on each standard: b Line or bus topology, using transceivers. b Star network topology, using hubs. b Tree network topology, using hubs. Transceivers are also used for transmitting signals between 2 dissimilar media such as fiber optic and twisted pair cables. In addition, the hubs (or concentrators) are also used to transmit signals among several media (ports). The transceivers and hubs are “plug and play” devices. Line or bus topology

Star topology

DTE

DTE

Transceiver

DTE

Hub

DTE

10BASE5

Tree topology

DTE

DTE

Hub

DTE

DTE

10BASE-T, 10BASE-F, 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX

DTE

10BASE-T, 10BASE-F, 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX

Note: in the information that follows, the terms “hubs” and “repeaters” are used interchangeably. Rule 1: to respect the “maximum network diameter” within a same collision domain Depending on the Ethernet standard employed, the network size can vary. To define the correct architecture, the 2 constraints of maximum segment length and maximum network diameter must be respected. The Schneider Electric ConneXium performances make it possible, in some situations, to surpass the limits of the 802.3 standard. Ethernet standard

Maximum segment length (physical limit)

Maximum network diameter (limited by collisions)

Type

According to standard 802.3

According to standard 802.3

With ConneXium products

10BASE5

500 m (50 m for a drop cable)

1.800 m (2.800 m with fiber optic segment)

10BASE-T

100 m

500 m

1.000 m

2.500 m

3.100 m (1)

2.000 m 10BASE-FL or mixed (FL and T) 100BASE-TX 100 m 100BASE-FX in Half Duplex 100BASE-FX in Full Duplex

3.100 m (1)

412 m

3,000 m with multimode 15.000 m with monomode (1) (1) Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation.


With ConneXium products

2.000 m

200 m 228 m or 412 m between 2 DTE devices 228 m or 412 m between 2 DTE devices


5/41

5 5.1

Installation rules (continued)


Installation rules (continued) Rule 2: for each technology, respect the following rules within the same collision domain 10BASE5

Between 2 DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) devices, a maximum of 2 repeaters or 1 repeater with 2 half-repeaters (half-repeaters ensure transmission between a copper and a fiber optic medium): b Drop cable, 50 m length max., b One segment, 500 m length max., b Between 2 fiber optic half-repeaters, 1000 m length max. Examples: b All copper, 1,800 m length max. Segment

Segment

Segment

500 m

500 m

500 m

DTE

50 m

50 m 50 m Hub/repeater


50 m

DTE

b Mixed copper/fiber optic, 2,800 m length max.

Segment 500 m

Segment 500 m

Segment 500 m 1,000 m

DTE

5

50 m


50 m Half-repeater

50 m Half-repeater

50 m

DTE

10BASE-T/10BASE-F

Between 2 DTE devices, a maximum of 5 segments and 4 hubs (or repeaters).

5.1

b Topology of 5 segments and 4 hubs (or repeaters): each 10BASE-FL segment must have a length of < 500 m. b Topology of 4 segments and 3 hubs (or repeaters): the 10BASE-FL inter-repeater segments must have a length of < 1,000 m, and the 10BASE-FL segments between hub and DTE devices must have a length of < 400 m. Examples: In the following 2 topologies, distances are usually given for the 10BASE-T standard, with distances for the 10BASE-F standard within parentheses. Hub/repeater

Hub/repeater

100 m (500 m)

Hub/repeater

Hub/repeater

100 m (500 m)

DTE

100 m (500 m)

100 m (500 m)

100 m (500 m)

Maximum 500 m in 10BASE-T, 2,500 m in 10BASE-F.

Hub/repeater Hub/repeater

Hub/repeater

100 m 100 m (1,000 m) (1,000 m)

DTE

100 m (400 m)

100 m (400 m)

Maximum 400 m in 100BASE-TX, 2,800 m in 100BASE-FX


5/42


DTE

DTE



Installation rules (continued) Rule 2: for each technology, respect the following rules within the same collision domain (continued) 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX

This Ethernet standard defines 2 classes of hubs (or repeaters): b Class 1 hubs: Maximum of 1 hub in a same collision domain. b Class 2 hubs (for ConneXium repeaters): Maximum of 2 hubs in a same collision domain. Examples: In the following 4 topologies, distances are usually given for the 100BASE-TX standard, with distances for the 100BASE-FX standard within parentheses. Class 1 hub/repeater

DTE

100 m

100 m (200 m)

Class 1 hub/repeater

DTE

DTE

200 m max. in 100BASE-TX, 300 m in mixed

160 m

DTE

320 m max. in 100BASE-FX


DTE

160 m


5m 100 m

DTE 100 m (111 m)

5

205 m max. in 100BASE-TX, 216 m in mixed Class 2 hub/repeater

DTE


28 m 100 m

100 m

5.1

DTE

228 m max. in 100BASE-FX



5/43



Architectures with several collision domains Switched devices enable the limits of the above-described architectures to be increased. Switches are used for communicating between 2 or more collision domains. Communication for the upper layers is guaranteed among the different ports and collisions at the link layer level are not propagated (filtering). Switches are “plug and play” devices that can be remotely administered via SNMP or HTTP. They essentially contribute 2 functions: b Extension of the architecture to surpass the “maximum network diameter”. b Improvement of performance by a better allocation of bandwidth due to reduction in collisions and network load. In addition, switches in the ConneXium range support multicast filtering via the standard GARP/GMRP protocol, which optimizes performances of the Global Data service. With these products, multicast frames are transmitted only on switch ports where stations subscribing to the Global Data service are connected. ConneXium switches also support the Faulty Device Replacement (FDR) service, as well as the Transparent Ready private MIB for managing devices via the SNMP network management protocol. Rule 3: to be respected when switches are used b Switches are DTE devices that can be connected to hubs or directly connected to devices. Rules 1 and 2, mentioned previously, thus apply. b When 2 switches are connected, the line can be in Full Duplex, which removes the risk of collisions and allows the effective data rate to be doubled. The rules related to the collision domain thus do not apply, and only those imposed by the physical limits should be observed. For example, 2 switches may be connected on their 100BASE-FX ports via a fiber optic cable 3,000 m in length.

5

Examples: Collision domain 1 DTE

5.1 DTE

DTE

Collision domain 2 DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

Site 1

Site 2

Switch

DTE

Switch 1

DTE

DTE

DTE

Switch 2

DTE

DTE

Collision domain 3

Switch used to isolate several collision domains (reduction of the network load in order to improve performance).

Switches used to extend the architecture to provide a link between 2 buildings, for example.

Maximum distances: b 100BASE-TX: 100 m between 2 switches. b 100BASE-FX: 2,000 m between 2 switches, 3,000 m with ConneXium switches and up to 40 km using monomode optical fiber (outside supply).


5/44




Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium wiring system

Routers In general, routers are used at the Enterprise's network level, in order to link different units or sites. They are sometimes associated with security functions such as firewalls for filtering remote access. A router must be configured to enable it to recognize where messages must be routed. Routing mechanisms are based on the IP address. Stations are grouped on the same subnet according to their IP addresses and their subnet mask. Every message addressed to a remote network will be transmitted to the router, which ensures routing to the correct destination. All of our Ethernet modules can be configured with a default gateway address and a subnet mask, complying with the IP standard. On the factory floor level, a switch is less expensive than a router, performs better, and is easier to install (“plug and play”).

Redundancy The architectures previously described can be created to have greater availability by using hubs or specific switches, linked to redundant copper or fiber optic rings. If the ring is broken, communication is seamlessly restored in less than 500 ms. These products are available with the possibility to create a redundant power supply. Associated with the Warm or Hot Standby offers, they guarantee maximum availability of the automation installations.

5

The various possible redundant topologies are: 1 10 Mbit/s copper or fiber optic redundant ring topology, with redundant hubs. 2 100 Mbit/s fiber optic ring redundant topology with redundant switches: maximum commutation time from the “normal” line to the “emergency” line of 500 ms for a redundant ring with 50 switches. 3 100 Mbit/s redundant fiber optic multiple ring topology with redundant switches: maximum commutation time from the “normal” line to the “emergency” line of 500 ms.

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE DTE

10 Mbit/s copper or fiber optic redundant ring

DTE

1,100 Mbit/s fiber optic ring

Redundant switches

100 Mbit/s fiber optic ring

Fiber optic ring 2

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

Fiber optic ring 3

Redundant hubs DTE

1


2

DTE

DTE

DTE

3


5/45

5.1


Presentation, characteristics, references

5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium hubs

Presentation Hubs (or concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media (ports). Hubs are “plug and play” devices that do not need any configuration. The use of hubs (or concentrators) makes it possible to create the following topologies: b Star topology using hubs. b Tree topology using hubs. See “Cabling system” page 5/35. Hub DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

Hub

Hub

Hub Hub

Hub DTE

DTE

Hub

DTE

DTE DTE

Star topology

Tree topology

Ring topology (with 499 NOH 105 10)

4 x 100BASE-TX ports

3 x 10BASE-T ports

Characteristics and references

5 Hubs Interfaces

5.1

Topology

Copper cable ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Line length

4 x 10BASE-T ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair 100 m

Optical fiber ports

– – – – –

Number and type Connectors Medium Line length Optical budget

Number of cascaded hubs Number of hubs in a ring

Redundancy

Power supply

Voltage Power consumption Removable terminal Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D mm (in) Weight Conformity to standards

LED indicators Alarm contact Reference

5/46

kg (lbs)

4 max. 2 max. – P1 and P2 redundant power supplies

2 x 10BASE-FL ports ST (BFOC) Multimode optical fiber 3100 m (10 170 ft) (1) With 50/125 or 62.2/125 µm fiber: 11.5 dB: 4 max. 11 max. P1 and P2 redundant power supplies, redundant optical ring

c 24 V (18…32 V), safety extra low voltage (SELV) 80 mA (130 max. at c 24 V) 210 mA (270 max. at c 24 V) 160 mA (350 max. at c 24 V) 5-pin 0…+ 60 °C (32…140 °F) 10…95% non condensing IP 30 IP 20 IP 30 40 x 125 x 80 47 x 135 x 111 80 x 140 x 85 (1.57 x 4.92 x 3.14) (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.35) (1.85 x 5.31 x 4.37) 0.530 (1.17) 0.240 (0.53) 0.900 (1.98) cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 – FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 Division 2 Division 2 Power, activity, link Power, activity, link, error Power, activity, link, collision Power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact 1 A max. under c 24 V) 499 NEH 104 10 499 NEH 141 00 499 NOH 105 10 (1) Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation.



5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium transceivers

Presentation The use of ConneXium transceivers makes it possible to perform the following: b Creation of linear fiber optic bus topologies, for products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection. b Interfacing products with twisted pair cable Ethernet connection with fiber optic cable. Transceivers are “plug and play” devices that do not need any configuration. See “Cabling system” page 5/35. ConneXium transceivers provide fiber optic connections for transmission in areas subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long distance communications.

DTE

DTE

DTE

Linear topology on optical fiber


5 5.1 Transceivers Interfaces

Copper cable port

Optical fiber ports

Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Line length Number and type Connectors Medium Line length Signal attenuation

Redundancy Power supply

Voltage Power consumption Removable terminal Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm contact Reference

mm (in) kg (lbs)

1 x 10BASE-T port 1 x 100BASE-TX port RJ45 Shielded twisted pair 100 m (328 ft) 1 x 10BASE-FL port 1 x 100BASE-FX port ST (BFOC) SC Multimode optical fiber 3100 m (10 170 ft) (1) 11.5 dB with 50/125 µm fiber 8 dB with 50/125 µm fiber 11.5 dB with 62.5/125 µm fiber 11 dB with 62.5/125 µm fiber P1 and P2 redundant power supplies c 24 V (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV) 80 mA (100 max. at c 24 V) 160 mA (190 max. at c 24 V) 5-pin 0…+ 60 °C (32…140 °F) 10…95% non condensing IP 30 IP 20 40 x 134 x 80 (1.57 x 5.47 x 3.14) 47 x 135 x 111 (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.35) 0.520 (1.15) 0.230 (0.50) cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 Division 2 – P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status Power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact 1 A max. under c 24 V) 499 NTR 100 10 499 NTR 101 00 (1) Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation.

5/47



5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium switches

Presentation

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

Collision domain 1

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

Collision domain 2 100 Mbit/s optical ring

DTE

Collision domain 3

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

DTE

Switches (see “Cabling system” page 5/38) are used to increase the limits of architectures based on hubs or transceivers, by separating collision domains. Higher layer communication is provided between the ports, and collisions at link layer are not propagated (filtering). They therefore improve performance by better allocation of the pass band due to the reduction of collisions and the network load. Certain Connexium switches also enable redundant architectures to be created on twister pair copper or fiber optic ring. Switches are “plug & play” devices that do not need any configuration. They can also be administered remotely via the SNMP or HTTP protocols for monitoring and diagnostics purposes.


Switches

5

Interfaces

5.1

Copper cable ports

Number and type

Optical fiber ports

Shielded connectors Medium Max. distances Number and type Connectors Medium Fiber length Optical budget

Topology

Number of switches

Cascaded Redundant in a ring

Power supply redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable terminals Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D

Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators

Alarm contact Reference

5/48

mm (in)

kg (lbs)

Unmanaged Shielded twisted pair and optical fiber, unmanaged basic 5 x 10BASE-T/ 4 x 10BASE-T/ 3 x 10BASE-T/ 4 x 10BASE-T/ 3 x 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair 100 m (328 ft) – 1 x 100BASE-FX 2 x 100BASE-FX 1 x 100BASE-FX 2 x 100BASE-FX port ports port ports – SC – Multimode fiber Monomode fiber – 3100 m (10 170 ft) (1) 15 000 m (49 210 ft) (1) – 8 dB with 50/125 µm fiber 16 dB with 50/125 µm fiber 11 dB with 62.5/125 µm fiber Any – – P1 and P2 redundant power supplies c 24 V c 24 V (18…32 V), safety extra low voltage (SELV) (19.2…30 V) 100 mA (120 max.) 5.4 W 5.9 W 5.4 W 5.9 W 3-pin 5-pin 0…+ 60°C (32…140 °F) 10…95% non Max. 95% non condensing condensing IP 20 75.2 x 143 x 43 47 x 135 x 111 (2.96 x 5.63 x (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.35) 1.69) 0.190 (0.42) 0.330 (0.72) 0.335 (0.74) 0.330 (0.72) 0.335 (0.74) UL508,CSA 1010, cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division EN 61131-2 2, e, GL Power supply, P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity ETH link status, 10/100 Mbps – Activity, power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact 1 A max. under c 24 V) 499 NES 251 00 499 NMS 251 01 499 NMS 251 02 499 NSS 251 01 499 NSS 251 02 r r r r (1) Depends on the optical budget and fiber attenuation r Available later.

Presentation, characteristics, references (continued)


5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium switches

Characteristics and references (continued)

Switches Interfaces

Copper cable ports

Optical fiber ports

Number and type

Shielded connectors Medium Max. distances Number and type Connectors Medium Fiber length Optical budget

Ethernet services Topology

Number of switches

Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable terminals Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators

Alarm contact

Reference

Unmanaged, copper Managed, copper 8 x 10BASE-T/ 5 x 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports 2 x 100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair 100 m (328 ft) – – – – – –

Cascaded Redundant in a ring

mm (in) kg (lbs)

Managed, copper + fiber 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports

2 x 100BASE-FX ports SC Multi mode optical fiber 3100 m (10 170 ft) (1) 8 dB with 50/125 µm fiber 11 dB with 62.5/125 µm fiber FDR client, SNMP, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, Web based configuration

Any – 50 max. P1 and P2 redundant power supplies c 18…32 V, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 125 mA (290 max.) 7.5 W 9W 5-pin 0…+ 60°C 0…+ 55°C 10…95% non condensing IP 20 47 x 135 x 111 110 x 131 x 111 mm (3.15 x 5.51 x 3.35) (4.33 x 5.16 x 4.37) 0.230 (0.72) 0.460 (1.00) cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 14, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL P1 and P2 power P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, redundancy supplies, Ethernet link management status, Power supply failure, permanent fault in hub, faulty link status of TP port (volt-free contact 1 A max. under c 24 V) – Redundancy health 499 NES 181 00 499 NES 171 00 499 NOS 171 00 (1) Depends on the optical fiber budgt and fiber attenuation..

5 5.1

5/49



Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium gateways

Presentation ConneXium communication gateways are used for interconnecting the following: b Modbus/Ethernet TCP/IP b Modbus Plus/Ethernet TCP/IP by providing multiple ports to adapt to the different architectures.


Gateways Functions

Communication gateway Interface for programming Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication services Modbus SL (RS 232/RS 485 serial link) Modbus Plus (RS 485 network) Configuration

5

Interfaces

5.1

Ethernet TCP/IP port

Serial port

Type

Shielded connectors Medium Max. distances Type Shielded connectors Medium

Power supply Voltage Power consumption Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Reference

5/50

mm (in) kg (lbs)

Ethernet/Modbus serial link Ethernet/Modbus Modbus TCP messaging SNMP Agent RTU/ASCII frame Data rate 0.3 K…115.2 Kbps – Local or remote by Telnet in hyper terminal mode 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

Ethernet/Modbus Plus Ethernet Modbus TCP messaging

Ethernet/Modbus Plus Modbus TCP messaging SNMP Agent

– Token bus, HDLC synchronous mode Data rate 1 Mbps Local using DOS Local or remote (1) 1 x 10BASE-T 1 x 10BASE2 1 x 10BASE5 RJ45, BNC and AUI

1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX

RJ45 RJ45 Shielded twisted pair 100 m (327 ft) 1 x Modbus SL 1 x Modbus Plus RJ45 9-way SUB-D connector Shielded twisted pair Shielded twisted pair (single or double) c 9…30 V, a 110/220 V (a 93.5 V…242 V), 47…63 Hz a 9 …24 V 3W 1A 0…+ 60°C 0…+ 50°C 20…90% non condensing 10…95% non condensing IP 20 35 x 95 x 60 122 x 229 x 248 (1.38 x 3.74 x 2.36) (4.80 x 9.0 x 9.80) 0.500 (1.10) 4.260 (9.40) UL, CSA, FM 3611 Class 1 UL 508, CSA 142, e Division 2 Activity, status, diagnostics Power 174 CEV 300 20 174 CEV 200 30 174 CEV 200 40 r (1) Local with additional keyboard and monitor, via a dedicated screen for basic diagnostic and configuration. Remote, via intuitive Web pages for full configuration and diagnostic. r Available later

5

Presentation, references


5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready ConneXium connection cables

Presentation ConneXium shielded connection cables are available in two versions to meet current standards and approvals: b Standard EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables: These cables conform to the EIA/TIA-568 standard, category 5, IEC 11801/EN 50173 class D. Their fire behavior conforms to NFC 32070# class C2 and IEC 322/1, Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH). b UL and CSA 22.1 approved shielded twisted pair cables: These cables are UL and CSA 22.1 approved. Their fire resistance conforms to NFPA 70.

References Standard EIA/TIA 568 shielded twisted pair cables Description 490 NT p 000 pp

Pre-equipped at both ends

Straight-through 2 RJ45 connectors shielded twisted pair For connection to terminal cables devices (DTE)

Description


Crossed cord 2 RJ45 connectors shielded twisted pair For connections between cables hubs, switches and transceivers

Length m (ft) 2 (6.56) 5 (16.4) 12 (39.4) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5)

Reference

Length

Reference

5 (16.4) 15 (49.2) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5)

490 NTC 000 490 NTC 000 490 NTC 000 490 NTC 000

490 NTW 000 02 490 NTW 000 05 490 NTW 000 12 490 NTW 000 40 490 NTW 000 80

05 05 40 80

Weight kg – – – – – Weight kg – – – –

UL and CSA 22.1 approved shielded twisted pair cables Description

490 NOC 000 05

Straight-through 2 RJ45 connectors shielded twisted pair For connection to terminal cables devices (DTE)

Description

490 NOT 000 05



Crossed cord 2 RJ45 connectors shielded twisted pair For connections between cables hubs, switches and transceivers

Length

Reference

2 (6.56) 5 (16.4) 12 (39.4) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5)

490 NTW 000 02U 490 NTW 000 05U 490 NTW 000 12U 490 NTW 000 40U 490 NTW 000 80U

Length

Reference

5 (16.4) 15 (49.2) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5)

490 NTC 000 490 NTC 000 490 NTC 000 490 NTC 000

Length m (ft) 5 (16.4)

Reference 490 NOC 000 05

Weight kg –

5 (16.4)

490 NOT 000 05

–

5 (16.4)

490 NOR 000 05

–

05U 05U 40U 80U

Weight kg – – – – – Weight kg – – – –

Fiber optic cables Description

490 NOR 000 05

Glass fiber optic cables for terminal devices (DTE) to hubs, switches and transceivers

Pre-equipped at both ends 1 SC connector and 1 MT-RJ connector 1 ST (BFOC) connector and 1 MT-RJ connector 2 MT-RJ connectors

5/51

5 5.1


Presentation

5

CANopen machine bus

Presentation Originally used in the automotive industry, CAN is increasingly used in general industry. Several fieldbuses based on CAN lower layers and components are available. The CANopen machine bus conforms to the ISO 11898 international standard, promoted by the CAN In Automation association, which consists of users and manufacturers and offers an excellent assurance of open access and interoperability due to its standardised devices and communication profiles.

Lexium MHD

TSX Micro Advantys STB

Premium

Twin Line TLC

CANopen bus From 1 to 127 slaves

ATV 38 ATV 58/58F

FTB 1CN TeSys model U

FTB 1CN

Tego Power

The CANopen bus is a multimaster bus which ensures reliable deterministic access to realtime data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based on broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, which ensures optimum use of the passband. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave parameters.

5

The bus uses a double shielded twisted pair, on which 127 devices maximum are connected by daisy chaining. The variable data rate between 20 Kbit/s and 1 Mbit/s depends on the length of the bus (between 30 and 5000 m). Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line terminator.

5.2

The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following characteristics: b Open bus system. b Data exchanges in real-time without overloading the protocol. b Modular design allowing modification of size. b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices. b Standardised configuration of networks. b Access to all device parameters. b Synchronisation and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled processes (short system response time). b Interoperability between numerous international manufacturers.


5/52



Connectable devices, description


5

CANopen machine bus

Connectable devices

TeSys model U

Advantys FTB

The TSX CPP 110 module performs the role of the master on the CANopen bus, and other Telemecanique devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are: b TeSys model U starter-controllers. b TeSys model d using the Tego Power installation assistance system. b Advantys STB distributed I/O. b Advantys FTB, IP 67 monobloc I/O splitter boxes. b Advantys FTM, IP 67 modular I/O splitter boxes. b Altivar 31, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.18…15 kW. b Altivar 58, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.37…75 kW. b Altivar 58F, variable speed drives with flux vector control for asynchronous motors 0.75…55 kW. b Twin Line TLC servodrives for brushless motors 3…16 A. b Lexium MHDA servodrives for brushless motors 1.5…70 A. Are also compatible: b Any third-party device which conforms to the CANopen standard profile. b Any CAN device which uses CAN V2.0B identifiers on the ISO 11898 physical layer. The TSX CPP 110 PCMCIA card supports the V4.02 CANopen standard with in particular the heartbeat network management.

Altivar ATV 31

Twin Line TLC

Example of connectable devices on the CANopen bus

Description

1 2

The Modicon TSX Micro/Premium platforms connect to the CANopen bus by means of the TSX CPP 110 type III PCMCIA card inserted in the processor or coprocessor communication port slot. The TSX CPP 110 machine bus CANopen set comprises: 1 A PCMCIA card, type III with fixing screws. 2 A tap junction equipped with one 9-way SUB-D connector for connecting the CANopen bus. 3 A connection cable length 0.5 m, interdependent of the PCMCIA card and the tap junction.

3

TSX CPP 110




5/53

5

5.2


Characteristics

5

CANopen machine bus

Software setup The CANopen bus is configured using dedicated SyCon (1) software, which should be ordered separately, reference SYC SPU LFp CD28M. This software is used: b To describe all devices connected on the bus. b To generate the “.CO” file including the informations relating to the devices connected. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software. If the configuration file is too large in relation to the TSX Micro/Premium processor capacity (see characteristics table), it is possible to load the master configuration directly by inserting the TSX CPP 110 card in a PCMCIA port (type III) on the PC on which SyCon software has been installed. In PL7, it is possible to configure the CANopen bus card so that the PLC processor/TSX CPP 110 card exchanges are executed at the same rate as the master task or the fast task. The process data exchanged with the slaves can be accessed by %MW standard words, the number of which depends on the type of processor and the task in which the module has been declared. PL7 standard function blocks are used to define the device parameters.

Example of SyCon configuration devices screen

Nota : In addition to supporting the CANopen protocol which uses V2.0A standard CAN identifiers on 11 bits, the card enables direct access to the CAN link layer via CAN V2.0B identifiers on 29 bits, used by the majority of CAN devices. In certain applications this enables simultaneous control of CANopen devices and dedicated CAN products. (1) The SyCon field bus configurator software also makes it possible to describre the I/O configuration of Profibus DP bus for Modicon Premium and Modicon Quantum platforms and the I/O configuration of INTERBUS bus for Modicon Quantum platform.

5 Characteristics Type of bus Structure

5.2

Type Physical interface Topology Access method

CANopen Industrial bus ISO 11898 Devices linked by daisy-chaining CSMA/CA, multimaster, producer/consumer, prioity information

Transmission

Data rate Medium

20 Kbit/s…1 Mbit/s depending on the length of bus Double shielded twisted pair

Physical configuration

Number of devices Length of bus according to data rate

127 max. 1 Mbit/s 800 Kbit/s 20 45 5 maxi (4 repeaters) 64 devices

m Segments

Number No. of devices per segment Max. length of m segment Equivalent length m of a repeater

Software configuration

170

Ko words words

250 Kbit/s 250

125 Kbit/s 500

32 devices

16 devices

190

210

50 Kbit/s 1000

20 Kbit/s 2500

15 Micro TSX 37 21 001/101 22 001/101

Size of configuration data (1) Max. size Master task of CANopen I/O Fast task data

500 Kbit/s 100

0…8 256 %MW 32 %MW

Premium PLCs and Atrium slot-PLCs 57 0p 57 2p 57 3p 57 1p 0…12 16 32 384 %MW 512 %MW 1024 %MW 48 %MW 64 %MW 128 %MW

57 4p 57 5p 64 3584 %MW 256 %MW

(1) This size can be exceeded if the configuration is loaded in the memory of CANopen PCMCIA card via the SyCon software.


5/54




References

5

CANopen machine bus

References CANopen machine bus set Description

Services

No. of module per PLC/PC CANopen - PDO cyclic 1 on Micro master V4.02 exchanges TSX 37 21/22 PCMCIA card - CMS 1 on Premium (type III) message TSX P57 (1) handling (SDO) 1 on Atrium - management TPCX of bus operating modes

Use

Reference

Supplied with a tap junction and cable length 0.5 m

TSX CPP 110

Weight kg 0.230

Sycon configuration softwares The SyCon software is the configurator for machine bus and field bus of Telemecanique. It supports the buses: b CANopen for TSX Micro et Premium platforms. b Profibus DP for Premium et Quantum platforms. b INTERBUS for Quantum platform.

TSX CPP 110

The SyCon tool includes also the device description for Telemecanique I/O modules. Description

Type

Reference

SyCon V2.8 configuration software licenses (2)

Single (1station) Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (up to 10 stations)

SYC SPU LFU CD28M SYC SPU LFG CD28M SYC SPU LFT CD28M SYC SPU LFF CD28M

Weight kg – – – –

SyCon V2.8 configuration software update

Single (1station)

SYC SPU LRU CD28M

–

SyCon V2.8 configuration software upgrade for previous version

Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (up to 10 stations)

SYC SPU LUG CD28M SYC SPU LUT CD28M SYC SPU LUF CD28M

– – –

(1) Unauthorized on TSX P57 153/154M Premium processor. (1) A software kit of single type (1 station) including PL7 Micro et Sycon softwares is also available, see page 6/71.



5

5.2


5/55



5

TSX SAY master module for AS-Interface bus

Presentation TSX SAY 1000 master module for the AS-Interface bus enables the Premium PLC to act as the AS-Interface bus master. Sensors Premium + TSX SAY 1000

XVA column AS-Interface bus

T

XBL keyboard XAL button box

Intelligent sensors

Motor starter

ASI ABL power supply

The bus comprises a master station (Premium PLC) and slave stations. The master that supports the AS-Interface profile successively interrogates the devices connected on the AS-Interfacenterface bus and stores the data (status of sensor/actuators, operational status of devices) in the PLC memory. Communication management on the AS-Interfacenterface bus is completely transparent with regard to the PLC application program. TSX SAY 1000 master module with the AS-Interface M2E profile (AS-Interface V2) manages: b Discrete slave devices (a maximum of 62 devices organized in 2 banks, A/B, with 31 addresses each), b Analog devices (a maximum of 31 devices in bank A) b Safety interfaces (a maximum of 31 devices in bank A).

5

The maximum number of TSX SAY 1000 modules per PLC station is either 2,4, or 8, depending on the type of processor installed (see page 5/57). An AS-Interface power supply must be used for powering the various devices on the bus. Ideally, this PSU should be situated nearest to the stations with the largest power demands.

Description

5.3

TSX SAY 1000 AS-Interface bus master module is standard format modules. Modules of this format are designed to slot into any position on the Premium PLC rack like any Input/Output module or application-specific module. The modules feature, on the front panel:

1 2 3 4 5

TSX SAY 1000

1 v v v v 2

A display unit comprising 4 indicator lamps showing the module operating modes: RUN indicator lamp (green): module operating, ERR indicator lamp (red): module fault, A/B indicator lamp (green): display of group of 32 slaves, I/O indicator lamp (red): AS-Interface bus I/O fault. A display unit comprising 32 indicator lamps for diagnostics of the AS-Interface bus and of each slave connected to the bus depending on the A/B push button selected (1). 3 Two or three indicator lamps specific to the module: See diagnostics on page 5/57. 4 Two push buttons: See diagnostics on page 5/57. 5 One 3-way male SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface bus (female screw connector supplied).

(1) Depending on the selection made with the A/B push button, the first 31 slaves (standard address settings) or the last 31 slaves (extended address settings with AS-Interface V2) are displayed.

5/56

Diagnostics, references, connections


5

TSX SAY master module for AS-Interface bus

Diagnostics TSX SAY 1000 module (AS-Interface V2) The two indicator lamps 3 on the front panel of the TSX SAY 1000 module that correspond to the two push buttons 4 are used for diagnostics at module level: Indicator lamps marked: PWR: FAULT: AS-Interface bus fault AS-Interface power supply present

Push buttons marked: A/B: selection of MODE: module slave group on Off line/On line display unit 2

The display unit on the front panel of the TSX SAY 1000 master module allows simplified local diagnostics to be performed by displaying the slave devices on the AS-Interface bus. Detailed diagnostics for each of these slave devices can be carried out via the ASI-TERV2 adjustment console.

References Description Number per PLC AS-Interface 1 for 57 Cp bus master 1 for 57 0p module (1) 2 for 57 1p for Premium 4 for 57 2p PLCs and 8 for 57 3p 8 for 57 4p Atrium Slot-PLCs 8 for 57 5p

Protocol and profile AS-Interface M2E

Number of I/Os Reference (2) Maximum of 62 discrete TSX SAY 1000 devices Maximum of 31 analog devices (3) 31 safety devices

Weight kg 0.340

Length

Reference

20 m 50 m 100 m

XZ-CB 10201 XZ-CB 10501 XZ-CB 11001

Weight kg 1.400 3.500 7.000

Connection accessories Description

TSX SAY 1000

Supply

AS-Interface For AS-Interface bus bus ribbon cables (yellow)

5

(1) The 3-way SUB-D connector for connection to the AS-Interface cable is supplied with the module. (2) These maximum values cannot be cumulated: see the characteristics on page 5/59. (3) Supports analog devices that have between 1 and 4 input or output channels.

Connections TSX SAY 1000 module Brown wire

Blue wire

5.3

AS-Interface ribbon cable

5/57

Software setup

Modicon Premium automation platform Master modules for AS-Interface bus

Software setup The AS-Interface bus is configured using Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software. The services offered are based on the principle of simplicity: b Management of profile tables, parameters and data by the master (this management is transparent to the user). b Topological I/O addressing: each AS-Interface slave declared on the bus is assigned a topological address on the bus. This is transparent to the user. b Each sensor/actuator for the AS-Interface bus interfaces is treated as an in-rack I/O by the TSX Micro/Premium PLC.

AS-Interface bus configuration All devices on the AS-Interface bus are configured implicitly using the following sequence of screens: b Declaration of the AS-Interface bus master module v The TSX SAZ 10 module is always inserted and declared in position no. 4 on TSX 37 10/21/22 TSX Micro automation platforms.

Declaration of the TSX SAZ 10 TSX Micro module

v TSX SAY 1000 modules can be inserted into any position on Premium automation platforms or Atrium slot-PLCs (except positions reserved for processors and power supplies). b Configuration of AS-Interface slave devices

5

Using the configuration screen, it is possible to configure all the slave devices corresponding to all interface I/Os on the AS-Interface bus. Depending on its type, the configuration for each device consists of defining, as appropriate: v Schneider Electric AS-Interface devices. The user selects the AS-Interface device catalog reference from the various discrete, analog, or safety interfaces listed. This selection automatically determines the AS-Interface profile and the parameters associated with each interface. v Third-party AS-Interface device. The user can use Uniti Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior software to manage a “customized” list of sensors/actuators of different brands. This list, specifying the AS-Interface profile and parameters, is compiled to meet the needs of the user.

5.3

Configuration of slave devices in TSX SAY 1000

Programming After configuration, the I/Os connected on the AS-Interface bus are processed by the application program in the same way as an in-rack I/O of the PLC, using either the address (e.g. %I\4.0\16.2, input 2 of slave 16 of the AS-Interface bus), or the associated symbol (e.g. Start_conveyor). Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software has an integrated function block library containing the specific diagnostic DFBs for AS-Interface bus. Its check for the appearance of any error on the AS-Interface (bus or slaves).

5/58

5


Diagnostics, characteristics

5

Master modules for AS-Interface bus

Diagnostics 1 2

Diagnostics performed using the centralized display unit of the TSX Micro platform or using the display unit of TSX SAY 1000 module can be completed using a PC terminal on which Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software has been installed. The terminal connected to the TSX Micro/Premium PLC is used to perform diagnostics of the operating state of the AS-Interface V1 TSX SAZ 10 master module, the bus and the slave devices on the bus. For the AS-Interface V2 TSX SAY 1000 master module, the diagnostics are identical to those of the AS-Interface V1 module, and in addition, take into account developments in the M2E standard. Diagnostics are performed using a single screen divided into four sections providing information on:

3

4

Diagnostics of the TSX SAY 1000 module using PL7

1 2 3 4

Status of the TSX SAZ 10 or TSX SAY 1000 module (RUN, ERR, I/O). Status of the AS-Interface channel connected to the module. Faulty interface (or slave). Data relating to any selected interface (profile, parameters, forcing, etc).

In the event of an AS-Interface module or channel fault, a second screen can be accessed, which clearly shows the type of fault, which may be at internal or external level.

Characteristics Type of module AS-Interface profile Type of addressing Product certification Ambient air temperature

Operation Storage

Degree of protection Vibration resistance Shock resistance Number of connectable interfaces With standard addressing (or slaves) With extended addressing Type of connectable interfaces With standard addressing

With extended addressing Bus connection Module power supply Display/diagnostics

TSX SAZ 10 M2(AS-Interface V1) Standard AS-Interface No. 12001, IEC 61131 2 0…+60 °C. -25…+70 °C. IP 20 Conforming to IEC 68 2 6. Fc tests. Conforming to IEC 68 2 27. EA tests. 31 slaves – Discrete I/Os (4I/4O)

TSX SAY 1000 M2E (AS-Interface V2) Standard and extended Pending

5

31 slaves Discrete I/Os (4I/4O) (1) Analog I/Os (a maximum of 4 channels) Safety interfaces – Discrete I/Os (4I/3O) By terminal block inside module By 3-way SUB-D connector (included with the (polarity locating device) module) Via power supply integrated into the host platform of the module Via: v centralized display unit on TSX Micro PLC or via the display unit of TSX SAY 1000 module v use of the Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software diagnostics function v use of the ASI-TERV1 adjustment console (infrared link) (1) If the interfaces are connected using extended addressing, the type of discrete I/Os is 4I/3O (instead of 4I/4O).

5/59

5.3

Presentation

5


5

Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies for AS-Interface

Power supplies for AS-Interface Consistent with the standard Phaseo line, the range of ASI ABL power supplies is designed to deliver a d.c. voltage, as required by networks operating under the AS-Interface protocol. Three versions are available to meet all needs encountered in industrial applications, in enclosures, cells or floor-standing enclosures. These single-phase, electronic, switch mode power supplies guarantee the quality of the output current, in accordance with the electrical characteristics and conforming to standard EN 50295. PE

N

b ASI ABLB300p Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this power supply delivers a voltage of 30 V d.c. Available in 2.4 and 4.8 A ratings, the parallel output terminal blocks allow the bus to be connected separately to the slaves and the master. Input and output LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics.

L

100-240V

24 V AS-i : 2,4 A ASI ABLB3002

AS-i + AS-i

GND AS-i + AS-i

GND

(1) AS-InterfaceAS-Interface master module

b ASI ABLD300p Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this power supply delivers a voltage of 30 V d.c. Available in 2.4 and 4.8 A ratings, it allows diagnosis and management of earth faults on AS-Interface networks. In the event of an earth fault, the Phaseo power supply trips out, thus stopping dialogue on the bus. Restarting is only possible after deliberate acknowledgement of the fault. Two I/O are provided, which may be used to monitor status. The parallel output terminal blocks are used to connect the bus separately to the slaves and the AS-Interface master. Input, output and fault LED’s allow fast and continuous diagnostics.

Earth fault Reset PE

5

N

L

100-240V

+

1

2

Reset Fault Fault Fault +

24 V

ON OFF

AS-i : 2,4 A ASI ABLD3002

TEST RESET

AS-i + AS-i

GND AS-i + AS-i

Warning: the earth (GND) (2) connection must be made. In the event of disconnection, the built-in detector becomes inoperative. To obtain earth connection diagnostics, it is recommended that an ASI ABLB300p power supply be used together with insulation relay RMO PAS 101.

GND

(2) AS-InterfaceAS-Interface master module

5.3

PE

N

b ASI ABLM3024 Operating on a 100 to 240 V a.c. supply, this product delivers two d.c. outputs which are totally independent in the way they operate. Two output voltages - 30 V d.c./2.4 A (AS-Interface supply) and 24 V d.c./3 A - are available, so making it possible to supply the control equipment without an additional power supply. Input and output LEDs allow fast and continuous diagnostics.

L

100-240V

24 V

AS-i

AS-i : 4,8 A ASI ABLM3024

24 V - 3 A 24 30,5 V

(1) Recommended connection. (2) Compulsory connection. +

AS-i + AS-i

GND AS-i + AS-i

GND

(1) AS-Interface AS-Interface 24 V d.c. master control module


5/60


Dimensions: page 5/63 Schneider Electric

Characteristics

5


5


Technical characteristics Type of power supply Functions Product certifications Conforming to standards

ASI ABLB3002 ASI ABLB3004 ASI ABLD3002 Supply to the AS-Interface system

ASI ABLD3004

ASI ABLM3024 24 V c supply

UL 508, CSA 22-2 n° 950 EN 60950, TÜV EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2, EN 55022 class B No

Safety EMC Low frequency harmonic currents

Input circuit LED indication Input voltage

Rated values Permissible values Permissible frequencies Efficiency at nominal load Current consumption Current at switch-on Power factor

V V Hz % A

Orange LED a 100…240 a 85…264 47…63 > 83 0.5 < 30 > 0.65

> 80 1

0.5

1

2.4

4.8

Output circuit LED indication Nominal output voltage Nominal output current Precision

Micro-breaks Protection

Adjustable output voltage Line and load regulation Residual ripple - interference Holding time for I max and Ve min Short-circuit Overload Overvoltage

V A V

Green LED c 30 (AS-Interface) 2.4 4.8 –

mV ms

3% 300 - 50 10 Permanent/automatic restart after elimination of the fault 1.1 In Tripping if U > 1.2 Un

Undervoltage

Tripping if U < 0.95 Un

2.4

c 24 3 100 to 120 %

U > 1.5 Un U < 0.8 Un

5

Operating characteristics Connections Environment

Operating position MTBF Dielectric strength

Input fuse incorporated Emissions Immunity

Presentation: page 5/60 Schneider Electric

Input Output Storage temperature Operating temperature Maximum relative humidity Degree of protection Vibration

mm2 mm2 °C °C

h Input/output Input/earth Output/earth (and input/output) Conducted/radiated Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic Conducted interference Mains interference


2 x 2.5 screw terminals + earth 2 x 2.5 screw terminals + earth, multiple output - 25 to + 70 0 to + 60 (derating from 50) 95 % (without condensation or dripping water) IP 20 (conforming to IEC 529) EN 61131-2 Vertical > 100000 (conforming to Bell core, at 40 °C) 3000 V/50 Hz/1 mm 3000 V/50 Hz/1 mm 500 V/50 Hz/1 mm Yes (not interchangeable) Class B (conforming to EN 55022) EN 61000-4-2 (4 kV contact/8 kV air) EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m) EN 61000-4-4 level 3 (2 kV), EN 61000-4-6 (10 V) EN 61000-4-11

5.3


5/61

Characteristics, selection

5


5


Output characteristics Derating The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced. The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) which the power supply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature. P/Pn (%)

140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 10 20 30 Maximum operating temperature (°C)

40

50

60

70

Selection Upstream protection of power supplies for use on the AS-Interface system Mains supply a 115 V single-phase Type of Thermal-magnetic protection circuit-breaker Single-pole GB2 CBpp 2-pole GB2 DBpp C60N ASI ABLB3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 ASI ABLB3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 ASI ABLD3002 GB2 pB07 MG24517 ASI ABLD3004 GB2 pB08 MG24518 ASI ABLM3024 GB2 pB07 MG24517 (1) UL certified circuit-breaker.

5

(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)

Gg fuse

a 230 V single-phase Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker

2A 4A 2A 4A 2A

GB2 DBpp GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB06 GB2 DB07 GB2 DB06

C60N MG24516 MG17453 MG24516 MG17453 MG17453

Gg fuse

(1) (1) (1) (1) (1)

2A 2A 2A 2A 2A

Function diagram 10 N

L

+

5 1

1

ON/OFF DDT

2

Supply AS-i + AS-i – , and GND (4)

2

AS-i +

5.3

6 7

8 9

24 V

AS-i –

(1)

1

AS-i : 2,4 A

4 3

3 or 10

Reset

(1) Reset

(1)

4

Test

(3)

5

AS-i + AS-i

GND AS-i + AS-i

6 7 8 9

GND

2

(2)

(3)

(2)

(3)

(2)

(3)

(2)

Fault

AS-i Fault + Fault – Relay off Relay on Input at state 0 or contact open Input at state 1 or contact closed LED off LED on

(1) 30 ms min. (2) 15 ms. (3) 20 ms. (4) Warning: the earth fault detector will only operate if the earth (GND) terminal is connected. Presentation: page 5/60

5/62



Dimensions: page 5/63 Schneider Electric


References, dimensions, schemes

5

5


ASI ABL regulated switch mode power supplies Mains input voltage 47…63 Hz V 100…240 single-phase wide range

Output voltage cV

Nominal power W

Nominal current A

Auto-protect reset

30

72

2.4

auto

no

ASI ABLB3002

0.800

145

4.8

auto

no

ASI ABLB3004

1.300

72

2.4

auto

yes

ASI ABLD3002

0.800

145

4.8

auto

yes

ASI ABLD3004

1.300

2 x 72

2.4 + 3

auto

no

ASI ABLM3024

1.300

30 + 24

Earth fault detection

Reference

Weight kg

Dimensions ASI ABLB3002 ASI ABLD3002

ASI ABLM3024 ASI ABLp3004

120

120

Common side view Mounting on 35 and 75 mm rails

54

120

5

81

Schemes

L

N

2

1

+

ASI ABLM3024

L

N

ASI ABLD300p

L

N

ASI ABLB300p

Set

5.3 Fault detector

AS-i

GND

AS-i +

GND

AS-i

AS-i +

+

GND

Filter

AS-i

AS-i +

ON/ OFF

GND

AS-i

AS-i +

AS-i

GND

AS-i +

Filter

GND

AS-i

AS-i +

Filter

24 V

Presentation: page 5/60 Schneider Electric


Selection: page 5/62

5/63


Communication architecture

5

Level 3 Ethernet

Monitor Pro Ethernet TCP/IP (Uni-TE, Modbus)

Ethernet TCP/IP (Uni-TE, Modbus)

Level 2 TSX Micro TSX ETZ TSX ETZ Modbus bus Uni-Telway bus

Premium Modem

ATV 28

Modem

5 ATV 58

Level 1

TSX Micro Fipway/Modbus Plus

TSX Micro

TSX Micro

Magelis AS-Interface bus

XAL control station Nano

5.4

Intelligent sensor Nano

Nano

Nano

5/64

5

Digital HP Magelis iPC (1)

Service Global Data

Ethernet TCP/IP (Modbus)

Quantum + Web serveur

Quantum Premium + Web serveur

Ethernet Premium

Magelis iPC

Modbus Plus

5 I/O Scanning

Momentum

TSX Micro

Bridge

Premium

Premium

ATV 58 T XBT F Magelis

Premium I/O extension rack

AS-interface bus

Quantum

Sensors

5.4

Premium I/O extension rack

T

AS-interface bus Motor starter T

Bus X

XAL control station

Intelligent sensors

XBL keypad Motor starter

(1) PC industriel Magelis iPC in configuration “Thin Client” : PC having only Windows and an Internet browser.

5/65

X-Way and the OSI model


5

X-way communication

X-Way and the OSI model The communication architecture of the programmable TSX Micro/Premium PLCs, like that of TSX 17 or TSX model 40 PLCs, is compliant with the OSI model.

Telegram 7

Common words/shared table

Application

Application-to-application communications

Uni-TE Modbus (1)

Uni-TE 6

Presentation

5

Session

4

Transport

3

Network

2

Link

Uni-Telway

WorldFip

ISO 8802 3 Ethernet

ISO 8802 3 Ethernet

1

Physical

RS 485 19.2 Kbps

WorldFip 1 Mbps

ISO 8802 3 10 Mbps

10/100 Mbps

Uni-Telway

Fipio/Fipway

Ethway

TCP X-Way addressing system

IP

ISO 8802 3 Ethernet TCP

The physical layer enables the physical transmission of data signals between 2 systems via a medium. In order for a network to operate correctly, and to ensure full security of personnel in compliance with IEC 1131 2, it is necessary to implement the wiring recommendations described in the reference manual TSX DR NET F “X-Way communication” (or in the TSX CD DMTE 13E CD-ROM “Technical documentation”).

5

The application layer concerns application programs, data exchange and cooperation conventions. This layer provides the following services: b Industrial Uni-TE message, available on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX PLCs. b Distributed COM database available on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX PLCs, or Shared Table service available on TSX Micro/Premium PLCs. b Periodical data exchange on Fipio bus, see page 5/72. b Application-to-application communication. b Telegram.

5.4

Size of requests Ethway, Ethernet Fipway Fipio Uni-Telway TCP/IP (1) Uni-TE service 256 bytes (2) 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (3) COM service 256 word 128 word – – database (4) database Application-to256 bytes 128 bytes 128 bytes 240 bytes (3) application Telegram – 16 bytes – – (1) Ethway not available on TSX Micro PLC. (2) 1 K bytes with requests executed as a background task. (3) 128 bytes on TSX Micro/Premium/TSX model 40 terminal port, 32 bytes on TSX 17 20/47 20/25. (4) COM service not available with Ethernet TCP/IP.

Uni-TE services The Uni-TE protocol is the industrial message handling system supported by the X-Way communication architecture. It operates on the question/answer or request/confirmation principle. A device which supports the Uni-TE protocol can be a: b Client: this device initiates communication. It asks a question (reads), transmits data (writes) or sends an instruction (Run, Stop, etc.). b Server: this device executes the service requested by the client and sends a confirmation after execution.

5/66

X-Way and the OSI model (continued)


5

X-way communication

The services provided depend on the type of device (PLC, numerical controller, programming terminal, supervision station, etc.). Depending on its function, each device can be Client and/or Server. A Client PLC can access other devices on the architecture via its application program: It can read/write objects on another PLC or numerical controller, select programs on a numerical controller, etc. Network transparency When connected to any station in the network or directly connected to the Fipway/ Ethernet TCP/IP network, a programming terminal can communicate with any other station in the network (as if the terminal were physically connected to the PLC with which it is dialoguing). Network transparency also applies between stations connected to different segments of the same multinetwork architecture. COM service and Shared Table service (exclusive services one from another) The COM service is made up of a set of dedicated words called common words. Each Fipway/Ethway network station may or may not access the database (in read only or read/write mode). All PLC stations exchanging common words (32 stations on Fipway, 64 stations on Ethway) are allocated, in a dedicated database (128 words for Fipway, 256 words for Ethway), a write zone (set at 4 words for the Fipway network, and variable from 4 to 64 words for the Ethway network) per TSX Micro/Premium station. COM words are updated automatically during each scan of the general sequential program (master task) without the intervention of the application program. The Shared Table service can be used to exchange a table of internal words divided into as many zones as there are TSX Micro/Premium PLCs which comprise the Fipway network. The exchange principle is based on the broadcasting, by each PLC, of a word memory zone (broadcast zone) to the other PLCs on the network. Each network station is allocated an exchange table comprising 128 internal words for the 32 PLCs that share the service, with a broadcast zone assigned to each PLC, variable from 1 to 32 internal words.

5

Application-to-application communication This consists of using the user application program to send word tables between 2 devices, which may be TSX Micro/Premium and TSX PLCs. This service is particularly suitable for: b Sending alarm messages from a PLC to a supervision station. b Exchanging data tables between two PLCs controlled by the application programs of the transmission and destination device. b Sending broadcast messages to all stations and devices. Telegram The telegram service available on Fipway is a special case of application-toapplication messages. It enables short messages to be sent and received on a priority basis (maximum 16 characters). A telegram from a TSX Micro/Premium PLC is sent immediately without waiting for the end of the cycle. The telegram is received by the TSX Micro/Premium PLC in: b The event-triggered task (processed as soon as the message arrives in the network card). b The fast task or master task (when scanning the reception function). b A PLC can only process one telegram at a time. Use in a multinetwork The X-Way communication architecture is designed to cover multinetwork applications capable of dealing with problems of: b Concentration, the architecture is particularly suitable for feedback of supervision data to a higher level. b Redundancy, each PLC monitors the correct operation of both networks to which it is connected. If one of the networks should fail, all traffic could be transferred to the valid network. b Inter-network communication. These architectures comprise several network segments which are interconnected by “bridge PLC” stations. Transparent communication is then offered between the entire architecture.

5/67

5.4


Presentation, connectable devices

5


Presentation Premium (Bus manager)

Magelis IPC

Magelis XBT, CCX17

Produits Tiers

Momentum TBX Fipio

Micro (Agent) Dust and damp proof TBX

AS-interface gateway

Premium (Agent)

AS-i

ATV

The Fipio fieldbus is a standard means of communication between different control system components. It enables 127 devices to be connected at the connection point integrated in the processor. This fieldbus conforms to the WorldFip standard based on producer/consumer mechanisms. It is designed for remote location of l/O up to 15 km away and enables a third-party Schneider Alliances device to be installed. The bus arbitrator (manager) can be a : b Premium PLC TSX P 57 15p/25p/2823/35p/45p/4823/554M. b Atrium slot-PLC T PCX 57 353/TSX PCI 354M. Characteristics see page 5/73. Fipio bus accessories and connecting cables, see pages 5/82 to 5/85.

5

Connectable devices Schneider Electric devices which can be connected on the Fipio bus include: b Micro/Premium Agent function (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card). b CCX 17 operator panel (version ≥ 2.4 ) (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card). b Magelis XBT-F graphic screen terminal (via PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card) PCMCIA TSX FPP 20 card. b Le PC industriel Magelis IPC (via carte PCMCIA TSX FPC 10M). b Advantys STB distributed I/O (with STB NFP 2212 network interface module). b Momentum distributed discrete, analogue or application-specific l/O (with 170 FNT 110 01 communication module version u 1.0). b TBX distributed discrete (1) or analogue l/O (IP 20) with TBX LEP 030 communication module version ≥ 1.2. b TBX distributed discrete dust and damp proof l/O (IP 65) (2) or TSX EpF (IP 67). b ATV 38/58/58F variable speed drive (via VW3-A58301/311 card) and ATV 68 (via VW3-A68301 card). b TBX SAP 10 Fipio/AS-Interface gateway (2). b Partner products (see below).

5.4

Fipio bus openness Collaborative Automation Partner Program is a programme of cooperation between Schneider Electric and its partners, offering automation products (hardware and software), system integration and other services to complement the Schneider Electric offer. The programme was established to improve the connection of devices from other control system suppliers on the Fipio bus. Connection of a wide variety of different brands of sensors and actuators offers the end user a choice of global, high-performance and low-cost control system solutions. (1) WorldFip mode is only supported by TBX discrete I/O modules version ≥ 1.4. (TBX LEP 020). (2) WorldFip mode is only supported by modules version ≥ 2.0.


5/68



Description, software setup

5


Fipio bus openness (continued) Schneider Electric has integrated specific WorldFip mechanisms into its PLCs and software in order to make them accessible to any automation system engineer without any particular expertise in this area. Schneider Electric products and partner products connected on Fipio then automatically reap the following benefits: simplified description of architectures and configuration of equipment, and also simple control system development and programming, operation and maintenance. Find out more about the “Collaboprative Automation Partner Program” at: www.collaboratveautomation.schneider-electric.com

Description TSX P57 p53/54M (1) processors and the T PCX P57 353/354M slot-PLC have on the front panel: 1 A 9-way SUB-D connecdiscr. for connection to the bus via the TSX FP ACC 2/12 connector. 1

TSX P 57p823M

T PCX P57 353M

Software setup Configuration Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software offer configuration screens which enable the declaration and immediate and intuitive configuration of the remote devices connected on the Fipio bus.

1

5

1 Each circle represents one connection point. 2

2 Clicking on a circle accesses the catalogue of devices which can be connected. 3 Once confirmed, the Fipio bus configuration will appear. 3

Processors fitted with the integrated Fipio link can manage 128 connection points on the bus (addresses 0 to 127). See page 5/70 for the table detailing limitations according to processor and type of device.

5.4

Diagnostics The diagnostic functions of the Fipio bus, integrated in the Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software, very quickly identify a fault on:

1

b The bus medium. b Remote devices. 2

1 A graphic representation of the architecture displays the defective devices in red. 2 More detailed diagnostics can be accessed by double-clicking. 3

3 In addition, special screens display an overview of all the faults appearing on the bus or on any device. On request, these faults can be recorded for later analysis.

(1) The TSX P57 153/154M processor is a single format module.



5/69

Maximum configuration


5


Maximum configuration The Fipio bus enables a maximum of 128 devices to be connected. This limit can, in certain cases, be restricted depending on the type of bus manager processor and on the devices which are connected on the bus. The maximum number of devices which can be connected depends on: b The maximum size of memory space available for Fipio data which is v 94320 bytes for TSX P57 15p/25p/2823/35p processors and the T PCX 57 353/TSX PCI 57 354M slot-PLC, v 213104 bytes for the TSX P 57 45p/4823/554M. b The total number of bytes consumed by each device (see table below). Product family

Reference

Maxi number of Fipio devices (1) ATV 38/58 With VW3-A58301 card ATV 38/58/58F With VW3-A58311 card ATV 68 With VW3-A68301 card Lexium MHDA With AM0 FIP 001V000 card CCX 17 T CCX 1720 F/FPS, T CCX 17p0 L/LPS Magelis XBT-F With TSX FPP 10 card Magelis IPC, compatible PC With TSX FPP 20 (address 63) Inductel, read/write stations XGK-S130421, XGP-S1304202 With VW3-A58301 card Advantys STB STB NFP 2212 Momentum

5 TBX (3)

170 ADI ppp/ADO ppp, 170 ADM 350 10/11, 170 ARM 370 10/390 10/30, 170 ADM 690 51, 170 ARN 120 90, 170 ARM 370 30/390 10 170 AAI 030 00/520 40, 170 AAO 120 00/921 00, 170 AEC 920 00, 170 AMM 090 00 170 AAI 140 00 TBX AES 200/ASS 400(4)

Base size (bytes)

Extension size (bytes)

1808 1280 1280 1424 1952

Maximum number of connection points TSX P571p 2p/35p 4p/5p 63 127 127 52 52 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 62 4 4 4

1424 – 1808

62 1 52

62 1 52

62 1 62

832, 896, or 1280 (2) 832, 896 or 1280 (2)

62

113, 106 or 73

126

62

98

98

1808

52

52

98

2304 1332

40 62 59

40 70 59

92 126 126

59

59

126

50 50 44

50 50 44

100 (4) 84 (4) 63 (4)

31 62 62 62 62 62 52 62 52 62 62 54 62 52 62 48 62 40 62 38

31 81 64 (5) 72 72 64 52 98 52 62 113 54 105 52 90 48 73 40 66 38

31 126 64 (5) 85 (5) 102 (5) 126 117 98 98 62 126 122 126 117 126 109 126 92 126 87

272 (2/4 chan. extens.) TBX AMS 620

1584 272 (2 chan. extens.) (4 chan. extens.) 528 (8 chan.extens.)

TBX CEP 1622/CSP 1622/1625 1152 TBX DES 16pp/DMS16pp/DSS16pp 1152

5.4

I/O IP 67 Micro/Premium Agent FipConnect profile

TBX DSS 1235 TBX DMS 1025 TBX EEP/ESP 08C22/1622 (IP 65) TBX SAP 10 TSX EEF 08D2/EEF 16D2 TSX ESF 08T22/EMF 16DT2 With TSX FPP 10 card FRD C2 FRD C2P FSD C8 FSD C8P FSD M8 FSD M8P FED C32 FED C32P FED M32 FED M32P

1152 1152 1152 1808 832 1808 1424 832 1744 896 1808 1040 1952 1280 2304 1424 2448

144 (extension) 144 (extension) 144 (extension)

Not applicable (1) Address 63 is reserved for the programming and diagnostic terminal. (2) Depending on the I/O number of island. (3) Do not mix discrete and analogue base units on the same Fipio connection point. (4) The number of analogue channels for TBX base units (AES, ASS or AMS) is limited to 1008. (5) The number of channels for TBX base units (DES, DMS or DSS) is limited to 2048.

5/70

Application services, references


5


Application services When using the bus manager function, the application services supported by the Premium PLCs are: b Remote l/O Remote l/O modules are addressed by the PL7 application program as “In rack” l/O, with which they can of course coexist. This service enables the exchange of l/O status variables and output command variables. These exchanges are carried out in a cyclical and deterministic manner and without intervention from the application program. The manager also manages remote devices (configuration) in an aperiodic manner, without intervention from the application program. b Uni-TE service X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for MMI, diagnostics and control functions (requests of 128 bytes maximum). b Application-to-application service This service consists of sending tables between 2 devices under the control of their respective application programs (requests of 128 bytes maximum). b Terminal transparency Terminals connected on a higher level X-way network or on the manager PLC terminal port communicate with the devices on the bus. This is also the case when the terminal is connected at the priority address 63.

TSX P57 153M

Processors and coprocessor

TSX P57 253/353/453M

Type and max. no. of racks

With software

Reference (4)

TSX P57 15pM 4 racks

Unity Pro PL7 Junior/Pro Unity Pro PL7 Junior/Pro

Voir page 1/12 Voir page 1/31 Voir page 1/12 Voir page 1/31

– – – –

Unity Pro

Voir page 1/12

–

Unity Pro PL7 Junior/Pro

Voir page 1/13 Voir page 1/31

– –

Unity Pro

Voir page 1/13

–

TSX P57 25pM TSX P57 2823M 16 racks TSX P57 35pM 16 racks TSX P57 45pM TSX P57 4823M 16 racks TSX P57 554M 16 racks

TSX P57 454/554M

Weight kg

5

Accessories and connecting cables (1)

T PCX 57 353M

Description

Use

Female connectors (9-way SUB-D)

Processors and slot-PLCs with Fipio integrated link

Material Polycarbonate black (IP 20) Zamac

Reference TSX FP ACC 12 TSX FP ACC 2

Weight kg 0.040 0.080

5.4

(1) For other accessories and Fipio bus connecting cables, see pages 5/82 and 5/85. TSX FP ACC 12



5/71


Presentation

Fipio bus Agent function

Presentation Premium (bus manager) Lexium Momentum

TSX Micro (Agent)

CCX 17

Fipio bus ATV 58

Intelligent sensors

XAL keyboard Premium (Agent) Bus AS-Interface Motor starter T

TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) or Premium PLCs, fitted with a TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card on their integrated communication channel, are agents on the Fipio bus. The bus manager is a TSX P 57 15p/25p/2823/35p/45p/4823/554M, Atrium slot-PLC T PCX 57 353/TSX PCI 354M.

5

The Fipio bus enables I/O to be remotely located close to the devices to be controlled (Momentum, Altivar, etc). The Agent function enables offline processing, by locating a TSX Micro PLC close to the machine. In addition to the standard Fipio services (see pages 5/66 to 5/67), TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Premium PLCs allow exchanges of input and output variables with the bus manager PLC. These exchanges are performed cyclically, automatically and without the involvement of the application program at the same rate as the task for which the agent PLC has been configured. For characteristics, Fipio bus wiring system and connection accessories, see pages 5/82 to 5/85.

Application services

5.4

The application services supported by TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Premium Agent function PLCs are: b Uni-TE service, X-Way industrial message handling service suitable for operator dialogue, diagnostics and control functions (requests of up to 128 bytes). b Application-to-application communication service, which consists of the transmission of tables between 2 devices controlled by their respective application programs (messages of up to 128 bytes). b New periodic data exchange service for exchanging a 64 word table between the bus manager PLC and the Premium Agent PLC. Sofware setup see page 5/74.


5/72



5


Characteristics

5


Characteristics The Fipio industrial fieldbus is standard of communication between various control system components. It conforms to the WorldFip standard. Type of bus/network Structure Type

Fipio bus Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WordFip standard

Topology

Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections

Maximum length

Transmission

m

Access method

Producer/consummer principal Management by fixed arbitrator

Mode

Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 46 604

Data rate

Mbit/s

Number of devices

Segments

Per segment

32 connexion points per segment

Maxi

128 on all segments

Number

Unlimited

5

Length

Services

1

150 Ω shielded twisted pair, 62.5/125 ou 50/125 fibre optic using electrical/fibre optic repeaters

Medium

Configuration

15 000

m

1 000 maxi per electric segment 3 000 maxi per optical segment

Input/output exchanges

Periodic and deterministic exchanges of variables between bus manager PLC and Agent PLC (64 %MWi consecutive words: 32 %MWi for transmmission and 32 %MWi for reception)

Uni-TE

Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: 128 bytes maximum, can be used by all devices connected to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server device system functions)

Application-to-application

Point-to-point messages: 128 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all TSX Micro(1)/Premium/TSX Serie 7

Security

Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming to standard NF C 46 603

(1) TSX 37 21/22 only.




5/73

5.4


Software setup, description

5


Software setup Each TSX Micro/Premium PLC Fipio Agent uses 64 %MWi consecutive internal words to exchange periodic data. The first 32 words are reserved for sending data to the manager, and the remaining 32 are reserved for receiving data from the manager. Unity Pro or PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro application-specific screens allow the configuration of the Fipio Agent PCMCIA card. This consists of: b Indicating the connection point number (1 to 127). b Indicating the address at the beginning of the 64 %MW word table reserved for sending data to and receiving data from the manager.

Description TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22)/Premium PLCs have a slot in the processor for a type III PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with a TSX FPP 10 Fipio bus connection card. 3

The TSX FPP 10 card comprises: 1 A protective cover. 2 A removable cover with fixing screws giving access to the 20 way miniature connector.

5 1

3 Two indicator lamps: v ERR lamp: card fault, link fault, v COM lamp: transmission or reception of data.

2 4

Connector to be ordered separately: 4 TSX FP CG 010/030, 1 or 3 m cable for connecting the TSX FP ACC 4 tap junction (on 9-way SUB-D connector).

5.4


5/74




References


References Fipio bus connection component Description

Composition

Use

Fipio Agent 1 type III PCMCIA function card Version V1.8

TSX FPP 10

Reference

On TSX Micro TSX FPP 10 processors (TSX 37 21/22), Premium processors and Atrium slot-PLCs

Weight kg 0.110

Fipio bus connection accessories (1) Description Insulated bus cable connector (in black polycarbonate, IP 20)

TSX FP ACC 3

Use

Reference

Trunk cable tap link, supports 2 x 9-way female SUB-D connectors (for TSX FP CG 010/030 PCMCIA card cable), for connection of TBX dust and damp proof module c 24 V supply

TSX FP ACC 3

Weight kg 0.090

TSX FP ACC 4

0.660

Dust and damp Trunk cable tap link proof bus cable connector

TSX FP ACC 4

Fipio bus connection cables (1) Description

Use From Cables for TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card card (miniature connector)

Length To TSX FP ACC 4 1 m cable connector (9-way SUB-D connector) 3m

Reference TSX FP CG 010

Weight kg 0.210

TSX FP CG 030

0.410

5

(1) For other Fipio bus accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/84 and 5/85.

TSX FP CG 010/030

5.4




5/75


Presentation

Fipway network

Presentation

Magelis iPC

Ethernet TCP/IP

Premium

Fipway TSX TSX 17 20 Premium

TSX Micro

Bus X

The Fipway network is an open local area network for communication between the various TSX Micro, Premium and TSX Series 7 PLCs using the X-Way services. Communication conforms to the FIP standard with access via a bus arbitrator.

5

TSX Micro (TSX 37 21/22) and Premium PLCs can be connected to a Fipway network using a Fipway PCMCIA card which is inserted in each processor or into the TSX SCY 21601 (Premium) communication module. Supported X-Way services (see pages 5/66 to 5/67) are: b Uni-TE services. b Distributed database (COM) or Shared Table. b Telegram (service only available when the PCMCIA card is inserted in the processor). b Application-to-application communication. For characteristics, Fipway network wiring and connection accessories, see pages 5/82 to 5/85.

5.4


5/76


Performances: page 5/79

5


Characteristics

5

Fipway network

Characteristics The Fipio industrial fieldbus is standard of communication between various control system components. It conforms to the WorldFip standard. Type of bus/network Structure Type

Fipway network Open industrial fieldbus conforming to WordFip standard

Devices linked by daisy-chaining or tap link connections

Topology

Maximum length

Transmission

m

Access method

Producer/consummer principal Management by fixed arbitrator

Mode

Physical layer in baseband on shielded twisted pair, conforming to NF C 46 604

Data rate

Mbit/s

Number of devices

Segments

Per segment

32 stations

Maxi

64 stations

Number

Unlimited

Length

Services

1

150 Ω shielded twisted pair, 62.5/125 ou 50/125 fibre optic using electrical/fibre optic repeaters

Medium Configuration

5 000

m

5

1 000 maximum per electrical segment 3 000 maximum per optical segment

COM (1)

Distributed database: 128 mots maximum 0 or 4 % NWi words for TSX Micro and Premium station with addresses 0 to 31

Shared table(1)

Shared table of internal words: 128 words maximum 1 to 32 % MWi words per TSX Micro and Premium station with addresses 0 to 3 (2)

Uni-TE

Point-to-point requests with confirmation report: 128 bytes maximum, can be used by all devices connected to the same X-Way architecture (access by the Client device to the Server device system functions)

Application-to-application

Point-to-point messages: 128 bytes maximum between 2 devices, can be used by all TSX Micro (1)/Premium/TSX Serie 7

Telegram

Point-to-point priority messages: 16 bytes maximum between 2 Premium (3) or TSX Series 7 stations with addresses 0 to 15

Security

Control characters in each frame and acknowledgement of point-to-point messages conforming to standard NF C 46 603 (1) The COM and Shared table service are mutualy exclusive. (2) Service reserved for TSX Micro and Premium PLCs. (3) Service only available when Fipway PCMCIA card is installed in the processor.




5/77

5.4


Performances, description

Fipway network

Performances The operating principle of a Fipway network gives ensured, constant network cycle times whatever the traffic and number of stations (2 to 64). This enables the Fipway network to be updated (addition or removal of stations) without changing the performance.

Event

Report

CT1 CT1

Device 1

Fipway network

Device 2

CT1 CT1 NCT NCT CT2 CT2

Maximum transmission time b Telegram (TLG): priority application messages are transmitted in less than 10 ms (one telegram per station). b Common words (COM): the database of common words is updated every 40 ms. b Shared Table: the exchange table is updated every 40 ms. Uni-TE message handling system: Uni-TE or standard application-to-application messages are normally transmitted in less than 80 ms (40 ms for stations with addresses below 32). Where there is a large amount of traffic, some messages can wait for several cycles before being transmitted. The network characteristics enable a maximum of 210 messages of 128 bytes per second to be transmitted. The performance can be improved by inhibiting the Telegram service in the network. With such network characteristics, the response time at application level depends almost exclusively on the processing capacity of the devices which are connected. For example, the remote loading of a 50 K word program takes less than two minutes on a network with normal load. CT1 = Cycle time of device 1. NCT = Cycle time of Fipway network. CT2 = Cycle time of device 2.

Action

The response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application in relation to the devices connected. The processing time of a device can vary from one to two cycle times as a function of asynchronous operation.

5

Connectable devices

5.4


5/78


TSX 7 PLCs

Magelis iPC industrial PC

Magelis operator dialogue terminals

Connection via Fipio/Fipway integrated link or via the TSX FPM 100 module of TSX/PMX model 40 PLCs. Connection via the TSX FPG 10 module of TSX 17 20 TSX Micro PLCs.

Equipped with TSX FPC 10M for PC compatible (ISA bus). They access all devices in the X-Way architecture. The various X-Way drivers are available on CD-ROM.

Connection via the TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card.


5


Description, references

5

Fipway network

Description

3 4 2 1

TSX Micro/Premium PLCs have a slot on the processor for a type III PCMCIA communication card. This can be fitted with the TSX FPP 20 fipway network connection card, which is also inserted into the TSX SCY 21601 communication module slot. The TSX FPP 20 card comprises: 1 Protective cover 2 Removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature connector 3 Two indicator lamps: v ERR lamp: card fault, link fault, v COM lamp: data transmission or reception. Connector to be ordered separately: TSX FP CG 010/030, 1 or 3 m cable for connection to the TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4 T-junction box (on 9-way SUB-D connector).


Fipway card

TSX FPP 20

Number per Premium PLC 1 with 37 20 1 with 57 10 1 with 57 20 3 with 57 30 4 with 57 40

Communication See page module 5/103

Use

Composition

Reference

Type lll slot on, - TSX Micro - Premium PLC - Atrium slot-PLC - TSX SCY 21601 module

1 type lll PCMCIA card

TSX FPP 20

For Premium PLC or 2 channels TSX SCY 21601 Atrium slot-PLC - 1 isolated 2 wire RS 485 integrated channel (Half-duplex) - 1 slot for type lll PCMCIA card

Weight kg 0.110

0.360

5

TSX SCY 21601 Set of X-Way drivers for PC compatible

Includes all X-Way drivers

1 CD-Rom TLX CD DRV 20 M

–

Connection cables and accessories (1) Description Cables for PCMCIA

Use From TSX FPP 20 card (miniature connector)

To TSX FP ACC 3/4 box (SUB-D 9-way connector)

Length

Reference

1m

TSX FP CG 010

Weight kg 0.210

3m

TSX FP CG 030

0.410

TSX FP CG 010/030 (1) For other Fipway network accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/84 and 5/85.




5/79

5.4


Presentation

5

Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver

Presentation The OZD FIP G3 optic transceivers are particularly adapted for use with applications which are subject to harsh electrical environments or which are distributed over large areas: b Public buildings. b Large-scale industrial sites. b Water treatment and distribution. b Transport and highway tunnel infrastructures, etc. The OZD FIP G3 optic transceiver enables conversion of a FIP electric interface to 2 FIP optic interfaces and vice versa. As a result, it allows redundant ring topologies to exist; these improve installation availability even when a line is broken at a point in the medium. In these situations, the length of the bus or the Fipio/Fipway ring can reach 20 Km, with a maximum of 32 Fipio or 20 Fipway transceivers. See characteristics on page 5/81. These characteristics may be increased using mixed topologies such as 2 serial optic rings or 2 serial optic buses; please consult our regional office. Wiring system Premium CCX 17

3

3 4

4

6

6

2 1

5

2 1

6

6 1

1

6 2

Optic ring

1

6

4

4

2 6

6 3

5.4

6 2

6

5 5

Third party

Momentum

TSX Micro or Premium + TSX FPP 10 Magelis iPC + TSX FPC 10M

1 OZD FIF GG3: Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver. 2 TSX FP CAp00: 150 Ω shielded twisted pair trunk cable (diameter 8 mm) for use in standard environments and inside buildings. 3 TSX FP CG 0p0: tap-off connection cable for TSX FPP 10/20 PCMCIA module card for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs. 4 TSX FP ACC 3/4: T-junction box. It also has two 9-way female SUB-D connectors for connecting any device which connects to the bus by a PCMCIA card. 5 TSX FP ACC 2/12: 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection using daisy chaining or tap link connection. 6 TSX FP ACC 7: line terminator to be placed at each segment end. TSX LES 65: terminal block for TSX Series 7 PLC, which performs the address coding.


5/80


Presentation (continued), characteristics, references


5

Fipio/Fipway optic transceiver

Performances Fipio bus operating mode and performance on fiber optics After configuration in Fipio mode, the processor scans the various application devices according to the software configuration: b Image variables of the input values and of the output command values of a configured device are scanned as quickly as possible on the bus, whilst respecting the existing relationships between periods of different tasks which use these devices. b Appearance or disappearance of a configured device is detected on the bus within a maximum time of 200 ms. b Exchanges occur at the rate defined by the programmer, from 10 to 20 Uni-TE messages per second. The network cycle time is double that of the electrical bus when OZD FIP G3 transceivers are used. Fipway bus operating mode and performance on fiber optics The operating principle is identical to that on an electrical network, in that the number of stations is limited to 32 and the transmission time is as follows: b For the Common words and Shared Table services, updating of the entire database is carried out every 40 ms maximum. For Uni-TE message handling, the network characteristics are used to transmit a maximum of 230 messages of 128 bytes per second.

Characteristics (with OZD FIP G3 optic transceivers) (1) Type of bus/network

Fipio bus

Structure

Type Topology Access method

Transmission

Mode Data rate Medium (2) Inter-repeater distance No. of connection points Maximum no. of devices

Configuration

No. of segments Length Maximum optic distance between 2 OZD FIP G3 transceivers Tap links Services

Fipway network

Open industrial support conforming to Fip standard In redundant rings or in a line with simple redundant links Producer/consumer principle Producer/consumer principle Management by a fixed arbitrator Management by an automatically elected arbitrator Multimode (860 nanometres) 1 Mbit/s Fiber optic 50/125 - 17 dBm or 62.5/125 - 15 dBm 2,500 m for 50/125 and 2,800 m for 62.5/125 32 optic transceivers 20 optic transceivers 16 Fipio devices can be connected to the same 16 stations can be connected to the same fiber fiber optic transceiver optic transceiver but the maximum number of stations is 32 The loop (or fiber optic line) is similar to a non cascadable segment Maximum circumference of the ring (or length of the line): 20 km 1,500 m, with the following on the ring or the line: 32 optic transceivers 2,000 m, with the following on the ring or the line: < 32 optic transceivers 3,000 m, with the following on the ring or the line: 2 optic transceivers From the OZD FIP G3 fiber optic transceiver, the maximum length of the electrical tap link is 100 m Same as page 5/66 except for the Telegram service, which is not available with OZD FIP G3 fiber optic transceiver.

References Description Optic transceiver Fipio/Fipway (3)

Max. number of transceivers 32 with Fipio 20 with Fipway

Connectable devices Fipio bus - TSX Micro/Premium/Atrium - TBX remote I/Os with TBX LEP 30 - Remote Momentum I/O - CCX 17 panels (version 2.4) - Magelis iPC industrial PCs - Lexium drives, etc.

Fipway Reference network TSX Micro, OZD FIP G3 Premium, Atrium (with TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card)

Weight kg 0.500

TSX Micro/Premium PLC connection components (4) Description OZD FIP G3

TSX FPP 20/10

Use

Composition Reference

Fipway card

TSX 37 21/22 Micro PLC, Premium processor, Atrium slot-PLC

1 type III TSX FPP OZD 200 PCMCIA card

0.110

Fipio card agent function

TSX 37 21/22 Micro PLC, Premium processor, Atrium slot-PLC

1 type III TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card

0.110

Weight kg

(1) These characteristics can be increased using mixed topologies; please consult our regional office. (2) Devices connected on electrical tap links are compatible with the WorldFip physical layer. (3) For TSX FP ACC 8M fiber optic electrical repeater, see page 5/84. (4) For accessories and connection cables, see pages 5/84 and 5/85.


5/81

5

5.4


Connections

5

Fipio bus and Fipway network

Fipio bus and Fipway network wiring system TSX 17 20

CCX 17 FipConnect third-party products

4

5 Daisy chaining

8

7

14

10

or

5

1 or 2

14 13

1 or 2

Daisy chaining

4

24 V 15

1

TSX SAP 10 TBX (IP 20)

9

10

3

3

7 or

8

6

6

1 or 2 13

Fiber optic link

3

1

12

11

TSX Series 7 model 40 Integrated link

14

24 V

14

24 V 11

TSX Serie 7 model 40 with PCMCIA

Premium (bus manager) Momentum Lexium, ATV 38/58/68 FipConnect third product

TSX SAP 10 TBX (IP 20)

9

4

or

TSX 17 20

Premium bus manager Momentum Lexium, ATV 38/58/68 FipConnect third-party products

Daisy chaining

TSX Micro Agent Premium Agent Magelis XBT F Magelis iPC Compatible PC

14

1 or 2

TSX Series 7 model 40 Integrated link

Proof I/O IP 65 or IP 67 (1)

F Connection to Fipway network and Fipio bus Connection to Fipway bus Connection to Fipio bus (1) Dust and damp proof I/O modules on Fipio bus for IP 65 modules: TBX EEP/ESP modules and connections, see pages 3/54 to 3/58, IP 67 modules: TSX EEF/ESF/EMF modules and connections, see pages 3/60 to 3/69.

5

5.4

Connectable devices Devices to be connected on Fipio

Premium Fipio Agent Premium bus manager TSX Micro Fipio Agent Lexium ATV 58E ATV 58H/P/F, ATV 68/68F CCX 17 Industrial Magelis iPC PCs XBT F Magelis terminals PC compatible Momentum TBX IP 20 TBX IP 65 with telealimentation TBX IP 65 without telealimentation IP 67 I/O TBX SAP 10 AS-i gateway Devices to be connected on Fipway

Premium TSX Micro TSX Series 7 model 40 (integrated link) TSX Series 7 model 40 (PCMCIA) TSX 17 20 XBT F Magelis terminals Magelis iPC industrial PC PC compatible LUF P1 Modbus gateway

Boxes TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TBX FP ACC4 8 ACC14 6 ACC3 7 ACC10 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D C/D (2) D (1)

TSX EF ACC99

Connectors TSX FP TSX FP TBX TBX ACC 2 9 ACC12 9 BLP01 10 BLP10 C/D

C/D

C/D C/D

C/D C/D

C/D

C/D C/D C/D D

C/D (3) D (3)

TBX BLP10

TBX BAS10

C/D D D Boxes TSX FP TSX FP TSX FP TBX FP ACC4 8 ACC14 6 ACC3 7 ACC10 D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D

TSX EF ACC99

C/D Connectors TSX FP TSX FP TBX ACC2 9 ACC12 9 BLP01

C/D C/D

C/D

C/D

C/D

recommended connection C: connection by daisy chaining possible connection D: connection by tap link (1) Possible if only one TBX IP 65 module is used. (2) The connection by daisy chaining with the TBX FP ACC 10 connection box is only possible with the first TBX module on Fipio bus. (3) The TBX BAS connector is only used for TBX IP 65 output modules.

5/82

TBX BAS10



5


Cables 1 TSX FP CAp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω (8 mm diameter) for normal environments and use inside buildings. 2 TSX FP CFp00: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω and 1 x 1.5 mm2 pair for remote supply (9.5 mm diameter) for harsh environments and use outside buildings. 3 TSX FP CCp00: tap link cable, shielded twisted pair 150 Ω ( 8 mm diameter) for normal environments and use inside buildings. 4 TSX FP CG0p0: tap link connecting cable for PCMCIA TSX FPP 10/20 communication card for TSX Micro/Premium/TSX Series 7 PLCs, FT 2100 terminals and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the TSX FP ACC3/ACC4 junction box. 5 TSX FP CE030: tap link connecting cable for TSX FPC 10 or FCP FPC 10 PC communication card (ISA bus) for Magelis iPC and PC compatibles. Connection to the bus is via a 9-way SUB-D connector on the TSX FP ACC 3/ACC 4 junction box. Connection boxes 6 TSX FP ACC14: Polycarbonate IP 20 junction box: provides tap link from the trunk cable to connect 1 device via TSX FP CCp00 tap link cable or several devices in a daisy chain. 7 TSX FP ACC3: IP 20 box for connecting 2 PC or PCMCIA cards (TSX FPP 10, TSX FPC 10, TSX FPP 20/200, FCP FPP 10) on a 9-way SUB-D connector. 8 TSX FP ACC4: IP 65 junction box. It also has a 9-way female SUB-D connector for any device which is connected to the bus via a PCMCIA card (in this case, the box is IP 20). TSX EF ACC99: IP 65 junction box for IP 67 I/O modules, see page 3/67.

5

Connectors 9 TSX FP ACC2 and TSX FP ACC12: 9-way female SUB-D connector for Fipway/Fipio connection (TSX FP ACC 2 connector for TSX 17 20 micro-PLC for example). Used for daisy chain or tap link connection (90° output high or low, 45° output high or low). 10 TBX BLP01: connector for TBX I/O modules (IP 20). 11 TSX LES65: connecting cable for TSX/PMX model 40 PLCs. Used for address coding. 12 TSX FP ACC6: electrical repeater: used to increase the number of stations (max 64) and the length of the network by creating an additional segment of up to 1000 m (a maximum of 4 repeaters in cascade giving a network length of 5000 m). TSX EF Cppp: dust and damp proof connectors for IP 67 I/O modules, see page 3/69. Other elements 13 TSX FP ACC8M: fibre optic/electrical repeater: used to connect electrical segments via a fibre optic link (particularly suitable for zones with a high level of interference) or to connect a fibre optic device. 14 TSX FP ACC7: Line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment. 15 TSX FP JF020: fibre optic jumper (length 2 m). For fibre optic connection of the TSX FP ACC 8M repeater to a patch panel. The maximum length of the fibre optic cable (62.5/125) between 2 repeaters is 3000 m. TSX EF ACC7: line terminator, to be installed at both ends of a segment requiring IP 67 protection, see page 3/69. TSX FP ACC9: network wiring test tool. This is used for testing the continuity of segments, the connections of the various devices and the installation of line terminators.

5/83

5.4


References

5


Fipway network/Fipio bus connection accessories (1) Description Female connector for TSX FPG10p module (TSX 17 micro-PLCs)

Use

Rep.

Reference

Weight kg 0.080

Connection by daisy chaining Zamac material

9

TSX FP ACC2

10

TSX FP ACC12

0.040

TSX FP ACC14

0.120

7

TSX FP ACC3

0.090

8

TSX FP ACC4

0.660

TSX EF ACC99

0.715

TSX FP ACC 12 Female isolating Connection by daisy chaining connector for devices with or tap link black polycarbonate material IP 20 9-way SUB-D connectors

Insulated bus connection Trunk cable tap link (for connecting the c 24 V 6 box power supply of TBX dust and damp proof modules) (black polycarbonate, IP 20) TSX FP ACC14

Trunk cable tap link supports 2 x 9-way SUB-D female connectors (for PCMCIA card cable TSX FP CG 010/030) For connecting c 24 V power supply of TBX dust and damp proof modules Dust and damp proof bus Trunk cable tap link, supports 1 x 9-way female SUB-D connector (for PCMCIA connection box card cable TSX FP CG 010/030) (Zamac material, IP 65)

Trunk cable tap link via 2 M23 connectors Remote c 24 V power distribution via 7/8” connector PC compatible terminal connection via 9-way female SUB-D connector

TSX FP ACC3

5 TSX FP ACC4

Line terminators (sold in lots of 2)

2 impedance adaptors

14

TSX EF ACC7

0.020

Electrical repeater (IP 65)

12 Increases the length of the network or bus by allowing the connection of 2 segments of up to 1000 m each

TSX FP ACC6

0.520

Electrical/fibre optic repeater (IP 65)

Used to connect (via patch panel) an electrical segment (1000 m max.) and a fibre optic segment (3000 m max.)

TSX FP ACC8M

0.620

FIP wiring test tool

Used to test each cable segment of the network

TSX FP ACC9

0.050

13

TSX EF ACC99

5.4 Fipio/Fipway communication cards PCMCIA cards

Type III cards

See pages 5/75 and 5/79

ISA bus PC card

Fipio/Fipway connection card for PC compatible Card with short format on ISA bus Windows 95/98 and Windows NT4 compatible

TSX FPC10M

0.140

(1) The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus or Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories being used.

5/84


References (continued), Dimensions

5


Fipway network/Fipio bus connecting cables (1) Description

Type

Trunk cables

Conditions of use

Rep. Length Reference

8 mm In normal environment 1 shielded twisted (2) pair 150 Ω and inside building

1

9.5 mm, 1 shielded In harsh environment (3) twisted pair 150 Ω outside building or in garland (4) 9.5 mm, 1 shielded twisted pair 150 Ω and 1 x 1.5 mm2 pair for remote supply 8 mm, 2 shielded twisted pairs 150 Ω

Tap link cables

100 m 200 m 500 m

TSX FP CA100 TSX FP CA200 TSX FP CA500

Weight kg 5.680 10.920 30.000

100 m 200 m 500 m

TSX FP CR100 TSX FP CR200 TSX FP CR500

7.680 14.920 30.000

I/O IP 67, In normal environment (2) and inside building

–

100 m 500 m

TSX FP CP100 TSX FP CP500

7.680 30.000

In normal environment (2) and inside building

3

100 m 200 m 500 m

TSX FP CC100 TSX FP CC200 TSX FP CC500

5.680 10.920 30.000

Cable for PCs card

2 shielded twisted From TSX FPC10M card 5 pairs to TSX FP ACC3/4 box

3m

TSX FP CE030

0.410

Fibre optic jumper

Double fibre optic 62.5/125

2m

TSX FP JF020

0.550

For electrical/fibre optic repeater

15

(1) The characteristics and performances of the Fipio bus/Fipway network are dependent on the above TSX FP accessories being used. (2) Normal environment: v without special environmental restrictions, v operating temperature between + 5 °C and + 60 °C, v fixed installations. (3) Harsh environment: v resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder chips, v up to 100% humidity, v saline environment, v extreme variations in temperature, v operating temperature between - 10 °C and + 70 °C, v mobile installations. (4) Mobile installations: cables as per VDE 472, part 603/H: v for use on cable drag chain with minimum bend radius of 75 mm, v for use on gantry crane (strikethrough: portal support), subject to compliance with conditions for use such as acceleration, speed, length etc: contact our regional branch office for further information. v not authorized for use on robots, or multi-axis applications.

5

Dimensions TSX FP ACC6

27

220

=

205

116 =

50 79

= 50 83

65 80

RUN DEF

25

20

=

ø

¡

=

¡

20

ø

=

RUN DEF

20

104

68

=

=

160

=

50

= = 20

=

175

20

TSX FP ACC14

20

80

TSX FP ACC8M

25

TSX FP ACC4

5/85

5.4

Wiring system


5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by 10BASE5 interface (AUI) Wiring system TSX ETY 110/110 WS modules can take an AUI connector which enables direct connection to an Ethernet 10BASE5 segment with the accessories and cables described below. Connection by 10BASE5 interface (AUI)

7

1

5

5

6

5

5

4

5

TSX ETY 110/110WS

2

7

1

5

5

4

5

5

5

TSX ETY 410/5101

8

5

3 TSX ETY 110/110WS

2

1 TSX ETH CA pp0 trunk cable, triaxial cable (50 Ω coaxial with shielding) 1 male N type connector to be fitted to each end. TSX ETH CD 025 trunk cable, triaxial cable equipped with N type connectors, length 2.5 m. Corresponds to minimum length between 2 TSX ETH ACC 2 transceivers. 2 TSX ETY CB 0pp drop cable, 4 shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface (a straight connector and an elbow connector). 3 TSX ETY CC 0pp drop cable, 4 shielded twisted pair cable, AUI interface (two straight connectors). 4 TSX ETH ACC 2 transceiver, AUI interface. Enables a device to be connected to the Ethway network (obligatory when connecting two modules in point-to-point). 5 TSX ETH ACC 3 male N type connector for trunk cable. 6 TSX ETH ACC 4 female/female adaptor for extension of trunk cable. 7 TSX ETH ACC 5 (50 Ω) line terminator (includes an isolated terminator and a non isolated terminator which must be connected to the installation grounding network. One assembly per segment is required).

5.4

Wiring system: page 5/86

5/86

References


5

Ethernet TCP/IP network, connection by 10BASE5 interface (AUI) AUI interface accessories for connecting to the Ethernet network Description

TSX ETH ACC 2

Use

Ethernet transceiver Access point to any network

No (1) 4

Order in Unit reference multiples of 1 TSX ETH ACC 2

Weight kg 0.765

Mini transceiver

Can be used to connect 10BASE5 Ethernet station on a 10BASE-T network

1

TSX ETH NTR1

–

Connector for trunk cable

Must be fitted to both 5 ends of cable segment on trunk cable

10

TSX ETH ACC 3

0.050

Female/female adaptor

Extension of 2 cable segments on trunk cable

6

10

TSX ETH ACC 4

0.050

Line terminator kit

Impedance adaptor

7

1

TSX ETH ACC 5

0.070

Ethernet network connecting cables Description Trunk cables (radius curvature min. 500mm)

Drop cables (radius curvature min. 65mm)

Connectors 2 type N

No (1) 1

To be equipped with 2 1 TSX ETH ACC 3 male N type connectors

15-way, SUB-D 1 straight, 1 elbow (module side)

2

15-way, SUB-D, 3 2 straight (for FTX 517 or PC compatible connection)

Description

Use

Length

Reference

2.5 m

TSX ETH CD 025

Weight kg 0.840

23.4 m

TSX ETH CA 020

1.650

117 m

TSX ETH CA 100

5.600

210.6 m

TSX ETH CA 200

8.300

5m

TSX ETY CB 005

0.510

10 m

TSX ETY CB 010

0.980

20 m

TSX ETY CB 020

1.820

5m

TSX ETH CC 005

0.510

10 m

TSX ETH CC 010

0.980

20 m

TSX ETH CC 020

1.820

Reference Masse (2) kg TSX ETH ACC 10M 4.800

Ethernet 10BASE5 Fitting TSX ETH ACC 3 on trunk cable installation kit (1) See page 5/86 for key. (2) The letter M at the end of a reference indicates that the product is supplied with documentation in English and in French.


5/87

5

5.4


Presentation

5

Modbus Plus network

Presentation Premium

3 Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway Quantum

1

Momentum

2

Premium

Lexium MHDA

XBT-F

Momentum

3

5 Modbus Plus Bridge

Premium

Third-party device

TSX Micro

Modbus Plus ATV 58

Gateway

2 Modbus

1 Quantum

4 Modbus device

The Modbus Plus network is a high-performance industrial local network which can respond to Client/Server type extended architectures,combining a high data rate (1 Mbit/s), simple and economical transmission support and several message handling services.

5

The main data exchange functions between all devices connected to the network are: b The message exchange function according to the Modbus protocol. b The “global database” function (Shared Table service, periodic, controlled by the application: a station with the token can send 32 words to a maximum of 63 other stations connected on the network). 1 The Premium (or TSX Micro) client communicates with the Quantum server on the Modbus Plus network via function block (communication function). 2 The Quantum client communicates with the Premium server on the Modbus Plus network via MSTR function blocks. 3 A Premium (or TSX Micro) client connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP or Fipway network can communicate in read/write mode with a Modbus Plus station (the Premium PLC therefore acts as a gateway).

5.5

4 A Premium (or TSX Micro) client connected to the Modbus Plus network can access a remote station via the Modbus Plus/Modbus gateway. 5 A Premium client connected to the Modbus Plus network can make exchanges with the Momentum distributed inputs/outputs via the Peer cop function.

5/88


Description, characteristics

5

Modbus Plus network

Description The type III TSX MBP 100 card is used to connect the Premium/TSX Micro PLCs and Atrium slot-PLCs to the Modbus Plus network. This card is installed in the slot reserved for processors or slot-PLCs: 1 A host slot on processors or slot-PLCs. 2 A protective cover. 1

3 A removable cover with fixing screw (access to 20-way miniature connector). 4 1

2

3

4 Two indicator lamps: v ERR: card or link fault, v COM: activity on the line. Connectors to be ordered separately: v TSX MBP CE 0pp drop cables.

Characteristics Structure

Transmission

Configuration

Services

Type

Industrial bus

Physical interface

RS 485

Method of access

Token bus

Mode

Synchronous HDLC

Data rate

1 Mbit/s

Medium

Twisted pair

Number of devices

32 per segment, 64 maximum on all segments (1,800 m maximum)

Number of addresses

64 devices maximum per segment

Length of bus

450 m maximum per segment, 1,800 m maximum with 3 repeaters

Number of segments

Cascaded: 5 maximum using Modbus Plus BP85 bridges

Global database

- 4096 byte common database - cyclical exchange of 32 broadcast words

“Peer to peer” dialogue

Read/write services (number of requests: 100 registers per transaction)

Peer Cop

Cyclical exchange service (on Premium only): 500 words per station (broadcast or point-to-point)

5

5.5

5/89

Connections


5

Modbus Plus network

Wiring system 11

5

3

5

8

6

5

4

9 7

7

7 12

10 1

2

1

1 TSX MBP 100: Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, for type III processor slot on TSX Micro or Premium platforms. 2 170 PNT 110 20: communication module for Momentum I/O base unit. 3 490 NAA 271 0p: trunk cable, shielded twisted pair with shielding drain (flying leads). In lengths of 30, 150, 300, 450 or 1,500 m. 4 170 MCI 020/021 p p: drop cable equipped at each end with an RJ45 connector (baseT interface). In lengths of 0.25, 0.75, 3 or 10 m. 5 990 NAD 230 00: IP 20 local site tap, provides a tap link from the trunk cable for connecting 1 device (connection of conductors requires wiring tool 043 509 383). Integrates the line terminal. 6 Local site taps provides a tap link from the trunk cable for 1 device (screw terminal connection). It also has an RJ45 connector for connecting a programming and maintenance terminals: - 990 NAD 230 20/21: IP 20 plastic tap, - 990 NAD 230 10: IP 65 zamac tap. 7 170 XTS 020 00: IP 20 tee, provides a tap link from the Modbus Plus cable (cable with connectors at each end of an RJ45 connector). It has a 9-way SUB-D female connector for connecting the device. 8 TSX MBP CE 030/060: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature connector and with flying leads on the 990 NAD 230 00/010 local site tap side. In lengths of 3 or 6 m. 9 990 NAD 211 10/30: drop cable with a 9-way SUB-D male connector for connecting the device and with flying leads on the 990 NAD 230 00/010 local site tap side. In lengths of 2, 4 or 6 m. 10 TSX MBP CE 002: drop cable for Modbus Plus PCMCIA card, equipped on the PCMCIA side with a 20-way miniature connector and on the network side with a 9-way SUB-D female connector. Can be used as an extension for cable 990 NAD 211 10/30. In lengths of 0.2 m. 11 AS MBKT 185: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) to be placed at each end of the segment. The AS MBKT 185 terminators are placed directly at the end of the cable (without a tap or tee). 990 NAD 230 11: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) for IP 65 local site tap 990 NAD 230 10, to be placed at each end of the segment. 12 170 XTS 021 00: set of 2 line terminators (impedance adapter) for tee 170 XTS 020 00, to be placed at each end of the segment.

5

5.5

For wiring system: b Quantum platform: please refer to our catalog. b Lexium drive for brushless motors: please refer to our catalog “Lexium movement command”. b Altivar drive for asynchronous motors: please refer to our catalog “Progressive starters and speed controllers”.

5/90


References

5

Modbus Plus network

Reference Description Number per PLC Use

TSX MBP 100

Weight kg 0.110

Reference (1) STB NMP 2212 170 PNT 110 20

Weight kg 0.145 0.110

Addr.

Reference

5

990 NAD 230 00

Weight kg 0.230

6 6

990 NAD 230 20 990 NAD 230 21

– –

6

990 NAD 230 10

0.650

7

170 XTS 020 00

0.260

11 11 12 11

990 NAD 230 22 990 NAD 230 11 170 XTS 021 00 AS MBKT 185

– – – –

Mounting kit DIN rail mounting for 990 NAD 230 10 for IP 65 tee local site tap

–

990 NAD 230 12

–

Protector pack

Replacement port protectors to prevent ingress into the RJ45 quick connect programming port of 990 NAD 230 10 tap

Sold in lot of 4

990 NAD 230 23

–

Wiring tool

Mounting trunk and tap wires in the local site tap.

–

043 509 383

–

Addr. Length

Reference

3

30 m 150 m 300 m 450 m 1,500 m

490 NAA 271 01 490 NAA 271 02 490 NAA 271 03 490 NAA 271 04 490 NAA 271 06

– – – – –

4

0.25 m 1m 3m 10 m

170 MCI 020 10 170 MCI 020 36 170 MCI 021 20 170 MCI 020 80

– – – –

10

0.2 m

TSX MBP CE 002

–

8

3m 6m

TSX MBP CE 030 TSX MBP CE 060

0.340 0.530

Modbus Plus 1 with TSX Micro PCMCIA card TSX 37 21/22 1 with Premium/Atrium TSX MBP 100 Description Distributed I/O on Modbus Plus network 170 PNT 110 20

Addr. Composition Reference

Type III slot on: - TSX 37 21/22 PLC - Premium processor TSX 57 1p/2p/3p/4p/5p - Atrium slot-PLC T PCX /TSX PCI 57 2p/3p - Magelis XBT F terminals Connection

1

1 PCMCIA type III card

Addr.

Advantys STB network interface module – Momentum communication module 2

Connection accessories (1) Description Use

Mounting

Modbus Plus IP 20 tee, requires the wiring tool – taps 043 509 283. Integrates the line terminal IP 20 tap for tap link connection (screw DIN rail terminal connection), supports 1 RJ45 Mounting plate connector on front panel IP 65 tap for tap link connection (tee), Mounting plate supports 1 RJ45 connector on front panel IP 20 tee with 2 RJ45 connectors for Modbus Plus cable and 1 9-way SUB-D connector for tap link devices Line For tap (IP 20) 990 NAD 230 20/21 terminators For tap (IP 65) 990 NAD 230 10 (sold in lot For tee (IP 20) 170 XTS 020 00 of 2) Used directly at the end of the cable (without a tap or tee)

5

Connection cables (1) Description Use From Modbus Plus Local site tap trunk cables

To Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10

Drop cables IP 20 IP 20 170 XTS 020 00 tee 170 XTS 020 00 tee

PCMCIA card TSX MBP 100 (miniature connector) TSX MBP CE 030/060

Drop cable with 9 way male SUB-D connector Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10

Communication Local site tap 990 NAD 230 00/10 9 2.4 m 990 NAD 211 10 module for 6m 990 NAD 211 30 Momentum I/O base units (1) For other Modbus Plus network connecting cables and accessories, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

Weight kg

0.530 0.530

5/91

5.5


Presentation, description, connectable devices

Profibus DP bus

Presentation PLC with Unity Pro/PL7 and DP software

X-Way Premium

Repeaters (3 maxi)

With Unity Pro/PL7 and DP software

Third party device

Third party device

Momentum

ATV

The Profibus DP bus is a high-speed fieldbus which conforms to industrial communication requirements. The Profibus DP is a linear bus with a centralised access procedure of the master/slave type. Only master stations, also known as active stations, have access rights to the bus. The slave or passive stations can only respond to prompts. Dialogue between masters is also possible from some stations by means of a token bus protocol. The physical connection is a single shielded twisted pair, but fibre optic interfaces are available to create tree, star, or ring structures. Compared to the ISO model, only layers 1, 2 are implemented, since access from the user interface is made directly to the link layer via simple mapping of variables.

5

Configuration The Profibus DP bus is configured usind dedicating SyCon software, which should be ordered separatly, reference SYC SPU LFp CD28M. This sofware is used to generate the file including the informations relating to the devices connected. This extension file is imported into the PLC application via the Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro programming software. Description Premium PLCs and Atrium slot-PLCs are connected to the Profibus DP bus by a TSX PBY 100 module. This module can be installed in any slot in the Premium PLC rack. It comprises:

5.5

1 Host module for the PCMCIA card. 2 Profibus DP PCMCIA card with its integral connecting cable, 0.6 m long. 3 T-junction box enabling the tap link of the main bus 490 NAE 911 00. Connectable devices

1

5/92

2

3

The TSX PBY 110 module performs the role of the master on the Profibus DP bus. The Telemecanique devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are: b TeSys model U starter-controllers, via Modbus gateway. b Advantys STB and Momentum distributed I/O. b Advantys FTB/FTM, IP 67 monobloc and modular I/O spliter boxes. b Altivar 31/58/58F/68, variable speed drives for asynchronous motors. b Twin Line TLC and Lexium MHDA servodrives for brushless motors. b Altistart ATS 48 soft starters. b … And any third-party device which conforms to the Profibus DP standard profile.

5


Characteristics, references

5

Profibus DP bus

Characteristics of the bus supported by the module Type of bus Structure

Transmission


Services (VO)

Type

Profibus DP Industrial bus

Physical interface

RS 485

Method of access

Master

Mode

NRZ

Medium

Shielded twisted pair, fibre optic, infra-red

Data rate Number of slaves

v to 9.6 K bit/s with the length of 1200 m (4800 m with 3 repeaters) v from 12 M bit/s with the length of 100 m (400 m with 3 repeaters) 126

Number of inputs/outputs

3872 inputs/3872 outputs (242 %IW words, 242 %QW words)

Subset of Class 1 master function

Read/write DP slave I/O data Transfer slave diagnostic data Set slave parameters (on power-up) Check slave configurations (on power-up) Manage monitoring requests: Global_CONTROL et Get_Master_Diag master/master dialogue is not supported

Subset of Class 2 master function


+ +

Communication profile Profibus DP module Master/slave kit for Premium PLC 12 Mbit/s and Atrium slot-PLC

SyCon V2.8 configuration software

+

Description

–

Type of license

Services

Reference

Class 1 and Class 2 TSX PBY 100 V0 master functions, see characteristics Profibus FMS message handling not supported Generates an See page 5/55 ASCII configuration file for the module to be imported into the Unity Pro or PL7 application Reference

490 NAD 911 03

Single (1 station) Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (up to 10 stations) Single (1 station)

SyCon V2.8 configuration software update SyCon V2.8 Group (3 stations) configuration Team (10 stations) software update for Site (up to 10 stations) previous version

5 –

SYC SPU LFU CD28M SYC SPU LFG CD28M SYC SPU LFT CD28M SYC SPU LFF CD28M SYC SPU LRU CD28M

Weight kg – – – – –

SYC SPU LUG CD28M SYC SPU LUT CD28M SYC SPU LUF CD28M

– – –

TSX PBY 100 SyCon V2.8 configuration software licenses

Weight kg 0.870

Elements for connection to Profibus DP bus Description Distributed I/O on Profibus DP Connectors for communication module Description Profibus DP connecting cables

Use

Reference

Advantys STB network interface module STB NDP 2112 Momentum communication module 170 DTN 110 00 Line terminator 490 NAD 911 03 Intermediate connection 490 NAD 911 04 Intermediate connection and terminal 490 NAD 911 05 port Length Reference 100 m 400 m

TSX PBS CA 100 TSX PBS CA 400

Weight kg 0.140 – – – – Weight kg – –

5/93

5.5


Presentation

5

INTERBUS bus

Presentation The INTErBUS bus is a serial link type fieldbus for sensors and actuators which conforms to the requirements of an industrial environment. Quantum

Premium/Atrium E/S IP 65

Installation remote bus module

c 24 V

ATV 58

2

1 Installation remote bus module Bus terminal module c 24 V

5

E/S IP 65

Momentum

The topology of the INTERBUS bus is designed as a ring system with master/slave central access procedure. It is subdivided into three parts: b The remote bus 1 (bus devices use RS 485 point-to-point connection). b The installation remote bus 2 (remote bus tap link via a bus terminal module). Its technology is particularly suitable for IP 65 dust and damp proof systems. b The local bus with TTL technology is particularly suitable for buses within a control cabinet. Each bus subscriber comprises a transmitter and a receiver. The INTErBUS system is like a data ring and has the structure of a shift register distributed on the bus. With its registers, each module constitutes a component of this shift register ring. The INTErBUS master circulates the data in series on this ring.

5.5


5/94




Description, connectable devices

5

INTERBUS bus

Description 1 1 2

2

Premium PLCs are connected to the INTERBUS bus via the TSX IBY 100 INTERBUS bus module. The TSX IBX 100 communication coprocessor can be used to connect a Atrium slot-PLC integrated in a PC compatible to the InterBus bus.

3

3

The front panel on the TSX IBY 100/IBX 100 module comprises: 1 A display block with 6 indicator lamps (on the card for the TSX IBX 100). 2 A 9-way female RS 232 SUB-D connector: CMD Tool software support (configuration software). 3 A 9-way female RS 485 SUB-D connector: InterBus link (this connector integrates an additional power supply for the fibre optic link).

Connectable devices The TSX IBY 100 module or the TSX IBX 100 card acts as the master on the INTERBUS bus, other Schneider Electric devices (slaves) which can be connected on the bus are: b ATV 38/58 variable speed drives for asynchronus motors. b Telefast IP 20 I/O interfaces. b Momentum IP 20 I/O.

5

b Distributed discrete dust and damp proof I/O (IP 65). b Inductel inductive identification systems (XGP/XGK-S read/write stations). b AS-Interface/INTERBUS gateway. b Any third-party device conforming to InterBus standard profiles.

5.5




5/95

Characteristics, software configuration

Modicon Premium automation platform INTERBUS bus

Characteristics of the bus supported by TSX IBY 100 modules or TSX IBX 100 coprocessors Type of bus Structure

Transmission


Remote bus Type

Industrial bus

Physical interface

RS 485

Method of access

Master/slave

Mode

NRZ

Data rate

500 K bit/s

Medium

Length of segment Maximum length of cable between:

Number of tap links

5

Installation rmote bus

Local bus

INTERBUS loop

RS 485 with c 24 V in TTL cable

Combined interface (vertically mounted signal and c 24 V power supply)

- Twisted pair - Fibre optic - Wave guide rail - Infra-red - Rotating collector

Special cable for: Sensor and I/O module 24V power supply Data transmission

Special cable

2 x 1.5 mm2

400 m maxi - Module and the 1st bus terminal module: 400 m - 2 bus term.modules: 400 m Module and last station on the remote bus: 12.8 km 16 maxi

– - Bus terminal module and 1st module: 50 m - 2 modules: 50 m

– - Bus terminal module and 1st module: 1.5 m - 2 modules: 1.5 m

200 m max. in the loop - Bus terminal module and 1st interface: 20 m - 2 modules: 10 m

The bus terminal module and last module: 50 m –

Bus terminal module Bus terminal module and last module: 10 m and last module: 100 m – 1 loop per bus terminal module – –

Number of bus terminal modules 254 maxi

–

Number of slaves

512 maxi

Total current of connected modules: 4.5 A max.

8

63

Number of I/O

3872 I/3872 O max. (4096 I/O in total)

–

–

–

INTERBUS services

Implicit exchange of process date: 242 %IW and 242 %QW Pre-processing Logical addressing Segmentation

Software configuration The INTERBUS bus can be configured in 3 modes: b Auto mode: This mode does not require the use of any special configuration software (I/O images are copied to %IW, %QW implicitly). It facilitates the wiring check.

5.5

b Mode Unity Pro/PL7 V IBY mode: This mode is used to define and load the configuration to the module (explicit assignment of %IW, %QW). The CMD Tool software (1) is required in order to generate the configuration text file. b CMD V IBY mode: Reserved for configurations > 8 K words, and requires the use of the CMD Tool software. PMS message handling (usable on PCP devices) is managed via standard OFs (Read-var, Write-var, etc). The catalogue file which enables Schneider Electric devices to be integrated in the CMD Tool software is available on our Web site: b Address: www.schneiderautomation.com b File for downloading: Schneider device catalog for CMD. (1) Contact your Phœnix Contact vendor.


5/96



5


References

5

INTERBUS bus

References INTERBUS bus modules Description

No. of modules per PLC/PC See pages INTERBUS module for 1/12, 1/13 or Premium PLC 1/31

INTERBUS

TSX IBY 100

coprocessor Atrium slot-PLC

Communication profil Master/slave 0.5 Mbit/s Generation 4

See page 1/21 Master/slave or 1/35 0.5 Mbit/s Generation 4

Services

Reference (1)

- cyclical TSX IBY 100 variable exchanges - PMS messaging - bus operating modes management cyclical TSX IBX 100 variable exchanges - PMS messaging - bus operating modes management

Weight kg 0.320

0.280

Converter software Description

Use

Reference

TSX IBX 100 Symbol converter software

Used to convert CMD symbols into Unity Pro or TLX LIBS CNVE PL7 symbols

Weight kg –

Bus connection elements Description

Use

Momentum Momentum I/O base units on communica-ti INTERBUS bus on module Avantys STB distributed I/O Remote bus cables

–

170 INT 110 00 Installation remote bus cables

Preformed cables for linking 2 communication modules

Connecting cable

TSX IBp to PC connection (with CMD Tool software)

9-way SUB-D Remote bus cables connectors (sold in lots of 2)

Length

Reference (1)

Weight kg –

–

170 INT 110 00

–

STB NIB 2212

–

100 m

TSX IBS CA 100

–

400 m

TSX IBS CA 400

–

0.110 m

170 MCI 007 00

–

1m

170 MCI 100 00

–

6m

990 NAA 263 20

–

15 m

990 NAA 263 50

–

–

170 XTS 009 00

0.045

5

(1) Product supplied with multilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French.

5.5




5/97



Modbus serial link

Presentation Magelis iPC

ATV 58

Modbus

XBT TSX Micro/Premium

April 5000

Quantum

The Modbus bus is used for master/slave architectures (it is necessary, however, to check that the Modbus services used by the application are implemented on the devices concerned). The bus comprises one master station and several slave stations. Only the master station can initiate the exchange (direct communication between slave stations is not possible). Two exchange mechanisms are possible: b Question/answer, where the requests from the master are addressed to a given slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave which has been interrogated. b Broadcasting, the master broadcasts a message to all the slave stations on the bus. These stations execute the order without transmitting a response.

5 Description

The TSX Micro/Premium PLCs or Atrium slot-PLCs offer various Modbus bus connection possibilities. 1

Built-in links to the TSX Micro processor or to the TSX SCY p1601 Premium module 1 Via integrated port on the TSX Micro processor. The TER port (8-way mini DIN) has Modbus RTU master/slave (1) protocol.

TSX Micro

2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 11601/21601 module for Premium PLCs. This module has an isolated Half-duplex RS 485 serial link channel(25-way SUB-D connector) with multiprotocol (including Modbus); (for the TSX SCY 11601 module, only the Modbus protocol is supported).

3 6

TSX SCP 11 multiprotocol PCMCIA cardsp

5 4 Premium

TSX SCY 11601

TSX SCY 21601

3 A slot on the TSX Micro/Premium processors, the Atrium slot-PLC and the TSX SCY 21601 module(2) exists for the multiprotocol TSX SCP11p cards, including Modbus, featuring:

5.6 4 A protective cover.

2

5 A removable cover with fixing screws (to access a 20-way miniature connector). 6 Two LEDs: v ERR lamp: card or link fault, v COM lamp: data transmission or reception.

3

Cable connector to be ordered separately: TSX SCP/SCY cable. 6 4 References: pages 5/100 and 5/101

5/98

5

(1) Modbus RTU slave Protocol with TSX 37 05/08. (2) This slot is also designed for Fipway TSX FPP 20 or Jnet TSX JNP 112/114 PCMCIA network cards.

5


Characteristics

5

Modbus serial link

Characteristics Physical Interface

Structure

Transmission

Configuration

TSX Micro terminal port

PCMCIA card

Isolated RS 485 (1)

Type

Non-isolated RS 485 TSX 37 05/08 TSX 37 10/21/22 Heterogeneous industrial bus

Method of access

Slave

Master/slave Type

Mode

Asynchronous in baseband

Frame

RTU

RTU/ASCII

Data rate

1.2...14.2 Kbit/s

Medium

Double shielded twisted pair

Number of devices

28 max. in RS 485 Point-to-point in RS 422

0.6..19.2 Kbit/s (for TSX SCP 111) 1.2...19.2 Kbit/s 1.2... 19.2 Kbit/s (for TSX SCP 112/114) Double Quintuple Double shielded twisted pair shielded shielded twisted pair, twisted pair doubled 16 max. 2 32 (point-to-point)

Max. number of link addresses Length of bus

98

98

Tap links Services

Master/slave

248

10 m max. non isolated link 1,300 m max. on isolated link (2) –

1,300 m excluding tap links 15 m max.

Requests

Bits: 1,920 bits per request Words: 120 words per request

Security

One CRC 16 check parameter on each frame

Monitoring

No flow control

Modbus functions available on Premium/TSX Micro PLCs or on Atrium slot-PLC

Code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 0B 0C 0F 10 11 –

20 mA CL

Non-isolated RS 232D

TSX SCY integrated port for integrated Premium RS 485 TSX TSX SCY 11601 SCY 21601

248 100 to 1,000 m 15 m max. according to rate – –

98

1,300 m excluding C

15 m

5

Diagnostic counters, event counters Modbus slave Read n output bits Read n input bits Read n output words Read n input words Write 1 output bit Write 1 output word Exceptional read status Diagnostic Event counter Event connection Write n output bits Write n output words Identification –

Modbus master Read bits Read input bits (3) Read words Read input words (3) Write 1 bit or n bits Write 1 word or n words Exceptional read status Diagnostic Event counter Event connection – – Slave identification Other requests accessible via SEND_REQ generic function blocks

(1) Point-to-point RS 422 compatible connection. (2) For an isolated link, you must use the TSX P ACC 01 terminal port cable connector. (3) Requests not available on TSX 37 10/21/22 terminal port.

5.6


5/99


References

5

Modbus serial link

Modbus bus connection elements Description

Protocol

Physical layer

Reference

Weight kg –

TSX Micro PLC integrated link (TER port)

Modbus (RTU) Uni-Telway character mode

Non-isolated RS 485

Refer to our catalog “TSX Micro automation platform”

Communication module for Premium/Atrium

Modbus Character mode Uni-Telway

- 1 RS 485 isolated integrated channel TSX SCY 21601 (channel 0), (1 to 97 slaves) - 1 slot for PCMCIA card (channel 1) (1)

0.360

Modbus

1 RS 485 isolated integrated channel (channel 0), 1.2...19.2 Kbit/s (1 to 247 slaves)

TSX SCY 11601

0.340

RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) 1.2...19.2. Kbit/s

TSX SCP 114

0.105

RS 232D (9 signals) 0.6...19.2. Kbit/s

TSX SCP 111

0.105

20 mA CL 1.2...19.2. Kbit/s

TSX SCP 112

0.105

TSX Micro

TSX SCY 21601

5

TSX SCY 11601

Modbus PCMCIA cards type III for Premium Character mode processor, Atrium Uni-Telway slot-PLC, PLC TSX 37 21/22 or TSX SCY 21601 module

TSX SCP 11p

Modbus connection accessories Description

TSX SCA 50

Use

Reference

Passive junction box

Bus tap link and extension, line termination adaptation

TSX SCA 50

Weight kg 0.520

2 channel passive subscriber socket (2 or 4 wire) (2)

Tap link of 2 devices with 2 wires TSX SCA 64 Tap link of 1 master device and/or 1 slave device with 4 wires Fitted with 2 female 15-pin SUB-D connectors

0.570

Active adapter RS 232C/RS 485

Connection of an RS 232C device as RS 485 Isolation of signals and line termination adaptation

TSX SCA 72

0.520

TSX Micro PLC TER Bus tap link cable (2 or 4-wire) terminal port cable Isolation of Modbus signals connector Line termination adaptation Supplied with cable (length 1 m) fitted with a mini-DIN connector (TER port)

TSX P ACC 01

0.690

Line terminators (sold in lot of 2)

TSX SCA 10

0.030

TSX SCA 64

5.6

2/4-wire cabling Can be connected to the front panel of the TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket

(1) PCMCIA type III slot for 1 TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 112/114 card. (2) 2 or 4 wire cabling, compatible with the TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket requires a max. 10 mm external diameter Modbus cable.


5/100



5

Modbus serial link

Modbus connection cables Description RS 485 double shielded twisted pair trunk cables

Cables for isolated RS 422/485 tap link

Use From Modbus Bus

TSX SCP 114 card

Built-in channel (channel 0) Premium TSX SCY 11601, TSX SCY 21601 module

RS 232D tap link cables

TSX SCP 111 card

Length

Reference

100 m

TSX CSA 100

5.680

200 m

TSX CSA 200

10.920

500 m

TSX CSA 500

30.000

3m

TSX SCP CM 4030

0.160

TSX SCA 64 subscriber 3 m socket, 2/4 wires

TSX SCP CM 4530

0,180

Modbus standard device, 4 wires (1) (point-to-point)

3m

TSX SCP CX 4030

0.160

TSX SCA 50 housing, 2 wires (1)

3m

TSX SCY CM 6030

0.160

TSX SCA 64 subscriber 3 m socket, 2 wires

TSX SCY CM 6530

0.160

Communication device 3 m (Modem, converter, etc) (DCE) (2)

TSX SCP CC 1030

0.190

Terminal device with point-to-point (DTE) (2)

3m

TSX SCP CD 1030

0.190

10 m

TSX SCP CD 1100

0.620

0.160

To –

TSX SCA 50 housing 2 wires (1)

Cable for tap link 20 mA CL

TSX SCP 112 card

Multidrop Modbus (1)

3m

TSX SCP CX 2030

Other connecting cables

–

–

–

See page 5/110

Weight kg

5

–

5.6 (1) End of cable fitted with free wires. (2) End of cable fitted with a male 25-pin SUB-D connector.


5/101


Presentation, characteristics

Uni-Telway serial link

Presentation The Uni-Telway bus is a standard means of communication between control system components (PLCs, MMI terminals, supervisors, variable speed drives, numerical controllers, weighing equipment, etc.). It is suitable for architectures designed to manage control and monitoring devices via a PLC, or architectures used for MMI (supervision, etc.).

Premium

The Uni-Telway bus requires a master station which manages the allocation of bus access rights to the various connected stations (known as slave stations).

Uni-Telway

CCX 17

ATV 58

TSX Micro

Characteristics

5

Physical interface

Structure

Transmission

Configuration

Service

Type

RS 485 non isolated Premium RS 485 terminal port isolated module (TER/AUX) integrated port (1) Heterogeneous industrial bus

Isolated RS 485/ 20 mA CL PCMCIA RS 422 PCMCIA card card

Non-isolated RS 232D PCMCIA card

Link

Multidrop

Method of access

Master/Slave principle

Mode

Asynchronous transmission in baseband

Data rate

1.2…19.2 Kbit/s

Medium

Shielded double twisted pair

Number of devices

5 max.

28 max.

Number of connection addresses Length of bus

8 max.

96 max.(1 device can occupy several datalink addresses)

10 m max., 1,000 m with TSX P ACC 01

1,000 m max. excluding tap links

1300 m max., excluding tap links

15 m (unlimited via modem)

Tap links

–

20 m

15 m

–

Uni-TE

Point-to-point requests with confirmation (question/response), of up to 240 bytes (2) initiated by any connected device

Point-to-point

0.3…19.2 Kbit/s

16 max.

20 m

2

Unsolicited point-to-point data, without confirmation, of up to 240 bytes(2) initiated by any connected device

5.6

Broadcast messages of up to 240 bytes (2) initiated by the master device Other functions

Transparent communication, via the master, with any device in an X-Way architecture Diagnostics, debugging, adjustment and programming of PLCs

Security Monitoring

Check character on each frame, acknowledgement and, if required, repetition of messages ensure security of transmission Bus status table, transmission error counters and device status can be accessed by program in each device Status of the bus and devices connected from the master PLC accessible using Unity Pro or PL7 software.

(1) TSX SCY 21601 single format module. (2) Limited to 128 bytes with TSX Micro/Premium PLC terminal port. Connections: page 5/104

5/102


5


Characteristics (continued), description

5


Performances

1

The Uni-Telway bus cycle time depends on: b The number of devices polled (datalink addresses). b The data rate. b The turnaround time of each device. b The number, length and type of messages.

2

BCT = Bus Cycle Time, is the interval between two polls from the same device.

BCT (ms) 400

300

200

The curves opposite give the Uni-Telway cycle time as a function of the number of slaves operating at 9.6 Kbit/s or 19.2 Kbit/s, with a typical turnaround time of 5 ms per device (excluding messages).

100

The following table shows the time to be added (in ms) to obtain the true BCT value as a function of the traffic (N = Number of usable characters): 1

4

8

12

16

20

24

27

1 = 9.6 Kbit/s 2 = 19.2 Kbit/s

Event Device 1

Report CT1 CT1

Uni-Telway bus

Time (ms) at 9.6 Kbit/s 24 + 1.2 N (1)

at 19.2 Kbit/s 17 + 0.6 N (1)

Slave to Master

19 + 1.2 N (1)

12 + 0.6 N (1)

Slave to slave

44 + 2.3 N (1)

29 + 1.15 N (1)

CT1 CT1 BCT

In a distributed control system architecture the application-to-application response time depends not only on the communication system, but also on:

BCT

b The processing times of the message source and destination devices. b The degree of asynchronism between the bus and processor cycle times.

CT2 CT2

Device 2

Exchanges Master to slave

Action

This response time must be evaluated by the designer of each application according to the devices which are connected.

BCT = Uni-Telway bus cycle time CT1 = Device 1 bus cycle time CT2 = Device 2 bus cycle time

5

The processing time of a device may vary from one to two cycle times depending on the degrees of asynchronism.

Description TSX Micro/Premium PLCs TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide various ways of connecting to the Uni-Telway bus. 1 By integrated TSX Micro/Premium processor or Atrium slot-PLC port The AUX port (2) (8-way mini-DIN) has one non-isolated RS 485 serial link channel (maximum distance 10 m). 2 By TSX SCY 21601 integrated port for Premium PLC or Atrium slot-PLC This module has one Half-duplex isolated RS 485 serial link channel, which is multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway. 3 Via multiprotocol PCMCIA card A slot on the TSX 37 21/22/Premium PLC processors, the Atrium slot-PLC and the TSX SCY 21601 module (3) accepts the following multiprotocol cards:

TSX Micro

v TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card Isolated RS 485/RS 422 link. This type of card corresponds to the Uni-Telway standard. 2

1

v TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card 20 mA current loop link. This type of card is used for a multidrop link (2 to 16 devices) and requires a c 24V external power supply.

3

Premium

v TSX SCP 111 PCMCIA card Non isolated RS 232D link. This type of card can be used for direct point-to-point links or via Modem.

TSX SCY 21601 (1) N = Number of usable characters corresponding to the messages to be exchanged. (2) TER port for TSX 37 05/08/10 PLC. (3) This slot can also accept the TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card for Fipway networks, or the TSX JNP 112/114 PCMCIA card for JNet networks.



5/103

5.6


Connections

5


Uni-Telway bus wiring system

12 FT 2100

TSX 17 20

2

4

2

1

2

11

5

2

TER AUX

3

Device

10

Adaptor

8

3

TSX Micro (TER terminal port)

9 7

ATV 38/58

6

1 TSX CSA ppp: bus cable, double shielded twisted pair. The shielding must be connected to the earth of each device. 2 TSX SCA 50: passive T-junction box, matches the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line. 3 TSX SCA 62: passive 2-channel Uni-Telway subscriber socket, is used for coding the address of two connected devices, and matching the impedance when it is installed at the end of the line. 4 TSX SCA 60/61: passive terminal block, used for intermediate devices that have a 15-way female SUB D connector: v TSX SCA 60 used for intermediate devices, v TSX SCA 61 used for end devices. 5 TSX P ACC 01: connection box, used for connecting a TSX Micro/Premium PLC to the Uni-Telway bus via the PLC terminal port. The connecting cable (length 1 m) is integrated in the connection box. It isolates the signals (for distances >10 m) and is used to match the end of line impedance. It is also used to set the operation of the terminal port (Uni-Telway Master/Slave or character mode). 6 TSX LES 64/74: cable connectors for extensions to the Uni-Telway bus, used to connect TSX model 40 PLC processors that have an integral Uni-Telway port as standard. They are used for coding the address of the connected device. 7 TSX SCP 114 : PCMCIA card for connecting TSX Micro (1)/Premium PLCs to the Uni-Telway bus. 8 TSX SCP CU 4030: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card (on TSX P57 p0M processor or TSX SCY 21601 module) and the TSX SCA 50 junction box. 9 TSX SCY CU 6530: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the TSX SCY 21601 module integrated channel and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket. 10 XBT-Z908: Uni-Telway connecting cable between the CCX 17 and the TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket. 11 TSX PCX 1031: universal connecting cable between a PC compatible (COM port, 9-way SUB D connector) and the TER or AUX port for TSX Micro/Premium PLCs or the TSX P ACC 01 connection box (8-way mini-DIN connector). 12 TSX CSC 015: connecting cable between the TSX 17 micro-PLC (via a TSX 17 ACC 5 adapter or a TSX SCG 1161 module) and TSX SCA 62 subscriber socket.

5

5.6

TSX DG UTW F: this manual describes the operating principles and the architectures of the Uni-Telway bus. It is required for setting up and installing the Uni-Telway bus. TSX DR NET F: this manual describes the X-Way architectures, services and address mechanisms. It includes the coding of Uni-TE requests as well as precautions for connecting earths for the networks. It also includes the principles of asynchronous serial transmission. (1) With TSX 37 21/22 PLCs. Characteristics: pages 5/102 and 5/103

5/104




References

5


Elements for connection to Uni-Telway bus Description Integrated link on processor

Protocol

Physical layer

Uni-Telway Non isolated RS 485 Character mode

Communication module

1 isolated 2-wire RS 485 Uni-Telway integrated channel Modbus/Jbus Character mode (channel 0), 1 PCMCIA card slot (channel 1) (2)

Type III PCMCIA cards for Premium processors, Atrium slot-PLCs, TSX 37 21/22 PLCs, or TSX SCY 21601 modules

Uni-Telway RS 232 D (9 signals) Modbus/Jbus 0.3…19.2 Kbit/s Character mode RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s

TSX Micro

PLC

Premium

Addr. Reference Weight (1) kg – Please consult our catalog “Modicon TSX Micro” – See page 1/12,1/13 or1/31

Atrium

–

See page 1/21 or 1/35

Premium Atrium

–

TSX SCY 21601

0.360

7

TSX SCP 111

0.105

7

TSX SCP 114

0.105

7

TSX SCP 112

0.105

TSX Micro

20 mA CL 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s

Premium

Set of X-Way drivers for TSX SCY 21601 PC compatibles

Includes all the X-Way drivers

1 CD-Rom –

TSX CD DRV 20M

–

Uni-Telway bus connection accessories Description

TSX SCP 11 p

TSX P ACC 01

Use

Addr. Reference

Weight kg 0.690

Terminal port connection Isolation of Uni-Telway signals for bus length > 10 m, end 5 box of line adaptation, bus cable tap links. Supplied with cable (1 m length) equipped with a mini-DIN connector (TER or AUX ports)

TSX P ACC 01

Passive T-junction box

Tap link and extension of bus cable,

2

TSX SCA 50

0.520

Passive 2-channel subscriber socket

2-channel tap link (15-way female SUB-D connector) and 3 extension of bus cable, address coding and end of line adaptation

TSX SCA 62

0.570

Active adaptation box RS 232C/RS 485

Connection of an RS 232C device active adapter unit (using Uni-Telway protocol), adaptation and isolation of signals, end of line adaptation (no address coding)

TSX SCA 72

0.520

–

5

Uni-Telway bus connecting cables (3) Description

TSX SCA 50

Double shielded twisted pair RS 485 cables

Use From Uni-Telway bus

Cables for isolated RS 485 TSX SCP 114 card tap link TSX SCA 62 TSX SCY 21601 module integrated channel (channel 0)

TSX SCA 72

RS 232 terminal port/peripheral device connecting cable

TSX Micro/ Premium or Atrium port or TSX P ACC 01 box (TER or AUX)

Addr. Length To –

TSX SCA 50 T-jun. box TSX SCA 62 sub. sock. TSX SCA 50 T-jun. box TSX SCA 62 sub. sock. RS 232D port for 9-way SUB D type PC compatible USB port of PC

1

100 m

Reference (1) TSX CSA 100

Weight kg 5.680

200 m

TSX CSA 200

10.920

500 m

TSX CSA 500

30.000

8

3m

TSX SCP CU 4030

0.160

–

3m

TSX SCP CU 4530

0.180

–

3m

TSX SCP CU 6030

0.180

9

3m

TSX SCP CU 6530

0.200

11

2.5 m

TSX PCX 1031

0.170

–

2.5 m

TSX PCX 3030

–

5.6

(1) Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) Type III PCMCIA type III slot for TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 112/114p card (3) For information on other connection cables, please see pages 5/108.

TSX PCX 1031




5/105


Presentation, description, characteristics

5

Jnet serial link

Presentation The Jnet network enables an automatic exchange of data between several Series 1000, SMC 50/600 and Premium PLCs, using the shared table service (exchange by each PLC of a memory zone, internal words, broadcast zone, to other PLCs on the network), see page 5/67.

Jnet

April 5000

Premium

April 2000

April 3000

April 7000

SMC 50/600

The Jnet network services exchange data between Series 1000, SMC 50/600 and Premium PLCs. The principle is based on broadcasting of a local zone by each PLC (word memory zone), which is automatically copied to other PLCs on the network ; no explicit programming for exchanges is required.

Description Premium PLCs are connected to the Jnet network using type III PCMCIA communication cards: b TSX JNP 112 card for which the physical layer is a 20 mA current loop serial link. b TSX JNP 114 card for which the physical layer is a RS 485 serial link.

5

These PCMCIA cards are installed in the host slot 1 on the TSX SCY 21601 module of communication. 1

4

2

TSX JNP cards comprise: 2 A protective cover. 3 A removable cover avec vis de fixation (accès au connecteur miniature 20 contacts. 4 Two indicator lamps: v ERR: card or link fault, v COM: activity on the line. Connectors to be ordered separately: v TSX SCP CM 4030/CM 4530/CX 2030 cable.

3

Characteristics

5.6

Structure

Type Topology Method of access Physical interface

Inter-PLC network Bus with passive tap links Circulation by token RS 485 2 wire, 20 mA CL

Transmission

Mode Format Data rate Medium

Half duplex on 2 wires 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop 92.2 Kbps Shielded twisted pair

Configuration

Number of devices Length of bus Tap links

32 (16 if the network includes SMC PLCs) 1300 m maximum without tap links 15 m maximum

Services

Data exchanged

Distributed database: - 128 16-bit words for a network with 32 stations (Series 1000/Premium), - 64 16-bit words for a network including SMC PLCs.

Monitoring

Network nominal duty control indicator lamp


5/106

Software configuration, references


5

Jnet serial link

Software configuration Installation procedures and access to the Jnet module configuration screen are identical to those for any PCMCIA type communication module, using Unity Pro or PL7 Junior/Pro software. Configuration of a Jnet PCMCIA card is accessed using the screen below: Stations communicate between themselves automatically once they are configured and connected to the same Jnet network. A debug screen is also linked to the module. It gives the following information: b Status of each station (RUN/STOP/ABSENT). b Transmission error counter.

References Connection elements to Jnet network Description Jnet type III PCMCIA

Number per Use Physical layer PLC 3 maximum Type III slot on 20 mA CL TSX SCY 21601 19.2 Kbps module RS 485 19.2 Kbps

Reference (1) TSX JNP 112

Weight kg 0.110

TSX JNP 114

0.110

Connection accessories Description TSX JNP 112/114

TSX SCA 64

2-channel subscriber socket (2 or 4-wire) (2)

Use Tap link of 2 x 2-wire devices Tap link of 1 Master device and/ or 1 x 4-wire Slave device Fitted with 2 x 15-way female SUB-D connectors

Power supply Reference (1) – TSX SCA 64

Weight kg 0.570

Line Connection to the front panel of – terminators TSX SCA 64 subscriber socket (sold in lots of 2) 2/4-wire cabling

TSX SCA 10

0.030

T-junction box Connection to RS 485 viatap link Passive (Tee)

TSX SCA 50

0.520

5

Connection cables Description Cables for isolated RS 422/485 tap link TSX SCA 50

Use Length From To TSX JNP 114 TSX SCA 50 box 3 m card 2-wire (3) TSX SCA 64 3m subscriber socket 2/4-wire

Reference

Weight kg TSX SCP CM 4030 0.160

TSX SCP CM 4530

0.180

Cable for TSX JNP 112 Multidrop Modbus 3 m TSX SCP CX 2030 0.160 20 mA CL tap card (3) link (1) Product supplied with bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) 2 or 4-wire cabling, compatible with TSX SCA 64 subscriber sockets requires the use of a Modbus cable with an external diameter of 10 mm maximum. (3) Cable end fitted with flying leads.


5/107

5.6


Presentation, description, characteristics

Asynchronous serial links

Presentation Premium

TSX SCY 21601

2

1

3

3

TSX Micro 5 1

3

4

TSX Micro/Premium PLCs provide, via their processor, slot-PLC or TSX SCY 21601 communication module, several possible ways for exchanging data in character mode with devices equipped with an asynchronous serial link interface: b RS 485 integrated port. b Type III PCMCIA card with RS 232D, RS 485 (RS 422 compatible) or 20 mA current loop link. Protocols supported are character mode (ASCII), Uni-Telway and Modbus. Other protocols are also available, or can be developed on request, on a RS 485 or RS 232D link, which enables TSX Micro/Premium PLCs to communicate on third-party architectures. These products are offered within the framework of the Schneider Alliances partnership programme. The list of modules available can be obtained from your Regional Sales Office, or from our Internet site www.schneideralliances.com.

Description Integrated links 1 Via integrated port on the processor or slot-PLC The AUX (1) port (8-way mini-DIN connector) has one non-isolated RS 485 serial link channel (maximum distance 10 m). 2 Via integrated port on the TSX SCY 21601 module This module for Premium PLCs has one isolated RS 485 serial link channel (25-way SUB-D connector). Half duplex multiprotocol, including Uni-Telway. TSX SCP 11p multiprotocol PCMCIA cards 3 A slot on the processor, slot-PLC and on the TSX SCY 21601 module takes cards which comprise: 4 A removable cover with fixing screws for access to the 20-way miniature connector. 5 Two indicator lamps: v ERR lamp: card or link fault, v COM lamp: data transmission or reception. Connector cable to be ordered separately: TSX SCP Cp ppp cable.

5

(1) TER port for TSX Micro TSX 37 05/08/10 PLC.

Characteristics Type

Physical layer

Data rate

Transmission

Size Data Stop bit Parity bit Stop on silence Reception echo Repeat 1st char. echo Auto LF Back space Beep Flow mgmt by Xon-Xoff byRTS/CTS RTS/CTS delay Stop on reception End of message PSR management

Services

5.6

Non isolated Isolated RS 485 RS 485 terminal TSX SCY 21601 port integrated port (1) 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s (2) 120 characters 7 or 8 bits 1 or 2 bits Even, odd or none

PCMCIA cards RS 232D

0.3…19.2 Kbit/s

PCMCIA cards RS 485 RS 422 Compatible 1.2…19.2 Kbit/s

PCMCIA cards 20 mA current loop (3)

4096 characters max.

Parameters which can be accessed in configuration mode. (1) For characteristics of the communication module integrated channel. (2) With the TSX P57 3p3/453 processor, data rate up to 115 Kbit/s during program uploading. (3) Point-to-point or multidrop link.


5/108

5


References

Asynchronous serial links

References Asynchronous serial link elements (character mode) Description Integrated link on processor

TSX Micro

Communication module

Protocol

Physical layer

PLC

Character mode Uni-Telway

RS 485 non-isolated

TSX Micro

Character mode Uni-Telway Modbus/Jbus

Type III PCMCIA cards for Character mode TSX 37 21/22, PLC, Uni-Telway Premium processor, Modbus/Jbus Atrium slot-PLC or TSX SCY 21601 module

Premium

Premium

Reference Weight (1) kg Please consult our catalog “Modicon TSX Micro” See page 1/12, 1/13 or 1/31

Atrium

See page 1/21 or 1/35

- 1 isolated RS 485 Premium integrated chan. Atrium (channel 0), - 1 type III PCMCIA card slot (channel 1) (2)

TSX SCY 21601

–

RS 232 D (9 signaux) 0,3…19,2 K bits/s

TSX SCP 111

–

RS 485 (compatible RS 422) 1,2…19,2 K bits/s

TSX SCP 114

–

BC 20 mA 1,2…19,2 K bits/s

TSX SCP 112

–

Asynchronous serial link connection accessories Description

Use

Terminal port connection Isolation of RS 485 signals, end of line box adaptation, supplied with cable for connection to PLC

Length

Reference

1m

TSX P ACC 01

Length

Reference

Weight kg 0.690

Connecting cables for asynchronous serial links Description

TSX SCY 21601

TSX SCP 11 p

Use From Cables for isolated RS 485 TSX SCP 114 card connection

Universal cable for terminal port/RS 232 device

Cables for RS 232D connection

3m

Weight kg TSX SCP CX 4030 0.160

3m

TSX SCY CU 6030

0.180

Integrated channel (channel 0) module TSX SCY 21601

To RS 485/RS 422 device (3) RS 485/RS 422 device (4) via TSX SCA 50 box

TSX Micro/Premium/ Atrium port (TER or AUX) or TSX P ACC 01 box

RS 232D of a 2.5 m terminal device (DTE) (5) USB port of PC 2.5 m

TSX PCX 1031

0.170

TSX PCX 3030

–

TSX SCP 111 card

Communication device: modem, converter, (DCE) (4)

TSX SCP CC 1030

0.190

TSX SCP CD 1030

0.190

TSX SCP CD 1100

0.620

TSX SCP CX 2030

0.160

TSX P ACC 01

3m

Point-to-point 3m terminal device (DTE) (4) 10 m Cable for BC 20 mA connection

Current loop device (3)

3m

5.6

(1) Product supplied with a bilingual Quick Reference Guide: English and French. (2) PCMCIA type III slot can receive one TSX SCP 111/112/114, TSX FPP 20 or TSX JNP 112/114 card. (3) End of cable fitted with flying leads. (4) End of cable fitted with a 25-way male SUB-D connector. (5) End of cable fitted with a 9-way male SUB-D connector. For use, to order separatly one TSX CTC 10 adaptator (9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way male SUB-D connectors).

TSX PCX 1031


TSX SCP 112 card


5


5/109


References

5

Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports TSX Micro/Premium PLC TSX SCP 111 PCMCIA card

Device to be Physical link connected DTE terminal 2 RS 232D

Protocol

Length

Reference

Character mode

3m

Weight kg TSX SCP CD 1030 0.190

10 m

TSX SCP CD 1100

0.620

DCE terminal (Modem...) 2

RS 232D


3m

TSX SCP CC 1030

0.190

TSX SCA 50 T-junction box 3

RS 485 Character mode (2-wire isolated) Uni-Telway

3m

TSX SCP CU 4030

0.160

RS 422/485 Character mode (2-wire isolated) Modbus

3m

TSX SCP CM 4030

0.160

TSX SCA 62 2-channel subscriber socket 4

RS 485 Uni-Telway (2-wire isolated)

3m

TSX SCP CU 4530

0.160


RS 422/485 (2/4 wire)

Modbus

3m

TSX SCP CM 4530

0.180

DTE Terminal 3 RS 422/485 (4-wire)

Modbus

3m

TSX SCP CX 4030

0.160

TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card

Active or passive terminal 3

Character mode Uni-Telway Modbus

3m

TSX SCP CX 2030

0.160

TER/AUX ports

TSX P ACC 01 RS 485 junction box

Uni-Telway

1m

Included with TSX P ACC 01

TSX P ACC 01 RS 485 junction box 5

Uni-Telway

2m

T FTX CB1 020

0.100

5m

T FTX CB1 050

0.190

0.170

TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card

5

1

20 mA current loop

5.6

DTE terminal (PC, printer) 6

RS 232

Character mode

2,5 m

TSX PCX 1031 (1)

7

RS 232

Character mode

2,5 m

TSX PCX 3030

1 25-way male miniature connector. 2 25-way male SUB-D connector. 3 Flying leads. (1) Separate parts see page 5/111.

5/110

4 5 6 7

15-way male SUB-D connector. 8-way female mini-DIN connector. 9-way female SUB-D connector. USB type connector.

–



5

Connecting cables for PCMCIA cards and TER/AUX ports TSX Micro/Premium PLC TER/AUX ports (contin.) 1

Device to be Physical link connected DTE terminal RS 232 (slave PC ) 2 RS 485

Protocol

Length

Reference

Uni-Telway

2.5 m

TSX PCX 1031

Weight kg 0.170

Uni-Telway

2.5 m

TSX PCX 3030

–


2.5 m

TSX PCX 1031 (1)


2.5 m

TSX PCX 3030

DCE terminal RS 232 (Modem M/Sl. USA/Europe) 4


3m

TSX PCX 1130 (2)

0.140

CCX 17, panel, RS 485 XBT terminal 5

Uni-Telway

2.5 m

XBT Z968

0.180

5m

XTB Z9681

0.340

3m

TSX SCY CU 6030

0.180

3 RS 232 RS 485

DTE terminal RS 232 (printer, slave PC without RTS) 2 3 RS 232

TSX SCY 21601 communication module integrated port 5

TSX SCA 50 RS 485 Uni-Telway T-junction box 6 (2-wire isolated)

Modbus/Jbus

0.170

–

5 3m

TSX SCY CM 6030

0.180


RS 485 Uni-Telway (2-wire isolated)

3m

TSX SCY CU 6530

0.200

RS 485 terminal 6

RS 485 Character mode (2-wire isolated)

3m

TSX SCY CM 6030

0.180

Separate parts Description SUB-D adapter

Description

Reference

9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way female SUB-D connectors TSX CTC 07

Weight kg 0.060

5.6 9-way male SUB-D connector/25-way male SUB-D connector

1 8-way female mini-DIN connector. 2 9-way female SUB-D connector. 3 USB type connector.

4 5 6 7

TSX CTC 10

0.060

9-way male SUB-D connector. 25-way male SUB-D connector Flying leads. 15-way male SUB-D connector

(1) To be ordered separatly: TSX CTC 07 and TSX CTC 10 adapters, see above separate parts. (2) Point to point, supplied wih 1 SUB-D adapter: TSX CTC 09 9-way female/25-way male SUB-D connector.

5/111

6

6/0

Contents

6 - Software

6

6.1 - Unity software Selection guide: Unity software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/2 b Unity Pro software v Presentation, setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/4 v Software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/7 v IEC languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/10 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/16 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/26 b Unity EFB Toolkit software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/28 b Unity SFC View software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/30 b Unity Studio software suite v Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/34 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/35 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/41 b Unity Application Generator (UAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/42 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/47 b Process control v Presentation (user-definable and programmable control loops) . . . . page 6/48 v User-definable process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/49

6.2 - PL7 software Selection guide: PL7 software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/54 b PL7 Junior/Pro programming software v Presentation, setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/56 v Software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/59 v 4 languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/61 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/63 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/69 b SDKC software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/72 b PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/74 b PL7 DIF application comparison software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/76 b Process control v Presentation (user-definable control loops) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/78 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/79 v Control and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6/83

6/1

6

Selection guide

Modicon Premium automation platform Unity software

Unity Pro programming software

IEC 61131-3 languages

Programming services

6 6.1

Instruction List (IL) Ladder (LD) Structured Text (ST) Function Block Diagram (FBD) Sequential Function Chart (SFC)/Grafcet Multitask programming (Master, fast and event-triggered) Multitask programming (Master, fast, auxiliary and event-triggered) Functional view and function modules DFB editor DDT compound data editor Data structure instances and tables Use of DFB instances EF function block libraries and EFB function blocks User-definable control loops

Programmable control loops (with function block libraries) Hot Standby PLC redundancy system System diagnostics Application diagnostics Diagnostics with location of error source Debugging and PLC simulator display Hypertext link animations in graphic services languages Step by step execution, breakpoint Watchpoint Runtime screens Diagnostic viewers Other services Creation of hyperlinks XML import/export Application converters (Concept, PL7) Utilities for updating PLC operating systems Communication drivers for Windows 2000/XP

A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P

A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q


A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P


P (TSX P57 5p) Q (140 CPU 651/671) A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q

A (TSX PCI 2p) P (TSX P57 2p)

A (TSX PCI 2p/3p) P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p) P (TSX P57 4p) - Q

P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p/5p) P (TSX P57 4p/5p) - Q

A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P

A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q

Q (140 CPU 67 160) A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q

A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P A-P

A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q

A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q A-P-Q

Atrium slot-PLCs A

TSX PCI 204M

Premium CPUs P

TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 204/2634/254M

TSX PCI 204M TSX PCI 354M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX P57 304/3634/354M TSX P57 4634/454M

Quantum CPUs Q

–

140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12/534 14U

TSX PCI 204M TSX PCI 354M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX P57 304/3634/354M TSX P57 4634/454M TSX P57 5634/554M 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12/534 14U 140 CPU 651 50/60 140 CPU 671 60

Software name

Unity Pro Medium

Unity Pro Large

Unity Pro Extra Large

Unity Pro software type

UNY SPU MFp CD 20

UNY SPU LFp CD 20

UNY SPU EFp CD 20

Pages

6/27

Compatible Modicon platforms

6/2

6

6

EF/EFB function development software in C language

“Collaborative Control” distributed project development software

Software for designing and generating batch/process applications

SFC View application diagnostic and monitoring software

Pack for developing specific solutions

Enhancement of EF and EFB function block libraries: v Creation of families v Development of functions in C language v Access to all data and variable types v Debugging functions (step by step, breakpoint) v Use of functions created in all languages

Software suite for managing distributed and multi-application projects: v Used for developing and structuring control system applications in a “Collaborative Automation” environment v Ensures consistency when synchronizing applications on Ethernet v Based on the MS Visio 2003 graphic software, the software suite includes: v Unity Studio Manager v Unity Pro XL v OFS (communication) v PowerSuite (drives and motor starters) v XBT-L1000 (user interface) v VBA (Visual Basic for Applications)

UAG specialist software for designing and generating batch/process applications in a “Collaborative Automation” environment. It provides the unique project database: v process and control (PLCs) v HMI user interface (Magelis) v SCADA supervision (Monitor Pro V7.2)

ActiveX control component for monitoring and diagnostics of chart status (SFC or Grafcet) in sequential applications: v Overview of charts and detailed views v Can be integrated in human/machine interface (HMI) applications v Access to PLC data via OFS (OPC Factory Server)

Specialist software for developing made-to-order solutions (for example interfaces with an electrical CAD system, automatic application generator, etc): v Access to Unity Pro object servers v Reserved for IT development engineers using Visual Basic or C++

Includes EFB function block library for Unity Pro

UDE software only supplied after signature of a specific contract with Schneider Electric

Supplied with Microsoft Visual C++

Based around re-usable objects (PID, valves, etc) and complying with standard ISA S88, UAG generates the PLC code and the elements required for the HMI system. Complies with the GAMP standard (Good Automation Manufacturing Practice)

6 6.1

Compatible with: v Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large v All Atrium slot-PLCs v All Premium Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs


Compatible with: v Unity Pro Large and Extra Large v TSX P57 4634/454M and TSX P57 5634/554M Premium Unity CPUs v All Quantum Unity CPUs



Unity EFB Toolkit

Unity Studio

Unity Application Generator UAG Medium/Large

Unity SFC View

Unity Developer’s Edition

UNY SPU ZFU CD20E

UNY SEW pF

UNY SEW pFp CD21

UNY SDU MFp CD20

Please consult your Regional Sales Office

6/27

6/27

6/47

6/33

6/26

6/3


Presentation

6

Unity Pro software

User interface Unity Pro’s welcome screen provides access to all available tools in a user-friendly format that has been redesigned on the basis of feedback received from users of Concept and PL7 Junior/Pro application design software.

This welcome screen consists of a general view made up of a number of windows and toolbars, which can be arranged as required on the screen: 1 Menu bar from which all functions can be accessed 2 Toolbar consisting of icons from which the most frequently used functions can be accessed 3 Application browser, which can be used to browse the application based on a conventional and/or a functional view 4 Editor windows area, which can be used to view a number of editors at the same time (configuration editor, Structured Text/Ladder etc. language editors, data editor) 5 Tabs for direct access to editor windows 6 Information window with tabs (User Errors, Import/Export, Search/Replace, etc.) 7 Status bar

6 6.1

“File/Edit” toolbar

FBD language editor contextual toolbar

Accessing functions All functions can be accessed via drop-down menus from the menu bar. The toolbar, which consists of icons, provides more rapid access to the most frequently used functions. This toolbar, which is displayed by default, can be customized to meet the requirements associated with the various uses of Unity Pro software and is divided into three groups: b Main toolbars, which are visible at all times b Contextual toolbar, which is displayed when the corresponding editor is selected b Toolbar with zoom functions (in and out), full-screen view for editor window They are classified according to the category of functions available: b File management (New Project, Open, Save, Print) b Edit (Undo, Redo, Confirm, Go To) b Application services (Analyze Project, Build Project, Browse, Find, Access Library) b Automation platform operating mode (Upload/Download Project, Online/Offline, Run/Stop, Animate, PLC/Simulation Mode) b Debug mode (Set/Remove Breakpoint, etc.) b Window display (Cascade, Horizontal, Vertical) b Online help (non-contextual or contextual)

“PLC” toolbar for debug mode

Toolbar with zoom (in and out)

Users can create their own toolbars and insert icons from the main and contextual toolbars into them.

Setup: pages 6/5 and 6/84

6/4

Software structure: pages 6/85 to 6/9

IEC language: pages 6/10 to 6/15

Functions: pages 6/16 to 6/26



Setup

6

Unity Pro software

Project browser The project browser can be used: b To display the content of an Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLC project b To move between the different components of the application (configuration, program, variables, communication, DFB user function blocks, DDT derived function blocks) created by the user The project can be displayed using two types of view: b The structural view, which provides an overall view of the various components of the application. This representation provides a view of the order in which the program sections are processed in the PLC. b The functional view, which provides a view of the project based on specific function modules. This representation provides a breakdown according to consistent functions in relation to the process to be controlled. These two types of view, which are available at any time, can be displayed separately or at the same time (horizontal or vertical windows) by clicking on the icons in the toolbar. Structural view This conventional view allows you to access all the different components of the application (configuration, programming, function blocks, debugging, etc.) via the application browser.

1

The browser gives an overall view of the program and offers fast access to all application components. 1 Configuration editor 2 DFB (user function block) and DDT (Derived Data Type) editors 3 Communication networks editor 4 Program editor 5 Variables editor 6 Animation tables editor 7 Runtime screens editor 8 Documentation editor

2 5

3 9 4

From any level in the tree structure, you can: 9 Create a hyperlink to a comment or description 10 Create a directory for storing hyperlinks used to access a set of user folders From this level, it is also possible to zoom in and only view the detailed levels for a component on this level.

10 6

6.1

Functional view 7

8 Structural view

Unity Pro software applications support the creation of an application structure for Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms based on function modules comprising: b Sections (program code) b Animation tables b Runtime screens The designer can define a multi-level tree structure for the application, independently of the multitask structure of the PLC. Program sections written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Function Block Diagram (FBD) or Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language can be associated with each level, along with animation tables and runtime screens. .

Exporting/Importing function modules All or part of the tree structure can be exported to function modules. In this case, all program sections on the various module levels are exported. Utilities make it easy to reuse these modules in new applications by means of data and module name reassignment services. Functional view




6



6/5


Setup (continued)

Unity Pro software

Configuration editor Hardware configuration The first step when creating an automation project based on an Atrium, Premium or Quantum platform is to select the processor for which a rack and power supply are defined by default. The configuration editor supports the intuitive and graphics-based modification and extension of this configuration with the following elements: b Racks, power supply b PCMCIA memory or communication cards (Atrium/Premium) on the processor b Discrete I/O, analog I/O or application-specific modules b Etc

2

1

The user has two options: 1 Select the reference for the module chosen from the catalog list and drag it to an available slot in the rack. 2 Insert a new module into a free slot from the contextual file. Configuration and parameter settings for I/O and application-specific modules From the configuration screen for Atrium, Premium or Quantum racks, the parameters screen displayed for the module concerned can be used to define the operating characteristics and parameters for the selected application, e.g.: b Filter values for discrete I/O b Voltage or current range for analog I/O b Threshold counter values b Trajectory of axes for position control b Weigher calibration for weighing b Transmission speed for communication b Presymbolization for variables associated with modules b Etc

Configuration and parameter settings for communication networks The “Communication” folder in the structural view can be used to define the list of networks connected to the PLC station. Then, the parameters for all elements required for networks to function correctly can be set by: b Creating a logical network to which comments can be associated b Configuring a logical network defining the various associated network services. Once the network module has been created in the configuration, it must then be associated with one of the logical networks. Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus Plus and Fipway network modules are all configured in this way. The Unity Studio software suite provides the same parameter-setting services for the global automation project, see page 6/36.

6 6.1

Configuration check The following information can be accessed at any time during configuration: b The power consumption statistics for the power supply in each of the racks in the PLC configuration, for all the different voltages provided by each of these power supplies b The number of inputs/outputs configured (with Atrium or Premium platform)


6/6





6


Software structure

6

Unity Pro software

Software structure The Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms set up by Unity Pro software support two types of application structure: b Single-task: This is the more simple default structure, in which only the master task is executed. b Multitask: This structure, which is more suitable for high-performance real-time events, consists of a master task, a fast task, periodic tasks, and high-priority event-triggered tasks. The master, fast and periodic tasks are made up of sections and subroutines. The sections and subroutines can be programmed in any of the following languages: Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Ladder (LD) or Function Block Diagram (FBD) (1). The event-triggered tasks use the same languages. Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language is reserved for master task sections. The table below lists the possible program tasks for Atrium, Premium and Quantum type processors respectively. Platform

Premium TSX P 57 1p4M

TSX P 57 554M TSX P 57 564M

Atrium TSX PCI 57 204 M TSX PCI 57 454 M

Yes

Yes

Quantum 140 CPU 31110 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A Yes

140 CPU 651 p0 140 CPU 671 60

Cyclic or periodic master task

Yes

TSX P 57 2p(3)4M TSX P 57 3p(3)4M TSX P 57 4p(3)4M Yes

Periodic fast task

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Periodic auxiliary tasks

–

–

4

–

–

4

32 Event-triggered tasks (from modules)

64

128

64

64

128

Event-triggered tasks (from timers)

–

–

32

–

16

32

Total number of event-triggered tasks

32

64

128

64

64

128

Yes

6 (1) Premium TSX P57 1p4M processors do not support Function Block Diagram (FBD) language.

Structure, modular and portable programming

Airlock (LD)

Airlock_Alarm (LD)

Oven_1 (SFC)

Mon_Sec (LD)

Tunnel_1 (SFC)

Oven_Alarm (ST)

Extractor (FBD)

SR0

Cleaning_Alarm (ST)

Cleaning (ST)

The tasks of a Unity Pro program for Atrium, Premium or Quantum platforms are composed of several parts known as sections and subroutines. Each of these sections can be programmed in the most appropriate language for the process to be executed. Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program modules to be generated or added with ease.

SR0

Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from other subroutines in the same task.

Master task

Fast task

Compatibility of languages compliant with IEC standard 61131-3: Unity Pro software can be configured (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions menu) to ensure that applications generated are compliant with IEC standard 61131-3. Furthermore, as long as you use only the standard instruction libraries, you will be able to reuse programs created in this way on any Atrium, Premium or Quantum platform.






6/7

6.1


platform

6

Unity Pro software

Single-task memory structure Start of period

Internal processing

Input acquisition (%I)

Input acquisition (%I)

Two types of cyclic execution are supported: b Normal cyclic execution. This is the default option. b Periodic execution. This type of execution, as well as the period, are selected by the user during programming when the task parameters are set (master task). Normal execution (cyclic)

RUN

STOP

Program processing

Updating of outputs (%O)

RUN

STOP

Program processing

Updating of outputs (%O) Internal processing

End of period

Cyclic execution

At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches a new scan. The execution time of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value is defined by the user (max. 1500 ms). In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing: b The scan to stop immediately (STOP) b A fault state to be displayed on the front panel of the processor b The alarm relay for the main rack power supply to be set to 0 Periodic execution A new scan is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the scan must be less than the time of the period defined (max. 255 ms). In the event of overrun, the latter is stored in a system bit (%S19), which can be reset to 0 by the user (via the program or terminal). A software watchdog, which can be configured by the user (max. 1500 ms), monitors the scan time. In the event of overrun, an execution fault is indicated (see normal execution). The scan execution times (the last scan, the longest scan and the shortest scan) are stored in system words %SW 30/31/32.

Periodic execution

Multitask software structure Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms support a multitask structure comprising: b 1 master task (divided into several sections programmed in ST, IL, LD, FBD, and SFC languages) b 1 fast task (divided into sections) b 0 to 4 auxiliary tasks (divided into sections) (1) b 1 or more event-triggered tasks (only one section per task) These tasks are independent and are executed in parallel, with the PLC processor managing their execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast task scan: b If any lower-priority tasks are currently being executed, they are suspended. b The event-triggered task or fast task is executed. b The interrupted task resumes once execution of the priority task has been completed.

6 6.1

Event-triggered tasks

Master task

Fast task

Auxiliary tasks (1) Aux1

Timer_1

Fast Airlock_Alarm (IL)

Airlock (LD)

Mast

EVT1

Aux0

Process value (FBD)

Mon_Dry (LD) Oven_1 (SFC) EVT0 Outside limits

Oven Diag (ST)

Tunnel_1 (SFC)

Oven_Alarm (ST)

Temp. (FBD) Cleaning_Alarm (ST)

Extractor (FBD) SR0

SR0

SR0

Drying (LD)

Priority +…-

This structure optimizes the way in which processing power is employed and can be used to structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as each task can be written and debugged independently of the others. (1) Tasks reserved for top-of-the-range Premium TSX P57 5p4M and Quantum 140 CPU 651 p0/67160 processors.


6/8






platform

6

Unity Pro software

Multitask memory structure (continued) Master task This task, which can be periodic or cyclic, executes the main program. It is activated systematically. Each of its component sections and subroutines can be programmed in Ladder (LD), Function Block Diagram (FBD), Structured Text (ST) or Instruction List (IL) language. Several sections of the master task can be programmed in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language. Fast task This task, which has a higher priority than the master task, is periodic in order to allow time for tasks with lower priorities to be executed. It should be used when fast periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored and acknowledged. The execution of the master task (lower priority) is suspended while the fast task is being executed. Processing operations in this task must be as short as possible in order to avoid adversely affecting master task processing operations. Each of the component sections and subroutines of the fast task can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). Auxiliary tasks These tasks, which are available on top-of-the-range Premium TSX P57 5p4M and Quantum 140 CPU 651 p0/67160 processors, are designed for use with slower types of processing operation such as measurement, process control, HMI, application diagnostics, etc. Periodic type auxiliary tasks have the lowest level of priority and are executed once the higher-priority periodic tasks (master and fast) have completed their scan. Each of the component sections and subroutines of the fast task can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). Event-triggered tasks Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to one period. The execution of these tasks is triggered asynchronously by: An event from certain application-specific modules (e.g.: overrun of a counter threshold, change of state of a discrete input) An event from the event timers These tasks are processed before all other tasks and are thus suitable for processing requiring very short reaction times in comparison to the arrival of the event. Atrium, Premium or Quantum platforms have 3 levels of priority (these are, in descending order, module event EVT0, module events EVTi and timer events Timeri). These tasks, each comprised of a single section, can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). Assignment of I/O channels to tasks Each of the master, fast or event-triggered tasks reads (at the start of the scan) and writes (at the end of the scan) the inputs assigned to it. By default, they are assigned to the master task. Input acquisition

For the Quantum platform, the remote inputs/outputs (RIO) are only assigned to the master task (these assignments can be made per station or for each of the component sections of the task), while the distributed inputs/outputs (DIO) are all assigned to the master task (without assignment to its component sections).

Program processing

For event-triggered tasks, it is possible to assign input/output channels (1) other than those relating to the event. Exchanges are then performed implicitly at the start of processing for inputs and at the end of processing for outputs. Updating of outputs

(1) These channel assignments are made per I/O module for Quantum and per channel for Atrium/Premium inputs/outputs.






6/9

6 6.1


IEC language

Unity Pro software

The five IEC languages The five graphical or textual languages available in Unity Pro are used for programming Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms. The 3 graphical languages are: b Ladder (LD) b Function Block Diagram (FBD) b Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet The 2 textual languages are: b Structured Text (ST) b Instruction List (IL) For these 5 languages, you can use the standard set of instructions compliant with IEC standard 61131-3 to create applications, which can be transferred from one platform to another. Unity Pro software also provides extensions to this standard set of instructions. As they are specific to Atrium/Premium and Quantum PLCs, these extensions support the development of more complex applications in order to maximize the potential of the specific features of each of these platforms. Functionalities common to all five language editors The editors for each of the 5 languages provide a number of common tools used for writing, reading and analyzing programs in a user-friendly manner: b The text editors for Instruction List (IL) and Structured Text (ST) support: v Text entry in insert or overwrite mode v The use of dialog boxes for the assisted entry of variables, functions, function blocks or assignment instructions v Checks on data entry to detect syntax or semantics errors. The user is informed of the result of this check by red “wavy” underlining or by a change in the color of the text concerned. v Access to a set of colors, which can be used to facilitate reading by distinguishing text (black) from operators (red), language key words (blue), and program comments (green)

6

b The graphics editors for Ladder (LD) language, Function Block Diagram (FBD) language and Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language feature: v A set of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols in the language via the mouse or keyboard v A pop-up menu, which can be accessed by right-clicking with the mouse

6.1

b Unlimited number and length of comments. These comments can be positioned as text objects in any cell (graphical languages) or at any point in expressions (textual languages). b Assisted data entry functions for: v Accessing DFB function libraries, the variables editor or the text object for entering comments v Initializing a variable reference v Initializing the animation table on selected variables v Displaying and modifying the properties of the selected variable v Creating variables in real time without having to use the data editor b “Cut”, “Copy”, “Paste”, “Delete”, “Move”, etc. b Setting bookmarks on lines of text or in the margin so that you can: v Easily locate lines in important program sections v Browse in an editor by bookmark, label or line and column number


6/10





6

IEC languages (continued)


6

Unity Pro software

Ladder (LD) language Each section or subroutine using Ladder language consists of a series of rungs, which are executed sequentially by the PLC. Each rung consists of graphic objects (placed in cells arranged in columns and lines) corresponding to contacts, links, coils, operation blocks, EF/EFB/DFB function blocks, jumps, SR calls, etc.

Program structure (section or subroutine) Each Ladder language section may contain: b Between 11 and 64 columns (number set by user) b Up to 2000 lines (for all rungs in the section)

6

Graphics palette in the Ladder language editor

6.1

“Mixed Display” mode supports the unrestricted display of comments, addresses and symbols for the variables used for rungs.






6/11


Modicon Premium automation platform Unity Pro software

Function Block Diagram (FBD) language, with Unity Pro Large and X Large version Function Block Diagram language is a graphical language based on function blocks associated with variables or parameters, which are linked together. This language is particularly suitable for process control applications.

Program structure (section or subroutine)

6

The graphical language FBD supports three types of function block: b Elementary blocks (EFs) b Elementary Function Blocks (EFBs), sorted into different libraries depending on their type of use b Derived Function Blocks (DFBs), which have a structure identical to that of EFBs but are created by the user with the ST, IL, LD or FBD programming languages

6.1

Within the same section, subroutines can be called using a specific block. Program jumps to a block instance can also be programmed. A section programmed in FBD language contains the equivalent of a grid with 30 columns and 23 rows. The blocks are positioned on this grid in minimum steps of 1/10 of a column and 1/10 of a line (called halftone dot).


6/12





6



6

Unity Pro software

Sequential Function Chart (SFC) and Grafcet language Sequential Function Chart (and Grafcet) language can be used to describe the sequential part of an automation system in simple graphical format using steps and transitions. SFC language does not process charts in the same way as Grafcet language: b SFC only authorizes one token in one chart. b Grafcet language authorizes several tokens in one chart. Unity Pro software has one editor for these two languages with the option of defining behavior in the application settings (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions menu). Program structure (master task section) SFC language is only used in sections belonging to the master task. Each SFC section consists of a main chart sub-section CHART and sub-sections for each of the macro-steps. The component parts of the charts are: b Macro-steps, which are the sole representation of a set of steps and transitions (used to set up a hierarchical chart structure) b Steps b Transitions and directed links between steps and transitions Associated with steps and transitions respectively, the actions and transition conditions can be: b Integrated into the CHART or macro-step charts, in which case the actions or transition conditions are defined by a single variable b Processed in specific sections, in which case dedicated processing (to be programmed in Ladder, Function Block Diagram, Structured Text or Instruction List language) is necessary In order to check that machine scans have been completed successfully, activity times (minimum, maximum) can be associated with each step. These times are set by the user. Program structure (section in master task) For each SFC section, the graphics editor provides a maximum of: b One grid containing 32 columns and 200 rows, or 6400 cells. Steps, transitions or jumps all need one cell respectively. b 1024 steps (macro-steps and steps in macro-steps) b 20 actions assigned to the same step b 100 steps activated at the same time b 100 actions activated at the same time To help you to create basic charts, graphic screens can be used to create “n” steps in series and “m” steps in parallel in a single operation. Dialog boxes can be used to assign associated properties to steps (activity time, actions), transitions (variable linked to transition condition), etc.






6/13

6 6.1



Structured Text (ST) language Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language, which is particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations, message handling, etc.

Program structure (section or subroutine) Structured Text language, which can be used to directly transcribe an analysis based on an organization chart, is structured into expressions composed of a series of instructions organized in lines. There is no limit to the number of characters an instruction line may contain (the only limit is the program memory available for the Premium and Quantum platforms, except on TSX P57 10…40 processors, where the limit is 64 Kb). The length of the section is only limited by the size of the application memory.

6

Four preformatted expression structures can be called up directly from the toolbar: b Conditional action : IF…THEN…ELSIF…THEN…ELSE…END-IF; b Iterative conditional action: WHILE…DO…END_WHILE; REPEAT…UNTIL…END_REPEAT; b Repetitive action: FOR…TO…BY…DO…END_FOR; b Selective action: CASE…OF…ELSE…END_CASE;

6.1

The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables linked to function blocks. To make the expressions easier to read, different colors are used to identify objects, language key words and program comments.


6/14





6



6

Unity Pro software

Instruction List (IL) language Instruction List language is a language representing the equivalent of a Ladder diagram in text form. It can be used to write Boolean and arithmetic equations using all the functions available in the Unity Pro language (calling of functions and function blocks, assignment of variables, creation of program jumps, branching to subroutines within a program section, etc.).

6

Program structure (section or subroutine) A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions classified into the following different families: b Bit instructions, e.g. read input: LD overspeed b Function block instructions, e.g. call timer: CAL MOTOR_TIMER b Numerical instructions using single, double and floating point integers, e.g.: LD Result ADD Surplus ST Archive b Word table or character string instructions, e.g. make assignment: LD Result:10:=Setpoint:10 b Program instructions, e.g. SR call: CALL SR10 The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables linked to function blocks.






6/15

6.1


Functions

Unity Pro software

Data editor The data editor, which can be accessed from the structural view of the project, provides a single tool for performing the following editing tasks: b Declaration of data including variables and function blocks (declaration of their type, instants and attributes) b Use and archiving of function block data types in different libraries b Hierarchical view of data structures b Searching, sorting and filtering of data b Creation of a hyperlink to access a description from any variable comment The data is displayed under four tabs: b “Variables” tab for the creation and management of the following data instances: bits, words, double words, inputs/outputs, tables, and structures b “DDT Types” tab for the creation of derived data types (tables and structures) b “Function Blocks” tabs for the declaration of EFB and DFB function blocks b “DFB Types” for the creation of DFB user function block data types

Each data instance has several attributes, of which: b The name and type of the variable are mandatory b The comment, physical address in the memory or initial values are optional The data editor columns can be configured (number of columns, order). All the attributes associated with a variable can be displayed in a properties window. This editor can be accessed at any time during programming by selecting variables for data modification or creation.

6 6.1


6/16





6



6

Unity Pro software

DFB user function blocks The user can create his own function blocks for specific application requirements on Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms using Unity Pro software. Once created and saved in the library, these user function blocks can be reused as easily as EFBs (Elementary Function Blocks). These user function blocks can be used to structure an application. They are used when a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or for fixing a standard programming routine. They can be read-only protected or read/write-protected. They can be exported to all other Unity Pro applications. Using a DFB function block in one or more applications: b Simplifies program design and entry b Improves program readability and understanding b Facilitates program debugging (all variables handled by the DFB block function are identified in the data editor) b Enables the use of private variables specific to the DFBs, which are independent of the application A DFB function block is set up in several phases: b The DFB is designed by assigning a name, a set of parameters (inputs, outputs, public and private internal variables) and a comment to it via the data editor. b The code is created in one or more sections of the program, with the following languages selected according to requirements: Structured Text, Instruction List, Ladder or Function Block Diagram (ST, IL, LD or FBD). b The DFB may be stored in a library with an associated version number. b A DFB instance is created in the data editor or when the function is called in the program editor. b This instance is used in the program in the same way as an EFB (Elementary Function Block). (The instance can be created from within the program.)

6 6.1

Main characteristics Inputs Outputs Inputs/outputs Public internal variables

32 max. (1) 32 max. (2) 32 max. (1) (2) Unlimited (can be accessed via the application program)

Private internal variables Comment Program sections

Unlimited (cannot be accessed via the application program) 1024 characters max. Unlimited, each section can be programmed independently in one of the 4 languages (IL, ST, LD, and FBD). (1) The maximum cumulative total of inputs and inputs/outputs is 32. (2) The maximum cumulative total of outputs and inputs/outputs is 32.






6/17



6

Unity Pro software

Function block libraries The function and function block libraries manager contains all the elements provided with Unity Pro software. The functions and function blocks are organized into libraries, which themselves consist of families. Depending on the type of PLC selected and the model of processor, the user will have a sub-set of these libraries available to write his/her applications. However, the “Base Lib” library contains a set of functions and function blocks, the majority of which are compatible with all platforms. In particular, it contains the blocks compliant with IEC 61131-3. The “Base Lib” library is structured into families: b Timers and counters b Internal process control b Array management b Comparison b Date and time management b Logic processing b Mathematical processing b Statistical processing b Character string processing b Type-to-type data conversion This library, which covers standard automation functions, is supplemented by other, more application-specific libraries, which are platform-specific: b Management library for motion control and fast counting b Process control library. The CONT_CTL library can be used to set up process-specific control loops. In particular, it offers controller, derivative and integral control functions. b Communication library, providing an easy means of integrating communication programs from PLCs with those used by HMIs from the PLC application program. Like other function blocks, these EFBs can be used in all languages to share data or to deliver data to be displayed on an HMI. b Extended library, providing additional algorithms, e.g.: EFBs for calculating mean values, selecting a maximum value, performing movements with first-order interpolation, detecting edges or assigning a hysteresis to process variables, etc. b Diagnostics library, which can be used to monitor actuators and contains EFBs for active diagnostics, reactive diagnostics, interlocking diagnostics, permanent process condition diagnostics, dynamic diagnostics, monitoring of signal groups, etc. b “System” library, which provides EFBs for the execution of system functions: evaluation of scan time, availability of several different system clocks, SFC section monitoring, display of system state, etc. b Finally, a library named “obsolete” containing all function blocks used by legacy programming software needed to perform application conversions

6 6.1

Management of user standards Users may create libraries and families in order to store their own DFB function blocks and DDT data structures. This enhancement allows users to take advantage of programming standards adapted to their needs, along with version management. This means that it is possible to: b Check the version of the elements used in an application program against those stored in the library b Perform an upgrade, if necessary


6/18







6

Unity Pro software

Debugging tools Unity Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging Atrium, Premium or Quantum applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions: b Dynamic program animation b Setting of watchdogs or breakpoints (not authorized in event-triggered tasks) b Step-by-step program execution. A function in this mode enables section-by-section execution. Instruction-by-instruction execution can be launched from the previous breakpoint. Three execution commands are therefore possible when the element to be processed is a subroutine (SR) or DFB user block: v Detailed step-by-step or “Step Into”. This command is used to move to the first element of the SR or DFB. v Overall step-by-step or “Step Over”. This command is used to process the entire SR or DFB. v Outgoing step-by-step or “Step Out”. This command is used to move to the next instruction after the SR or DFB element. b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST), auxiliary (AUX), and event-triggered (EVTi) tasks.

Insertion/removal of watchpoint

Execution command

Animation of program elements Dynamic animation is managed section by section. A button in the toolbar is used to activate or deactivate animation for each section. When the PLC is in RUN, this mode can be used to view, simultaneously: b The animation of a program section, regardless of the language used b The variables window containing the application objects created automatically from the section viewed Several windows can be displayed and animated simultaneously. The “Tool tip” function, which uses help balloons, can be used to view a variable and its content simultaneously when the object is selected with the mouse (or other pointing device).

Animation of ST program

Two types of animation are supported: b Standard: The variables of the active section are refreshed at the end of the master task (MAST). b Synchronized: The watchpoint can be used to synchronize the display of animated variables with a program element in order to determine their value at this precise point in the program.

6

Animation table Animation table

Tables containing the variables of the application to be monitored or modified can be created by data entry or initialized automatically from the selected program section. In addition to data animation it is possible to: b Modify bit variables or force them to 0 or 1 b Change the display format b Copy or move variables b Search by cross-reference b Display the list of forced bits These tables can be stored in the application and retrieved from there at a later date. Debugging of DFB user function blocks The parameters and public variables of these blocks are displayed and animated in real time using animation tables, with the possibility of modifying and forcing the required objects. In exactly the same way as with other program elements, the watchpoint, breakpoint, step-by-step execution, and program code diagnostics functions can be used to analyze the behavior of DFBs. Setting a breakpoint in a DFB user function block instance stops the execution of the task containing this block.






6/19

6.1



Debugging in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language The various debugging tools are also available in SFC language. However, unlike other sections (IL, ST, LD or FBD) an SFC section executed step by step does not stop execution of the task but instead freezes the SFC chart. Several breakpoints can be declared simultaneously within a single SFC section. Numerous commands are available in this debugging mode via the control panel: b Deactivate active step(s) b Activate initial step(s) b Disable step execution times b Freeze chart regardless of transition conditions b Stop processing of steps b Move to the next step taking account of the transition conditions b Enable transition and move to next step(s) (detailed step-by-step command, “Step Into”) b Enable transition in order to execute the end of the macro-step (outgoing step-by-step command, “Step Out”) b Preposition chart on steps for which markers have been set, etc. SFC control panel

PLC simulator The simulator integrated in Unity Pro can be used to test the application program for Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLCs from the PC terminal without having to connect to the PLC processor. The functions provided by the debugging tools are available for debugging the master, fast and auxiliary tasks. As the simulator does not manage the PLC I/O, animation tables can be used to simulate the state of inputs by forcing them to 0 or 1. The simulator can be connected to third-party applications via an OPC server with OFS (OPC Factory Server) software. Simulator control panel

Documentation editor The documentation editor is built around the Documentation Browser, which shows the file structure in tree form. It allows all or part of the application file to be printed on any graphics printer accessible under Windows and using True Type technology, in A4 or US letter print format. The documentation editor supports the creation of user-specific documentation files using the following headings: b Title page b Contents b General information b Title block b Configuration b EF, EFB and DFB type function blocks b User variables b Communication b Project structure b Program b Animation tables and cross-references b Runtime screens

6 6.1

Access to documentation editor

The documentation editor can generate the documentation file based on two different structures: b Structural view: All the objects in the project are associated with their corresponding headings. b Functional view: The objects in the project are associated with the function modules to which they belong. The documentation file can be created and saved as the project progresses, from one Unity Pro session to another.


6/20





6



6

Unity Pro software Integrated diagnostics

Presentation Diagnostics integrated into Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms System diagnostics

Diagnostics viewers

Vijeo Look Monitor Pro Processor for system bits and words

In-rack I/O modules

Remote I/O modules on Fipio

Higher-level M.E.S.

Ethernet TCP/IP

Quantum Cell level Application diagnostics

Premium

Magelis XBT/T XBT

Machine level Unity Pro PC

The diagnostics offer for Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms is based on three components: b System diagnostics b DFB and EFB diagnostic function blocks (for system and application diagnostics) b Error message display system or viewers supplied as standard with Magelis XBT/T XBT terminals, Vijeo Look/ Monitor Pro supervisory software and Unity Pro setup software.

6

Functions System diagnostics The system diagnostics for the Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms supports the monitoring of system bits/words, I/O modules and activity times (minimum/maximum) of SFC steps. By simply choosing the relevant option in the application configuration, any event will result in time-stamped messages being generated automatically without the need for any additional programming thanks to these diagnostics viewers (1). With the assistance of Unity Pro's integrated diagnostics, this function can be used to perform 1st level diagnostics of the elements in the configuration, up to and including each I/O module channel.

Configuration level

Viewer window (example with Unity Pro software)

Module level

Channel level

(1) Diagnostics viewers are tools used to display and acknowledge error messages relating to diagnostics. They are supplied as standard with Unity Pro, Vijeo Look and Monitor Pro software and with Magelis terminals.

6/21

6.1




Application diagnostics Unity Pro software also has a library of function blocks for monitoring, called diagnostic DFBs and EFBs. The library of diagnostic function blocks contains: b Manufacturer blocks for system diagnostics v IO_DIA input/output fault, which is used to monitor the state of inputs/outputs. v ASI_DIA, which monitors whether an error has occurred on the AS-i bus (module or bus fault, no slave, slave not configured or faulty). b Manufacturer blocks for application diagnostics, for example: v EV_DIA, which monitors whether an event (bit status) has the correct value at a given time (no notion of timing). v MV_DIA, D_GRP, D_REA, which monitor whether an event (change in the status of a bit) occurs in accordance with the specified time conditions. v ALRM_DIA, which monitors the combination of the status of 2 bits. v NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA, which can be used to check, control and perform diagnostics for elements in the working part of the system made up of the combination of 2 actuators and 2 sensors.

Usrst_dia

Inputs

ED ERROR

COND

Outputs

b Open diagnostics blocks These enable users to create their own diagnostic function blocks to meet the specific requirements of their applications and therefore to supplement the manufacturer DFBs and EFBs described above. They can be created from 2 model blocks, which must be written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Function Block Diagram (FBD) or Instruction List (IL) language.

STATUS AREA_NR OP_CTRL

Diagnostics with fault finding Furthermore, when a fault occurs, Unity Pro analyzes the program sections concerned and opens a second window displaying the causes and probable sources of the fault. The user or process operator is guided though the fault-finding process, enabling machine downtimes to be reduced. The configuration module or instruction, which is the source of the fault, can also be accessed via the diagnostics viewer integrated into Unity Pro, directly from the alarm in the viewer output window (see page 6/23).

6 6.1


6/22





6



6


Diagnostics viewers All the diagnostic events processed by Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms via diagnostic DFBs/EFBs are stored in a buffer (specific data memory area on the PLC). The information contained in this buffer is sent (transparently for the user) to viewers for automatic display and for management of faults and alarms. The viewer function is supplied as standard with: b Vijeo Look and Monitor Pro V7 supervisory software b Unity Pro programming software b Magelis XBT F and Magelis iPC HMI terminals (function only available with Premium PLCs) The integrated viewer in Unity Pro can also be used to access the instruction or module, which is the source of the fault. See “Diagnostics with fault finding”, page 6/22. Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms have multiviewer capability (can be used with a maximum of 15 viewers). A PC-compatible station with the viewer function can be multi-PLC (can be used with a maximum of 15 Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms). The buffer/viewer structure supports: b A single point for fault management in each application b Time-stamping of the occurrence of faults at source b Storage of intermittent faults in memory b Independence with regard to the viewer functions. The frame sent from the PLC buffer is identical for all viewers. b Automatic archiving of all error messages Viewer

Output window The diagnostics viewer takes the form of an output window divided into 2 sections: b A message list indicating, for each alarm: state, DFB type, geographical zone, dates and times of appearance/disappearance, associated message and status b An area for additional information about the selected message: type, comment, date of appearance, specific data, variables in error state, etc.

Runtime screens The runtime screen tool is integrated into Unity Pro. The runtime screens are designed to facilitate the operation of automated processes during debugging, startup and maintenance. The runtime screens provide a set of information (explanatory texts, display of dynamic values, push buttons, and synoptics), enabling users to act quickly and easily to modify and dynamically monitor PLC variables. The runtime screens editor provides all the HMI (Human/Machine Interface) elements needed for the animated design and viewing of processes. It enables these screens to be designed using specific tools: b Screen: Creation of runtime screens, which can be classified according to family. b Message: Creation of messages to be displayed. b Objects: Creation of a graphic objects library using: v Geometrical elements (line, rectangle, ellipse, incorporation of images, controller front panels, etc.) v Control elements (buttons, data entry fields, screen browsing controls, etc.) v Animation elements (colors, flashing elements, bar graphs, etc.) When the station on which Unity Pro has been installed is connected to the PLC, the user can obtain a dynamic display of the screens according to the state of the process. Screen sequencing is possible, depending on the priority attributed, either via the keyboard or a PLC request. When online, the Unity Pro application program can be accessed directly from the runtime screens by clicking on the selected object in a synoptic screen view. It is also possible to activate the animation table or cross-reference functions by selecting one or more variables on the screen. To make the display easier to read, the synoptic views can be displayed in full-screen view.






6/23

6 6.1



Modifying the program with the PLC in RUN Unity Pro enables changes to be made to the program when the PLC connected to the programming terminal is in RUN. These modifications are made by performing the following operations: b Where necessary, transferring the application in the PLC to the PC terminal running Unity Pro. b Preparing the program changes offline. These program modifications can be of any type and in any language (IL, ST, LD, FBD, and SFC), for example adding/deleting SFC steps or actions. Furthermore, modifications can be made to the code of a DFB user function block (although its interface cannot be modified). b Updating the program in the PLC (in RUN) to reflect these program changes. This function allows program code and data in different parts of the application to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process). This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume required.

Cross-References functions The Unity Pro Cross-References function, which is available in standalone mode (offline) and when connected to the PLC (online), allows users to view all the elements of a PLC application by searching for variables of any type. This view indicates where the declared variable is used as well as the mode in which it is used (write, read, etc.). This function also provides access to the Search/Replace function for variable names. The variables search can be initialized from any editor (language, data, runtime screen, animation table, etc.).

Import/export function The import/export function available in Unity Pro supports the following operations from the structural and functional project views: b Via the import function, to reuse all or part of a project created previously in the current project b Via the export function, to copy all or part of the current project to a file for subsequent reuse

6

The files generated on export are generally in XML format (1). However, variables can be exported or imported in the following formats in addition to XML: b .xvm format compatible with OFS data server software b Source format, in a .scy file compatible with PL7 design software b Text format with separator (TAB), in a .txt file for compatibility with any other system

6.1

On import, data can be assigned to new instances of the following elements via an assistant: b DFB function blocks b DDT data structures b Simple data Furthermore, when importing a function module, the data associated with animation tables and runtime screens is also reassigned. The XML import function also supports the transfer of an Atrium, Premium or Quantum PLC configuration prepared in the SIS Pro costing and configuration tool for use in the creation of a project in Unity Pro. This import function means that the user does not have to repeat the PLC configuration process when this has already been completed in the SIS Pro tool. (1) XML language: Open text-based language providing structural and semantic information.


6/24





6



6

Unity Pro software

Application converters Unity Pro's integrated conversion tools can be used to convert PLC applications created with Concept and PL7 programming and setup software in Unity Pro applications. Concept/Unity Pro converter (Quantum PLC) The conversion can be performed from a Concept V2.5 application (possible in V2.11 or later but only once it has been updated to version V2.5). In order to perform the conversion, the application must be exported to an ASCII file in Concept. The export file is converted into Unity Pro source files automatically. This source file is then analyzed by Unity Pro. At the end of the procedure, a conversion report is generated and an output window displays any conversion errors from which the part of the program to be modified can be accessed directly. The Concept application converter converts the application into Unity Pro but does not guarantee that it will operate correctly in real time. It is therefore essential to test or debug any converted application. PL7/Unity Pro converter (Premium and Atrium slot PLC) The conversion can be performed from a PL7 application V4 or later (Premium PLC or Atrium slot PLC). In order to perform the conversion, the source file (complete application) or source file (user function block) must be exported in PL7. The conversion procedure is similar to that of the Concept conversion described above.

Operating system update utilities OS-Loader software is designed for updating operating systems on Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms and is supplied with Unity Pro software. It can be used to update the following for compatibility with Unity Pro: b Premium TSX P57 2p3M/2623M and TSX P57 3p3M/3623M processors b Quantum 140 CPU 434 12A and 140 CPU 534 14A processors (requires PV 04 or later) b Ethernet TCP/IP TSX ETY and 140 NOE 771 communication modules These operating system updates are performed as follows for the various types of processor: b Uni-Telway RS 485 terminal link for Premium processors b Modbus or Modbus Plus terminal link for Quantum processors b Ethernet TCP/IP network for integrated Ethernet port on Premium processors and Ethernet Premium and Quantum processors

Communication drivers The drivers used most frequently on the Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms are installed at the same time as the Unity Pro software. Furthermore, Unity Pro also includes the following communication drivers, which can be installed as required: Driver type

Windows XP Windows 2000 Uni-Telway V1.6 IE17 TSX FPC10 V1.3 IE05 TSX FPC20 V1.2 IE03 TSX SCP 114 V1.1 IE04 Ethway V1.1 IE02 ISAway V1.2 IE04 PCIway V1.0 IE06 XIP V1.7 IE13 Modbus V1.1 IE06 USB for mini-DIN Included with terminal port PL7 USB for USB terminal port V1.0 IE14



Windows NT Windows 98 Millennium V1.9 IE17 V1.6 IE17 V1.3 IE08 V1.3 IE05 V1.3 IE08 V1.2 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE03 V2.6 IE06 V1.5 IE06 V1.2 IE04 – – V1.7 IE13 V1.7 IE13 V1.1 IE06 V1.1 IE06 – –

Windows 95

OSS/2

DOS

V7.8 IE18 V2.4 IE14 V1.2 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V2.6 IE06 V1.2 IE09 – V1.7 IE13 V1.1 IE06 –

– V2.4 IE13 V1.5 IE05 – V2.6 IE22 – – – – –

V7.4 IE14 V2.2 IE11 – – – – – – – –

–

–

–

–


–



6/25

6 6.1

Functions (continued), references


Advanced openness for experienced IT engineers Advanced openness, which is reserved for experienced IT engineers, supports the development of interfaces between Unity and expert tools as well as specific user-defined functions. This type of development requires expert IT knowledge in the following areas: b b b b

C++ or Visual Basic languages Client/server architectures XML and COM/DCOM technologies Issues relating to data synchronization

As a supplement to the Unity Studio software suite, the UDE (Unity Developer's Edition) development tool can be used to set up made-to-order solutions. In addition to a development kit, it includes the Unity servers, training, documentation, and technical support.

Example of a made-to-order solution, which can be set up with UDE

This UDE development tool can only be supplied once a specific contract has been signed with Schneider Electric. Please consult your Regional Sales Office.

References Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large software packages The software is available in 3 versions: b Unity Pro Medium for programming and setting up Unity automation platforms: v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20 v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10 and 57 20 b Unity Pro Large for programming and setting up automation platforms: v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30 v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30 and 57 40 v Quantum with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U and 534 14U processors b Unity Pro Extra Large for programming and setting up all Unity automation platforms: v Atrium TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30 v Premium TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30, 57 40 and 57 50 v Quantum with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U, 534 14U, 651 50, 651 60 and Hot Standby 140 CPU 671 60 processors Furthermore, Unity Pro can be used to design and run programmable process control loops on Premium TSX 57 40 and 57 50 platforms and Quantum platforms with 140 CPU 651 50, 651 60 and 671 60 processors (access to CONT_CTL process control function block library).

6 6.1

Upgrade kits for Concept, PL7 Pro and ProWORX software Users who have already purchased these installed base software programs and have a current subscription may purchase Unity Pro version V2.0 software at vastly reduced prices. These upgrades are only possible for licenses of the same type (from Concept XL group license to Unity Pro Extra Large group license). OS Windows composition and compatibility Unity Pro multilingual software is compatible with Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP operating systems. It comprises: b Documentation in electronic format in 4 languages (English, French, German, and Spanish) This documentation can be ordered separately in paper format. b Converters for converting applications created with Concept and PL7 Pro programming software b PLC simulator Cables for connecting the processor to the programming PC must be ordered separately.


6/26





6



6

Unity Pro software

References (continued) Unity Pro Medium version 2.0 software packages For PLCs TSX 57 0p…57 20 TSX PCI 57 20

Description

Type of license

Reference

Unity Pro Medium software packages

Single-station Group (3 stations) Single-station Group (3 stations)

UNY SPU MFU CD 20 UNY SPU MFG CD 20 UNY SPU MZU CD 20 UNY SPU MZG CD 20

Description

Type of license

Reference

Unity Pro Large software packages

Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (> 10 stations) Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (> 10 stations)

UNY SPU LFU CD 20 UNY SPU LFG CD 20 UNY SPU LFT CD 20 UNY SPU LFF CD 20 UNY SPU LZU CD 20 UNY SPU LZG CD 20 UNY SPU LZT CD 20 UNY SPU LZF CD 20

Software upgrades from: - Concept M - PL7 Junior


Unity Pro Large version 2.0 software packages For PLCs TSX 57 0p…57 40 TSX PCI 57 20/30 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U

Software upgrades from: - Concept M - PL7 Junior

Weight kg – – – – – – – –

Unity Pro Extra Large version 2.0 software packages For PLCs TSX 57 0p…57 50 TSX PCI 57 20/30 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 651 50/60 140 CPU 671 60

Description

Type of license

Reference

Unity Pro Extra Large software Single-station packages Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (> 10 stations) Software upgrades from: Single-station - Concept M Group (3 stations) - PL7 Junior Team (10 stations) - ProWORX NxT Site (> 10 stations) - ProWORX 32

UNY SPU EFU CD 20 UNY SPU EFG CD 20 UNY SPU EFT CD 20 UNY SPU EFF CD 20 UNY SPU EZU CD 20 UNY SPU EZG CD 20 UNY SPU EZT CD 20 UNY SPU EZF CD 20

Weight kg – – – – – – – –

Documentation for Unity Pro version 2.0 For PLCs

Description

Type of license

Reference

Getting Started manuals (on CD-ROM)

Assisted creation of a first Unity Pro application

English French

UNY USE 100 10E UNY USE 100 10E

Hardware and software manuals (on CD-ROM)

Platform setup for: Multilingual: English, French, - Atrium/Premium German, and Spanish - Quantum - Momentum - Electromagnetic compatibility of networks and fieldbuses Software setup for: - Unity Pro - EF/EFB/DFB function blocks library

UNY USE 909 CD M

Use from processor

Length

Reference

2.5 m

TSX PCX 1031

2.5 m 3.7 m 15 m

TSX PCX 3030 990 NAA 263 20 990 NAA 263 50

1m 3m 6m 3.3 m

110 XCA 282 01 110 XCA 282 02 110 XCA 282 03 UNY XCA USB 033

Weight kg – – –

6.1

Separate parts Description PC terminal connection cables

TSX PCX 1031

To PC port

Mini-DIN port for RS 232D (15-way Premium TSx 57 1p/2p/3p/4p SUB-D connector) Atrium TSX PCI 57 USB port Modbus port RS 232D (15-way 15-way SUB-D Quantum SUB-D connector) 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A RJ45 connector for Modbus RJ45 connector port Quantum 140 CPU 6p1 USB port Premium TSX 57 5p USB port Quantum 140 CPU 6p1





6

Weight kg 0.170 0.150 0.300 0.180

– – – –


6/27

Presentation, setup


6

Unity EFB Toolkit software

Presentation Unity EFB Toolkit is the software for developing EF functions and EFB function blocks in C language and is optional software for Unity Pro. It can be used to develop new functions (whose internal code is written in C language) to extend and complete the set of functions proposed as standard in Unity Pro. This software comes with Microsoft Visual C++ @.Net which can be used to debug the functions used on the Unity Pro PLC simulator. Unity EFB Toolkit also includes a service for creating and managing families of functions, with a view to their integration in the Unity Pro function libraries.

Setup C language development software is a proper tool for managing the whole function while it is being performed: b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in Unity Pro, with automatic file organization b Powerful tools for testing and debugging b Management of compatibilities and software versions of created functions b Generation of files for subsequent installation of functions on other development stations

Managing function families The software can be used to define different function families. These functions, also known as EFs/EFBs, are stored in families, making it possible to create an organized library of functions written in C language. Once created, these families can be distributed and integrated in the Unity Pro libraries. They are: b Arranged in families/functions b Used in all languages with the same flexibility as standard functions (data entry wizard) b Managed by the Unity Pro library tool (version management)

6 Editing functions

6.1

The various tabs in the EFB Toolkit software editor allow the user to create the function by: b Declaring the interface, all data types are possible (elementary, structures, tables) b Supporting public and private variables Writing the source code file in C language A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such as the real-time clock, PLC variables, system words, math functions. In particular, it is possible to perform numerical processing in floating point format.

6/28

Setup(continued), reference


6

Unity EFB Toolkit software

Setup (continued) Debugging functions The function created can be tested after insertion in an application and loading into the Unity Pro PLC simulator. The Microsoft Visual C++ tool is used to debug the function. It is used to: b Insert breakpoints b Perform step by step execution b Display the code with the breakpoints visible b Display manipulated data

Enhancing the function library As the function has been debugged, it can be generated and distributed, and the updating tool supplied with Unity Pro can be used to enhance the libraries on a user station. Version management means that at any time the user knows the level of functions installed on a station and can update the application with the latest existing versions.

References The “companion” software for Unity Pro, Unity EFB Toolkit can be used to create EF elementary blocks and EFB elementary function blocks. These are developed in Visual C++ language and are integrated in Unity Pro function block libraries. The Unity EFB Toolkit software and its documentation are supplied in electronic form on CD-ROM in English. Description

Type of Language Reference license Unity EFB Toolkit, kit for Single English UNY SPU ZFU CD 20E developing EF and EFB (1 station) (software and blocks electronic documentation) Unity EFB Toolkit UNY CSP SPU ZBU subscription renewal

Weight kg –

6

–

6.1

6/29

Presentation

Modicon Premium automation platform Unity SFC View software

Presentation Unity SFC View is integrated in human/machine interface (HMI) applications for monitoring Unity Pro sequential applications written in sequential function chart language (SFC or Grafcet) executed by a PLC. Set up in the same way as an ActiveX control component, Unity SFC View is used to display status information relating to SFC charts executed by a Premium or Quantum PLC. Installed on an HMI station, Unity SFC View monitors and controls the status of SFC charts in real time, supplying detailed diagnostic data. Unity SFC View reads the necessary data from the Unity project database in offline mode. The PLC data is accessed online via the OFS (OPC Factory Server). Without needing to recreate SFC charts in the HMI environment, Unity SFC View reads the structure of the SFC charts directly from the Unity project database. Modifications made to the SFC application are detected and updated at any time. In online mode, Unity SFC View accesses the PLC diagnostic data, thus enabling awareness and tracking of the occurrence of the first fault and subsequent faults. System downtime is much reduced since Unity SFC View enables maintenance staff to locate the source of the problem much more quickly. Unity SFC View is designed for end users and system designers who wish to integrate this control into their HMI system. Unity SFC View is compatible with most HMI platforms handling ActiveX Control components such as Vijeo Look control software or Monitor Pro supervisory software or in a programming environment such as Visual Basic.

6 6.1

6/30

6



6

Unity SFC View software

The 3 Unity SFC View views Unity SFC View offers 3 views: b An overview for managing selection of SFC charts b Two detailed views presenting the status and diagnostic data of the selected SFC chart The overview provides a general view of all the SFC charts in a Unity project. It contains real-time data such as current step, simultaneous steps, chart error with indication of the SFC chart status. The overview makes it easy to browse through SFC charts and switch quickly to the detailed view of the desired SFC chart in the Unity Pro application. Overview

The simple detailed view shows the elementary data on the active step (or selected step) of the SFC chart in real time. The data displayed may include the name, comment, chart and step status, as well as the activity times (min, max, actual). You can also enable the chart navigation option. Simple detailed view

Because of the compact size of the simple detailed view, it is possible to place several instances of it on a single HMI screen relating to a certain part of the process. From this simple detailed mode, you can navigate between HMI screens with SFC View controls and display the detailed view of SFC charts. The detailed view illustrates the details of an SFC chart in real time. The display indicates the current step, the transition awaiting activation and the next step. The actions associated with the steps are displayed along with sequence selections or parallel branches. The detailed diagnostic data includes analysis of the causes of the fault at transition level. Depending on the diagnostic mode, the error grid contains the causes of errors or all the variables assigned to the transition logic. The current state of the various variables and selected errors are identified by different colors.

Diagnostic mode Transition logic diagnostics is a key function of Unity SFC View. It minimizes system downtimes in the event of a fault. Two different diagnostic modes are available: Detailed view

b Unity SFC View reads the data in the Unity PLC diagnostic buffer. It provides information about faulty or missing events that are preventing the transition from being enabled. This mode does not require any configuration or additional programming in the PLC program. b Unity SFC View monitors the internal logic of the transition conditions “back to front”. This mode provides diagnostic data concerning all the inputs connected to the transition (not limited to faulty inputs). In this mode, Unity SFC View uses specific EFB function blocks linked to the transition conditions. The library for these blocks is supplied with the Unity SFC View software.

Customization Unity SFC View offers a programming interface which can be used to integrate the ActiveX Control component in an HMI application and customize its functions and its operator interface. The ActiveX Control component in Unity SFC View can be customized. It accepts properties, methods and events (all the properties have a default value). The properties pages simplify configuration. Unity SFC View accepts scripts with methods such as browsing through charts, status control of charts, and also events such as error notification or chart selection. This data can be used to launch programs or operator screens.

SFC View properties page

6/31

6 6.1


Modicon Premium automation platform Unity SFC View software

Possible architectures Unity SFC View is used in a configuration where the OFS and Unity Pro software reside on the same PC platform as the HMI application. Basic architecture Operator station with HMI application and Unity Pro, OFS and SFC View programs and projects

Quantum, Premium with Unity SFC program

In a distributed configuration, the OFS and Unity Pro software can be installed on different servers. Distributed architecture Operator station with HMI application and SFC View projects

Unity projects

Ethernet TCP/IP

COM or DCOM OFS server P Server (Unity)

PLC network

6 Quantum, Premium with Unity SFC program

6.1

6/32

6



6

Unity SFC View software

References When integrated in an HMI application, Unity SFC View can be used to monitor and control charts in applications developed in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language running on Premium/Quantum Unity PLCs. The HMI station, compatible with Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional operating systems, must support ActiveX Control components. Unity SFC View V2.0 requires: b Unity Pro V2.0 (M, L or XL), to be ordered separately b OFS V3.1 data server software, to be ordered separately Unity SFC View multilingual software, supplied on a CD-ROM, includes: b The SFC View ActiveX Control component b The EFB function block library for Unity Pro V2.0 b An example of how to integrate SFC View in Unity Pro projects b The electronic documentation (English, French, German and Spanish) The Unity SFC View integration example illustrates the main possibilities offered by Unity SFC View. This is an executable program which does not need HMI software in order to run. It helps the user understand how to configure and use the Unity SFC View ActiveX Control component.

Description Unity SFC View software packages (version V2.0)

Type of license

Reference

Single (1 station)

UNY SDU MFU CD20

Weight kg –

Team (10 stations) UNY SDU MFT CD20

–

Site (100 stations) UNY SDU MFF CD20

–

6 6.1

6/33


Presentation

6

Unity Studio software suite General presentation

Unity Studio for the development of a distributed project 1 1

2 2 2 4

The Unity Studio software suite is the key component on design office workstations used for designing and structuring automation applications in a collaborative environment. This type of project consists of creating an automation application comprising various devices: 1 Communication networks 2 Automation platforms and distributed I/O 3 Variable speed drives, motion control 4 Human machine interfaces (HMIs) Based on a horizontal approach, the software suite supports: b Project management for distributed control applications b Application and device management b The consistency and synchronization of Ethernet TCP/IP communication between devices

3

The Unity Studio software suite offers designers of industrial automation distributed control projects the possibility of using all these tools in conjunction. From the design phase on, everyone involved has easy, user-friendly access to a single, shared representation of the project. The objective of the Unity Studio software suite is to: b Provide a unique structural representation of the project shared by experts in all application-specific domains b Increase the productivity of each expert

“All-in-one” software suite Unity Studio V2.0 is an “all-in-one” software suite based on Microsoft's Visio 2003 Professional graphic design tool. It is supplied with the following software as standard: b Unity Studio Manager V2.0 for managing distributed control applications b Unity Pro XL V2.0 for programming Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms b OFS V3.1 (OPC Factory Server) for accessing and exchanging data in the architecture b PowerSuite V1.5 for setting up drives and motor starters b XBT-L1000 V4.30 for creating Magelis HMI applications b Microsoft VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) for developing customized functions b MS Visio 2003 Professional, depending on the type of software license

6

Unity Studio V2.0 is the ideal tool for integrating and configuring Transparent Ready products.

6.1

Unity Studio Manager tools allow you to create direct links with other Schneider Electric applications or with third-party software applications. In addition, the Unity Developer's Edition (UDE) software package provides an advanced open development solution for the programming of user functions and the development of interactive interfaces with other software applications (programming in C++, VBA, VBA macros, etc.), see page 6/26. The Unity Studio software suite is the ideal software engineering platform for distributed control applications.


6/34



Functions

6

Unity Studio software suite

Project views Graphical project views In conjunction with the Visio 2003 graphics editor, the Unity Studio software suite can be used to create project views in specific pages: b Process or machine view: A unique representation shared by all specialist experts/consultants working on the project (mechanical, hydraulic, electrical engineering, etc.). Graphical process or machine view

b View of the distributed automation architecture: A graphical representation of the project's automation devices and communication networks. These views are composed using application-specific object libraries (construction, mechanical, hydraulic, electrical engineering, etc.). The Schneider component library extends the scope of the Visio libraries. Graphical views are created by dragging and dropping objects from the libraries to the tabbed pages. Objects, their links and related properties composing the project views are entered once into the graphical views and shared with: b Other views b Other Unity Studio suite software and external software applications Based on the Visio 2003 editor, the graphical views are easy to use thanks to the standard user interface (Microsoft office tools). Graphic elements can be integrated from other market-standard CAD software (AutoCAD, Micro Station, etc.).

Graphical view of the distributed automation architecture

Functional view The functional view is a structured tree diagram of the entire set of machine or process functions. It is taken from the graphical view of the process or machine. This hierarchical structure comprises functional entities in the form of folders that can be nested at different levels. The project designer associates functional entities with stations making up the project. After “generation” (see page 6/39), the corresponding functional entities are made available in the structural view (configuration entity) of Unity Pro applications for Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms. Functional view

Topological view The topological view is composed using the control architecture graphical view. This topological view displays the communication networks and connected devices in a folder structure. In a similar fashion, after “generation” (see page 6/39), elements of the topological view are made available in the structural view (communication element) of each Unity Pro application for the Modicon Atrium/Premium/Quantum platforms in the distributed automation architecture. Network names and the names and types of stations defined in the graphical view of Unity Studio are sent to Unity Pro applications.

Topological view



6/35

6 6.1



6


Communication view The communication view enables PLCs to be synchronized and data to be exchanged with the following types of distributed product: v Altivar drives v Advantys STB, Momentum distributed I/O v Or any other product connected to the Ethernet architecture, including those connected via Ethernet/Modbus Plus or Ethernet/Modbus gateways. Set using the symbolic variables editor in Unity Studio, parameters for communication services between the various devices or products (Global Data and I/O Scanning services) are loaded automatically in the files for each station during generation (see page 6/39), thereby ensuring that all stations benefit from: b Ensured communication consistency between the distributed applications concerned b Maximum productivity based on station configuration b Reduction in the risk of errors

Communication view

I/O Scanning The I/O Scanning service can be used to manage the exchange of remote I/O states on the Ethernet TCP/IP network following simple configuration, with no need for specific programming. I/O scanning is transparent and is carried out via read/write requests sent by the Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms in accordance with the Modbus TCP client/server protocol. This technique of scanning via a standard protocol enables communication with any product that supports a Modbus server on TCP/IP. Unity Studio can define a number of communication frames for each station. Each communication frame, reserved for reading inputs and writing outputs, is limited to 100 consecutive words. See page 5/22 for more information about the I/O Scanning service.

6

Global Data

Ethernet TCP/IP Variable A Variable B Variable C

The Global Data service on Ethernet TCP/IP communication networks can be used to exchange data between connected stations in real time.

6.1 Publication

Subscription

Subscription Publication

Application 1

Application 2

Application n

This service enables a common database to be synchronized and shared between 64 stations. Each of the 64 stations in a distribution group can: b Publish a 1024-byte variable on the network b Subscribe to between 1 and 64 published variables The Global Data view in Unity Studio can be used to define Global Data distribution groups and set parameters for variables published and subscribed to by the stations. See page 5/24 for more information about the Global Data service.

6/36



6


Object libraries The Unity Studio software suite supplies open libraries of objects that can be re-used in graphical views: b Visio 2003 libraries b Schneider Electric automation product library Objects found in these libraries are of 2 types: b Process objects for the creation of a graphical view of a process or machine (motors, valves, actuators, pumps, etc.) b Automation objects for the creation of a control architecture view (PLCs, networks, drives, HMI terminals, Ethernet hubs, etc.) Each object can be given its own parameters (type of valve, etc.) using predefined properties or enhanced by applying customized properties.

Adding new objects

Process library

Schneider Electric automation product library

The numerous libraries supplied can be expanded as needed by: b Downloading Visio objects available online, covering all industrial fields (Microsoft Visio site, product reseller sites or sites specializing in Visio objects) b Creation of objects by the user A customized object can be created by: b Integrating a graphical thumbnail of your choice (.bmp format) into the library b Defining customized object properties b Creating XML-format rules for complex objects Complex objects (for automation devices) can be created by writing usage rules (for instance, the possibility of connecting a type of automation device to a type of communication network) in standard eXtensible Markup Language (XML) format.

Thumbnails Parameters Rules XML-format rules

Process objects (sensors, actuators, etc.)

PLCs Networks HMI Variable speed drives Motor starters Hubs Switches etc.

Automation objects (components, etc.)

Hyperlinks can be defined from the objects in order to launch a software application or to open a document related to the object (see next page).



6/37

6 6.1



6


Direct-access hyperlinks From the Unity Studio project views, it is possible to create hyperlinks at any time to: b All document types in .xls, .doc, .pdf, etc. formats b Web pages via a URL address b Software tools, for example for configuration, network diagnostics, production management, etc.

Creation of a link from an object

Direct access to the configuration software tool relative to the object

Managing distributed control applications The project is described in Unity Studio by different views, which: b Provide specific types of characteristic information b Provide access to associated information

6 6.1

4 1 2 3 4


6/38


2

1

3

Assignment of an automation application to each station in the architecture Launch of the application from the topological or functional view Creation and location of files for each station Assignment of functional process or machine entities to station applications



6


Project analysis operations In order to detect any errors as early as possible, the Unity Studio software suite analyzes application coherence and consistency. A report indicates any possible errors in the form of alarms. Checks are performed on: b Station addressing b The types of station defined b Data exchanged in real time on the Ethernet network between PLC stations via the I/O Scanning and Global Data services (reserved word zones, group, published and subscribed variables) b The hierarchical structure of functional entities

Generation for each individual station Following the analysis (and after any corrections have been made to render the application compliant), generation using the Unity Pro software suite enables you to create specific parameter settings for each station in each corresponding station file. The parameter settings generated - consistent with the global project - are listed in the table below for each type of station. For PLC stations (Atrium, Premium and Quantum), this generation includes the creation of the functional view, the program structure and the parameter settings for the Global Data and I/O Scanning services. Type of data generated

Generation in Unity Pro

Unity Pro

XBT L1000

Power Suite

Concept PL7

OFS

Application

Creation of Unity Pro program structures

Name Project file Device Name Format Network Routing path Link Name Format Address Functional Name entity Structure Group Name Multicast address Global Data Variable name Variable type Producer/consumer I/O Scanning Variable name Variable type I/O Scanner setting

6 6.1

Data generated using Unity Studio with consistency check and updates Data created in Unity Studio XML data generated using Unity Pro

Consistency check and update operations The check verifies the consistency of the project parameter settings with the files for each station. The update updates the parameter settings in the station files to correspond to those in Unity Studio (see table above). Any modifications made on the stations are checked and replicated at all other project levels. The existing parameter settings for a station added to the project are updated in Unity Studio (in the event of the re-use of an existing station).



6/39




Global project documentation The Unity Studio software suite is a single publishing resource for creating global project documentation including information about the following different levels: b Project (topology, networks, global data, functional modules, Visio graphical views, VBA macros) b Stations (station applications), see “Unity Pro documentation editor”, page 6/19 This documentation can be viewed on screen or printed.

Openness of the Unity Studio software suite Better customer solutions with Unity Studio The inherent openness of Unity Studio means that project object models can be accessed for the purpose of using and extending their services. This adaptation of generic functions to meet user-specific requirements is achieved by: b Importing/exporting components in standard XML format b Launching VBA macros (Microsoft Visual Basic) b The option to include hyperlinks to third-party documents and software (MES, ERP, web, configurators, maintenance guide, etc.) b The use of COM/DCOM technology b The use of the UDE (Unity Developer's Edition) development tool, see page 6/27 The Unity Studio software suite is supplied with productivity examples based on VBA technology for creating language objects designed to enhance the Unity Pro design software.

Unrestricted design approach

Top-down approach

Unrestricted approach

6 6.1

Bottom-up approach

Unity software applications combine the assurance of overall project consistency with the freedom to select project design and debugging methods. A number of approaches are possible: b The top-down approach: In the Unity Studio software suite, this approach corresponds to the creation of graphical representations, the declaration of applications, the configuration of communications, the generation of station files (particularly in the Unity Pro setup software) and the publishing of global documentation. b The bottom-up approach: Based on applications created at each station level, this approach enables all parameter settings to be updated to match those at Unity Studio project level. b The unrestricted approach: In the Unity Studio software suite, this approach allows users to freely select the design method for a distributed automation project. Information entered at one level is automatically replicated and distributed at other levels of the project. This design freedom facilitates, for example: b The integration of existing applications into the project with upgrading to Unity Pro software and Unity Studio global project level b The incorporation of modifications made to each application following testing and start-up or maintenance operations


6/40


6


References

6


References The multilingual Unity Studio software suite, compatible with the Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP Professional operating systems, can be used to design and structure distributed automation projects. The Unity Studio software suite includes the following software applications: b Depending on the software offer, Microsoft Visio 2003 Professional for graphic design b Unity Studio Manager V2.0 for the management of distributed applications b Unity Pro Extra Large V2.0 for the programming and debugging of Atrium, Premium and Quantum automation platforms b OFS V3.1 (OPC Factory Server) for accessing and exchanging data in the architecture b PowerSuite V1.50 for setting up drives and motor starters b XBT-L1000 V4.30 for creating Magelis applications b Microsoft VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) for developing customized functions b Communication drivers (see detailed information on page 6/26). Documentation is supplied in electronic format. Processor/PC programming terminal connection cables must be ordered separately (see page 6/27). Description Unity Studio development software suite

Upgrade from Unity Pro to Unity Studio

MS Visio 2003

Type of license

Language (1) French English German Spanish Italian

Reference

Included

Single-station

Not included

Not included


UNY SEW UNY SEW UNY SEW UNY SEW UNY SEW

XFU CD20F r XFU CD20E r XFU CD20D r XFU CD20S r XFU CD20T r

Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (unlimited)

Multilingual Multilingual Multilingual Multilingual

UNY SEW UNY SEW UNY SEW UNY SEW

LFU CD20 r LFG CD20 r LFT CD20 r LFF CD20 r

– – –

Single-station

Multilingual

UNY SEW LYU CD20 r

–

(1) Defines the language for Visio 2003 Professional and the electronic documentation.

6.1

r Launch planned for 4th quarter of 2004


6


6/41

Presentation


6

Unity Application Generator

Unity Application Generator for designing and generating process applications Unity Application Generator (UAG) is a specialized software productivity tool for modeling and generating process applications in a collaborative environment. For process type applications, UAG provides a single database containing all the project information (process model, control configuration and SCADA integration). Using an approach based on reusable control devices (PID, motor, valve,etc.), UAG which complies with the standard ISA S88 and generates the PLC code (Unity Pro & Concept), plus all the elements required by the HMI monitoring system (Magelis) or SCADA (Monitor Pro V7.2 (1) or third-party supervision system). Single entry and central information management ensure data consistency and the integration of the control (PLC) and monitoring (HMI/SCADA) systems.

Process models Physical model (process view) Process components and logical structureation of the process are based on the ISA S88 standard. Adopting the ISA S88 standard provides the following benefits: b Considerable process flexibility. b Significant reduction in development and delivery timescales. b A standardized, uniform solution. b Reuse of sub-elements. UAG offers the 6 structural levels from the ISA S88 standard (site, area, process cell, unit, equipment module and control module): These levels can be found again within the applications structure (supervision and PLC) generated by UAG. Process parameters for control devices, such as motors, control loops and valves, are set at control module level.

6

Topological model (automation view)

6.1

In a Collaborative Control environment, UAG can be applied to the entire process’ control, monitoring and supervision topology. The topological view includes all devices with I/O points, as well as the communication channels between these devices. UAG supports: b Architectures comprising automation platforms. v Modicon Quantum, Premium and Atrium with Unity Pro. v Modicon Quantum and Momentum with Concept. b SCADA systems (Monitor Pro, iFix or generic), Magelis panels. b Ethernet TCP/IP and Modbus Plus communication networks. b Third-party devices. The process for configuration of networks, PLC applications with their I/O and other devices of the topological model , takes place directly in UAG. Complet model (project view) The physical and topological models are independent and can be created in parallel by independent process and automation experts. The models are integrated via simple drag & drop operations between the two views.. This integration simply involves assigning PLC I/O points to control devices (valves, motors, etc.).

6/42



6


Flow loop control

Integrating your expertise in UAG Smart Control Devices (SCoDs)

PLC Documentation PLC Logic

Maintenance

Locking

Diagnostic

UAG software is an object-oriented tool based on these Smart Control Devices. These elements describe a part of the process, including all the aspects of the process control system: b Links to the PLC logic. b Links to the graphic representation in the supervisory system. b Description of I/O interfaces. b Description of interfaces intended for HMI/SCADA supervisory. b Information related for handling alarms and events. b Documentation. In UAG these multi-faceted elements are called SCoDs (Smart Control Devices). They are created using UAG’s specific SCoD editor.

Graphic representation

Alarms/ events

Security

I/O interfaces

Documentation

A SCoD is defined for each control devices, and is created with the help of the SCoD editor by: b Using the DFB or EFB interface of the PLC logic (Unity Pro/Concept) by importing FBD Language. b Assigning a supervisory graphic reference (Monitor Pro (1) or others). b Defining the Smart control Device parameters and their behavior in the process control system: v control device parameters and attributes from the process side (operating modes, threshold limits, alarm texts, etc.). v I/O parameters and attributes for PLC logic, v parameters and attributes for HMI/SCADA supervisory. b Defining configuration screens for the UAG user interface. b Defining default or initial parameters.

IHM

This means that you can integrate your process expertise and know-how in your own SCoD libraries and reuse them again and again in all your UAG applications.

Customization UAG can be used to define your own standards and apply them. It provides a uniform solution based on your standards, and prepares for validation operations. During the design phase, the risk of error is kept to a minimum, thereby reducing debugging and maintenance costs too. UAG can be used to customize: b The selection of SCoD libraries. b The symbols nomenclature used in UAG. b The selection of PLC platforms and modules. b The definition of access levels, display formats, units of measurement, etc. used for HMI/SCADA supervisory. b The user documentation. b Security. This means that you can integrate your process expertise and standards in all your UAG applications.

6/43

6 6.1


Modicon Premium automation platform Unity Application Generator

Integrating your expertise in UAG (continued) Modeling process applications Once you have created the customization based on your standards and chosen your SCoD libraries, UAG offers you a simple, user-friendly, application-specific method of working. The process is defined using the physical model (process view), exploiting the expertise provided at customization and SCoD library creation stages. This means that the process behavior and the process configuration screens match exactly your requirements. The process control is defined using the topological model (automation view), again, in accordance with your customization. b Process design using UAG is made easy through functional analyses. It allows the user to reliably track the exact project status. In order to be able to detect any error or oversight as soon as possible, UAG analyzes the project and flags any bugs at the various levels of the project, for instance: b At physical model level: v SCoD instance attributes that are missing or over limit, v invalid or missing interlock parameters. b At topological model level: v Communication channels between devices that are not defined, v invalid or missing communication parameters. b At project level: v SCoD data is being transmitted from another PLC, but communication with this device has not been configured, v the SCoD data is not assigned to any PLC I/O variable, v behavior on response time for I/O variables that is not defined. This means that your process expertise and know-how is made available to be used in UAG, ensuring consistent process application modeling. Generating process applications UAG provides at a single point all the process information intended for the project’s multiple applications (PLCs, HMI/SCADA), along with the communication parameters. When applications are generated this information is used to create the configuration and part of the control logic in using IEC 61131-3 FBD functional language. The following items are generated: b At PLC level: v Hardware configuration, v localized and non-localized data with its initial value and symbol, v initialization, v inter-PLC communication and distributed I/O (I/O Scanning on Ethernet or Peer Coop on Modbus Plus), v DFB/EFB block data (information from SCoDs), v interlocks. b At HMI/SCADA level: v Data for graphic animations, v localized data with its corresponding symbol (display, alarm, archiving information, etc.), v user access rights. b At communication level: v Communication driver configuration (Monitor Pro (1) and iFIX), v configuration data for third-party devices (via an XML interface).

6 6.1

The generation process in UAG is incremental, which makes it possible to supplement the various applications with their dedicated tools outside UAG without any risk. Incremental generation in UAG only impacts changed elements within the applications, which ensures that any additions made using the dedicated tools are stored permanently. This means that your process expertise and know-how is quickly operational in your process without any errors or oversights.

6/44

6



6


Validation Validation UAG is a specialized functional tool for process experts and has been developed to comply with the following process standards: b ISA S88. b GAMP (Good Automation Manufacturing Practice). Implementing validation procedures User requirement specification

Software Design Specification

Performances qualification

Related to

Functional specification

Operational qualification

Related to

Process control system documentation Validation Qualification (IQ, OQ)

Related to

PLC/HMI Application Software

Design specification

Good Automation Manufacturing Practice

Installation qualification

System build

UAG uses ISA S88 standard terminology for batch control and adopts the GAMP methodology for creating an automated system. The inclusion of these two standards provides major support in the task of approving and validating processes. Validation according to FDA 21CFR Part 11 regulations is simplified by UAG, as it provides: b All process information at a single point, based on functional analysis. b Automatic generation of process applications by UAG. b Archiving in compliance with FDA regulations. b A log of all interactions by UAG. b Electronic documentation. UAG tracks and documents every modification made. The version control system, in compliance with regulation FDA 21 CFR Part 11, ensures simple, straightforward validation.

6

Active collaboration Compatible with third-party tools UAG arranges existing information according to your operating objectives and constraints. Open import/export interfaces are available at every level, facilitating the connection of third-party tools at any time. This means that you can share your expertise by reusing, for example, data from your CAD tools. Total user accessibility With its multi-user environment and common language, UAG facilitates sharing among process and PLC developers, as well as maintenance engineers and operating staff. UAG ensures optimum productivity throughout your application’s entire life cycle.

6/45

6.1


Modicon Premium automation platform Unity Application Generator

Interfacing with SCADA applications UAG can openly interface with many of the SCADA systems currently available on the market. Direct integration Direct integration by UAG automatically generates the Monitor Pro V7.2 supervisory application elements, which are: b Variables with symbol and attributes. b Alarm server configuration. b Trend server configuration (real time and historical). b Mimics (graphic objects) of the devices. b Configuration of the Modbus TCP/IP communication driver. In addition, for each modification by UAG, the Monitor Pro V7.2 application is automatically updated without any conflicts or risk of disruption of added or changed elements. UAG therefore ensures data consistency between the automation control and the supervory level. This type of direct integration is also available with the iFix supervisory and control system (GE Fanuc). Open integration Open integration is based on all the UAG application information made available via XML file format. This XML file is generated by UAG and can be imported into many third-party SCADA systems, once it has been customized using the XLS style sheets specific to the third-party system. Regardless of whether direct or open integration is involved, UAG provides you with total consistency within your control, monitoring and supervision system throughout the application’s entire life.

6 6.1

6/46

6

References


6


References This specialized software program UAG (Unity Application Generator) is multilingual (available in English, French and German) and is compatible with the Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP operating systems. UAG can be used to model and generate process applications in a collaborative environment. It generates the PLC code (Unity Pro & Concept) and the elements required by the HMI monitoring system (Magelis), SCADA (Monitor Pro V7.2 or third-party supervision systems). There are two types of software license available for UAG: Medium (M) and Large (L). They are determined by the functional level of the HMI integration: b The Medium version generates HMI information using customizable XML files (XSL style sheets). b The Large version also provides customizable XML files, direct integration for Monitor Pro and iFix supervision systems featuring the generation of SCADA applications with variables and attributes, mimics (graphic objects), alarm tables and communication driver configuration. Documentation is supplied in electronic format. UAG software suites Description UAG software suites (Unity Application Generator)

Type License type Code generated Medium Single (1 machine)

Large

Reference

Weight kg UAG SEW MFUCD 21 – r

Site

UAG SEW MFFCD 21 r

–

Single (1 machine)

UAG SEW LFUCD 21 r

–

Site

UAG SEW LFFCD 21 r

–

r Available later

6 6.1

6/47

Presentation

Modicon Premium automation platform Process control Unity Pro

The 2 Unity Pro process control offers User-definable control loops This offer of user-definable control loops is integrated as standard in Atrium PCI 57 2p/3p and Premium TSX 57 2p/3p/4p/5p platforms with Unity Pro Medium, Large and Extra Large software. This offer is identical to that offered with PL7 Junior/Pro, except for the runtime screens. See page 6/49. Programmable control loops The process control offer for Premium TSX 57 4p/5p platforms with Unity Pro Large and Extra Large software has been enhanced with the new programmable offer. This offer is based around the EF and EFB function block library specific to process control. More than 30 blocks are available, classified in 6 families: b EFB blocks for data preparation (for example, DTIME, INTEGRATOR, SCALING, etc) b Controller EFB blocks (for example, AUTOTUNE, PIDFF, SAMPLETM, etc) b Math EF blocks (for example, COMP_DB, MULTIV_M, SUM_W, etc) b Measurement processing EF/EFB blocks (for example, LOOKUP_TABLR1, HYST_ppp, AVGMV, etc) b Output value processing EFB blocks (for example, PWM1, SERVO, etc) b Reference value processing EFB blocks (RAMP, RATIO, SP8SEL) These blocks manage operating modes such as tracking, manual/automatic mode and process control algorithms on cyclic values (intervals between two consecutive sampling operations). For more information on this programmable process control offer, please consult your Regional Sales Office.

6 6.1

6/48

0



0

Process control Unity Pro

User-definable process control The process control offer integrated as standard in Premium platforms can be used to set up and debug machine control-oriented control loops in Unity Pro Large and Extra Large. 4

2

1

3

User-definable process control functions TSX P57 2p4/2634/3p4/3634/454/44634/554/5634M CPUs and TSX PCI 57 204/354M slot PLCs make it possible, depending on the model, to manage between 10 and 30 process control channels (of 3 loops each). These channels can be configured to execute algorithms for industrial processes: b Cascaded loop b Process loop b Autoselective loop b Setpoint programmer b Controller with three simple loops Inputs/Outputs TSX P57 2p4/2634/3p4/3634/454/44634/554/5634M CPUs and TSX PCI 57 204/354M slot PLCs manage an entire station consisting of racks connected on Bus X. The I/O interfaces required for process control processing operations are analog or discrete channels in: b “In rack” I/O modules b TBX, Advantys STB or Momentum distributed I/O modules Control loops Software setup of the control loops is user-definable (Plug and Play technology) during configuration of the Premium CPU or Atrium slot PLC. The user enters information in the predefined loop diagrams which also integrate management of operating modes and the link with the I/O.


6/49

6 6.1

Presentation (continued), functions


Presentation TSX P57 2p4/2634/3p4/3634/454/44634/554/5634M CPUs and TSX PCI 57 204/354M slot PLCs offer the possibility of configuring 10, 15, 20 or 30 control channels for continuous or semi-continuous processes. The process control functions offered by these CPUs are particularly suitable for: b Sequential processes requiring auxiliary process control functions such as packaging machines, surface treatment machines, presses, etc b Simple processes such as metal treatment furnaces, ceramic ovens, refrigeration units b Servocontrol systems or mechanical process control where the sampling time is critical, such as torque control, speed control, etc Premium CPUs include the following characteristics: b Each configurable process control channel can be used to manage 1 to 3 loops depending on the type of loop selected b Process control processes can be inserted in the overall architecture of a site, thanks to the integration of the PLC in different communication networks b Process control-related calculations are performed in floating point arithmetic expressed in physical units Description and characteristics : TSX P57 pp4/pp34M CPUs, see pages 1/6 to 1/11; TSX PCI 57pp4M slot PLCs, see pages 1/16 to 1/20.

Functions Control loops Premium CPUs can be used to set up 10 to 30 process control channels, each adopting one of the following 5 control profiles: b Process-type loop: loop with a single controller b Controller with 3 simple loops: controller used to increase the capacity of the number of loops b Autoselective loop, also called secondary loop: consisting of 2 loops in parallel with an algorithm for selecting the output b Cascaded loop: consists of 2 dependent loops (the master loop output is the slave loop setpoint) b Setpoint programmer: consisting of a maximum of 6 composite profiles, with a total of 48 segments As the channels are independent, configuration of 10 channels can be used for example to obtain: b 30 simple loops b 5 setpoint programmers, each associated with 5 control loops b 2 setpoint programmers and 8 process loops The various loops are characterized by: b Their different algorithms b 5 processing branches (measurement, setpoint, Feed Forward, controller and output processing) b Calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc) defined using parameters Types of control loop Predefined algorithms can be defined by the user and are represented as shown below:

6 6.1

Process loop

Simple loop

Autoselective loop

Cascaded loop


6/50

0



0


Processing branches Parameter-setting (selection of the functions to be used) of the control loop profiles can be used to adapt the algorithm to the process to be controlled. Measurement processing Measurements can be processed either in the standard way or externally. b Standard processing: The user can access the following functions: filtering, setting measurement between limits, function generator with scaling, management of alarms on threshold overshoot, totalizer and simulation of the measured value. b External processing: This means there can be a process value PV at the controller input which has been processed outside the control loop. This is a handy solution if calculation of the measurement requires special or customized functions. Setpoint processing Depending on the type of loop selected, it is possible to opt for one of the following 4 types of setpoint: ratio setpoint, selection setpoint, simple setpoint (“remote” with scaling) or setpoint programmer. In the case of the controller with 3 simple loops or the secondary loop (in an autoselective loop), only the simple setpoint and the setpoint programmer can be used. Feed Forward processing Feed Forward processing can be used to compensate for a measurable disturbance as soon as it appears. This open loop processing anticipates the effect of the disturbance. It features the “Leading” function (lead/lag phase). Controller and command processing The controller can be chosen from the following 6 types: Self-tuning PID, controller in discrete mode with 2 or 3 states, hot/cool controller (PID or self-tuning model) or Split Range controller (PID or self-tuning model). Output processing There are 3 types of output which can be processed: analog output, servomotor output or PWM output. Whatever the type of output, the command calculated by the controller crosses a gradient limiter and a limiter whose upper and lower limits are used to define the output variation range.

Setpoint programmer The setpoint programmer offers a maximum of 6 profiles consisting of a total of 48 segments. It is thus possible to create various programmer/segment configurations, e.g. one programmer with 48 segments, 6 programmers with 8 segments or one programmer with 24 segments plus one programmer with 16 segments and one programmer with 8 segments, etc. Each segment is configured as either a ramp or dwell step. It is characterized by: b The setpoint to be reached b The duration of the segment or slope of the segment (if it is a ramp) A profile can be executed once, a certain number of times or looped continuously. In addition, the concept of a guaranteed dwell step means the time is only counted down if the measurement is definitely within the specified range.


6/51

6 6.1



Configuring process control channels Special screens, accessible using Unity Pro software, can be used to configure control loops. Configuring process control channels: The “Loops” interface in Premium CPUs simplifies configuration by offering simple selections from menus: b The type of loop from 5 options b The choice of functions used in the 5 processing branches b The parameters linked to each of the functions b The assignment of PLC variables to the different loop branches (memory words, input words or output words depending on the processing branch) b Automatic presymbolization of the variables used in loops

Configuring process control channels

When configuring process, simple, autoselective and cascaded loops, default parameter settings are offered. The various functions integrated in the algorithms (square root, function generator, etc) and the initial value of each parameter are predefined. Example: Configuring a process loop Once the type has been chosen, its parameters can be set by selecting or deselecting the options in the processing branches. No programming is therefore necessary, the loop diagrams are enhanced or simplified as and when the parameters are validated. Opposite, selecting the PID controller enables display of the various valid parameters for this type of controller (KP, TI, TD, etc). In the case of the setpoint programmer, the different profiles (6 maximum) are configured via a table defining each segment.

Configuring a process loop

6

After selecting the type of segment (ramp or dwell step), its configuration consists of defining the setpoint to be reached (with the ramp) and the duration (for the ramp or dwell step). As selections are made, the bottom of the screen displays the profile with the setpoint limit values. This screen can also be used to define the cycles for this profile: execution once, a certain number of times or looped continuously (32,767 times maximum).

6.1 Executing process control channels The sampling period for the loops is predefined at 300 ms. This defines the controller processing period in automatic mode. It is possible to modify this period in the loop configuration screen. All the I/O and the parameters of the various configured process control channels can be accessed by the user at program level or via the various Unity Pro software tools (especially language editors and animation tables). Defining profile cycles


6/52

0



0


Debugging functions Adjusting and debugging control loops is simple and user-friendly via, for example, the application-specific loop configuration screen which, in online mode, provides access to the following functions: b Display and animation of the loop algorithm diagram b Display of process alarms and channel faults b Simulation of the input interface values: for example when these are not connected (measurement, Feed Forward) b Addition, deletion or replacement of calculation functions in online mode b Modification of the adjustment parameters for each of the functions b Modification of the controller operating modes and manual control mode With the controllers integrated in the control loops, it is possible to use the autotuning function which calculates a set of adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td or Ks, T1, T-delay) on request. Once the loop has been debugged, it is possible to save the current values resulting from the tests in the initial loop parameters values. This means that, on restarting the loop, it will start off with the correct values. Debugging a loop The debug screen can be used to: b Display the values of the variables linked to the loop in real time b Know which parameters have been selected (and even modify them) b Display alarms The menus can be used for manual control of the loop, autotuning, parameter backup, etc.

6 Debugging a loop

6.1

Debugging the setpoint programmer The setpoint programmer channels have their own debug screen which can be used to display: b The number of the active segment and the iteration b The execution time for the active segment b The overall execution time

Debugging the setpoint programmer


6/53

Selection guide

Modicon Premium automation platform PL7 software

PL7 programming software

6

6.2

Languages

Instruction List (IL) Ladder (LD) Structured Text (ST) Grafcet (SFC) Grafcet with macro-steps (SFC)

M M M M

A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M A-P

A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M A-P

Programming services

Multitask programming (master, fast and event-triggered) Functional view and function modules DFB editor Use of DFB instances EF function libraries Configurable control loops User-definable control loops Warm Standby PLC redundancy system System diagnostics Application diagnostics

M

A-P-M

A-P-M A-P A-P A-P A-P-M A-P-M A - P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p) P (TSX P57 353/453M) A-P-M A-P-M

M M

A-P A-P-M A-P-M A - P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p)

M

A-P-M

Debugging and Step by step execution, breakpoint display Runtime screens services Diagnostic viewers

M

A-P-M

A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M

Other services PL7 2 application converters PL7 3 and Orphee application converters Utilities for updating PLC operating systems Communication drivers for Windows 2000/XP

M

A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M

A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M A-P-M

Compatible Modicon platforms

Atrium slot-PLCs A

–

Premium CPUs P

–

TSX Micro PLCs M

TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22

T PCX 57 2p T PCX 57 3p TSX P57 1p TSX P57 2p TSX P57 3p TSX P57 4p TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22

T PCX 57 2p T PCX 57 3p TSX P57 1p TSX P57 2p TSX P57 3p TSX P57 4p TSX 37 05/08/10/21/22

Software name

PL7 Micro

PL7 Junior

PL7 Pro

Unity Pro software type

TLX CDp PL7M p44M

TLX CDp PL7J p44M

TLX CDp PL7J p44P

Pages

6/70 and 6/71

6/54

M M

0

0

EF function development software in Development of applications in C C language language

Comparison of PL7 applications

Availability of control systems based on Premium platforms

Enhancement of EF function block libraries: v Creation of families v Development of functions in C language v Access to math calculation functions in floating point format v Debugging functions (step by step, breakpoint) v Use of functions created in all languages

Automatic comparison of 2 Premium applications with identification of all differences.

Continuity of operation in a Premium redundant PLC architecture. Provides access to shared I/O on the Fipio bus or redundant I/O. Typical “Normal/Standby” switching time: 1 to 2 s

Development for processing process applications using fuzzy logic: v 25 linguistic rules for redefining expert knowledge using conditions/conclusions (If...Then) v Description of membership functions

Requires PL7 Pro software

Screens for simulation in offline mode and debugging in online mode.

Supplied with Microsoft Visual C++

6 Compatible with: v PL7 Pro v All Atrium slot-PLCs v All TSX Micro/Premium CPUs

Compatible with: v PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro v All Atrium slot-PLCs v All TSX Micro/Premium Unity CPUs

Compatible with: v PL7 Pro v All Atrium slot-PLCs v All TSX Micro/Premium CPUs

Compatible with: v PL7 Pro v TSX P57 353/453M CPUs

SDK C

PL7 FUZ

PL7 DIF

Warm Standby

TLX SDKC PL7 41M

TLX L PL7 FUZ 34M

TLX CDp PL7 DIF 41

TLX CDp WSBY P40F

6/73

6/75

6/77

6/66

6.2

6/55


Presentation

6

PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software

Presentation PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software packages are designed for Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP (1) operating systems and therefore benefit from all the facilities relating to these. PL7 version 4.4 enables new TSX Micro/Premium modules to take advantage of additional functionalities: b PL7 software registrations by the Internet, electronic mail, fax or phone (obligatory registration before 22nd day). b Change in the Fipio catalogue for Momentum distributed I/O. b Transfer of PL7 user rights between PCs via floppy disk or network. b Enriched export files of the data application (FEF) for better compatibility with Unity software after migration. PL7 Micro Junior/Pro software packages are offered according to two alternatives depending on the type of PLCs/PC cable: connection on the RS 232C port, or the USB port of a PC. Ergonomics of the software More user-friendly and productive ergonomics thanks to: b Access to contextual menus by right-clicking with the mouse for fast access to the services available for the select ed object. b Contextual help: direct access to help correspondingto the selected object. b Tool tips: explanatory messages appear when skimming over the toolbar buttons. Furthermore, some important functions make the software easier and safer to use: Multi-instance The multi-instance function enables several applications to be worked on simultaneously. This function enables: b Several different applications present on the PC to be opened in offline mode in order to check or copy data. b Debugging of two (or more) applications on two PLCs present on the same network in on-line mode. This is particularly useful when debugging inter-PLC communication functions.

6

Management of access rights Use of the various PL7 software functions can be limited and controlled by managing the access rights. There are 5 user profiles (differentiated by passwords) which characterize the functions available to users on the programming terminal. The profiles range from read-only access to an application (lowest profile) to full programming (profile with the most rights).

6.2

Application server

Terminal PC Serveur

OLE Automation

Applicatifs Client

OLE Automation

Terminal PC Client

PL7

PL7 Pro software can be launched in OLE Automation server mode from a third-party client application. In this case, certain PL7 program functions can be executed following commands sent by an OLE client application. This instance of the program then no longer reacts to commands from the operator keyboard. Server mode can be launched in offline mode (COM) if both programs are on the same machine, or in remote mode (DCOM), if the programs are installed on different machines. The commands available are as follows: b Manage an execution context (open/close an application, modification of the address and driver of the connected PLC; PLC status). b Control the PLC (connection/disconnection, send a RUN/STOP/INIT command, program uploading/downloading). b Read data (application or symbol export only in source format, read symbol/comment associated with an address, read application identity).

Fipway

Premium

TSX Micro

(1) However, compatibility with the Windows 95 operating system is no longer provided and USB port is not compatible with Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0.

6/56


Setup

6


Application creation and debug tools Application browser (conventional view) Access to all programming and debug tools is gained via the application browser. This gives a global view of the program and enables all the application components to be accessed quickly via contextual menus.

1

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

3

Configuration editor. Program editor. DFB user function block editor. Variable editor. Animation table editor. Documentation editor. Operating screen editor.

4

Concept of sections and Grafcet enhancement In order to make programs more comprehensible, the FAST and MAST tasks are split into sections. Each section 1 has a name, a comment and is programmed in one of the four languages available in PL7. A section programmed in Grafcet language can contain a main chart 2 and macro-steps 3. Version u V4.0 of PL7 allows comments to be added to each macro-step. To protect intellectual property or avoid any unwarranted modification, each section can be write-protected or read/write-protected.

5 6 7

Function views of an application 1 2 3

PL7 Pro software can be used to structure an application for a Premium platform into functional modules that are broken down into sections (program code), animation tables and operating screens. Independently of the multitask structure of the PLC, the designer can define a multilevel tree structure of the automation application. At each level, it is possible to attach program sections written in Ladder language (LD), Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Grafcet (SFC), and animation tables. Two types of view are available at all times: b A representation showing a tree structure of modules can provide a breakdown according to consistent functions in relation to the process to control. b The classic representation of the application browser provides a view of the execution order of the program sections for each PLC. The operation services associated with the functional view are available in one or the other view. In particular, a single command can be used to force whether or not a functional module is executed. In this case, every section attached to the functional module is automatically forced.

Exporting/importing functional modules

All or part of the tree structure can be exported into functional modules. In this case, all program sections of the different module levels are exported. During an import, an assistant can be used to reassign the data associated with the module in stages.

9/57

6

6.2

Setup (continued)

Modicon Premium automation platform PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software

Configuration editor Hardware configuration The configuration editor intuitively and graphically enables the declaration and configuration of the various components of the TSX Micro/Premium PLC application: b Processor, coprocessor. b Tasks. b Application-specific I/O modules. b Memory. b ... By clicking on an unconfigured position, the display of a dialog box shows the available I/O modules, classed according to family. Once the various modules are positioned, selecting them accesses parameter entry for each module. Software configuration The configuration editor can also be used to set the software parameters of the application: choice of the number of constants, number of internal words and the number of each type of function block. The configuration editor provides access to parameter entry for the function blocks. The copy/paste function for these parameters is available from version u V4.0 of the PL7 software onwards. Configuration of Grafcet objects When programming in Grafcet language, the configuration editor can define Grafcet objects (steps, macro-steps, etc.) and execution parameters (number of steps and active transitions). Setup of application-specific functions A number of tools are provided as standard for setting up the various applications: discrete I/O, analog I/O, counting, motion control (1), man-machine interface (MMI), communication, weighing (1), Warm Standby redundancy (2). The parameter screens for the application-specific functions are accessed from the I/O configuration screen by clicking on the position in which the module has been defined. The screens enable the main operating characteristics of the chosen application to be defined, for example:

6

b b b b b b

6.2

Filter values for discrete I/O. Voltage or current range for analog I/O. Threshold values for counting. Path of axes for position control. Calibration change during weighing. Transmission speed for communication.

(1) PL7 Junior/Pro function available on a Premium platform. (2) PL7 Junior/Pro function available on a Premium platform based on a TSX P57 353/453 processor (version with integrated Fipio link).

6/58

6


Software structure

6


Software structure PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers two types of structure: b Single task: this is the simplified structure offered by default, where a single master task consisting of a main program, comprising several sections and subroutines, is executed. b Multitask: this structure, which is better suited to high-performance real-time applications, consists of a master task, a fast task and event-triggered tasks, which have the highest priority. Master and fast tasks are divided into sections. Structured and modular programming Mast

Fast

Sas(LD)

Alarm_Sas(LD)

Furnace_1(Grafcet)

Safety_Mon(LD)

PL7 program tasks comprise several parts called sections and subroutines. Each section can be programmed in the appropriate language for the processing to be carried out. Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program modules can easily be generated or added.

Alarm_Furnace(ST)

PRE(LD) CHART

Alarm_Cleaning(ST)

POST(IL) SR0

SR0

Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from other subroutines in the same task.

Cleaning(ST)

Simple task software structure There are two types of cyclic execution: b Normal cyclic execution. This is the default option. b Periodic execution. This type of execution, as well as the period, are selected by the user during configuration. Normal execution (cyclic) Internal processing Input acquisition (%I)

RUN

STOP

Program processing

At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches the execution of a new scan. The execution time of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value is defined by the user.

6

In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing: b The scan to stop immediately (STOP). b A display on the front panel of the PLC. b The alarm relay of the main rack power supply to be set to 0.

Update of outputs (%O)

6.2 Periodic execution Launch of the period Input acquisition (%I)

RUN

STOP

Program processing

A new scan is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the scan must be less than the time of the period defined (1 to 255 ms). In the event of overrun, the latter is stored in a system bit (%S19), which can be set to 0 by the user (by program or by the terminal). A software watchdog which can be configured by the user monitors the scan time. In the event of overrun, an execution fault is signaled (see normal execution).

Update of outputs (%O) Internal processing End of period

9/59

Software structure (continued) Modicon Premium automation

platform

6


Multitask software structure PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a Multitask software structure, consisting of: b A master task (divided into sections, one of which may contain Grafcet). b A fast task (divided into sections). b One or more event-triggered tasks (only one section per task). These tasks are independent and are executed in "parallel", with the PLC processor managing the execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast task cycle: b The current execution of lower priority tasks is stopped. b The event-triggered task or the fast task is executed. b The interrupted task takes over again when processing of the priority task is completed. Fast task Event triggered tasks

Master task

Alarm_Sas(LD)

Sas(LD)

Safety_Mon(LD)

Furnace_1(LD) PRE(LD)

Alarm_Furnace(ST) Alarm_Cleaning(ST)

SR0

CHART POST(IL)

SR0

Drying(LD) Priority + ... –

This structure can optimize use of the processing power, and can be used to structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as it is possible to write and debug each task independently of the others. Master task This compulsory task, which executes the main program, is periodic or cyclic (see single task structures). It is activated systematically. It is intended for sequential processing. Each section can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language. One section is dedicated to Grafcet language; when this language is chosen, 3 processing operations are proposed: b Preliminary processing (PRE) is programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language and processes initializations on power return, operating mode modifications, input logic. b Sequential processing (CHART) includes the graphic transcription and management of Grafcet charts. It provides access to processing of the actions and transition conditions. b Post-processing (POST). This is programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language and is used to process all the instructions from the 2 preceding processing operations and the indirect safety functions specific to the outputs.

6

6.2

Fast task This task, which is higher priority than the master task, is periodic in order to leave time for execution of the lower priority task. Processing operations in this task must be as short as possible so as not to adversely affect the master task. It is useful when fast periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored. Each section of this task can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language. Event triggered tasks Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to a period. Their execution is triggered by an event occurring in an application-specific module (eg.: overrun of a counter threshold, change in state of a discrete input). These tasks have higher priority than all other tasks, and they are therefore suitable for processing operations requiring very short response times to the occurrence of an event. They can be programmed in Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List language. Number of EVTi control events: b TSX Micro PLCs: 8 events with TSX 37 10 and 16 events with TSX 37 21/22. b Premium PLCs: 32 events with TSX 57 10 and 64 events with TSX 57 20/30/40 and PCX 57 20/30. TSX Micro TSX 37 21/22 and Premium PLCs have 2 priority levels (EVT0 event has priority over other EVTi events).

6/60

Ladder language, structured text language


6


Ladder language (LD) Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered task) Programs written in Ladder language consist of a series of rungs which are executed sequentially by the PLC. Each rung may be: b Identified by a label. b Completed by a comment of up to 222 characters. A rung consists of 7 lines on TSX Micro and 16 lines on Premium, with 11 columns, allowing a maximum of 10 contacts and one coil per line. Program editor: Ladder language The Ladder language editor offers several tools for constructing rungs in a userfriendly way: b A palette of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols of the language via the mouse or the keyboard: contacts, Boolean logic, coils, operation blocks, predefined function blocks…

b A rung can be drawn without having to fill in each element. b The language objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format. b The symbol and address of each object can be displayed simultaneously. b A rung is constructed simply by selecting the symbol from the graphic palette and placing it in the correct position in the grid on-screen. b An automatic link line function optimizes the number of user actions. The Ladder language editor is used to call up immediately the functions which assist data entry: b Access to function libraries. b Access to the variables editor. b Cut, copy, paste.

Structured Text language (ST) Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language which is particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations, message handling, etc.

6

Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered task) Structured Text language enables direct transcription of a flowchart analysis and is organized into statements. Each statement consists of a label (1000 labels max), comments (256 characters max) and instructions. There are four methods for controlling statements: b Conditional action IF. b Conditional iterative action WHILE (action repeated while a condition is true). b Conditional iterative action REPEAT (action repeated until a condition is true). b Repetitive action FOR (action repeated a certain number of times). Program editor: Structured Text language The editor enables statements to be entered one after another. The editor provides help with entering: b Modifications, insertion, etc. b Cut, copy, paste. Objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format. Different colors are used for the objects, language key words and program comments to make it easier to read.

9/61

6.2

Grafcet language, Instruction List language


6


TSX Micro PLC b 96 steps maximum (2) on 8 pages for TSX 37-10 and 128 steps for TSX 37-21/22 b 1024 transitions maximum (2) b 11 elements maximum per divergence/convergence

Premium PLC b maximum of 250 steps (2) on 8 pages b 64 macro-steps of 250 steps. b A "generic" comment can be associated with each macro-step b 1024 transitions maximum (2) b 11 elements maximum per divergence/ convergence b 1024 steps maximum in the application

Grafcet language (SFC) Grafcet language is used to describe, in a simple and graphic manner, the sequential part of control systems. It corresponds to the SFC "sequential function chart" language described in standard IEC 1131-3. Structure of the section in the master task Grafcet SFC language is only used in one section of the master task. This is structured in three processing operations, see page 6/60. Programs written in Grafcet SFC language consist of: b Macro-steps (1) which are the only representation of a set of steps and a transition. b Steps, with which the actions to be executed are associated. b Transitions, with which the conditions are associated (transition conditions). b Directed links, connecting the steps and transitions. See characteristics page 6/68. The actions (continual, pulsed on activation or deactivation) and transition conditions can be programmed in the desired language: Ladder, Structured Text or Instruction List. Program editor: Grafcet SFC language The editor offers 8 pages, each consisting of 11 columns and 14 lines, giving 154 cells per page. A palette of graphic objects is used for direct access to each graphic symbol (macro-steps, steps, transitions, sequence selection, simultaneous activation/ deactivation and connectors). Programming of the transition conditions and actions is performed simply by clicking on the required chart element. On a Grafcet page, comments of up to 64 characters can be entered in any cell. Functions which assist entry: cut, copy, paste, etc. are available to the user.

Instruction List language (IL) Instruction List language is a language representing, in the form of text, the equivalent of a Ladder diagram. It is used for writing Boolean equations and making use of the functions available in the language.

6

Program structure (section, SR or event-triggered tasks) A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions from the following different families: b Bit instructions, for example read input n° 3: LD %I1.3. b Instructions on function blocks, for example start timer n° 0: IN %TM0. b Numerical instructions on single, double and floating point integers, for example, perform an addition: [%MW10:= %MW50 + 100]. b Instructions on word tables, character strings, for example, perform an assignment: [%MW10:10:=%KW50:10]. b Program instructions, for example, call subroutine n° 10: SR10. Each instruction is composed of an instruction code and a bit or word type operand.

6.2

Program editor: Instruction List language As in Ladder language, instructions are organized into sequences of instructions (equivalent to a rung). Each sequence of instructions can be identified by a label %Li, with i being from 0 to 999 and accompanied by a comment of 222 characters maximum. Each sequence of instructions is composed of one or more test instructions. The result of these instructions is applied to one or more action instructions. Objects can be entered and displayed in either symbol or address format. The editor provides help with entering data. (1) With Premium PLCs only.

6/62

Functions


6


Functions User DFB function blocks PL7 Pro software offers the user the possibility (for Premium PLCs) of creating their own function blocks which meet the particular needs of their applications. Once they have been created in the library, these function blocks can be used with PL7 Junior/Pro software. These user function blocks enable an application to be structured. They are used as soon as a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or to freeze a standard type of programming. They can be exported to all other PL7 applications. Using a DFB function block in one or more applications enables: b Simplification of program entry and design. b Improved program readability. b Easier debugging (all variables handled by the DFB function block are identified on its interface). b Use of DFB-specific internal variables (independent of the application). A DFB derived function block is set up in three phases: b Design of the DFB which has a name, parameters (I/O), variables and code in Structured Text or ladder language. b Creation of a DFB instance in the variables editor or when calling the function in the program editor. b Using this instance in the program in the same way as a standard function block. Main characteristics Inputs Outputs Inputs/outputs Public internal variables

16 max. (1) 16 max. (2) 16 max. (1) (2) 1000 (can be accessed via the application program)

Private internal variables 1000 (cannot be accessed via the application program) Comment 322 characters max. Program sections One section in one of the 2 languages (ST, LD). (1) The maximum cumulative total of inputs and inputs/outputs is 16. (2) The maximum cumulative total of outputs and inputs/outputs is 16.

Variables editor The variables editor is used to: b Symbolize the various application objects (bits, words, function blocks, I/O, …). b Define the parameters of the predefined function blocks (timers, counters, registers etc.). b Enter the values of the constants and select the display base (decimal, binary, hexadecimal, floating point, message). b Define the DFB user function block parameters. Each symbol (32 characters max, accented characters are permitted) can be accompanied by a comment (508 characters max). Editing services are available in the editor: b Find/replace an object in a part of the program or in a set of function modules (PL7 Pro). b Find a character string in a list of symbols or comments. Version u V4.0 of PL7 offers enhanced functions due to: b Copy/paste function for one or more symbol(s) and comments. b Display in plain language of the overlap of different types of variable on a single memory address (for example, single and double format internal words, %MW0/%MD0). b Highlighting of objects used by the application program. b Opening the application variable database to third-party tools by importing/exporting text files (.txt). This new function makes it possible to create/modify application databases using a third-party software (for example TSX Microsoft Excel) that has extended edit functions. v For each numerical variable, it is possible to select the display base (decimal, binary, hexadecimal, floating point, ASCII message). Version u V4.0 of PL7 offers new options for animation tables: b Display of the comment associated with variables. b Assignment of a single value to a number of variables. b Change of display format for a number of variables. b Display of the list of forced bits.

9/63

6

6.2



Animation table Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by entering them or automatically initialized from the selected phrase or rung. Variables can then be: b Modified. b Forced to 0 or 1 for bit objects. For each numerical variable, it is possible to select the display base (decimal, binary, hexadecimal, floating point, ASCII message). Version u V4.0 of PL7 offers new options for animation tables: b Display of the comment associated with variables. b Assignment of a single value to a number of variables. b Change of display format for a number of variables. b Display of the list of forced bits. Documentation editor The documentation editor is built around the Documentation Browser which displays the contents of the documentation file in a tree structure. It can be used to print all or part of the application documentation file on any graphic printer which can be accessed in Windows and uses True Type technology, in A4 or US letter print formats. The documentation editor is used to define: b A title page, including the name of the designer and project. b General information pages. b A footer.

The documentation editor automatically generates: b The contents. b The application documentation file: hardware and software configuration, program with its comments (including those relating to the macro-steps and subroutines). b The list of variables sorted by address or symbol. b The cross-references, sorted by address or symbol.

6

Runtime screens The runtime screen tool is integrated in PL7 Pro software (creation and use of screens). It is intended in particular, for debugging when starting up installations and for diagnostics on faults or malfunctions.

6.2

It comprises data (explanatory texts, dynamic values, synoptics, etc.) and enables a simple and fast action (modification and dynamic monitoring of PLC variables). The editor enables the design of these screens using the following tools: b Screen: creation of runtime screens, which can be classed according to family. b Message: creation of messages used. b Objects: creation of a graphic objects library.

When the station is connected to the PLC, the user can display screens dynamically depending on the state of the process. Screen sequencing is possible, depending on the attributed priority, via either the keyboard or PLC request. In online mode, runtime screens enable direct access to the PL7 program from synoptics by simply clicking on the selected object. It is also possible to activate the animation table functions or cross references once one or more variables have been selected on the screen. Version u V4.0 of PL7 software also enables character string type objects to be displayed. Synoptics can be displayed on the full screen for ease of viewing.

6/64

6



6


Debugging tools PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions: b Setting stop points. b Step by step program execution. b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST) and event-triggered (EVTi) tasks.

Animation of program elements Parts of the program are animated directly when the TSX Micro/Premium PLC is in RUN (rung, Structured Text statement or sequence of instructions in Instruction List language) by activating the PL7 animation function. Animation is used to display the status of program variables, whatever the language used. The animation can be frozen. Several windows can be displayed and animated simultaneously. Animation tables Tables containing the application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by entering them or automatically initialized from the selected program part. Variables can then be modified, forced to 0 or to 1 for bit objects. These tables can be stored in the application and therefore retrieved at a later date. Debugging the DFBs b Animation table: all public parameters and variables are displayed and animated in real time. It is possible to modify and force the desired objects. b As for the rest of the program, it is possible to use the following functions: breakpoint, step-by-step and program diagnostics. Grafcet debugging In online mode, the browser gives a hierarchical view of the chart with CHART module and macro-step nesting. Animation is characterized by the presence or absence of indicator colors. The Grafcet debug bar: b Displays the state of the chart. b Modifies the state of the chart. b Gives information on the state of the Master task. Debugging the application-specific functions The debug screens for the application-specific functions are accessed from the I/O configuration screen by clicking on the position in which the module has been defined, when the terminal is in online mode. These screens are used for: b Displaying and modifying the state of the I/O. b Forcing the I/O. b Displaying and modifying the current values. b ... Diagnostics The debug screens provide access to the general module or channel diagnostics. These screens identify: Internal module faults. b External faults from the application. b E.g.: range overrun fault for an analog module. With version u V4.0 of PL7 software, the Premium platform system diagnostics are extended. It is possible to monitor system bits and words as well as to display associated time-stamped messages automatically, without the need for additional programming. This monitoring applies to the system elements (processor, memory,tasks, …), in-rack I/O and remote I/O on the Fipio bus.

9/65

6

6.2



PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Integrated diagnostics .

Presentation Integrated diagnostics in Premium automation platforms System diagnostics

Display viewers

Monitor Pro Processor System bits and words

In-rack I/O modules

Remote I/O modules on Fipio

Higher level M.E.S

Ethernet

Cell level

Application diagnostics Magelis XBT/T XBT

Machine level Viewer

CCX 17

The diagnostic offer of Premium platform is built on threeelements: b System diagnostic. b Diagnostic DFBs function blocks (system and application). b Display system of fault messages named viewers. This viewer function is included as standard PL7 Pro, Vijeo Look, Monitor Pro softwares and CCX 17, Magelis dialog terminals.

6

Functions System diagnostics With version V4 of PL7 software, the Premium platform system diagnostics has been enhanced by the monitoring of system bits/words and I/O (in-rack and remote via the Fipio bus). All events automatically display time and date-stamped messages, without any additional programming, using one of the display units (1). The diagnostic functions integrated in PL7 Junior/Pro software can be used for 1st level diagnostics of the configuration elements, and are effective for every module up to channel level.

6.2

Configuration level Module level

Viewer window (example with PL7 Pro software) Channel level (1) Viewers function is included as standard PL7 Pro, Vijeo Look, Monitor Pro software and CCX 17, Magelis dialog terminals see page 6/67.

6/66

6



6

PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro programming software Integrated diagnostics

Functions (continued) Application diagnostics PL7 Pro software has an integrated function block library containing monitoring function blocks known as Diagnostic DFBs. The Diagnostic DFB library comprises: System diagnostic manufacturer blocks: b IO_DIA input/output fault. It can be used to monitor the state of the inputs/outputs. b ASI_DIA checks for the appearance of any errors on the AS-Interface bus (module or bus fault, slave missing, slave not configured or faulty). Application diagnostic manufacturer blocks: b EV_DIA checks that an event (state of a bit) takes the correct value at the expected time (no notion of time). b MV_DIA checks the requested movement (change in the state of a bit) due to occur in a preset time period. b ALRM_DIA monitors the state of a bit (at 1 or 0). b NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA can be used to monitor, control and diagnose the elements of the operating part created by wiring 2 preactuators and 2 sensors in conjunction. Open diagnostic blocks:

Usrst_dia Inputs

ED ERROR

COND

Outputs

STATUS AREA_NR OP_CTRL

These offer users the option of creating their own diagnostic function blocks to meet the specific requirements of their applications, thus complementing the manufacturer DFBs described above. They are created using 2 model blocks written in Ladder or Structured Text language. The following can be created simultaneously in one application: b a maximum of 26 types of system diagnostic DFBs b a maximum of 26 types of application diagnostic DFBs. Viewers The diagnostic events processed by the Premium PLC using the diagnostic DFBs are stored in a buffer (memory space for data specific to the Premium PLC). The information contained in this PLC buffer is sent transparently for the user to the viewers and can be displayed automatically and used to handle errors and alarms. The viewer function is included as standard in: b b b b

PL7 Pro programming software CCX 17 version > V 2.5 operator panels Magelis XBT-F graphic terminals Monitor Pro supervisor version V7.0.

The Premium platform has a multi-viewer option (link to a maximum of 15 viewers). A PC compatible station with the viewer function can be connected to several PLCs (link via X-Way communication to a maximum of 15 Premium platforms). This buffer/viewer structure offers:

*ACTIVE ALARMS: 011 * 002 03/04/97 11:07:54_NEPO_ACK Fault in left motor N° 3 +
V Status V Return

1 2

6

b A single point for managing faults per application b Time and date-stamping at source of the appearance of faults b Memorisation of transient faults b Independence from the viewer functions. The frame transmitted from the PLC buffer is identical for all viewers. Composition of messages: Each line displayed by the viewer represents a fault with, depending on the display capacity: state, type of DFB, geographical zone, dates and times of appearance/disappearance, associated message and status. 1 Viewer window on PL7 Pro screen. Viewer screen on CCX 17 operator panel.

9/67

6.2



Variable cross-references For every variable, this function can be used to: b Search for program modules where this variable is used. b Obtain the list of statements, rungs or expressions. b Display and check activation conditions. A log is used to keep track of this navigation. Options relating to the variable, can be associated with the search (extract bit, table object, function block elements, network object, etc.). This function can be initialized from the program or runtime screens.

Application converters PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro software includes application converters which make it possible to reuse in full or in part, applications already written in: b PL7 2, applications for TSX 17, TSX 27 or TSX 47 10/20/25 PLCs. b PL7 3 (1), applications for TSX/PMX 47...TSX/PMX 107 PLCs. b ORPHEE (1), applications for April Series 1000 PLCs. The converters offer the following utilities: b Translation of language objects into the new PL7 syntax with retrieval of associated symbols and comments. b Possibility of manually reassigning objects. b Configuration check: the tool checks whether the configuration resources required by the program to be converted are compatible with the configuration of the destination application. b Conversion (1) with generation of source files (Ladder, Structured Text or Grafcet) in PL7 Junior/Pro format. b Conversion ensures that instructions which are translated are functionally identical to the original program. b A translation report gives a summary: v result of the conversion with the cause of non-translation where possible, v correspondence of variables in PL7 with original variables. (1) Function or functionality requiring PL7 Junior/Pro software.

6

6.2

6/68

6


Selection

6


X-Way communication drivers The communication drivers (Uni-Telway COM port ans USB port, PC side) are available in the PL7 software CD-Rom. Depending on needs, another drivers can be be installed from TLX CD DRV20M CD-Rom (to order separately). See following table. Type of drivers

Windows XP Windows 2000 V1.6 IE17 V1.3 IE05 V1.2 IE03 V1.1 IE04 V1.1 IE02 V1.2 IE04 V1.0 IE06 V1.7 IE13 V1.1 IE06 Inclus PL7

Uni-Telway TSX FPC10 TSX FPC20 TSX SCP 114 Ethway ISAway PCIway XIP Modbus USB for mini-DIN terminal port USB for USB terminal port V1.0 IE14

Windows NT

Windows 95

OS/2

DOS


Windows 98 Millenium V1.6 IE17 V1.3 IE05 V1.2 IE04 V1.1 IE04 V2.6 IE06 V1.2 IE04 – V1.7 IE13 V1.1 IE06 –


– V2.4 IE13 V1.5 IE05 – V2.6 IE22 – – – – –

V7.4 IE14 V2.2 IE11 – – – – – – – –

–

–

–

–

–

References Multilingual software packages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian) for PC compatibles (1) equipped with Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows Millennium, Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP operating systems. For one station, these packages comprise: b A CD-ROM supporting the PL7 multilingual software, the PL7 demonstration applications and the terminal link Uni-Telway driver. b A cable reference TSX PCU 1031, PC compatible with TSX Micro/Premium PLC (length 2.5 m). Not supplied with software upgrade or update packages and PL7 software licenses. b Two CD-ROMs containing multilingual technical documentation. b A CD-ROM containing the TSX Micro/Premium platform operating systems. For packages for 3 stations, the above quantities are multiplied by three. For software licenses, TSX PCX 1031 cables must be ordered separately, according to the required number of users. All documentation reference (software setup manuals) reference TLX DOC PL7 43F should be ordered separately.

6

(1) Typical recommended configuration: Pentium processor, 266 MHz, 128 Mb of RAM memory, CD-ROM drive for installation of the PL7 program, VGA screen or above.

6.2

9/69

References


6


PL7 Micro software packages PL7 Micro software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder, Structured Text and Grafcet language. It can also be used to set up application-specific functions and perform maintenance and diagnostics of the developed applications. It includes the PL7 2 application converter. Description

For PLC

PL7 Micro TSX Micro software packages

PL7 Micro and TSX Micro SyCon V2.8 software package

Type of device and update Single (1 station)

Reference (1) TLX CD PL7M p44M

Weight kg –

Group (3 stations)

TLX CD3 PL7M p44M

–

Single (1 station)

TLX CD PL7M PC44M

–

Single (1 station)

TLX RCD PL7M P 44M

–

Group (3 stations)

TLX RCD3 PL7M P 44M

–

Single (1 station)

TLX RCD PL7M PC44M

–

Mises à jour logiciels PL7 Micro Software updates TSX Micro for previous version of PL7 Micro

Software update for previous version of PL7 Micro supplied with SyCon V2.8

TSX Micro

PL7 junior software packages PL7 Junior software enables programming in Instruction List, Ladder, Structured Text and Grafcet languages. It can also be used to set up application-specific functions and perform maintenance and diagnostics of the developed applications. It includes the PL7 2, PL7 3 and ORPHEE application converters.

6

Description

For PLCs

Single (1 station)

Reference (1) TLX CD PL7J p44M

Group (3 stations)

TLX CD3 PL7J p44M

–

Software updates TSX Micro, for previous Premium, version of Atrium PCX PL7 Junior

Single (1 station)

TLX RCD PL7J P44M

–

Group (3 stations)

TLX RCD3 PL7J P44M

–

Software upgrade TSX Micro, packages from Premium, previous version of Atrium PCX PL7 TSX Micro

Single (1 station)

TLX UCD PL7J P44M

–

Group (3 stations)

TLX UCD3 PL7J P44M

–

PL7 Junior TSX Micro, software packages Premium, Atrium PCX

6.2

Type

(1) p in reference, defines the type of connecting cable PC/PLC (length 2.5 m) v P: TSX PCX 1031 cable for RS 232C port of PC, v PU: TSX PCX 3030 cable for USB port of PC.

6/70

Weight kg –



6


Ensembles logiciels PL7 Pro Functions on PL7 Pro software are identical to those on PL7 Junior software. It also offers the user thepossibility of creating his own function blocks (DFBs) and graphic runtime screens. Description

For PLCs

Type

TSX Micro, Premium, Atrium PCX

Single (1 station)

Reference (1) TLX CD PL7P p44M

Group (3 stations)

TLX CD3 PL7P p44M

–

Single (1 station)

TLX RCD PL7P P44M

–

Group (3 stations)

TLX RCD3 PL7P P44M

–

Single (1 station)

TLX UCD PL7P P44M

–

Group (3 stations)

TLX UCD3 PL7P P44M

–

Type

Reference

PL7 TSX Micro Open Team TSX Micro software license

Team (10 stations) (2)

TLX OT PL7M P44M

Weight kg –

PL7 Pro Open Team software license


Team (10 stations) (2)

TLX OT PL7P P44M

–

PL7 Pro Open Site software license


Site > 10 stations (2)

TLX OS PL7P P44M

–

PL7 Pro Servi software license


Client/server network TLX S PL7P P44M architecture server device. Use of the PL7 Pro via client station (Thin client) on network and with access rights.

PL7 Pro software package

Software updates for previous version of PL7 Pro


Software upgrade packages from previous versions of PL7 Junior


Weight kg –

PL7 Micro/Pro software licenses Description

For PLCs

–

Separated elements Description

Use

Reference

X-Way drivers package for Includes all X-Way drivers (voir page 6/67) compatible PC Includes multilingual user documentation. Description Universal terminal port cable

TLX CD DRV20M

Weight kg –

Used from processor

to PC port

Length

Reference

Mini-DIN port TSX Micro/Premium

RS 232D (15-way SUB-D connector)

2.5 m

TSX PCX 1031

Weight kg 0.170

USB Port

2.5 m

TSX PCX 3030

0.150

6.2

TSX PCX 1031 Description Set of manuals PL7 software (in english)

6

Description

Reference

Hard copy including PL7 reference manuals, functions, communication, converters and diagnostics

TLX DOC PL7 44E

Weight kg 3.410

(1) p in reference, defines the type of connecting cable PC/PLC (length 2.5 m) v P: TSX PCX 1031 cable for RS 232C port of PC, v PU: TSX PCX 3030 cable for USB port of PC. (2) Team user stations from the same geographical site.

9/71

Presentation, setup

Modicon Premium automation platform SDKC software

Presentation C language function development software, also called SDKC, is a PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro software option. It enables new functions to be developed (internal code written in C language) and extends and completes the standard set of functions offered by PL7 software. SDKC software also integrates a creation and management service for families of functions, so they can be integrated in the PL7 library. Finally, it can be used to generate the function which ensures the protection of PL7 applications by reading a signature in the PCMCIA card inserted in the PLC.

Setup C language development software is a genuine tool for managing the entire function which has been created: b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in PL7, with automatic file organisation. b Powerful debug and test tools. b Management of compatibility and software version for the functions created. b Generation of disks for the subsequent installation of functions on other development stations. Management of function families The software enables different function families to be defined. These functions, also known as EF, are classed according to family, allowing the user to create a sequential library of functions written in C language. These functions, which will eventually form a part of the PL7 library, can be: b Used in all languages. b Displayed by the PL7 library tool. b Classed according to family/function. The user has the following data at his disposal: b Date of creation and generation of the function. b The version number of the function family.

6 Editing functions The various SDKC software editor tabs enable the user to create the function by: b Declaring the interface (name, type and comment) for each input, output or I/O parameter. b Writing the source code file in C language. b Declaring the constants as separate files.

6.2

A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such as real-time clock, PLC variables, system words, mathematical functions. In particular, it is possible to carry out numerical processing in floating point format, if the target PLC allows.

6/72

6

Setup (continued), reference


6

SDKC software

Setup (continued) Debugging the functions The function created must be generated under the “debug” format to be tested. Once it has been inserted in an application and loaded to a PLC, the execution of a function can be checked using numerous debug tools. A specific function debug menu in C language accesses the following services: b b b b

Breakpoint insertion. Step by step execution. Display of code with breakpoints shown. Display of data manipulations.

Functions library enhancement After developing, generating, then debugging the function, the last step consists of generating a function family installation disk. This enables the function library on the user's programming terminal to be enhanced. Managing the versions allows the level of any functions installed on a station to be known at any time. These functions can be used in all PL7 languages.

Reference This software extension enables standard functions offered by PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro version > V4 software to be extended.

6

It comprises: b A set of 3“1/2 disks. b A bilingual user manual (English and French). This software is supplied with a Microsoft Visual C++ software package registration card. PL7 SDKC procedure creation software Description

Function

Target PLC extension PL7 SDKC software Procedure written in PL7 Micro/ extension C language with Junior/Pro access to floating TSX Micro/ point functions Premium Debug in PLC

Reference

Weight kg 0.930 TLX L SDKC PL7 41M

6/73

6.2

Presentation, setup


6

PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing

Presentation PL7 FUZ software is a PL7 TSX Micro/Junior/Pro software option enabling fuzzy logic processing in order to optimise the control of processes from Micro and Premium PLCs. This is a software function which can be integrated in any PL7 program. lt includes setup and debug tools. This function is particularly suitable for controlling: b Systems which are difficult to model or non-linear systems, with wide variation of inputs or an insufficient sensor resolution. b Systems which are difficult to control and require experience and human intuition. It enables: b Boolean logic limits to be exceeded (true or false state). b The representation of physical measurements by gradual concepts. b Benefit to be gained from the expertise of operators when controlling a proces.s The fuzzy logic function is characterised by: b 5 physical measurements used as inputs (temperature, pressure, speed…). b 20 graphic related functions which allow the physical measurement inputs to be represented by predefined associated linguistic terms. A temperature will be represented for example by the terms: low, average, high according to the limits for the various terminals. b 25 linguistic rules which determine the state to be applied to the outputs (3 conditions and 2 conclusions per rule). b 4 numerical variables as outputs, results applying to the function input values b The possibility of debugging its control offline. Once inserted in a program, the fuzzy function can either operate in continuous mode (function executed on each scan) or on request (a single iteration on each execution). The operating mode enables the function to be used in automatic mode (calculation of the outputs depending on the state of the inputs) or in manual mode (applications with predefined output values).

Software setup The fuzzy logic function software is set up in 2 steps: b Integration of the fuzzy function in the application program, in the same way as any other standard function. b Setting the fuzzy function parameters using the setup screen.

6

Integration in the program The fuzzy logic function is inserted in the program in all the available languages. The software checks the various function parameters: b The 5 input variables. b The 4 output variables (plus an error bit). b The internal variables necessary for the function to operate correctly.

6.2

The function setup screen is used to access parameters (I/O), membership functions, linguistic rules, as well as debug functions. Membership functions The membership functions are described intuitively using a suitable layout. A membership function is characterised by: b The selection of one of the parameters (I/O). b The choice of associated linguistic terms from a library of terms predefined or created by the user. b The type of function to apply for the inputs (trapeze, triangle, etc) as well as its characteristic values and the functions to apply for the outputs (singleton).

6/74

Setup (continued), reference


6

PL7 FUZ software for fuzzy logic processing

Setup software (continued) Linguistic rules Linguistic rules (25 maximum) enable experts' know-how to be transcribed using conditions/conclusions such as: If…Then… b The definition of a rule is made easier by selecting the input parameters (3 per rule). b By assigning one of the possible linguistic terms to each input. b By defining the outputs affected by this rule (2 per rule) as well as the associated linguistic terms. Simulation and debug The fuzzy function is easily debugged using the setup and debug screen, especially simplified by the possibility of simulating the operation offline. Offline simulation Once the parameter entry screens have been completed, it is possible to perform the fuzzy function operation offline. The debug screen offers the possibility of: b Forcing values for the various input variables. b Starting the simulation using the “Start” key. The results achieved are: The values which will be applied to the outputs in normal operation. The percentages obtained under the various rules. Debug in online mode In online mode the debug screen enables: b Display of the state of the I/O. b Access to the involvement percentages obtained under the various rules. It can also: b Force the inputs for testing precise operating points. b Change to manual mode to apply predetermined values on the outputs. b Change the operating mode: on request, or continuously by defining a period of activation.

6

Reference This software extension enables standard functions offered by PL7 Micro, PL7 Junior and PL7 Pro software to be extended into the domain of fuzzy logic. It comprises: b A set of 3"1/2 disks. b A multilingual user manual (English, French and German).

6.2

Software for fuzzy logic processing Description PL7 FUZ software extension

Function Development and debugging of fuzzy logic applications. Defines the membership functions and fuzzy rules for the applications.

Target PLC Reference Weight extension kg PL7 Micro/Junior/Pro TLX L PL7 FUZ 34M 0.560 TSX Micro/Premium

6/75

Presentation, setup

Modicon Premium automation platform PL7 DIF application comparison software

Presentation PL7 DIF application comparison software for Premium platforms is an optional program which complements the PL7 Pro programming software. It is used to compare two PL7 applications generated by PL7 Pro and automatically provide an exhaustive list of all the differences between them. The PL7 DIF program increases productivity in the main life phases of a control system based on a Premium platform: b Application development and debugging. b Starting up installations and processes. b Operation and maintenance of installations and processes. PL7 DIF software is an efficient tool for handling PL7 applications for: b Control system design offices. b Operation and maintenance managers. b Installers and systems integrators.

Software setup The PL7 DIF software can be used in one of two modes: b Interactive mode, when the comparison is launched by an operator command (double-click on thePL7Diff software icon). b “Batch” mode, when it is launched by a previously established call command. These comparison commands locate all the differences between two applications in terms of: b b b b b b b

6

The hardware configuration. The application access protection. The software structure with the section validation conditions. The application program regardless of the language(s) used. The function modules. The code for the DFB user function blocks. All the variables.

The result of the comparison between the two applications can be: b Displayed. b Printed. b Saved in .txt format in a differences list. Comparison

6.2

The end of the comparison operation is signalled by the appearance of the application browser with its three tabs.

1

1 Identification tab for accessing the characteristics of the two applications being compared. The differences are marked by the sign #. 2 Browser tab for accessing the application multilevel tree structure.

2

3

6/76

3 List tab for accessing: v Printing the comparison list, v Creating the comparison file.

6


Setup (continued), references

6

PL7 DIF application comparison software

Setup (continued) Display of results The representation of the application multilevel tree structure, which can be accessed via the browser tab after launching a comparison, is annotated by 4 symbols in which the information associated with application 1 appear in blue and those associated with application 2 appear in red: This branch, found in this level of the tree structure, contains at least one difference This block contains at least one difference

This section is only present in application 1

This section is only present in application 2

The programming language of this section differs between application 1 and application 2

In the example opposite, a difference on the rung causing changeover to manual mode is detected:

1 2

1 This line [7] displayed in blue belongs to application 1. 2 This line [7] displayed in red belongs to application 2. The source code extracts of both applications can be used to locate the differences precisely. Printing a comparison list/creating a comparison file The list tab is the means of accessing the functions for printing a comparison list or creating a comparison file:

6

Access to the list form for printing a comparison list (or creating a comparison file) Used to include the block selected in the tree structure in the comparison list (or the comparison file) Used to exclude the block selected in the tree structure of the comparison list (or the comparison file) Used to create the comparison list (or the comparison file) according to the selections above Starts printing the comparison list (or saving the comparison file)

References This software extension can be used to compare two PL7 applications generated by PL7 Pro and designed for TSX Micro/Premium platforms. It comprises one CD-Rom (three disks), containing the PL7 DIF software with its documentation (English and French). A software subscription is available for this extension (please consult your Regional Sales Office). PL7 DIF application comparison software Function

Target extension PLC target Using for comparing PL7 Pro applications generated TSX Micro/ by PL7 Pro version u V4 Premium

Type of device

Reference

Weight kg

1 station

TLX CD PL7 DIF 41

–

3 stations

TLX CD3 PL7 DIF 41

–

6/77

6.2

Presentation

Modicon Premium automation platform Process control PL7 The process control range integrated as standard in Premium platforms enables the setup and debugging of process control loops specifically designed for machine control. 4

2

1

3

User-definable process control functions TSX P57 2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823M processors and T PCX 57 203/353M slot-PLCs can be used, depending on the model, to manage 10 to 20 control channels (of 3 loops each). These channels can be configured in order to execute algorithms used in industrial processes: b Cascaded loop. b Process loop. b Autoselective loop. b Setpoint programmer. b Controller with three simple loops.

6

Inputs/outputs TSX P57 2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823M processors and TPCX 57 203/353M slot-PLCs manage an entire station consisting of racks connected on Bus X. The I/O interfaces necessary for process control processing are analog or discrete module channels in: b In-rack I/O modules. b TBX or Momentum distributed I/O modules.

6.2

Control loops The software setup of control loops is performed by entering parameters (Plug and Play technology) when configuring the TSX P57/T PCX 57 processor or slot-PLC. The user completes predefined loop diagrams which also integrate management of the operating mode and the link with the I/O. Operator dialogue and control XBT F operator dialogue terminals have preconfigured screens dedicated to process control which simplify loop operation and control. These screens show the controller front panels as well as trending views and monitoring views.

6/78

6

Presentation, functions


6

Process control PL7

Presentation TSX P57 2p3/2p23/3p3/3623/453/4823M processors and T PCX 57 pp3M slot-PLCs can be used to configure 10, 15 or 20 continuous or semi-continuous process control channels. The control functions of these processors are particularly suitable for: b Sequential processing requiring auxiliary control functions such as packaging machines, surface treatment machines, presses, etc. b Simple processes such as metal processing furnaces, ceramic furnaces, refrigeration units, etc. b Feedback or mechanical control where sampling time is critical, eg torque control, speed control, etc. b Premium processors have, amongst others, the following characteristics: b Each configurable control channel can be used to manage 1 to 3 loops depending on the type of loop chosen. b Process control processors can be inserted in the overall architecture of a site as the PLC can be integrated in various communication networks. b Calculations related to process control are performed in floating point mode, expressed as physical units. Description: TSX P57 pp3/pp23M processors, see pages 1/27 to 1/29; TPCX 57 pp3M slot-PLCs, see pages 1/33 and 1/34.

Functions Control loops Premium processors can be used to set up 10 to 20 control channels, each one adopting one of the following 5 loop profiles : b Process loop: loop with a single controller. b Controller with 3 simple loops: controller which can increase the capacity of the number of loops. b Autoselective loop also known as secondary: comprises 2 loops in parallel with an output selection algorithm. b Cascaded loop: comprises 2 dependent loops (the master loop output is the slave loop setpoint). b Setpoint programmer: comprises a maximum of 6 compound profiles with a total of 48 segments. Since the channels are independent, configuration of 10 channels can be used to obtain: b 30 simple loops. b 5 setpoint programmers, each one associated with 5 control loops. b 2 setpoint programmers and 8 process loops. The various loops are characterised by: b Their different algorithms. b 5 processing branches (process value, setpoint, Feed Forward, loop controller and output processing). b Calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc) defined using parameters. Type of control loops Predefined algorithms, whose parameters can be defined by the user, are shown below: Process loop

Simple loop

Autoselective loop

Cascaded loop

6/79

6

6.2



6

Process control PL7

Processing branches Parameter definition (choice of functions to be used) of control loop profiles enables the algorithm to be adapted to the process to be controlled. Process value processing Process value processing can be performed either in standard fashion or externally. b Standard processing, the user has the following functions at his disposal: filtering, process value between limits, function generator with scaling, alarm management on threshold overrun, totalizer and simulation of the measured value. b External processing is used to obtain, at the loop controller input, a process value, PV, which was processed outside the control loop. This solution is useful if measurement calculation of the process value requires specific or customised functions. Setpoint processing Depending on the type of loop chosen, it is possible to opt for one of the following 4 setpoints: ratio setpoint, selection setpoint, simple setpoint (remote with scaling) or setpoint programmer. When using the controller with 3 single loops or the secondary loop (in an autoselective loop), only the simple setpoint and the setpoint programmer can be used. Feed Forward processing Feed Forward processing corrects a measurable disturbance as soon as it appears. This open loop processing anticipates the effect of the disturbance. It has the Leading function (phase lead/lag). Loop controller and command processing There are 6 different types of loop controller to choose from: autotuning PID, controller in discrete mode with 2 or 3 states, hot/cool controller (PID or autotuning model) or Split Range controller (PID or autotuning model).

6

Output processing There are 3 types of output processing: analog output, servomotor output or PWM output. Whatever the type of output, the control calculated by the controller crosses a ramp limiter and a limiter where the lower and higher limits can be used to define the output variation range.

6.2

Setpoint programmer The setpoint programmer offers a maximum of 6 profiles with a total of 48 segments. It is therefore possible to create a 48-segment programmer, six 8-segment programmers or one 24-segment programmer with one 16-segment programmer and one 8-segment programmer, etc. Each segment is configured as a ramp or dwell time. It is characterised by: b The setpoint to be reached. b Duration of the segment or gradient of the segment (if a ramp). A profile can be executed once, a certain number of times or continually looped back. Moreover, due to the concept of guaranteed dwell time, the time will only need to be downcounted if the process value is actually in the specified range.

6/80



6

Process control PL7

Configuration of control channels Special screens, accessible using PL7 Junior/Pro software, enable the configuration of control loops. Configuration of control channels By simply selecting from the menus, the “Loops” interface on PMX process control processors enables the following to be configured: b The type of loop (out of the 5 existing ones). b The choice of functions used in the 5 processing branches. b Parameters linked to each function. b Assignment of PLC variables to different loop branches (memory words, input words or output words depending on the processing branch). b Automatic presymbolization of variables used in the loops.

Configuration of control channels

Configuration of process, single, autoselective and cascaded loops proposes parameter entry by default. The various functions integrated in the algorithms (square root, function generator, etc) and the initial value of each parameter are predefined. Example: configuration of process loop Once the type of loop has been chosen, parameter entry is performed by selecting or deselecting options in the processing branches. No programming is therefore necessary, loop diagrams are enhanced or simplified as parameters are validated. The screen opposite shows how selecting the PID controller can display the various parameters valid for this type of controller (KP, TI, TD, etc). For the setpoint programmer, configuration of the various profiles (6 maximum) is done using a table defining each segment.

Configuration of a process loop

Once the type of segment has been chosen (ramp or dwell time), configuration consists of defining the setpoint to be reached (for the ramp) and duration (for the ramp or dwell time). While making selections, the lower part of the screen shows the profile display with the setpoint limit values.

6

This screen also allows the cycles of this profile to be defined: execution once, a certain number of times or continually looped back (32,767 times maximum).

Execution of control channels The loop sampling period is predefined at 300 ms. This defines the loop controller processing period in automatic mode. It is possible to modify this period in the loop configuration screen. The user can access all the I/O and parameters for the various configured control channels via the program or by using the various PL7 Junior/Pro software tools (in particular language editors and animation tables). Defining of the cycles of profiles

6/81

6.2


Modicon Premium automation platform Process control PL7

Debug functions Adjustment and debugging of control loops is performed in a simple and user-friendly way using the loop configuration application-specific screen which, when online, can access the following functions: b Display and animation of the loop algorithm diagram. b Display of alarms linked to the process and channel faults. b Simulation of input interface values: for example when they are not connected (process value, Feed Forward). b Addition, removal or replacement of calculation functions in online mode. b Modification of adjustment parameters for each function. b Modification of loop controller operating modes and manual control. With the controllers integrated in control loops, it is possible to use the autotuning function which calculates a set of adjustment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td or Ks, T1, T-delay) upon request. Once the loop has been debugged, it is possible to save the current test values as the initial loop parameter values. Hence, on restarting the loop, it will contain the correct values. Loop debugging The debugging screen: b Displays the values of variables linked to the loop dynamically. b Shows the parameters chosen (or can even modify them). b Displays alarms. The menus enable manual control of the loop, autotuning, parameter backup, etc. Loop debugging

Setpoint programmer debugging Setpoint programmer channels have their own debugging screen which displays:

6

b The number of the current segment and the iteration number. b Execution time of the current segment. b Overall execution time.

6.2

Runtime screens Setpoint programmer debugging

The runtime screen tool available in PL7 Pro software integrates front panel views and trending views in its object library which can be used to adjust and operate control loops. Front panel views and trending views Predefined controller front panel views provide the user with the traditional appearance of controller front panels. The user only enters the variables used by the loop being dealt with in the various fields in this view. Similarly, trending views display changes in loop parameters in graph form as well as useful operating information: operating mode, alarms, etc.

6/82

6



6

Process control PL7

Control and operation Tools integrated in PL7 software (loop debugging screens, runtime screens, etc) which are associated with XBT F Magelis graphic screen terminals offer screens dedicated to the control and operation of control loops. Setup These predefined screens offer runtime and control views. As standard, PL7 Junior/Pro software contains the application developed with XBT L1003/L1004 development software, which comprises predefined runtime and control views. When using this dialogue application, animation of runtime and control views is automatic. Presentation of views Each control loop is associated with a certain number of views depending on the size of the Magelis terminal screen. b v v v v v v v

With 5” screen terminals, the user has 7 views at his disposal: monitoring view, front panel (bar chart), supervisory control view (trending), adjustment view, autotuning view, setpoint programmer view, alarm view.

With this type of terminal, it is possible to operate 8 loops. b With 10” screen terminals, the user has 5 views at his disposal: v monitoring view, v front panel view integrating the display of the front panel, loop adjustment and autotuning, v supervisory control view, v setpoint programmer view, v alarm view.

6

With this type of terminal, it is possible to operate 16 loops. All runtime pages are based on the same presentation module:

Adjustment view

b An alarm zone is positioned at the bottom of the screen. It shows the last active alarm. b Dynamic function keys execute one and only one function (access to the adjustment page, starting autotuning, navigation between the various pages, selecting a loop, etc.). It is of course possible for the user to customise the screens to suit his requirements.

6/83

6.2

7

7/0

Contents

7 - Human/Machine Interfaces

7

7 - Human/Machine Interfaces Selection guide Magelis display units and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/2 Selection guide Magelis graphic terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/4 Selection guide Magelis iPC industrial PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/6 Software and Web servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/8 b OFS data server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/10 b Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/14 v Tego Dial/Tego Power installation system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7/16

7

7/1

Selection guide

7

Operator dialogue terminals Magelis display units and terminals

Applications

Display of text messages

Type of unit

Compact display units

Display units

Type

Back-lit green LCD, height 5.5 mm or Back-lit green, orange or red LCD, height 4.34…17.36 mm

Fluorescent green matrix (5 x 7 pixels), height 5 mm or Back-lit LCD (5 x 7 pixels), height 9 mm

Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (240 x 64 pixels), height 5.3 or 10.6 mm

Capacity

2 lines of 20 characters or 1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters

2 lines of 20 characters

4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40 characters

Via keypad with 8 keys (4 with changeable legends)

Display only or via keypad with 4 function keys + 1 service key or 5 service keys

Application

512 Kb Flash

128 Kb/256 Kb Flash

384 Kb Flash EPROM

Extension via type II PCMCIA

–

Maximum number of pages

128/200 application pages 256 alarm pages

100/200 application pages 128/256 alarm pages 256 print-out form pages (1)

600 application pages 256 alarm pages 256 print-out form pages (1)

Variables per page Representation of variables

40…50 Alphanumeric

Recipes Curves Alarm logs Real-time clock Alarm relay

– – – Depending on model Access to the PLC real-time clock – No

Asynchronous serial link Downloadable protocols

RS 232 C/RS 485 Uni-Telway, Modbus

RS 232 C/RS 485/RS 422 Uni-Telway, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens

Bus and networks Printer link

– –

AS-Interface using 22.5 pitch module RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (1)

Display

Data entry

Memory capacity

Functions

7

Communication

Display of text messages and/or semi-graphics

50 Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge

Development software

XBT L1001 and XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP)

Operating systems

Magelis

Type of terminal

XBT N

Pages

7/2

XBT H

XBT HM

Consult our catalog “Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces” (1) Depending on model.

7

7

Display of text messages Control and parametering of data

7

Display of text messages and/or semi-graphics Control and parametering of data

Terminals



Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (240 x 64 pixels), height 5.3 or 10.6 mm

2 lines of 20 characters

2 or 4 lines of 40 characters

4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40 characters

Via keypad with 8 function keys + 9 service keys or keypad with 12 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 numeric keys

Via keypad with 24 function keys + 10 service keys + 12 alphanumeric keys

Via keypad with 12 function keys 10 service keys 12 numeric keys 4 soft function keys

256 Kb Flash EPROM

384 Kb Flash EPROM

512 Kb Flash EPROM



– 400 application pages 256 alarm pages 256 print-out form pages (1)

50 Alphanumeric

– – Depending on model Access to the PLC real-time clock No

Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge

7 Built-in Yes

Access to the PLC real-time clock No


AS-Interface using 22.5 pitch module RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (1)

–

AS-Interface using 22.5 pitch module

XBT L1001 and XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP) Magelis

XBT P

XBT E

XBT PM

Consult our catalog “Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces”

7/3

Selection guide

7

Operator dialogue terminals Magelis graphic terminals

Applications

Display of text messages and graphic objects Control and parametering of data

Type of unit

Graphic terminals

Display

Type

Back-lit monochrome LCD (320 x 240 pixels) or Colour LCD STN with touch-sensitive screen (320 x 240 pixels) with optimum viewing angle (1)

Capacity

5.7"

Data entry

Memory capacity

Functions

7 Communication

Via touch-sensitive screen 4 tactile feedback keys (XBT-FC)

Application

8 Mb Flash EPROM (via PCMCIA type II card)

Extension

By PCMCIA type II card, 8 or 16 Mb

Maximum number of pages

50 to 720 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card used (512 alarms maximum)

Variables per page

64

Representation of variables

Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, potentiometer, selector

Recipes Curves Alarm logs Real-time clock Alarm relay

125 records maximum with 5000 values maximum 16 Yes Access to the PLC real-time clock Yes

Asynchronous serial link Downloadable protocols


Bus and networks

Modbus Plus, Fipio/Fipway with add-on PCMCIA type III card, Ethernet 10/100 TCP/IP (1) (2) RS 232 C asynchronous serial link (depending on model)

Printer link Development software

XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP)

Operating systems

Magelis

Type of terminal

XBT F01/F03/FC

Pages

7/4

Via keypad with 10 static function keys 8 soft function keys 12 service keys 12 alphanumeric keys

Consult our catalog “Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces” (1) Depending on model. (2) TCP/IP with Modbus protocol for XBT F. (3) Uni-Telway version V2 for Nano/Micro/Premium PLCs.

7

7

7

New Technology touch-sensitive graphic terminals

Back-lit monochrome LCD (640 x 480 pixels) or Back-lit colour LCD TFT (640 x 480 pixels) with optimum viewing angle (1)

Back-lit monochrome (blue or black and white mode) or colour LCD STN or LCD TFT (320 x 240 pixels) or Back-lit colour LCD TFT (640 x 480 pixels or 800 x 600 pixels) or Back-lit colour LCD STN (640 x 480 pixels)

9.5" (monochrome) 10.4" (colour)

5.7" (monochrome or colour) 7.4", 10.4" and 12.1" (colour)

Via touch-sensitive screen Via keypad with 8, 12 or 16 tactile feedback keys (XBT-FC) (1) 12 static function keys 10 soft function keys 12 service keys 12 alphanumeric keys

Via touch-sensitive screen (1)

4…8 Mb (1) By "Compact Flash" card, 16 or 32 Mb

30 to 480 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card used Limited by the internal Flash memory capacity or "Compact Flash" (512 alarms maximum) card memory capacity Unrestricted Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, button, light, clock, flashing light, keypad – Yes, with log

7

Built-in – RS 232 C/RS 485 Uni-Telway (3), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet (1), IEEE 802.3 10BaseT, RJ 45 For future use VJD SPUL FUCDV10M (under Windows 2000 and XP) Magelis (CPU 100 MHz RISC)

XBT F02/F03/FC

XBT G


7/5

Selection guide

Applications

Screen 12” SVGA (800 x 600), Data entry

7

Magelis iPC industrial PCs

7

“All in One” compact products

By keyboard By keyboard and touch screen By touch screen

Screen 15” XGA (1024 x 768) Data entry

By keyboard By keyboard and touch screen By touch screen

Page

Control box For modular products, to use with 1 front panel screen or in stand-alone (1)

7

Pages

7/6

p

p

–

Type

Smart iPC

Compact iPC

Processor

VIA 667 MHz

Internal hard disk

–

RAM memory

256 Mb extendable to 512 Mb 256 Mb extendable to 512 Mb

CD-Rom drive

–

Yes

Floppy disk drive

–

Yes

Extension slots

2 PCMCIA slots

1 PCI bus slot, 2 PCMCIA slots and 1 Compact Flash slot

Ethernet TCP/IP network

1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

Input/output ports

2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM2, 1 x parallel 1 x PS/2 keyboard

2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM2, 1 x COM3, 1 x parallel

Operating system

Windows XPe integrated operating system

Windows 2000 pre-installed operating system

Pre-installed software or software package

Transparent Ready Web browser

–

Supply voltage

c 24 V

a 115...230 V

Type of PC or Control box

MPC ST5 2NDJ 00T

MPC KT5 2NAA 00p

Intel Pentium 4 Mobile 1.7 GHz u 20 Gb

1 x USB on front panel, 1 x PS/2 keyboard, 1 x PS/2 pointing device

– Vijeo Look

Vijeo Look

MPC KT5 5NAA 00p


7

7

Modular products Control box to use with 1 front panel screen or in stand-alone (1)

MPC NA2 0NNN 00N MPC NA2 0NNN 00N MPC NA2 0NNN 00N MPC NA5 0NNN 00N MPC NA5 0NNN 00N MPC NA5 0NNN 00N –

Modular iPC Small

Modular iPC Medium

Intel Celeron 566 MHz

Intel Pentium III 850 MHz

Modular iPC Large Intel Celeron 566 MHz

Intel Pentium III 850 MHz

u 20 Gb, removable

Optionnal

Yes, removable Yes, removable

–

1 ISA bus slot, 1 PCI bus slot and 1 ISA/PCI bus slot

7

2 ISA bus slots, 3 PCI bus slots and 1 ISA/PCI bus slot

2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM4 and 1 x parallel 1 x external VGA video screen, 1 x PS/2 keyboard (2), 1 x PS/2 pointing device (2) Windows pre-installed operating system (Windows 2000 or Windows XPe)

Pack A

–

Pack A, B, C or D (a 115…230 V)

–

a 115...230 V

c 24 V

a 115…230 V ou c 24 V depending on model

MPC AN0 2NAp 00N

MPC AN0 2NDp 00N

MPC BN0 2NpA 00N

MPC BN0 5NpA 00N

Pack E (a 115…230 V model)

MPC CN0 2NpA 00N

MPC CN0 5NpA 00N

Consult our catalog “Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces” (1) To use the Control box without a front panel, you will require the MPC NP0 0NNN 00N mounting panel. (2) Port not operational when the Control box is used with the front panel screen.

7/7

Selection guide

Applications

7

Software and Web servers

Traditional architecture, HMI executed on dedicated terminal or PC platform Configuration software for user interface applications

Target products

Functions

Development of graphics applications

7

Type

Operating system on terminals

Magelis XBT N/H/P/E Magelis XBT HM/PM Magelis XBT F/FC (1) Proprietary Magelis operating system

Reading/writing of PLC variables Display of variables Data processing

Yes Yes –

Sharing of variables between HMI applications Saving of variables to external database

–

Native library of graphic objects Container Active X Java Beans Curves and alarms Scripts VBA Java

Yes – – Yes, with XBT F/FC terminal – –

Magelis XBT G (1)

Yes, with Java programming

–

Yes Yes, with log Yes

Online modification of applications

–

Communication between PLCs and HMI application

Via I/O drivers

Uploading of applications

Yes

Simulation of HMI applications

Yes

Redundancy

–

Recipe management

Yes

No

Report printing

Form, historical data and alarm pages

–

Access security

Linked to user profiles

Software compatible with OS

Windows 98, 2000 or XP

Windows 2000 or XP

Type of software

XBT L1000

Vijeo Designer

Pages

7/8

No

Consult our catalog “Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces” (1) Magelis XBT terminals behave transparently on restoration of power.

7

7

7

Web architecture, embedded HMI in PLC SCADA supervisory software

Magelis Compact iPC industrial PCs Magelis Modular iPC industrial PCs PC micro-computers

Ethernet TCP/IP modules with embedded Web server

Magelis Modular iPC industrial PCs PC micro-computers

TSX Micro TSX ETZ Premium TSX ETY Quantum 140 NOE 771

Premium TSX WMY 100 Quantum 140 NWM 100 00

Yes Application tasks Yes Client/server architecture Yes SQL server 2000 interface supplied

–

Yes

Microsoft Windows

Yes

Yes MSDE 2000 interface supplied (2)

Yes – Yes

Yes + compiled math and logic –

Yes

Via OFS data server

– –

– Yes Alarms via diagnostics buffer (3) –

–

Via OFS data server or I/O drivers

Yes + e-mail transmission triggered by event

Yes

Via internal bus on Premium/Quantum platforms

Yes – Yes Yes Alarms and setpoints

Vijeo Look

Yes

7

– –

All information in the real-time database

Monitor Pro

–

Windows 98, 2000, NT or XP

Windows 2000 or XP

FactoryCast

FactoryCast HMI

Consult our catalog “Automation and Control-Human/Machine Interfaces” (2) Compatible with SQL server 2000 interface. (3) Specific memory area with Modicon Premium (with PL7 or Unity Pro software) and Quantum (with Unity Pro software) PLC platforms.

7/9

Presentation

7

Software and Web servers OFS data server software

Presentation OPC Factory Server (OFS) version 3.0 software uses the OLE for Process Control (OPC) standard, allowing "Client" software applications (supervisors, databases, spreadsheet programs) to access the following data: b Internal variables (words, bits) and inputs/outputs of Modicon Premium/Quantum PLCs. b Internal variables (words, bits) of Modicon TSX Micro PLCs, Modicon Momentum/Quantum PLCs (1), TSX Series 7 and April PLCs.

OFS software is a multi-PLC data Server that enables several communication protocols to be used by providing Client application programs with a set of services for accessing the control system variables. This software is aimed at two types of user in particular: b “End” users who seek to develop applications on a PC and require access to PLC data. In this context, it is possible, for example, to create Client applications (supervisory control screens, Excel tables, etc.) with access to a number of PLCs connected to the PC supporting these applications. b “Suppliers” of control system or industrial data processing products (supervision, Human/Machine Interfaces, etc.) seeking to develop, within their standard products, an OPC Client application capable of accessing data stored in PLCs via the OPC Server.

The OFS offer comprises: b A tool for configuring the OPC Server. b An OPC Server software application that receives requests from an OPC Client and retransmits them to the PLCs. b Low-level drivers for communication with Modicon PLCs. b An OPC Client enabling verification of Client/Server communication between the various connected elements. b A simulator enabling verification of operation of one or more Clients, without a connected PLC. b The electronic setup documentation.

(1) With Concept/ProWORX software.

7

Setup: page 7/11

7/10



7

Setup

7


7

OFS data server software

Setup Ethernet TCP/IP

7 OFS Station 1 (V3.0) Databases

4

7

symbols.xvm (Unity Pro) symbols.prj (Concept) symbols.scy (PL7)

5 2

8 Unity Pro project station

6

Premium Ethernet TCP/IP

3

Quantum

Momentum

TSX Micro

OFS software can be integrated into control system architectures such as the one shown above: 1 PC running OFS software including the OPC Server. 2 PC running the Client application, which accesses the PLC data via OFS. 3 Communication networks linking the PC, running OFS software, with the PLCs. 4 OPC communication protocol. 5 Modbus on TCP/IP communication protocol. 6 Uni-TE on TCP/IP communication protocol. 7 OFS software program accesses Unity Pro project variables directly. Additionally, it conducts a check to verify that these variables are consistent with those of the Premium or Quantum PLC. Depending on the usage, the Client application and OFS software can be located on the same PC or on two different PCs 1 and 2, linked by a TCP/IP Ethernet network 7. Nota : Depending on the software used for Modicon PLCs: - PL7 software generates PLC variable symbol export files. These export files (symbols.scy) should be integrated in the OPC Server. - Concept: the variables can be accessed directly in the project (file.prj) of the Concept application. This direct link requires Concept (version > V2.0) to be installed on the OFS station 1. - Unity Pro programming software generates export files from PLC variable symbols. These export files (.xvm symbols) should be integrated into the OPC Server when the Unity Pro project development station 8 is not accessible via the OFS station. If the Unity Pro project station is permanently accessible via the OFS station, the former exchanges directly with the variables of the Unity Pro project (via P. server).



Reference numbers: page 7/13

7/11

7

Functions

7

Software and Web servers OFS data server software

Functions Development of Client applications OFS software has two interfaces: b OPC Automation interface. Particularly suitable for “end” users, it enables the development of OPC Client applications in Visual Basic, in Visual Basic for Excel, but also in C++. b OPC Custom interface. Used primarily by “suppliers” of automated control system or industrial IT products. It enables the development of applications in C++ in order to access the OFS software OPC Server. This interface is aimed at software development experts in particular, so that they can integrate the Client application into their standard products. This is the interface with the highest performance, in terms of access time, to data stored in the OPC Server but it requires extensive knowledge of C++ programming.

OFS software services The various OFS software services enable: b Access to the Server in local or remote mode. Symbols are accessed either: v via an .xvm/.prj/.scy-format export file (depending on the software used), v or via direct access to the Unity Pro project in the case where it is accessible via the OFS station. b With Unity Pro software, when accessing the Unity Pro project directly, the OFS software program transparently manages the consistency of the Unity Pro project symbol database with that of the Premium or Quantum PLC. In the event of inconsistency, three types of operation are possible: v "strict" mode, which stops exchanges, v "symbolic" mode, which signals an alert to the user, v "debug" mode, which does not hold up debugging of the architecture. b Access to variables in the form of addresses or symbols. b Reading and writing of variables to one or more PLCs present on the communication network connected to the PC running the OFS software. These variables can be: v the sum of all variables belonging to the Unity Pro projects (bits, words, spreadsheets, DDT/IODDT-type compound data), v system variables (OPC System Group: PLC status, diagnostics, etc.), v internal variables representing the PLC words or registers (OPC User Group). b Use of a notification mechanism that transmits change of status values to the Client. Communication between the OPC Server and the PLC uses polling or can be initiated by the PLC in order to decrease the volume of exchanges (“push data”). b Definition of dead bands for measurement noise filtering (floating variables).

7

Communication with PLCs The various variables contained in the PLCs are accessed via standard Telemecanique communication protocols using the following: b Uni-Telway bus and Ethernet/Fipway networks, Uni-TE protocol on TCP/IP, as well as the PCIway communication driver when TSX PCI 57 Atrium coprocessors (with Unity Pro) are used. b Modbus serial link, Ethernet/Modbus Plus networks and Modbus protocol on TCP/IP. The various corresponding communication drivers are supplied in the OFS software (except Modbus Plus driver, which is supplied with the PC Modbus Plus card).


7/12

Setup: page 7/11


7

References

7


7

OFS data server software

References OFS software for PC compatible stations (minimum configuration: Pentium 266 MHz processor, 64 Mb of RAM) running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP. The OFS offer comprises: b b b b b

OPC Server software, compatible with the OPC Data Access 2.0 standard. OPC Server simulator (for debugging the application when no PLCs are present). A tool for configuring the Server on the PC. A example of OPC Client for setting up applications. The setup documentation on CD-Rom.

Supplied on CD-Rom, this software operates independently on a PC. Nevertheless, export files for variables generated by PL7 or ProWORX development software are required. The direct link with Concept applications requires Concept software (version > 2.0) to be installed on the same station. Description OFS data server software (version V3.0)

Function

Type of license Single station

Enables the development of Client applications, accessing data of Premium and Quantum (with Unity Pro) via the OFS Server. 10 stations Also compatible with: - TSX Micro/Premium (with PL7), - Momentum/Quantum (with 200 stations Concept/ProWORX), - TSX Series 7 and April PLCs

OFS software Enables you to update a update previous version of OFS data server software

–

Reference TLX CD OFS 30M

Weight kg –

TLX CD 10OFS 30M

–

TLX CD UNOFS 30M

–

Consult your Regional Sales Office.

7


Setup: page 7/11


7/13


Installation system

7

Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces

Presentation The modular Tego Dial system is used to define human-machine interfaces. It facilitates the installation of Ø 22, Ø 16 and Ø 30 mm control and signalling units, DIN format display units, Magelis terminals and display units, XBL keypads and other products. Tego Dial simplifies an HMI application by : - definition of the application by Tego Dial Design software, - quick assembly of dialogue and display units, through the use of modular elements, - standard connections from the dialogue units to PLCs, bus and other products, - facilitates the integration of the dialogue application into the machine, control panel, enclosure, machine housing or intermediate suspension arm.

Description p Tego Dial Design definition software This software on CD-ROM facilitates graphical definition of the dialogue application in relation to the control units, pilot lights and display units necessary for the device. It selects the correct Tego Dial components that are required for the application and also features a legend design and printing function, both for the front panel and the connections. p Dialboard front panels 1 The front panels basically comprise a grey, RAL 7016, painted aluminium frame which is covered by a polycarbonate film. Six sizes are available based on a modular pattern of height H = 50 mm and width W = 75 mm 2. The sizes are 3H x 4W, 3H x 6W, 6H x 4W, 9H x 2W, 9H x 4W and 9H x 6W.

p Dialpack control console enclosers 3

3

1

3H

H = 50 mm, L = 75 mm

6H

6L

9H

3H

9H

9H

p Plates and cross-pieces 4

4L

4L

7

Four control consoles are available in the following modular sizes: 3H x 4W, 6H x 4W, 9H x 4W and 9H x 6W. The Dialpack console is an assembly comprising a Dialboard type front panel and a sheet steel folded and welded enclosure, painted with textured grey RAL 7016. The front panel is hinged and can be opened to 120°. Closing is by a 1/4-turn device, with stop, and locking by Ronis key no. 455. Double bar or CNOMO triangular key locks are also available. A customising component in 2 versions - yellow or unpainted enhances the Dialpack unit and makes it more ergonomic. A Dialpack S version in stainless steel type 304 is available for corrosive environments. This version conforms to enclosure standard EN 50298.

2L

4L

6L

2

A range of modular dimensioned plates facilitates the installation of all combinations of control and signalling units, operator dialogue terminals and other devices. These plates are attached directly to the framework of the front panel. The plates, made from sheet steel and painted grey RAL 7016, are designed for the following product ranges : - Ø 22, Ø 16 and Ø 30 control and signalling units, - DIN format display units, - Electronic operator terminals and displays (Magelis and others), - keypads, - other units: joystick controllers, cam switches, etc. Cross-pieces aid vertical mounting of several rows of plates. Cut-outs in the plates are dimensioned to suit the dialogue or display units that are to be installed. Some plate versions for Ø 22 units are available with knock-outs, which need to be removed before mounting the unit. Other versions incorporate cut-outs for the transparent polycarbonate legend holders (included with the plate). Alternatively, solid plates are also available for mounting any special equipment required. p Toolkit 5 The installation of dialogue and display units requires cut-outs to be made through the polycarbonate film. To simplify this operation, the plate is marked with cut-out guides and a toolkit is available, comprising : a mallet, cutting tools and replacement blades. p Pre-assembled kits Dialboard and Dialpack with pre-assembled plates and crosspieces are available.

4 5

7/14

Schneider Electric

Presentation

Installation system

7

Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces

Standard connections

1

5

1 7

5

2 5

B

P

Other products

A

D C A F E = 230Vac C B Ue E D H G J I points G F L Klbase 16 I H M J Dia O N 230 M L K APE1B O N

6

P

3

AS-i bus

Tego Dial offers a range of interface components and cabling accessories that simplify connections between control and signalling units and PLCs, buses and other products. The main components which make up this range are : - prefabricated connection cables and insulation displacement connectors 1, 5 mm pitch, for connecting control and signalling units to Dialbase interfaces, - Dialbase 8I/8O or 16I interfaces 2 with integrated commons, for connecting control and signalling units to PLCs via prefabricated Telefast connection cables 5, - an active splitter block 7 for connecting a Dialbase 8I/8O interface to PLCs with a connection modularity greater than 8I/8O, - a Dialbase 230 V interface 3 for connecting control and signalling units to any product up to 230V, - a Dialbase AS-i 4I/4O interface 4 with integrated commons, for connecting control and signalling units to the AS-i bus. The selection guide on page 7/16 indicates the type and quantity of components (Dialbase interfaces, active splitter block, Telefast connection cables) required to connect the control and signalling units to the various types of PLC. The most efficient connection is achieved using the Dialbase 8I/ 8O interface and the Telemecanique TSX Micro PLC TSX DMZ16DTK card 6.

Q4

108

Q1

1 101 201

301

4 104 204

105 205

206

4

Dialfix and Dialmove suspension arms Dialpack control consoles can be fitted directly using 4 adjustable lugs, ref. AE3-FX122. However, for improved ergonomy, they are usually mounted on a suspension arm. This can either be fixed (Dialfix) or moving (Dialmove). Dialfix fixed arms Two versions are available : - a straight fixed arm kit, comprising a straight Ø 70 mm tube, 500 or 1000 mm in length, and a pair of clamps (one for each end). Depending on the positioning of the clamps, an inclination of ±15° from the natural position can be achieved, - an elbowed (90°) fixed arm kit, 500 mm in length. This kit also includes the pair of clamps described above. Arms for corrosive environments The arms are in 304 type stainless steel and provide 350° rotation on the Dialpack fixing side. Two models are available: - straight arm kit, length 1000 mm, - 90° elbowed arm kit, length 500 mm. Dialmove moving arm This arm enables an extensive choice of mounting configurations. The cabling runs through the elements, which have removable side covers for easy access. Numerous configuration possibilities can be achieved by combining the following components: - straight tubes (100 to 1000 mm long), - fixed 90° joint, - wall fixing bracket (straight or elbowed, fixed or mobile), - straight fixing plates (one fixed, other rotating) for Dialpack, - 15° tilted joints, - pivoting joint (-90° to +90° in the same plane).

Schneider Electric

7/15

7


Compatibility

Tego Dial/Tego Power installation system

Tego Dial for Human-Machine interfaces and Tego Power for motor power-starter components Automation platforms

Type

Modularity of connection to the PLC

Compatible I/O modules

Tego Dial components

Tego Power components

Tego Dialbase 8 I/8 O

Tego Dialbase 16 I

Communication module or control splitter box with 8 I/8 O

APE-1B24M

APE-1B24E

APP-1CH, APP-2R4H1/H3

Micro platform Tego Dial

Tego Power

8 inputs + 8 outputs 16 inputs + 16 outputs 16 inputs 8 inputs + 8 outputs 16 inputs + 16 outputs

TSX DMZ 16DTK

1

TSX DMZ 64DTK

1 (1)

TSX DMZ 64DTK/28DTK TSX DMZ 16DTK

1 1

TSX DMZ 64DTK

1

Premium platform Tego Dial

7

16 inputs + 16 outputs

16 inputs Tego Power


TSX DEY 1 (1) 16FK/32D2K/64D2K TSX DSY 32T2K/64T2K TSX DEY 16FK/32D2K/64D2K TSX DEY 32D2K/64D2K/16FK TSX DSY 32T2K/64T2K

1

Quantum platform Tego Dial

Tego Power


140 DDI 353 00/10, 140 DDI 853 00, 140 DD0 353 00/10

32 inputs

140 DDI 353 00/10, 140 DDI 853 00 140 DDI 353 00/10, 140 DDI 853 00, 140 DD0 353 00/10


1 (1)

1

(1) For the connection of a second Dialbase APE-1B24M, use 2 x TSX DP pp3 connecting cables.

7/16

1

7

7

Connecting components

Control splitter box 16 I/8 O

Splitter box 16 I + 16 O to 2 x (8 I+8 O)

Splitter box 16 to 2 x 8

Telefast connecting cables

APP-2RH2/H4

APE-1R1628

ABE-7ACC02

TSX CDP pp3

ABF-M32Hpp0

1 1

2

1 1 1 (2) 1

3 1 (3)

1

3

2

7

2 1 (2) 1

3 1 (3)

1

3

1

2

1 1 (2) 1

1 (3)

1

2

1

2

(2) 8 I + 8 O remain available. To connect a second APP-1CH module or APP-2ppp 8 E + 8 S control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp4 cable. (3) 8 O remain available on ABE-7ACC02. To connect them a second AAP-2ppp 16 I/8 O control splitter box, use a additional TSX CDP pp3 cable.

7/17

8

8/0

Contents

8 - Connection interfaces and power supplies

8

8.1 - Telefast 2 pre-wired system Selection guide Telefast 2 pre-wired system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/2 b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/8 b References v Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/10 v Sub-bases with soldered solid state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/12 v Sub bases equipped with plug-in relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/13 v Sub-bases for analogue channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/16 b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/18

8.2 - Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Selection guide Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies . . . . page 8/20 b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/22 b Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/24 b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/26 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/31 b Dimensions and schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8/32

8

8/1

Selection guide

Connection interfaces

8

8

Telefast® 2 pre-wired system Discrete input and/or output sub-bases

817438

Relay amplification

–

Equipped with relay

–

Control voltage

c 24 V

Output voltage

c 24 V

Output current per channel

0.5 A

Modularity

16

No. of terminals per channel

1

1 to 3

1

2

Type of connection terminals

Signal

Signal, common (configurable c 24 V or 0 V)

Signal

Signal, Common (configurable c 24 V or 0 V)

Connectors

20-way HE10 connector

Terminal block Removable

No

No

Screw

Screw or spring

Type of terminals

8

817437

Discrete input or output 817436

Applications

8 -12 -16

Additional or optional* function

Low cost version fitted with cable

Miniature sub-bases

Compact size *

Type 2 input * (1)

Isolator *

Device type

ABE7H20Eppp 7H32Eppp

ABE7H16Cpp

ABE7HppR1p 7HppR50

ABE7HppR2p

ABE7HppS21

Pages

8/10 (1) For TSX Micro and Premium PLCs.

8.1

8/2

8/11

8

8

521500

817432

Discrete input and output

–

Removable electromechanical or solid state

–

No

Yes

c 24 V c 24 V

0.5 A

c 24 V (solid state) c 5... 24 V, a 230 V (electromechanical) 0.5 A

16

5 A (E.M.), 2 A (solid state)

5 A (th)

16 8 passive inputs 8 relay outputs

1

2

1

Signal, 2 common connections between the inputs and the outputs.

Signal, common, 2 common connections between the inputs and the outputs.

1 N/O contact and common, 4 output channels 2 input connection points

20-way HE10 connectors

No Screw

Miniature sub-base Synergy with Tego Power and API Micro PLC

Miniature sub-base - Common per 4 channels Synergy with Tego Power and API Micro PLC

ABE-7H16CM11

ABE-7P16M111

ABE-7R16M111

8/14

8/13

8/10

ABE-7H16CM21

8 8.1

8/3


8


8

Telefast® 2 pre-wired system Discrete input and output sub-bases

Discrete output 817440

Applications

Relay amplification

Electromechanical, fixed

Electromechanical or solid state

Equipped with relay

Yes

Yes

Control voltage

c 24 V

Output voltage

c 5 V... 30 V a 230 V


2 A (th)

3 A (th)

Modularity

8

8 - 16

No. of terminals per channel

2

1

Type of connection terminals

1 N/O contact and common Volt-free

1 N/O contact

Connectors

20-way HE 10 connector


Yes

Type of terminals

8

Yes

No

No

c 5 V... 150 V a 230 V

c 24 V (solid state) c 5 V... 24 V, a 230 V (E.M.)

c 5 V... 150 V a 230 V

5 A (th)

2 A (solid state), 6 A (electromechanical)

Depends on relay mounted 0.5 to 10 A

16

8 or 16

2

1

2 to 3

1 N/O contact and common

1 N/O contact

Signal, Polarities

Yes

No

No

Screw

Screw or spring

Screw or spring

Additional or optional* function

Miniature sub-base Bistable relay

Volt-free or common per 8 channels

Miniature sub-bases Common per 4 channels

Isolator and fuse

Device type

ABE7R08S216p

ABE7RppS1pp

ABE7R16T111

ABE7P16T111

ABE7P16T2ppp 7P08T3ppp

Pages

8/12

8/13

8/14

8.1

(1) For TSX Micro and Premium PLCs.

8/4

ABE7RppS2pp

8

8

817439

Discrete input

Electromechanical, removable

Solid state, fixed

–

–

Solid state, fixed

Solid state, removable

Yes

Yes

–

–

Yes

No

From c 24 V to a 230 V

From 5 V TTL to a 230 V

c 5 V... 150 V a 230 V 5A (th)

c 24 V

8 A (th)

from 0.5 to 2 A

2 to 3

2 to 6

1 C/O contact or 1 N/O contact and common

1 C/O contact or 2 C/O contacts and common

125 mA

0.5 A

125 mA

12 mA

2

3

2

Signal and 0 V

Signal c 24 V and 0 V

Signal can be Signal isolated, Protected common

16

No

Yes

Screw

Screw or spring

Volt-free or common per:

Fault signal

Isolator and fuse (indicator)

3-wire proximity sensor

Isolator and fuse (indicator)

–

ABE7SppS2Bp

ABE7H16F43

ABE7H16R3p

ABE7H16S43

ABE7S16E2pp

ABE7P16F31p

8/12

8/11

8/12

8/15

8 channels

4 channels

ABE7R16T2pp

ABE7R16T3pp

8/13

No

No

Yes

Screw

Screw or spring

Signal and common

No

8 8.1

8/5


8


8

Telefast® 2 pre-wired system Analogue sub-bases

Analogue signals and special functions 817431

Applications

Compatibility

TSX Micro

Premium

Standard

Type of signal

Counter inputs and analogue I/O

Counter inputs Axis control Position control

Analogue inputs Current Voltage Pt 100

Functions

Passive connection, point-to-point with shield continuity

Modularity

1 counter channel or 8 analogue inputs + 2 analogue outputs 8 channels

Control voltage

c 24 V

Output voltage

c 24 V


25 mA

Number of terminals per channel

2

2 or 4

Type of connector

15-way SUB-D + 9-way SUB-D

25-way SUB-D


No

No

Screw

Screw

Device type

ABE-7CPA01

ABE-7CPA02

Pages

8/16

Type of terminals

8 8.1

8/6

Analogue outputs Current Voltage

4 channels

2 or 4

ABE-7CPA21

8

817434

817435 817435

8

Premium TSX AEY810

Premium TSX CAYp1 TSX CTY2C

Premium TSX AEY1614

Premium TSX PAY2p2

Analogue inputs Current Voltage Pt 100

Isolated analogue inputs

Inputs Counter

Inputs for thermocouples

I/O

Distribution of sensor power supplies per limiter (25 mA)

Distribution of isolated sensor power supplies per converter

Acquisition of value from an absolute encoder

Connection of 16 thermocouples with cold junction compensation

Safety module (BG)

8 channels

8 channels

1 channel

16 channels

12 Emergency stops

–

–

2 or 4

1

25-way SUB-D

25-way SUB-D

15-way SUB-D

25-way SUB-D

50-way SUB-D

No

No

No

No

No

Screw

Screw or spring

Screw

Screw

Screw

ABE-7CPA03

ABE-7CPA31p

ABE-7CPA11

ABE-7CPA12

ABE-7CPA13

8 8.1

8/7

Presentation


8

Telefast®

9 8

7 6

5 4

3 2

1 0

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1 0

1 1 1 2 1 13 0 1 14 1 1 15 2 1 3 1 4

1 5

816575

2 pre-wired system Connector cables for Modicon PLCs

5

2 1

5

0

1

2

4

3

5

6

7

8

13

12

11

10

9

14

15

5 4

1 4

1 5

3

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

0

1

1

1 2

1 3

4

5

8

5

1-2 Cabled connectors combine a standard terminal block equipped with screw terminals, two multicore (AWG 22) cables and two 20-way HE 10 connectors. Two cabled connectors are available for the Quantum range and two others for the 984-A120-Compact range. The 4 products have the following functions: - ABF-M32Hpp0 1 for Quantum relay inputs or outputs, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 16 channels. - ABF-M32Hpp1 2 for outputs directly connected to the Quantum, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 16 channels and an external power supply with a direct connection to the output terminal marked 1. - ABF-M16Hpp0 for 984-A120-Compact inputs or relay outputs, with 1 x HE 10 connector each integrating 16 channels. - ABF-M16Hpp1 for 984-A120-Compact directly connected outputs, with 2 x HE 10 connectors each integrating 8 channels.

8.1

3 The splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02 may be used to connect sub-bases with 8-channel modularity. 4 A single type of cable equipped with 20-way HE 10 connectors irrespective of the 8, 12 or 16-channel modularity. The HE 10 connectors may be moulded (TSX-CDPppp) or self-perforating (ABF-H20Hppp). 5 8 and 16-channel sub-bases from the Telefast 2 range. (1) The c 24 V power supply is connected using Telefast 2 sub-bases only. The c 0 V connections must be equipotential.

8/8

Compatibility


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Modicon PLC and NUM numerical control I/O modules with interface sub-bases

I/O modules

Modicon PLCs 984-A120-Compact

Quantum

Inputs

TOR InOutputs put 32 E 32 S

Outputs

16 E DEP 220 DEO 216 DEP 216

Connection terminal blocks Cabled connectors Splitter sub-bases

16 S DEP 217

Included M16 Hpp0 ABE-7 – ABF-

DAO 216 DAP 216

DAO 216 DAP 216

DAP 217

M16 Hpp1 –

DDI 353 DDI 853

DDO 353

TOR Analogue InOut- Inputs Outputs put put 96 E 96 S 8 E 16E 4 S DDI 364

DDO 364

NUM numerical controllers NUM 1050/ NUM 1020 1060 Inputs/ Inputs/ Outputs Outputs 8S

64 E + 48 S 32 E + 24 S

140 140 140 140 64 I 140 ACI AVO ACO ACO AVI 03000 04000 02000 02000 13000 140 ACI 03000

48 O

32 I

24 O

NUM cables not supplied M08 M16 M04 M04 M08 – – – – M32 – – – – Hpp1 S201 S201 S200 S201 S202 – – CDPppp3 – ACC04 ACC05 ACC04 ACC05

M32 Hpp0 –

Connection sub-bases 8 channels ABE-7H08Rpp

(5)

ABE-7H08S21

(5)

(1) (5)

(1)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

(2)

12 channels ABE-7H12Rpp ABE-7H12S21 16 channels ABE-7H16Rpp/H16Cpp

(1)

ABE-7H16S21 ABE-7H16R23

(4)

ABE-7H16F43 ABE-7H16S43

(3)

Input adaptor sub-bases 16 channels ABE-7S16E2pp/7P16F3pp ABE-7P08T330

(2)

Output adaptor sub-bases 8 channels ABE-7S08S2pp

(2)

ABE-7R08Sppp/7P08T330

(2)

(2)

16 channels ABE-7R16Sppp ABE-7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp ABE-7S16Sppp Sub-bases for analogue/counter I/O ABE-7CPA01 ABE-7CPA02

(6)

ABE-7CPA03

(6)

8

ABE-7CPA21 ABE-7CPA31 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

8.1

(6) With Telefast 2 sub-bases with no channel LED. With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02. Only with module DDI 853. Only with module DDI 353. With the splitter sub-base ABE-7ACC02 or with a cabled connector ABF-M16Hpp1 directly. 2 sub-bases are required. Pre-wired cabled connectors

8/9

References


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Passive connection sub-bases

816461

816460

Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals "Low cost" sub-bases Function No. No. of terminals For PLCs of per on chan- chan- row nels nel number

Input or Output

16

1

2

Length Type Reference of PLC of connection connection cable m

Modicon TSX Micro/Premium

Weight

kg

1

Screw

ABE-7H20E100

0.330

2

Screw

ABE-7H20E200

0.410

3

Screw

ABE-7H20E300

0.480

1.5

Screw

ABE-7H32E150

0.360

3

Screw

ABE-7H32E300

0.460

ABE-7H20Eppp

Siemens S7

"Miniature" sub-bases Function No. No. of terminals of per on chan- chan- row nels nel number

8

16

816462

Input or Output

ABE-7H16C21

1

1

Reference Type of connection

Weight

LED per channel

Polarity distribution

No

No

Screw

ABE-7H16C10

0.160

Yes

No

Screw

ABE-7H16C11

0.160

kg

2

2

Yes

0 or 24 V

Screw

ABE-7H16C21

0.205

3

3

Yes

0 and 24 V

Screw

ABE-7H16C31

0.260

1

1

Yes

No

Screw

ABE-7H16CM11

0.160

2

2

Yes

0 or 24 V

Screw

ABE-7H16CM21

0.200

816463

8.1 Input 16 and Output(1) ABE-7H16CM21

(1) 8 I + 8 Q: these products have 2 commons connections which enable inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time.

8/10

References


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Passive connection sub-bases

Passive connection sub-bases for discrete signals (continued) 816464

Function

ABE-7H16R50

Input or Output

No. of channels

No. of terminals LED Polarity Isolator (I) Type of Reference per on per distribution Fuse (F) connection chan- row chanper nel number nel channel

8

1

2

12

1

2

816465

16

1

1

2

1

Weight

kg

No

No

–

Screw

ABE-7H08R10

0.187

Yes

No

–

Screw

ABE-7H08R11

0.187

Yes

0 or 24 V –

Screw

ABE-7H08R21

0.218

I

Screw

ABE-7H08S21

0.245

No

No

–

Screw

ABE-7H12R10

0.274

Yes

No

–

Screw

ABE-7H12R11

0.274

2

No

No

–

Screw

ABE-7H12R50

0.196

2

No

0 or 24 V –

Screw

ABE-7H12R20

0.300

Yes

0 or 24 V –

Screw

ABE-7H12R21

0.300

I

Screw

ABE-7H12S21

0.375

1

No

No

–

Screw

ABE-7H16R10

0.274

Yes

No

–

Screw

ABE-7H16R11

0.274

Spring

ABE-7H16R11E

0.274

Screw

ABE-7H16R50

0.196

Spring

ABE-7H16R50E

0.196

ABE-7H16R31 2

2

2

No

No

–

No

0 or 24 V –

Screw

ABE-7H16R20

0.300

Yes

0 or 24 V –

Screw

ABE-7H16R21

0.300

Spring

ABE-7H16R21E

0.300

Screw

ABE-7H16S21

0.375

Spring

ABE-7H16S21E

0.375

I

816466

3

3

No

0 and 24 V –

Screw

ABE-7H16R30

0.346

Yes

0 and 24 V –

Screw

ABE-7H16R31

0.346

Type 2 16 input (1)

2

2

Yes

0 and 24 V –

Screw

ABE-7H16R23

0.320

Input

16

2

1

Yes

24 V

I, F (2)

Screw

ABE-7H16S43

0.640

Output

16

2

1

Yes

0V

I, F (2)

Screw

ABE-7H16F43

0.640

ABE-7H16p43 (1) For Modicon TSX Micro, Premium and Numerical Controller NUM 1020/1060. (2) With LED to indicate blown fuse.

8/11

8 8.1

References


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Connection sub-bases with soldered relays and plug-in terminal blocks

816467

Sub-bases with soldered solid state inputs, plug-in terminal blocks Number No. of Isolation of terminals PLC/application channels per channel

Voltage

16

2

Yes

ABE-7S16E2pp

Reference

V

Type of connection

c 24

Screw

ABE-7S16E2B1

0.370

Spring

ABE-7S16E2B1E

0.370

Screw

ABE-7S16E2E1

0.370

Spring

ABE-7S16E2E1E

0.370

Screw

ABE-7S16E2E0

0.386

Spring

ABE-7S16E2E0E

0.386

Screw

ABE-7S16E2F0

0.397

Spring

ABE-7S16E2F0E

0.397

Screw

ABE-7S16E2M0

0.407

Spring

ABE-7S16E2M0E

0.407

c 48

a 48

a 110

a 230

Weight kg

Sub-bases with soldered solid state outputs, plug-in terminal blocks No. of Isolation Output channels PLC/ voltage application V 8

No

c 24

Output current A

Fault detection signal (1)

Type of connection

Reference

0.5

Yes (2)

Screw

ABE-7S08S2B0

0.252

Spring

ABE-7S08S2B0E

0.252

Screw

ABE-7S08S2B1

0.448

Spring

ABE-7S08S2B1E

0.448

Screw

ABE-7S16S2B0

0.405

Spring

ABE-7S16S2B0E

0.405

Screw

ABE-7S16S1B2

0.400

Spring

ABE-7S16S1B2E

0.400

2

16

No

c 24

0.5

Yes (2)

Yes (2)

No

Weight kg

Sub-bases with soldered electromechanical relays, plug-in terminal blocks

8.1

No. of contacts

8

1 “N/O”

5

Output current A

Polarity distribution/ application

2

Contact common Screw per group of 4 channels Spring

ABE-7R08S111

0.244

ABE-7R08S111E

0.244

Volt-free

Screw

ABE-7R08S216

0.250

Spring

ABE-7R08S216E

0.250

Screw

ABE-7R08S210

0.352

Spring

ABE-7R08S210E

0.352

Contact common Screw per group of 8 channels Spring

ABE-7R16S11

0.352

ABE-7R16S111E

0.352

Volt-free

ABE-7R16S210 ABE-7R16S210E

0.547 0.547

816468

8

No. of Relay channels width mm

Bistable

10

ABE-7R08S216

16

5

10

1 “N/O”

1 “N/O”

1 “N/O”

2

5

2

5

Volt-free

Type of connection

Screw Spring

Reference

kg

Common per Screw ABE-7R16S212 group of 8 chan. Spring ABE-7R16S212E on both poles (1) A fault on a sub-base output Qn will set PLC output Qn to safety mode which will be detected by the PLC. (2) Can only be used with modules with protected outputs.

8/12

Weight

0.547 0.547

References


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Plug-in relay sub-bases

816469

Sub-bases for plug-in solid state input relays (1) No. of Term- For chan- inals/ relay nels channel type 16

2

ABE-7R16T210

Isolation Input PLC/ connection application

ABS-7E Yes ABR-7 ABS-7S33E

Volt-free

Polarity distribution

Type of connection

Reference

Weight

Screw

ABE-7P16F310

0.850

Spring

ABE-7P16F310E

0.850

Screw

ABE-7P16F312

0.850

kg

Output sub-bases, equipped with plug-in electromechanical relays (2)

816471

No. of Relay Type chan- width of nels mm relay 16

5

No. and type of contacts

ABR-7S11 1 N/O

ABE-7R16M111 10

ABR-7S21 1 N/O

ABR-7S23 1 C/O

12

ABR-7S33 1 C/O

ABR-7S37 2 C/O

Polarity distribution/ application

Reference

Weight

Contact common per group of 4 channels

ABE-7R16T111

0.600

Contact common per group of 4 output channels + 2 input common terminals

ABE-7R16M111 (3)

0.600

Volt-free

ABE-7R16T210

0.735

Common on both poles (4)

ABE-7R16T212

0.730

Contact common (4)

ABE-7R16T231

0.730

Volt-free

ABE-7R16T230

0.775

Volt-free

ABE-7R16T330

1.300


ABE-7R16T332

1.200

Volt-free

ABE-7R16T370

kg

8 8.1

1.300

(1) Not equipped with relays. (2) Both technologies (electromechanical and solid state) may be combined on the same sub-base. (3) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. (4) Per group of 8 channels. (5) Per group of 4 channels.

8/13

References


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Plug-in relay sub-bases

Sub-bases for solid state and/or electromechanical output relays, plug-in (1) No. of Relay For chan- width relay nels type mm 16

5

ABR-7S11 No ABS-7SC1B

ABR-7S2p No ABS-7SA2p ABS-7SC2p ABE-7ACC20

Fuse per channel

Polarity Type distribution/ of application connection

Reference

Weight

kg No

No

Contact common per group of 4 channels

ABE-7P16T111

0.550

Contact common per group of 4 output channels and 2 common input terminals

ABE-7P16M111 (2)

0.550

Volt-free

ABE-7P16T210 (3)

0.615

ABE-7P16T230 (3)

0.655

Spring

ABE-7P16T230E (3)

0.655

Screw

Yes

Volt-free

Screw

ABE-7P16T214

0.675

No


Screw

ABE-7P16T212

0.615

Yes


Screw

ABE-7P16T215

0.670

No

Volt-free

Screw

ABE-7P08T330

0.450

Spring

ABE-7P08T330E

0.450

Screw

ABE-7P16T330

0.900

Spring

ABE-7P16T330E

0.900


Screw

ABE-7P16T332

0.900

Yes

Volt-free

Screw

ABE-7P16T334

0.900

Yes


Screw

ABE-7P16T318

1.000

Spring

ABE-7P16T318E

1.000

816473

10

Isolator per channel

ABE-7P16T2pp

8

16

12

12

ABR-7S33 No ABS-7SA3p ABS-7SC3pp ABE-7ACC21

ABR-7S33 No ABS-7SA3p ABS-7SC3pp ABE-7ACC21

No

8 ABR-7S33 No ABS-7SA3M ABS-7SC3E ABE-7ACC21 Yes

8.1

Volt-free

(1) Not equipped with relays (2) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. (3) With relay ABR-7S21 for sub-base ABE-7P16T210, with relay ABR-7S23 for sub-base ABE-7P16T230p. (4) Per group of 8 channels. (5) Per group of 4 channels.

8/14

References


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Plug-in relays

Plug-in solid state relays (Order in multiples of 4) Relay Funcwidth tions

Input circuit Current

816475

mm

Nominal voltage V

Output circuit Current (1) Nominal voltage A V

Unit reference

Weight

kg

5

Output

c

24

2

c 24

ABS-7SC1B

0.010

10

Output

c

24

0.5

c 5…48

ABS-7SC2E

0.016

a 24…240

ABS-7SA2M

0.016

c 24

ABS-7EC3AL

0.014

ABS-7SC1B

12

Input

Output

c

5 TTL

24 Type 2

–

c 24

ABS-7EC3B2

0.014

48 Type 2

–

c 24

ABS-7EC3E2

0.014

a 50 Hz

48

–

c 24

ABS-7EA3E5

0.014

a 60 Hz

110…130

–

c 24

ABS-7EA3F5

0.014

a 50 Hz

230…240

–

c 24

ABS-7EA3M5

0.014

c

24

2 c 24 Self-protected

ABS-7SC3BA

0.016

1.5

c 5…48

ABS-7SC3E

0.016

1.5

a 24…240

ABS-7SA3MA

0.016

Order in multiples of

Unit reference

816476

Plug-in electromechanical relays

ABR-7S2p

Relay width mm

Control voltage V

Output current (1) A (Ith)

No. of contacts

5

c 24

5

1 N/O

4

ABR-7S11

0.005

10

c 24

5

1 N/O

4

ABR-7S21

0.008

1 C/O

4

ABR-7S23

0.008

10

1 C/O

4

ABR-7S33

0.017

8

2 C/O

4

ABR-7S37

0.017

8

1 C/O

4

ABR-7S33E

0.017

c 24

816474

12

Weight kg

8 8.1

c 48

ABR-7S3p

Accessory Description

Reference

Extractor for 5 mm miniature relays

ABE-7ACC12

Weight kg 0.010

(1) See characterics table for specifications of relays in the sub-bases

8/15

References


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Connection sub-bases for counter and analogue channels

Connection sub-bases for counter and analogue channels

816478

Functions

For Modicon PLCs

Compatible modules

TSX Micro

Integrated analogue and counter TSX 37.22 TSX CTZpA

15-way SUB-D Screw

ABE-7CPA01

0.300

Counting Premium Axis control Position control

TSX CTYpA TSX CAYp1

15-way SUB-D Screw

ABE-7CPA01

0.300

Parallel output Premium absolute encoder connection

TSX CTYpA TSX CAYp1

15-way SUB-D Screw

ABE-7CPA11

0.330

Distribution Premium of 16 thermocouples

TSX AEY1614 25-way SUB-D Screw

ABE-7CPA12

0.300

Passive distribution of 8 channels on screw terminal block with shielding continuity

Premium

TSX ASY810 25-way SUB-D Screw TSX AEY1600 TSX ApY800 140 AVI 03000 140 ACI 03000 140 ACI 04000 140 ACO 13000

ABE-7CPA02

0.290

Distribution of 4 analogue output channels

Premium

TSX ASY410 25-way SUB-D Screw TSX AEY420 140 AVO 02000 140 ACO 02000

ABE-7CPA21

0.210

Distribution and supply of 8 analogue channels with limitation of each current loop

Premium

TSX AEM8p1 25-way SUB-D Screw TSX AEM16pp TSX AEY800 TSX AEY1600 140 AVI 03000 140 ACI 03000 140 ACI 04000

ABE-7CPA03

0.330

Distribution Premium and supply Quantum of 8 analogue input channels isolated from each other with 25 mA/ channel limiter

TSX AEY810 25-way SUB-D Screw 140 AVI 03000 140 ACI 03000 140 ACI 04000

ABE-7CPA31

0.410

ABE-7CPA31E

0.410

Safety

TSX PAY2p2

ABE-7CPA13

0.290

Counting and analogue

816477

ABE-7CPA01

ABE-7CPA02

8 8.1

8/16

Quantum

Quantum

Quantum

Premium

Type of connection Telefast 2 side

Type of Reference connection

Weight kg

Spring

25-way SUB-D Screw

References


8

Telefast®

2 pre-wired system Accessories for connection sub-bases

816483

Software Description

Operating system

Reference

Weight kg

Software for client label marking

Under Windows version 3.1 or 95

ABE-7LOGV10

0.350

Pack of 25 pre-cut label sheets (160 labels)

–

ABE-7LOGF25

0.200

Accessories

ABE-7ACC02

Description

No. of Characteristics channels

Order in Unit multiples of reference

–

–

10

ABE-7ACC01

0.008

–

16 as 2 x 8 channels

1

ABE-7ACC02

0.075

–

16 as 2 x 16 channels 1

ABE-7ACC10

0.075

16 as 2 x 16 channels 1

ABE-7ACC11

0.075

–

10 mm wide

4

ABE-7ACC20

0.007

–

12 mm wide

4

ABE-7ACC21

0.010

–

–

100

ABE-7ACC30

0.100

Enclosure feedthrough with industrial connector

32

40-way

1

ABE-7ACC80

0.300

Plug-in 40-way male connector

32

For mounting on ABE-7ACC80

1

ABE-7ACC81

0.370

1

ABE-7ACC82

0.150

1

ABE-7ACC83

0.150

816480

Kit for fixing on solid plate Splitter sub-base Redundant output sub-base Redundant input sub-base Removable continuity blocks Locating device for removable terminal block

816481

ABE-7ACC80 + ABE-7ACC81

Enclosure feedthrough 16 19-way with CNOMO M23 connector (1 x 20-way HE 10 8 and 12 19-way connector, PLC end)

Weight kg

816482

ABE-7BV20

2 01 2 01

816479

ABE-7TES160

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Impedance adaptor for Type 2 compatibility

–

Used with ABE-7ACC82 1 and ABE-7ACC83

ABE-7ACC85

0.012

IP 65 cable gland

–

For 3 cables

1

ABE-7ACC84

0.300

Additional snap-on terminal blocks (shunted terminals)

8

10 screw terminals

5

ABE-7BV10

0.030

10 spring terminals

5

ABE-7BV10E

0.030

20 screw terminals

5

ABE-7BV20

0.060

20 spring terminals

5

ABE-7BV20E

0.060

16

I/O simulator sub-base

16

Display, forcing inhibition, continuity

1

ABE-7TES160

0.350

Adhesive label holder

–

For 6 characters

50

AR1-SB3

0.001

Fast blow fuses 5 x 20, 250 V, UL

–

0.125 A 0.5 A 1A 2A 4A 6.3 A

10 10 10 10 10 10

ABE-7FU012 ABE-7FU050 ABE-7FU100 ABE-7FU200 ABE-7FU400 ABE-7FU630

0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010

816484

AR1-SB3

“Flexible commoning links” accessories Description

ABF-C08Rppp

For common

Flexible Coil commoning links a Modularity 8 x 1 mm2 c

Colour

Distance between cable ends cm

Reference

White

12 2 12 2 12 2

ABF-C08R12W ABF-C08R02W ABF-C08R12R ABF-C08R02R ABF-C08R12B ABF-C08R02B

Red Blue

Weight kg

0.020 0.010 0.020 0.010 0.020 0.010

8/17

8 8.1

Dimensions

Connection interfaces Telefast®

ABE-7H20Eppp ABE-7H32Eppp

2 pre-wired system

ABE-7H16Cpp/ABE-7H16CMpp, ABE-7p16M111/ABE-7p16T111

ABE-7H16R50, ABE-7H12R50, ABE-7H08R1p, ABE-7H08R21, ABE-7R08S111/S111E, ABE-7H08S21, ABE-7CPA21

b

35

b

b1

Common side view

8

1

1

1

1

84 a

55

15 c c+9

7p16M111/T111 110 89 58 54 ABE-7H16p43

70

7H16Cpp/CMpp ABEa 106 b 49 b1 41,5 c 60 ABE-7R16S21p, ABE-7S16S2B0/S2B02E, ABE-7S16E2pp/S16E2ppE, ABE-7S08S2B1/S08S2B1E ABE-7CPA31

77

b

b + 12

35

b1

7Hppppp/CPA21 7R08S111p ABE7H20E/7H32Eppp b 67 70 77 b1 56 58 58 c 59 58 58 1 Additional shunt terminal block ABE-7BV10/7BV20 Common side view ABE-7H16R2p, ABE-7H12R2p, ABE-7H16R3p, ABE-7H16R1p, ABE-7H12R1p, ABE-7H12S21, ABE-7H16S2p, ABE-7R16S11p, ABE-7R08S210, ABE-7S08S2B0, ABE-7CPA02, ABE-7CPA03 ABE7S16S1B2, ABE-7R08S216

1

206 15

125

c 7pR08S210p, 7S16S1B2p, 7R08S216 77 58 58

All sub-bases b1 58 c 58

ABE-7CPA01, ABE-7CPA11/CPA12/CPA13

8

58 67

211

15 64

143

Note: details of the front view are the same as for the ABE-7CPA01.

73 ABE-7R16T3pp, ABE-7P16T3pp, ABE-7P16F31p Common side view

15 74 83

8/18

89

89

58

ABE-7P08T330

35

8.1

70

35

89

35

58

c1 ABE7pppppp b 70 b1 58 c 58 1 Additional shunt terminal block ABE-7BV10/7BV20 ABE-7R16T2pp, ABE-7P16T2pp

272

150

Dimensions

Connection interfaces Telefast®

ABE-7ACC02

8

2 pre-wired system

ABE-7ACC03

ABE-7ACC04, ABE-7ACC05 ABE-7ACC10, ABE-7ACC11 A C

B

D

C

D

89

35

89

35

70

35 15

B

58

A

C

58

B

58

A

50

48

15

88

15

57

66

48

48

57

57

Note: Drawing representing ABE-7ACC04 and ABE-7ACC05 ABE-7ACC80

ABE-7ACC82, ABE-7ACC83

112 130

140

50

88

54

25

42

43

74

65

34

52

32

64,5

35

ABE-7TES160

35

89

80

103

120

58

ABE-7ACC84

15 72

43

30

54

32

170

50 59

8 Fixing centres for sub-bases using mounting kit ABE-7ACC01

b G = a-12

6

H = b+12

a

ABE-7 ACC02 ACC03 ACC04 ACC05 ACC10/11 H08Rpp H08S21 H12R50 H16R50 R08S111 CPA01 CPA02 CPA1p CPA03

G 38 53 53 53 53 72 72 72 72 72 131 113 131 113

H 82 101 101 101 101 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82

ABE-7 H12R1p H12R2p H16R1p H16R2p H16R3p H12S21 H16S21 R08S210 R16S111 R16S21p S08S2B0 S08S2B1

G 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 194 113 194

H 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82

ABE-7 H16F43 H16S43 S16E2pp S16S1B2 S16S2pp R16T2pp P16T2pp R16T3pp P08T330 P16T3pp P16F3pp

G 194 194 194 113 194 199 199 260 150 260 260

H 82 82 82 82 82 101 101 101 101 101 101

8.1

8/19

Selection guide

8

Power supplies

8

Power supplies for d.c. control circuits

8

Functions

Supplies for d.c. control circuits

Type of product

Single-phase, modular switch mode power supplies

Single-phase, regulated switch mode power supplies

Applications

Industrial, commercial or residential applications. Modular format allowing integration into panels.

Simple, low power equipment.

Industrial applications, low and medium power. Machine equipment applications.

Industrial or commercial applications on sites sensitive to mains interference. Protection against accidental restarting.

Nominal power

22 W

7 W…30 W

48…240 W

60…240 W

Input voltage

a 100…240 V single-phase

a 100…240 V single-phase c 110…220 V compatible (1)


a 100…240 V single-phase, c 110…220 V compatible (1)

Output voltage

c 12 V adjustable

c 24 V adjustable

c 24 V adjustable

c 12, 24 V or 48 V adjustable

Technology

Primary switch mode electronic power supplies.

Secondary protection

Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, with automatic reset.

Signalling

Output indicator lamp.

Other characteristics

–

Connection by lug- – clamps possible

Mounting

Direct on 7 rail

Direct, on 7 rail and on panel

Direct on 7 rail

Disturbance (conforming to EN55011/22) Conducted and radiated

cl.B

cl.A (7/15 W) cl.B (30 W)

cl.B

EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2 (EN 50082-2), IEC 950, EN61131-2/A11

EN 50081-2, IEC 61000-6-2, EN 60950

UL, CSA, TÜV

cULus, TÜV

EN 50081-1, EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-6-2, (EN 50082-2), (EN 50082-2), IEC 950 IEC 950, 61000-3-2 UL, CSA, TÜV, CTick

ABL-7RM

ABL-7CEM

ABL-7RE

Conforming to standards

8.2

Approvals

Device type

Pages

8/20

30 W

c 24 V adjustable

Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, with manual and automatic reset.

Output and input indicator lamp.

Please consult our catalog: 8/22 “Automation & Control, Interfaces, I/O splitter boxes and power supplies” (1) Compatible input voltage, not indicated on the product.

Anti-harmonic distortion filter

ABL-7RP

8

8

2-phase regulated switch mode power supplies

3-phase regulated switch mode power supplies

Regulated switch mode power supplies for AS-Interface

Industrial applications.

Industrial applications. In-line continuous process equipment, machine tools, injection presses, etc.

Industrial applications. Supply of d.c. voltage necessary for AS-Interface systems.

120 and 240 W

240 and 480 W 120 W

240…960 W

72 W

a 2 x 380…415 V 2-phase

a3x 380…415 V 3-phase

a3x 400…520 V 3-phase


a3x 400…520 V 3-phase

c 24 V adjustable

145 W

c 30 V

2 x 72 W

c 24 V adjustable

Primary switch mode electronic power supplies. Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, with manual and automatic reset.

Integrated, against overloads and short-circuits, overvoltage and undervoltage.

Output indicator lamp.

Output and input indicator lamps.

–

–

Anti-harmonic distortion filter

Direct on 7 rail

Direct on 7 rail (except ABL-7UPS 24200 and ABL-7UPS24400)

Direct on 7 rail

cl.B

cl.B

cl.B

EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 60950

EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 60950

–

–

ABL-7REQ

ABL-7UEQ

8/22

8/22

ABL-7UES

–

8

EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2, EN 60950, IEC 61000-3-2 cULus, c us

EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2, EN 55022 class B

ABL-7UPS

ASI-ABL

8.2

UL, CSA, TÜV

Please consult our catalog “AS-Interface cabling system”

8/21

Presentation

8

Power supplies Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies

ABL-7 power supplies The ABL-7 range of power supplies is designed to provide the d.c. voltage necessary for the control circuits of automation system equipment. Split into three families, this range meets all the needs encountered in industrial, commercial and residential applications. Single-phase or 3-phase, of the electronic switch mode type, they provide a quality of output which is suitable for the loads supplied and compatible with the mains supply available in the equipment. Clear guidelines are given for selecting protection devices which are often used with them and thus a comprehensive solution is provided, which can be used in total safety. Phaseo switch mode power supplies These switch mode power supplies are totally electronic and regulated. The use of electronics makes it possible to significantly improve the performance of these power supplies, which offer: - very compact size, - integrated overload, short-circuit, overvoltage and undervoltage protection, - a very wide range of permissible input voltages, without any adjustment, - a high degree of output voltage stability, - good performance, - LED indicators on the front panel. Phaseo power supplies are available in single-phase and 3-phase versions. They deliver a voltage which is precise to 3%, whatever the load and whatever the type of mains supply, within a range of 85 to 264 V for single-phase, or 360 to 550 V for 3-phase. Conforming to IEC standards and UL and CSA certified, they are suitable for universal use. The inclusion of overload and short-circuit protection makes downstream protection unnecessary if discrimination is not required. ABL-7 RE and ABL-7 RP supplies are also equipped with an output undervoltage control which causes the product to trip if the output voltage drops below 19 V, in order to ensure that the voltage delivered is always usable by the actuators being supplied. All the products are fitted with an output voltage adjustment potentiometer in order to be able to compensate for any line voltage drops in installations with long cable runs. Most of our power supplies are designed for direct mounting on 35 and 75 mm 7 rails. These power supplies are available in single-phase and 3-phase versions and are split into three families: Compact single-phase supply ABL-7CEM: b power less than or equal to 30 W (1.2 A), b compact size, b for all low power equipment, b suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Nano and Twido platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 24 V supply.

ABL 7CEM

Universal single-phase supplies ABL-7RE and ABL-7RP: b ABL-7RE v power between 48 W (2 A) and 240 W (10 A), v compact size, v for all machine equipment, v suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Micro and Premium platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 24 V supply. b ABL-7RP v power between 60 W (2.5 A) and 240 W (10 A), v output voltage available: c 12, 24 and 48 V, v input filter (PFC) for commercial and residential environments (conforming to standard EN 61000-3-2), v two operating modes possible for handling of overload and short-circuit faults: - "AUTO" mode which provides automatic restarting of the power supply on elimination of the fault, - "MANU" mode which requires manual resetting of the power supply to restart. Resetting is achieved by switching off the mains power.

8 ABL-7RP

8.2

Characteristics : pages 8/26 to 8/29

8/22

References : page 8/31

Dimensions : page 8/32

Schemes : page 8/33

8


8

Power supplies

8


530894

108387-25-M

Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies

ABL-7UPS

ABL-7REQ

Phaseo switch mode power supplies (continued) 3-phase and single-phase process supplies ABL-7U and ABL-7REQ: b ABL-7UE v power between 120 W (5 A) and 480 W (20 A), v compact size, v voltages between 3 x 380 V and 3 x 500 V, v for use in industrial applications, for all in-line or continuous process equipment, machine tools and injection presses, etc. v suitable for use in automation system environments based on the Premium and Quantum platforms, or in any automation system configuration requiring a c 24 V supply. b ABL-7UPS v power between 120 W (10 A) and 960 W (40 A). Identical to the ABL-7UE range, this power supply differs in that it includes a filter (PFC) which means that it can be connected directly to the public mains supply, in compliance with standard EN 61000-3-2. This product, for world-wide use, is UL certified. b ABL-7 REQ v power between 120 W (5 A) and 240 W (10 A), v compact size, v can be connected to 2-phase input voltages between 380 V and 415 V, to replace older power supplies connected by only two wires. Economical, more competitive, yet with a smaller input voltage range it can, in certain cases, be used in place of the 3phase versions.

Using c 24 V b Using c 24 V enables so-called protection installations (PELV) to be built. Using PELV is a measure designed to protect people from direct and indirect contact. Measures relating to these installations are defined in publication NF C 12-201 and in standard IEC 364-4-41. b The application of these measures to the electrical equipment in machines is defined in standard NF EN 60204-1 and requires: v that the voltage used is below 60 V d.c. in dry environments and below 30 V in damp environments, v the connection of one side of the PELV circuit, or one point of the source, to the equipotential protection circuit associated with higher voltages, v the use of switchgear and control gear on which measures have been taken to ensure "safety separation" between power circuits and control circuits. b A safety separation is necessary between power circuits and control circuits in PELV circuits. Its aim is to prevent the appearance of dangerous voltages in c 24 V safety circuits. b The reference standards involved are: v IEC 61558-2-6 and EN 61558-2-6 (safety transformers), v IEC 664 (coordination of isolation). Telemecanique power supplies meet these requirements. b Moreover, to ensure that these products will operate correctly in relation to the demands of their reinforced isolation, it is recommended that they be mounted and wired as indicated below: v they should be placed on an earthed mounting plate or rail, v they should be connected using flexible cables, with a maximum of two wires per connection, and tightened to the nominal torque, v conductors of the correct insulation class must be used. b If the d.c. circuit is not connected to an equipotential protection conductor, an earth leakage detector will indicate any accidental earth faults (please consult your Regional Sales Office).

8

Operating voltage b The permissible tolerances for the operating voltage are listed in publications IEC 1131-2 and DIN 19240. b For nominal voltage Un = c 24 V, the extreme operating values are from - 15 % to + 20 % of Un, whatever the supply fluctuations in the range -10 % to + 6 % (defined by standard IEC 38) and load variations in the range 0-100 % of In. All Telemecanique c 24 V power supplies are designed to provide a voltage within this range. b It may be necessary to use a voltage measurement relay to detect when the normal voltage limits are being surpassed and to deal with the consequences of this (please consult your Regional Sales Office).




Schemes : page 8/33

8/23

8.2

Selection

8

Power supplies

8

Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies

Selection of power supplies The characteristics to be taken into account when selecting a power supply are: - the required output voltage and current, - the mains voltage available in the installation. An initial selection can be made using the table opposite. This may however result in several products being selected as suitable. Other selection criteria must therefore be taken into account. b The quality of the mains power supply The Phaseo range is the solution because it guarantees precision to 3% of the output voltage, whatever the load current and the input voltage. In addition, the wide input voltage range of Phaseo power supplies allows them to be connected to all mains supplies within the nominal range, without any adjustment. The Phaseo RP family can also be connected to c 110 and 220 V emergency supplies. b Harmonic pollution (power factor) The current drawn by a power supply is not sinusoidal. This leads to the existence of harmonic currents which pollute the mains supply. European standard EN 61000-3-2 limits the harmonic currents produced by power supplies. This standard covers all devices between 75 W and 1000 W, drawing up to 16 A per phase, and connected directly to the public mains power supply. Devices connected downstream of a private, low voltage general transformer are therefore excluded. Regulated switch mode supplies always produce harmonic currents; a filter circuit (Power Factor Correction or PFC) must therefore be added to comply with standard EN 61000-3-2. Phaseo ABL-7RP and ABL-7UPS power supplies conform to standard EN 61000-3-2 and can therefore be connected directly to public mains power supplies. b Electromagnetic compatibility Levels of conducted and radiated emissions are defined in standards EN 55011 and EN 55022. The majority of products in the Phaseo range have class B certification and can be used without any restrictions due to their low emissions. ABL-7CEM24003 and ABL-7CEM24006 power supplies have class A certification. It is recommended that they should not be used in the following equipment: trains, aircraft, nuclear applications and in any environment where malfunctioning could cause serious injuries or lead to death. These products are designed for use in industrial equipment and are not suitable for use in residential environments. b Behaviour in the event of short-circuits Phaseo power supplies are equipped with an electronic protection device. This protection device resets itself automatically on elimination of the fault (around 1 second for ABL-7 RE/RP, around 3 seconds for ABL-7 UE/UP/REQ) which avoids having to take any action or change a fuse. In addition, the Phaseo ABL-7RP/U/REQ ranges allow the user to select the reset mode in the event of a fault: - in the "AUTO" position, resetting is automatic, - in the "MANU" position, resetting occurs after elimination of the fault and after switching the mains power off and back on. This feature allows Phaseo ABL-7RP/U/REQ power supplies to be used in installations where the risks associated with untimely restarting are significant.

8

b Behaviour in the event of phase failure In the event of failure of one phase, all Phaseo 3-phase power supplies switch to relaxation mode for as long as the input voltage is < 450 V. For operation on higher voltages (e.g. 480 V), use of an upstream GV2 type residual current protection device is recommended. b Selection of reset mode v on the ABL-7RP family of products: By microswitch on the front panel of the product. v on the ABL-7U/REQ family of products: By jumper on the front panel. Warning: selection of the function is only possible after the mains power supply has been switched off for at least 5 minutes. The jumper is moved using a pair of insulated, flat-nose pliers.

8.2

Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/23

8/24




Schemes : page 8/33

Selection (continued)

8

Power supplies

8


Selection according to application characteristics Type of mains supply Rated mains supply voltage

Permissible variation

Output voltage Output current

Single-phase

2-phase

a 100…240 V 50/60 Hz c 110… 220 V (1) Wide range 85…264 V, 47…63 Hz c 100...250 V (1), c 105...370 V (2)

100…240 V 50/60 Hz Wide range 85…264 V 47…63 Hz

2 x 380…415 V 3 x 50/60 Hz 380…415 V 50/60 Hz 340…460 V 340…460 V 47…63 Hz 47…63 Hz

3 x 400…520 V 50/60 Hz Wide range 360…550 V 47…63 Hz

3 x 380…520 V 50/60 Hz Wide range 340…550 V 47…63 Hz

12 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

48 V

0.3 A

24 V

24 V

ABL7CEM24003 ABL7CEM24006 ABL7CEM24012

0.6 A 1.2 A 2A

ABL7RE2402

2.5 A

ABL7RP4803

3A 5A

3-phase

ABL7RP1205

10 A

ABL7RP2403 ABL7RP2405 ABL7RP2410

ABL7RE2403 ABL7RE2405 ABL7RE2410

ABL7REQ24050 ABL7REQ24100

20 A

ABL7UES24050 ABL7UEQ24100 ABL7UEQ24200

ABL7UPS24100 ABL7UPS24200 ABL7UPS24400

40 A

Conforming to EN 61000-3-2

Yes (not applicable for ABL-7CEM)

No

No

No

Integrated automatic protection

Yes Automatic or manual restart on ABL-7RP Automatic restart only on ABL-7CEM

Yes Automatic restart

Yes Automatic or manual restart

No

Yes

(1) Values for ABL-7RP power supplies, not indicated on the product. (2) Values for ABL-7CEM power supplies, not indicated on the product.

8

8.2





Schemes : page 8/33

8/25

Characteristics

8

Power supplies

8


Technical characteristics Type of power supply Product certifications Conforming to standards Safety EMC Low frequency harmonic currents

ABL-7CEM cULus, TÜV UL 508 IEC/EN 60950, FELV EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2 –

ABL-7RE UL, CSA, TÜV, CTick UL 508, CSA 22.2 n° 950

– a 100…240, c 110…220 compatible (1) a 85…264, c 105…370 compatible (1) 47…63 > 70 % 0.1 (7 W)/0.2 (15 W)/0.45 (30 W) 0.17 (7 W)/0.3 (15 W)/0.68 (30 W) < 50 0.45 approx.

Orange LED a 100…240

Green LED c 24 0.3/0.6/1.2 Adjustable from 90 to 110 % 2 % max < 200 (peak-peak) > 20 See curves page 8/29 Permanent/automatic restart

Green LED

1.05 In U > 1.2 –

1.1 In Tripping if U > 1.5 Un Tripping if U < 0.8 Un

ABL-7RP

IEC/EN 61496-1-2, FELV EN 50081-1, IEC 61000-6-2 (EN 50082-2) – EN 61000-3-2

Input circuit LED indication Input voltages

Rated values

V

Permissible values

V

Permissible frequencies Efficiency at nominal load Current Ue = 240 V consumption Ue = 100 V

Hz

Current at switch-on Power factor

A

A A

a 85…264 single-phase

> 85 % 0.6 (48 W)/0.83 (72 W) 1.2 (120 W)/2.5 (240 W) 1.2 (48 W)/1.46 (72 W) 1.9 (120 W)/3.6 (240 W) < 30 0.65 approx.

Orange LED a 100…240, c 110…220 compatible (1) a 85…264, c 100…250 compatible (1)

0.4 (72 W)/0.6 (120 W) 1.3 (240W) 0.8 (72 W)/1 (120 W)/2.8 (240 W) 0.98 approx.

Output circuit LED indication Nominal output voltage (U out) Nominal output current Precision Output voltage Line and load regulation Residual ripple - interference Micro-breaks Holding time at I max and Ve min Temporary overloads Permissible inrush current (U out >19V) Protection Short-circuit

V A

mV ms

Overload Overvoltage Undervoltage

Green LED 12, 24 and 48 2/3/5/10 2.5/5/10 Adjustable from 100 to 120 % ±3% > 10

> 20

Permanent/automatic restart

Permanent/automatic restart or restart after switching off mains power

Operating and environmental characteristics Connections Ambient conditions

Input Output Storage temperature Operating temperature

Max. relative humidity Degree of protection Vibrations Operating position

8

MTBF at 40° Connections

Series Parallel Dielectric strength Input/output Input/earth Output/earth (and output/output) Input fuse incorporated Disturbance Conducted

8.2

Radiated Immunity Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic Conducted interference Mains interference


8/26


mm2 mm2 °C °C

2 x 2.5 + earth 2 x 2.5 2 x 2.5 + earth, multiple output, depending on model - 25… + 70 - 10… + 60 (derating as 0… + 60 (derating as from 50° C, mounted vertically) from 50° C, mounted vertically) 20…90 % 95 % without condensation or dripping water IP 20 conforming to IEC 529 Conforming to IEC 61131-2 Vertical and horizontal Vertical (see derating curve, page 8/28) > 100 000 h Possible (see page 8/29) No Possible (max. temperature 50° C) 3000 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 3000 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 2000 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 3000 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 500 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 500 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min Yes (not interchangeable) EN 50081-2 (generic) EN 50081-1 EN 55011/EN 55022 class A EN 55011/EN 55022 class B (7 and 15 W) EN 55011/ EN 55022 class B (30W) EN 55011/EN 55022 class B IEC 61000-6-2 (generic) EN 61000-4-2 (4 kV contact/8 kV air) EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m) EN 61000-4-4 level 3 (2 kV) , EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6 level 3, EN 61000-4-8 level 4 EN 1000-4-11 (voltage drops and cuts) (1) Compatible input voltage, not indicated on the product.


Schemes : page 8/33


8

Power supplies

8


Technical characteristics Type of power supply Product certifications Conforming to standards Safety EMC Low frequency harmonic currents

ABL-7REQ24p –

ABL-7UEQ24p

ABL-7UES24p

EN 60950, FELV EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2 –

ABL-7UPS24p cULus, c us

EN 61000-3-2

Input circuit LED indication Input voltages

– Rated values Permissible values Permissible frequencies Efficiency at nominal load Current consumption Ue = 400 V

Current at switch-on Power factor 2-phase operating mode

a 2 x 380…415 a 2 x 340…460 50…60 > 85 %

a 3 x 380…415 a 3 x 400…520 a 3 x 340…460 a 3 x 360…550

0.75 (240 W)/1.5 0.7 (240 W)/1.2 (480 W)/1.7 (960 W) (480 W)

V

0.65 (120 W)/1.2 (240 W) < 35 0.6 –

V A

Green LED c 24 5/10

mV

Adjustable from 100 to 116% 1 % max < 200 (peak-peak)

ms

15

V V Hz

A A

a 3 x 400…520 a 3 x 360…550

> 90 %

0.55 0.7 0.7/0.9 (960 W) Relaxation if input voltage < a 450

Output circuit LED indication Nominal output voltage (U out) Nominal output current Precision Output voltage Line and load regulation Residual ripple - interference Micro-breaks Holding time for I max and Ve min Temporary overloads Permissible inrush current (U out >19V) Protection Short-circuit Overload Overvoltage Undervoltage

10/20

5

10

10/20/40

Between 8 and 13

See curves, page 8/29

V V

Permanent/automatic or normal restart 1.20 In < 50 ms 28.5 typical 19 typical

Operating and environmental characteristics Connections

Input Output

Ambient conditions

Storage temperature Operating temperature Maximum relative humidity Degree of protection Vibrations Operating position MTBF Connections Series Parallel Dielectric strength

Input/output Input/earth Output/earth (and output/output) Input fuse incorporated Disturbance Conducted/radiated Immunity Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic Conducted interference Mains interference



mm2 mm2

2 x 1.5…2.5 mm2 + earth 4 x 1.5…2.5 mm2 4 x 4…6 mm2

°C °C

- 25…+ 70 0° C…+ 60° C 30…90 % IP 20 or IP XXB Conforming to IEC 61131-2 Vertical > 100 000 h Possible See page 8/29

4 x 1.5…2.5 mm2

4 x 1.5…2.5 mm2 + earth (240 W) 4 x 4…6 mm2 + earth (480 W) 4 x 4…10 mm2 + earth (960 W)

8

3750 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 3500 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min 500 V/50 and 60 Hz 1 min No EN 55011/EN 5022 - class B EN 61000-4-2 (4 kV contact/8 kV air) EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m) EN 61000-4-4 level 3 (2 kV) , EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-6 level3, EN 61000-4-8 level 4 (for ABL-7RE/RP) EN 61000-4-11 (voltage drops and cuts)


Schemes : page 8/33

8/27

8.2

Output characteristics

8

Power supplies

8


Derating The ambient temperature is a determining factor which limits the power that an electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced. Conversely, a power supply can deliver more than its nominal power if the ambient temperature remains largely below the rated operating temperature. The rated ambient temperature for Phaseo power supplies is 50 °C. Above this, derating is necessary up to a maximum temperature of 60 °C. The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) which the power supply can deliver continuously, according to the ambient temperature. P/Pn (%)

140

120

100

80

3

2

1

60 50 40

20 0 0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

Maximum operating temperature (°C)

1 ABL-7RE, ABL-7RP, ABL-7U mounted vertically 2 ABL-7CEM mounted vertically 3 ABL-7CEM mounted horizontally

Derating should be considered in extreme operating conditions: - intensive operation (output current permanently close to the nominal current, combined with a high ambient temperature), - output voltage set above 24 V (to compensate for line voltage drops, for example), - parallel connection to increase the total power. General rules to be complied with

Intensive operation See derating on above graph. Example for ABL-7RE: - without derating, from 0 °C to 50 °C, - derating of nominal current by 2%, per additional °C, up to 60 °C. Rise in output The nominal power is fixed. voltage Increasing the output voltage means that the current delivered must be reduced Parallel connection The total power is equal to the sum of the power supplies used, but the to increase the maximum ambient temperature for operation is 50 °C. power (except To improve heat dissipation, the power supplies must not be in contact ABL-7CEM) with each other

8

8.2

In all cases, there must be adequate convection round the products to ensure easier cooling. There must be a clear space of 50 mm above and below Phaseo power supplies and of 15 mm at the sides.


8/28



Schemes : page 8/33

Output characteristics

Power supplies

(continued)


8

8

Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies

Load limit ABL-7CEM24ppp

ABL-7RE24pp/ABL-7RPpppp ABL-7Upp24pp/ABL-7REQpppp

U out (%)

U out

100 %

19 V

50 %

1

2

I out In

I out

1,1 x In 1,2 x In

1,2 x In

1 ABL-7RE24pp/ABL-7RPpppp 2 ABL-7Upp24pp/ABL-7REQpppp

Temporary overloads ABL-7CEM

ABL-7RE/ABL-7RP I out

T (ms) 100 90

I out

T (ms) 20

I out:(0...100%)

I out:(0...100%)

18

80 70

16

60 50

14

40 12

30 20

10

10 0

0 1,8

2

2,2

2,4

1,2

2,6 x In

1,3

1,4

1,5

1,6

1,7

1,8 x In

ABL-7U T (ms) 800 700 600

I out=0% I out=50%

500

Example: For an ABL-7UPS24ppp power supply with 50 % loading. (I out = 50 %), this power supply can absorb a current peak of 1.6 x In for 250 ms with an output voltage u 19 V.

400 300 250 200

I out=80%

I out=100%

100 0

1,2

1,3

1,4

1,6

1,5

1,7

1,8 x In

Series or parallel connection

ABL 7

ABL 7

+

(1)

8 ABL 7

+

ABL 7

+

Parallel connection

+

Series connection

(1)

8.2 2 x c 24 V / I out

c 24 V / 2 x I out

Family

Series

Parallel

ABL-7CEM

2 products max (1)

No

ABL-7RE/RP

2 products max

2 products max

ABL-7U/REQ

2 products max

2 products max

(1) 2 Shottky diodes 2 A/100 V on ABL-7CEM only. Presentation : pages 8/22 and 8/23



Schemes : page 8/33

8/29

Selection

8

Power supplies

8

Power supplies for d.c. control circuits Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies Upstream protection

ABL-7CEM, ABL-7RE and ABL-7RP power supplies: protection of the power supply line Type of mains supply Type of protection

a 115 V single-phase Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker GB2

C60N

ABL-7CEM24003

GB2-CD06

ABL-7CEM24006

GB2-CD07

ABL-7CEM24012

GB2-CD07

ABL-7RE2402

GB2-pB07

24183 MG24516 (1) 24184 MG24517 (1) 24184 MG24517 (1) MG24517 (1)

ABL-7RE2403

GB2-pB07

ABL-7RE2405

a 230 V single-phase gG fuse

Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker GB2

C60N

2A

GB2-CD07

2A

2A

GB2-CD08

2A

GB2-CD08

2A

GB2-DB06

24184 MG24517 (1) 24185 MG24518 (1) 24185 MG24518 (1) MG24516 (1)

MG24517 (1)

2A

GB2-DB06

MG24516 (1)

2A

GB2-pB08

MG24518 (1)

4A

GB2-DB07

MG17453 (1)

2A

ABL-7RE2410

GB2-pB12

MG17454 (1)

6A

GB2-DB08

MG24518 (1)

4A

ABL-7RP2403

GB2-pB07

MG24517 (1)

2A

GB2-DB07

MG24516 (1)

2A

ABL-7RP2405

GB2-pB07

MG24517 (1)

2A

GB2-DB07

MG24516 (1)

2A

ABL-7RP2410

GB2-pB09

MG24519 (1)

4A

GB2-DB07

MG24516 (1)

2A

ABL-7RP4803

GB2-pB07

MG24517 (1)

2A

GB2-DB07

MG24516 (1)

2A

ABL-7REQ power supplies: protection of the power supply line Type of mains supply Type of protection

a 400 V 2-phase Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker

2-pole

gG fuse

GB2-DBpp

C60N

ABL-7REQ24050

DB07

24100

10 A

ABL-7REQ24100

DB08

24100

10 A

ABL-7UEQ, ABL-7UES and ABL-7UPS power supplies: protection of the power supply line Type of mains supply Type of protection

a 400…480 V 3-phase Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker

2-pole

8

gG fuse

gG fuse

GV2-MEpp

C60N

ABL-7UEQ24100

GV2-ME08 (1)

24212

4A

ABL-7UEQ24200

GV2-ME08 (1)

24213

6A

ABL-7UES24050

GV2-ME08 (1)

24210

2A

ABL-7UPS24100

GV2-ME08 (1)

24210

2A

ABL-7UPS24200

GV2-ME08 (1)

24211

3A

ABL-7UPS24400

GV2-ME08 (1)

24212

4A

(1) UL certified circuit-breaker.

8.2


8/30



Schemes : page 8/33

2A 2A 2A

References

8

Power supplies

8


ABL 7CEM single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies

108700-13-M

Mains input voltage 47...63 Hz V a 100…240 single-phase wide range c 110…220 (1)

Output Nominal voltage power

Nominal current

cV

W

A

24

7

0.3

auto

no

ABL-7CEM24003

0.150

15

0.6

auto

no

ABL-7CEM24006

0.180

30

1.2

auto

no

ABL-7CEM24012

0.220

ABL-7CEM

Autoprotect reset

Conforming Reference to standard EN 61000-3-2

Weight

kg

ABL-7RE single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies

43367-15-M

Mains input voltage 47...63 Hz V a 100…240 single-phase wide range


Nominal current

Autoprotect reset


Weight

cV

W

A

24

48

2

auto

no

ABL-7RE2402

0.520

72

3

auto

no

ABL-7RE2403

0.520

120

5

auto

no

ABL-7RE2405

1.000

240

10

auto

no

ABL-7RE2410

2.200

kg

ABL-7RP single-phase regulated switch mode power supplies ABL-7RE2405 ABL-7RP2405 ABL-7RP4803

Mains input voltage 47...63 Hz V

530894

a 100...240 single-phase wide range c 110...220 (1)

Nominal current

cV

W

A

12

60

5

auto/man

yes

ABL-7RP1205

1.000

24

72

3

auto/man

yes

ABL-7RP2403

0.520

120

5

auto/man

yes

ABL-7RP2405

1.000

240

10

auto/man

yes

ABL-7RP2410

2.200

144

2.5

auto/man

yes

ABL-7RP4803

1.000

48

Autoprotect reset


Weight

kg

ABL-7REQ 2-phase regulated switch mode power supplies Mains input voltage 47...63 Hz V

ABL-7REQ


a 380…415


Nominal current

Autoprotect reset


Weight

cV

W

A

24

120

5

auto/man

no

ABL-7REQ24050

0.850

240

10

auto/man

no

ABL-7REQ24100

1.200

kg

ABL-7U 3-phase regulated switch mode power supplies 108387-25-M

Mains input voltage 47...63 Hz V


Nominal current

cV

W

A

24

240

10

auto/man

no

ABL-7UEQ24100

1.200

480

20

auto/man

no

ABL-7UEQ24200

2.100

120

5

auto/man

no

ABL-7UES24050

1.300

240

10

auto/man

yes

ABL-7UPS24100

1.300

480

20

auto/man

yes

ABL-7UPS24200

2.300

960 40 auto/man (1) Compatible input voltage, not indicated on the product.

yes

ABL-7UPS24400

4.500


Schemes : page 8/33

a 3x380…415

a 3x400…520

24

Autoprotect reset


Weight

8

kg

8.2 ABL-7UPS



8/31

Dimensions

8

Power supplies

8


ABL-7RE2405 ABL-7RP1205/2405/4803

120

27

120 ABL-7CEM24ppp ABL-7CEM24003

ABL-7RE2410 ABL-7RP2410

120

ABL-7RE2402/2403 ABL-7RP2403

120

ABL-7RE24pp/ABL-7RPpppp Common side view Mounting on 35 and 75 mm rails

54

ABL-7CEM24006/ ABL-7CEM24012

135

ABL-7REQ24ppp/ABL-7UEQ24100/ABL-7UES24050/ ABL-7UPS24100

120

75

127

Common front view

70

95

45 a

P

6

68

Panel mounting

(1)

60 (62,5)

ABL-

P mm 130 154 154 171 171

7REQ24050 7REQ24100 7UEQ24100 7UES24050 7UPS24100

35 (38,5) (1) 2 x M4 or 2 x Ø4.5 ABL-7UEQ24200

a mm – – – 15 15

ABL-7UPS24200

201

84

240

ABL-7UPS24400

81

230 242

8

6

8.2

106

275


8/32



Schemes : page 8/33

84

209

170

197

60

Schemes

8

Power supplies

8


–

+

–

+

–

–

+

Filter

+

–

+

+

+ L/+

N/

L/+

N/

ABL-7RP2410

Filter

+

Filter

L

N

+

+

+

ABL-7RP1205/2405/4803

L/+

ABL-7RP2403

N/

ABL-7RE2410 L

L

N

ABL-7RE2405

+

N

ABL-7RE2402/2403

L

NC

+

N

ABL-7CEM24ppp

ABL-7REQ24ppp

ABL-7UEppppp

+ +

ABL-7UPppppp

+ +

+ +

L1

L

L1

L2

N

L2 L3

L3

8

8.2




Schemes : page 8/32

8/33

9

9/0

Contents

9 - Services

9

Technical information b Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/2 b Power supply module selection document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/4 b Standards and certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/6 b Environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/7 b Optional conformal coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/9 b Automation product certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/10 b Community regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/11

Schneider Electric worldwide b Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/12

Index b Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9/18

9

9/1

References


0

Documentation

An electronic documentation (hardware and software) in 4 languages (English, French, German and Spanish) is included in the software package (1). Each software includes online contextual help in 4 languages (2). These electronic documentation are added to following paper documentation: b B7 format multilingual data sheet (93 x 127 mm), supplied with each application-specific module and communication module. b B7 format mini-book (93 x 127 mm) for hardware installation of processors, slot-PLCs, racks and power supplies, to be ordered separately. b Kit of manuals (178 x 216 mm) for hardware installation of: v Premium processors and Atrium slot-PLCs, v discrete I/O modules, v analog I/O modules, v communication overview, v grounding and cabling system installation. b Unity Pro quick start manual. (1) Only with Unity Pro software. (2) English, French, German, Spanish and Italian for PL7 software.

Unity documentation manuals Description

Use

Reference

Premium et Atrium To be ordered separately reference manual: bases, discrete/analog modules, communication, grounding and cabling system installation

UNY USE 20110 V20E

Weight kg –

Minibook: hardware installation of processors, slot-PLCs, racks and power supplies

5 languages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian) Sold in lots of 10 To be ordered separately

UNY USE 20910 V10M

–

Unity Pro quick start manual

To be ordered separately

UNY USE 40010 V20E

–

PL7 documentation manuals Description

Use

Reference

Weight kg –

Premium et Atrium To be ordered separately reference manual: bases, discrete/analog modules, communication

TSX DM 57 43E

Minibook: hardware installation of processors, slot-PLCs, racks and power supplies

UNY USE 20910 V10M

–

TLX DOC PL7 44E

–

5 languages (English, French, German, Spanish and Italian) Sold in lots of 10 To be ordered separately

All PL7 software To be ordered separately installation software: reference, application-specific functions, communication, converters, runtime screen ans diagnostics

Documentation on CD-Rom

9

Description

Use

Full documentation, 4 languages (English, French, hardware (Atrium, Premium German and Spanish) and Quantum) and Unity To be ordered separately software

9/2

Reference UNY USE 909 CDM

Weight kg –



0

Documentation

Bus/network documentation manuals (178 x 216 mm) Grounding and cabling system installation guide

Included in Premium and Atrium reference manual UNY USE 20110 V20E

UNY USE 10010 V11E

–

Ethernet network (10BASE-5) To be ordered separately reference manual

TSX DR ETH E

CANopen bus module Installation manual


TSX DM CPP 100E

X-Way communication reference manual


TSX DR NET E

0,320

Fipio bus reference manual


TSX DR FIP E

0,230

Fipway network installation and setup Fipio/Fipway optic fibre transceiver setup


TSX DG FPW E

0,140


TSX DM OZD 01E

0,110

Modbus Plus network installation guide


890 USE 100 00

0,040

Modbus serial link user’s manual


TSX DG MDB E

0,040

Uni-Telway serial link installation and setup


TSX DG UTW E

0,060

Jnet serial link user’s manual To be ordered separately (English and French)

TSX DG JNT M

0,360

Profibus DP module installation manual

TSX DM PBY 100E

0,140

TSX DM IBY 100E

0,140


INTERBUS modules installation To be ordered separately manual

0,120

–

9

9/3

TSX PSY power supply Modicon Premium automation module selection document platform (specimen to be photocopied)

The power required to supply each TSX RKY rack depends on the type and number of modules installed. It is therefore necessary to create a power consumption table for each rack in order to define the most suitable TSX PSY power supply module for each rack. The table below can be used to calculate the consumption on the three different voltages to be supplied (c 5 V, c 24 V, c 24 VR). Procedure : b Check and choose a power supply module corresponding to the power supplies available for the 3 voltages. b Check that the total power absorbed on these three voltages does not exceed the overall power of the power supply module. b Values to be entered according to the type of Premium PLC configuration. Reference Rack n°

Unity processors with memory extension card

PL7 processors with memory extension card

Discrete I/O

9

Bus X remote Analogue I/O

Safety

Number

Consumption in mA (1) Voltage c 5 V Voltage c 24 VR Module Total Module Total

TSX P57 Cp 0244M TSX P57 0244M TSX P57 104M TSX P57 1634M TSX P57 154M TSX P57 204M TSX P57 2634M TSX P57 254M TSX P57 304M TSX P57 3634M TSX P57 354M TSX P57 454M TSX P57 4634M TSX P57 554M TSX P57 5634M TSX P57 103M TSX P57 153M TSX P57 203M TSX P57 2623M TSX P57 253M TSX P57 2823M TSX P57 303M TSX P57 3623M TSX P57 353M TSX P57 453M TSX P57 4823M

Configuration S S D S D D D D D D D D D D S S D D D D D D D D D

910 910 850 1650 930 850 1650 930 1180 1900 1180 1680 1880 1680 1880 440 8530 750 1110 820 1180 1000 1360 1060 1080 1440

TSX DEY 08D2 TSX DEY 16A2 TSX DEY 16A3 TSX DEY 16A4 TSX DEY 16A5 TSX DEY 16D2 TSX DEY 16D3 TSX DEY 16FK TSX DEY 32D2K TSX DEY 32D3K TSX DEY 64D2K TSX DSY 08R4D TSX DSY 08R5 TSX DSY 08R5A TSX DSY 08S5 TSX DSY 08T2 TSY DSY 08T22 TSX DSY 08T31 TSX DSY 16R5 TSX DSY 16S4 TSX DSY 16S5 TSX DSY 16T2 TSX DSY 16T3 TSX DSY 32T2K TSX DSY 64T2K TSX DMY 28FK TSX DMY 28RFK TSX REY 200 TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 420 TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 810 TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 1614 TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800 (2) TSX PAY 262 TSX PAY 282

S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

55 80 80 80 80 80 80 250 135 140 155 55 55 55 125 55 55 55 80 220 220 80 80 140 155 300 300 500 660 500 270 475 270 300 900 200 150 150

Total (cary ovet to page 9/5)

9/4

Format S : standard D : double

Current (mA)

Voltage c 24 V Module Total

80

135 135 75 160 275 315 80 70 80

135

75 75

300 200 200

9

TSX PSY power supply Modicon Premium automation module selection document platform

9

(specimen to be photocopied)

Reference Rack n°

Format S : standard D : double

Number

Consumption 1n mA (1) Voltage c 5 V Voltage c 24 VR Module Total Module Total

Voltage c 24 V Module Total

Carried forward Counting, motion, control and weighing

Communication

Terminal

TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 4A TSX CTY 2C TSX CCY 1128 TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 41 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 42 TSX CAY 33 TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21 TSX CSY 84/164 TSX ISP Y101

S S S S S D S D D S S D S

280 330 850 660 1100 1500 1100 1500 1500 510 650 1800 150

TSX ETY 110 (3) TSX ETY 110 (4) TSX ETY 110 WS (3) TSX ETY 110 WS (4) TSX ETY 4103/5103 TSX IBY 100 TSX PBY 100 TSX SAY 100 TSX SAY 1000 TSX SCY 11601 TSX SCY 21601 TSX SCP 111 TSX SCP 112 TSX SCP 114 TSX FPP 10 TSX FPP 20 TSX JNP 112 TSX JNP 114 TSX MBP 100 TSX CPP 110 TSX P ACC 01

S S S S S S S S S S S – – – – – – – – –

800 1200 800 1200 360 500 400 110 100 350 350 140 120 150 330 330 120 150 220 60 150

T FTX 117 ADJ 02

–

310

30 36 15 15 15 30 15 30 30 50 100 145

Total of the 3 powers Consumption per voltage

Total current (mA) x5V Power (mW)

x 24 VR +

x 24 V +

=

Power available in mW Choice of power supply

TSX PSY 1610 TSX PSY 2600 TSX PSY 3610 TSX PSY 5520 TSX PSY 5500

S S D D D

TSX PSY 8500

D

c 24 V non isolated a 100…240 V c 24 V non isolated c 24…48 V isolated a 100…120 V a 200…240 V a 100…120 V a 200…240 V

Overall

15 000 25 000 35 000 35 000 35 000

15 000 15 000 19 000 19 000 19 000

– 12 000 – – 19 000

30 26 50 50 50

000 000 000 000 000

75 000

–

38 000

77 000 (5)

(1) Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1. (2) If using an external c 24 V sensor power supply, the consumption on the c 24 V voltage should not be included. (3) Without remote power supply (RJ 45). (4) With remote power supply (AUI). (5) 77,000 mW at 60 °C, 85,000 mW at 55 °C or 100,000 mW at 55 °C when using TSX FAN fan modules.

9

9/5


Standards and certifications

Standards, certifications and environment conditions Standards and certifications Modicon Premium and Atrium PLCs have been developed to conform to the principal national and international standards concerning electronic equipment for industrial automation systems. b Requirements specific to programmable controllers: functional characteristics, immunity, resistance, safety, etc.: IEC 61131-2, CSA 22.2 N° 142, UL 508. b Merchant navy requirements of the main international bodies: ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LR, RINA, RMRS, etc. b Compliance with European Directives: v Low Voltage: 73/23/EEC amendment 93/68/EEC, v Electromagnetic Compatibility: 89/336/EEC amendments 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC. b Electrical qualities and self-extinguishing capacity of insulating materials: UL 746C, UL 94. b Hazardous areas calssification: CSA 22.2 No. 213, Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D.

Characteristics Service conditions and recommendations relating to environment Temperature Operation °C 0...+ 60 (to IEC 61131-2, + 5...+ 55) (1) 0...+ 70 with TSX FAN fan modules (1) °C -25...+ 70 (according to IEC 61131-2) Storage Relative humidity Operation % 10…95 without condensation Storage % 5…95 without condensation (according to IEC 61131-2) Altitude m 0…2000 TSX PSY p610 TSX PSY 5520 TSX PSY 2600 Supply voltage Nominal voltage V c 24 c 48 a 100...240 Limit voltages Nominal frequencies Limit frequencies

Hz Hz

c 19..30 – –

c 19...60 – –

a 90...264 50/60 47/63

TSX PSY p500 a 100...120 a 200...240 a 140/190...264 50/60 47/63

Protective treatment of Modicon Premium PLCs Premium/Atrium PLCs meet the requirements of "TC" treatment (Treatment for all Climates). For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding to "TH" treatment (treatment for hot and humid environments), Premium PLCs must be embedded in envelopes with a minimum IP 54 protection, in compliance with IEC 60664 and NF C 20 040. Premium/Atrium PLCs themselves offer protection to IP 20 level (1). They can therefore be installed without an envelope in reserved-access areas which do not exceed pollution level 2 (control room with no dust-producing machine or activity). The pollution level 2 does not take account of more severe environmental conditions: air pollution by dust, smoke, corrosive or radioactive particles, vapours or salts, attack by fungi, insects, ... If the control system needs to operate in a corrosive environment, some of then Premium modules and racks can be ordered with a conformal applied to the cover and bezel, see page 9/9.

9

(1) TSX P57 0244/104/154M and TSX P57 454/4634/554/5634M: 0...+ 57 °C (or 0...67 )C with TSX FAN fan modules) when some of then I/O modules are insert adjacent to above processors. (2) In the case where a position is not occupied by a module, a TSX RKA 02 protection cover must be installed.

9/6

0

Environment tests


0

Standards, certifications and environment conditions Environment tests Name of test

Standards

Levels

Immunity to LF interference (e) (1) Voltage and frequency variation

IEC/EN 61131-2

Direct voltage variation Harmonic 3 Short momentary interrupt Voltage shut-down/start-up

IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61131-2

Name of test

Standards

0.85 Un/0.95 Fn for 30 minutes; 1.15 Un/1.05 Fn for 30 minutes; 0.8 Un/0.9 Fn for 5 seconds; 1.2 Un/1.1 Fn for 5 seconds 0.85 Un...1.2 Un for 30 minutes with 5% ripple (peak values) 10 % Un; 0°/5 min...180°/5 min 10 ms with a supply; 1 ms with c supply Un-0-Un; Un for 60 s; 3 cycles separated by 10 s Un-0-Un; Un for 5 s; 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s Un-0.9-Udl; Un for 60 s; 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s Where: Un: nominal voltage Fn: nominal frequency Udl: detection level when powered Levels

Immunity to HF interference. (e) (1) Damped oscillatory wave

IEC 61000-4-12

Electrical fast transient bursts

IEC 61000-4-4

Surge

IEC 61000-4-5

Electrostatic discharges Radiated electromagnetic field

IEC 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-3

Conducted interference induced IEC 61000-4-6 by radiated field

a / c supply: 1kV in serial mode Discrete I/O u 24V: 1 kV in serial mode a / c supply: 2 kV in wire/common mode Discrete I/O > 48V: 2 kV in common mode; other ports: 1 kV in common mode a / csupply: 2 kV in wire mode/1 kV in serial mode; Discrete I/O a: 2 kV in wire mode/1 kV in serial mode; Discrete I/O c: 2 kV in wire mode/0.5 kV in serial mode; shielded cable: 1 kV in common mode 6 kV contact, 8 kV air 10 V/m; 80 MHz...2 GHz Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80 %/1 kHz 10 V/0,15 MHz...80 MHz Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80%/1 kHz

Electromagnetic emissions (e) (1) (2) Interference voltage

IEC 61000-6-4

Interference field (3)

IEC 61000-6-4

Class A 150 kHz...500 kHz quasi-peak 79 dB (µV); average 66 dB (µV) 500 kHz...30 MHz quasi-peak 73 dB (µV); average 60 dB (µV) Class A, 10 m measurement 30 MHz...230 MHz quasi-peak 40 dB (µV); 230 MHz...1 GHz quasi-peak 47 dB (µV)

Immunity to climatic variations Dry heat Cold Continuous humid heat

IEC 60068-2-2 Bd IEC 60068-2-1 Ad IEC 60068-2-3 Ca

Cyclical humid heat Cyclical temperature variations

IEC 60068-2-3 Db IEC 60068-2-14 Nb

Temperature Rise

IEC 61131-2/UL 508 CSA 22-2 No.142

60 ° C for 16 hours (D.O); 40 ° C for 16 hours (D.C) 0 ° C for 16 hours 60 ° C with 93 % relative humidity/96 hours (D.O); 40 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity/96 hours (D.C); [55 ° C (D.O)/40 ° C (D.O)] - 25 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity; 2 cycles: 12 hours/12 hours 0 ° C...60 ° C/5 cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.O) 0 ° C...40 ° C/5 cycles: 6 hours/6 hours (D.C) Ambient temperature: 60 ° C

Withstand to climatic variations Dry heat (power off) IEC 60068-2-2 Bb Cold (power off) IEC 60068-2-1 Ab Humid heat (power off) IEC 60068-2-30 dB Heat shocks when not operational IEC 60068-2-14 Na

70 ° C for 96 hours -25 ° C for 96 hours 60 ° C-25 ° C with 93...95 % relative humidity; 2 cycles: 12 hours/12 hours - 25 ° C...70 ° C; 2 cycles: 3 hours/3 hours

D.O: Device Open (device to be embedded in an envelope D.C: Device Closed (device can be installed without envelope), see (1) page 9/6 (e): tests required by European directives e. and based on IEC / EN 61131-2 standards. (1) Devices must be installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the UNY USE 10010 V11E manual “Grounding and cabling system intallation guide”. (2) These tests are performed without a cabinet, with devices fixed on a metal grid and wired as per the recommendations in the industrial UNY USE 10010 V11E manual “Grounding and cabling system intallation guide”. (3) In the case where the limits of electromagnetic emissions between 30 MHz and 1 GHz must be supervised, it is recommended to use the TSX RKY 6EX/8EX racks instead of the TSX RKY 6/8 racks.

9/7

9

Environment tests (continued) Modicon Premium automation

platform Standards, certifications and environment conditions Environment tests Name of test

Standards

Levels

Immunity to mechanical constraints Sinusoidal vibrations Shocks

IEC 60068-2-6 Fc IEC 60068-2-6 Fc IEC 60068-2-27 Ea

3 Hz...100 Hz/1 mm amplitude/0.7 g; endurance: fr/90 min/axis (application coefficient < 10) 10...150 Hz/75 µm amplitude/1 g; endurance: 10 cycles of 1 octave/min 15 g-11 ms; 3 shocks/direction/axis

Withstand to mechanical constraints Flat freefall Controlled position freefall Random freefall, equipment in packaging

IEC 60068-2-32 Ed IEC 60068-2-31 Ec IEC 60068-2-32 method 1

10 cm/2 falls 30 ° or 10 cm/2 falls 1 m/5 falls

Equipment and personnel safety (1) Dielectric strength and insulation UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.14 resistance (e) IEC 60950 Continuity of earth(e) UL 508 CSA 22-2 No.142 Leakage current (e) CSA 22-2 No.142/IEC 60950 Protection offered by enclosures CSA 22-2 No.142 (e) IEC 60950 Withstand to impacts CSA 22-2 No.142/IEC 60950

c 24/48V supply: 1,500 V rms; a 100/220V supply: 2,000 V rms Discrete I/O u 48 V: 500 V rms; Discrete I/O > 48 V: 2,000 V rms; > 10 MΩ < 0,1 Ω/30 A/2 min < 3.5 mA fixed device IP 20 500 g sphere: fall from 1.3 m D.O: Device Open (device to be embedded in an envelope D.C: Device Closed (device can be installed without envelope), see (1) page 9/6 (e): tests required by European directives e. and based on IEC / EN 61131-2 standards.

(1) Devices must be installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the UNY USE 10010 V11E manual “Grounding and cabling system intallation guide”. (2) These tests are performed without a cabinet, with devices fixed on a metal grid and wired as per the recommendations in the industrial UNY USE 10010 V11E manual “Grounding and cabling system intallation guide”.

9

9/8

0

Optional conformal coating Modicon Premium automation

platform

0

Standards, certifications and environment conditions If the control system needs to operate in a corrosive environment, some of then Premium modules and racks can be ordered with a conformal coating applied to components of the product. Conformal coating will extend its life and enhance its environmental performance capabilities. For more information or to order, please contact your Regional Sales Office. Mixed flowing gas (power on) Standard EIA 364-65 level III

Pollutant CI2 NO2 H 2S

Parts/billion 20 (±5) 200 (±50) 100 (±20)

Quantum's performance Meets the standard Exceeds standard (1250 parts/billion) Meets standard

ISA-S71.04 GX severe

CI2 NO2 H 2S SO2

10 1250 50 300

Exceeds standard (20 parts/billion) Meets standard Exceeds standard (100 parts/billion) Meets standard

Humidity (operating) Standard IEC-68-2-3

Concentration (%) 93 @ 60 °C (140 °F)

Quantum's performance Meets standard

Salt mist (non-operating) Standard IEC 68-2-11

Concentration (%) 5 (±1)

Quantum's performance Exceeds standard (5.7%)

Fungus resistance Standard MIL-I-46058C

Quantum's performance Designed to meet standard

Temperature cycling (operating) Standard IEC 68-2-14

Cycles 100 @ 0…60 °C (32…140 °F)

Quantum's performance Meets standard

Dust (non-operating) Standard EIA 364-TP91 (pending)

Pollutant Silica Calcite Iron oxide Alumina Gypsum Paper fiber Cotton fiber Polyester fiber Carbon black Human hair Cigarette ash

Weight (%) 36 29 12 8 5 3 3 2 1 0.5 0.5

Quantum's performance Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard Meets standard

9

9/9

Technical information

9

Automation products certifications

In some countries, certification of certain electrical components is enforced by law. A standard conformity certificate is then issued by the official organization. Each certified product must carry approval symbols when enforced. Use on board merchant navy vessels generally requires prior approval (= certification) of an electrical device by certain marine classification authorities. Key CSA C-Tick UL Key ABS BV DNV GL GOST LR RINA RMRS

Certification body Canadian Standards Association Australian Communication Authority Underwriters Laboratories Classification authority American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Institut de recherche Scientifique Gost Standardt Lloyd's Register Registro Italiano Navale Register of Shipping

Country Canada Australia USA Country USA France Norway Germany C.I.S., Russia United-Kingdom Italiy C.I.S.

The table below shows the situation as of the 01.07.2004 for certifications obtained or pending from organizations for base PLCs. An overview of certificates for Telemecanique products is available on our Internet web site : www.telemecanique.com

Product certifications Certifications C-Tick Certified Pending certification

Advantys STB ConneXium Lexium MHD/BPH Magelis iPC Magelis XBT-F/FC Magelis XBT-G/H/P/E/HM/PM Momentum Premium PL7 Unity Quantum Concept Unity TBX Telefast 2 TSX Micro TSX/PMX 47 à 107 Twido Twin Line

UL

CSA

ACA

SIMTARS

GOST

USA

Canada

Australia

Australia

CEI, Russia

Hazardous locations Class 1 Div 2 (1) US (2)

CSA CSA FM FM

(2) (1) Hazardous locations: CSA 22.2 no. 213, certified products are suitable for use in Class I, division 2, groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous locations only. (2) Depending on product, see pages 5/46 to 5/50. (3) cULus north-american certification (Canada and US).

Local certifications BG Germany AS-Interface Europe

9

9/10

TSX DPZ 10D2A safety module (TSX Micro) TSX PAY 262/282 safety modules (Premium) TSX SAZ 10 master module (TSX Micro) TSX SAY 100/1000 master modules (Premium) TBX SAP 10 Fipio bus/AS-Interface bus gateway

Technical information

9

Automation products certifications Community regulations

Marine classification Marine classification des authorities

Certified Pending certification

ABS

BV

DNV

GL

LR

USA

France

Norway

Germany

Unit.-Kingdom Italiy

Advantys STB ConneXium Lexium MHD/BPH Magelis iPC Magelis XBT-F/FC Magelis XBT-H/P/E/HM/PM Momentum Premium PL7 (2) Unity Quantum Concept (2) Unity TBX Telefast 2 TSX Micro TSX/PMX 47 à 107 Twido Twin Line

RINA

RMRS C.I.S.

(1)

(1) Depending on product, see pages 5/46 to 5/50. (2) Request for Marine certifications forecast 4th quarter 2004.

Community regulations European directives The opening of European markets implies a harmonization of regulations in the various European Union member states. European Directives are documents used to remove obstacles to the free movement of goods and their application is compulsory in all states of the European Union. Member states are obliged to transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and, at the same time, to withdraw any conflicting regulations. The Directives, particularly those of a technical nature with which we are concerned, only set objectives, called “general requirements”. The manufacturer must take all necessary measures to ensure that his products conform to the requirements of each Directive relating to his equipment. As a general rule, the manufacturer affirms that his product conforms to the necessary requirements of the Directive(s) by applying the e label to his product. e marking is applied to Telemecanique products where relevant. The significance of e marking b e marking on a product means that the manufacturer certifies that his product conforms to the relevant European Directives ; it is necessary in order that a product which is subject to a Directive(s) can be marketed and freely moved within the European Union. b e marking is intended solely for the national authorities responsible for market regulation.

d

For electrical equipment, only conformity of the product to standards indicates that it is suitable for use, and only a guarantee by a recognised manufacturer can ensure a high level of quality. One or more Directives, as appropriate, may apply to our products, in particular : b The Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC : e marking under the terms of this Directive is compulsory as of 1 January 1997. b The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC : e marking on the products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since 1 January 1996. The system designer must use devices external to the SCADA to protect against active faults, which are not indicated and are judjed to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor). 9/11

9

Schneider Electric worldwide

0

Up-dated: 30-07-2003 Afghanistan

Contacts are assured by

Schneider Electric India

Albania


Schneider Electric Austria

Algeria

b Schneider Electric

voie A Lot C22 Zone industrielle Rouiba - Alger

Andorra


Schneider Electric France

Angola


Schneider Electric South Africa

Anguilla


Schneider Electric Dominican Rep.

Antartica


Schneider Electric Brazil

Antigua & Barbuda



Argentina

b Schneider Argentina

Viamonte 2850 - 1678 Caseros (provincia Buenos Aires)

Armenia


Schneider Electric Russian Fed.

Aruba



Australia

b Schneider Electric (Australia) Pty. 2 Solent Circuit Limited

Tel.: +54 1 716 88 88 Fax: +54 1 716 88 33

www.schneider-electric.com.ar

Tel.: +61 298 51 28 00 Fax: +61 296 29 83 40

www.schneider.com.au

Tel.: +431 610 540 Fax: +431 610 54 54

www.schneider-electric.at

www.squared.com

b Schneider Austria Ges.m.b.H.

Birostrasse 11 1239 Wien

Azerbaijan



Bahamas


Union Village PO Box 3901 - Nassau

Tel. : +1 242 327 42 91 Fax : +1 242 327 42 91

Bahrain


Floor 1 - Juma Building Abu Horaira Avenue PO Box 355 - 304 Manama

Tel.: +97 322 7897 Fax: +97 321 8313

Bangladesh



Austria

9

Norwest Business Park Baulkham Hill _ NSW 2153

Tel. : +213 21 92 97 02 à 09 Fax : +213 21 92 97 00 à 01

Barbados



Belarus

b Schneider Electric Industries SA

Prospect Macherova 5, of. 202 220004 Minsk

Tel. : +375 172 23 75 50 Fax : +375 172 23 97 61

Belgium

b Schneider Electric nv/sa

Dieweg 3 B - 1180 Brussels

Tel.: +3223737711 Fax: +3223753858

www.schneider-electric.be

Belize


Schneider Electric USA

Benin


Schneider Electric Ivory Coast

Bermuda



Bhutan



Bolivia


Schneider Electric Chile

Bosnia and Herzegovina


Schneider Electric Croatia

Botswana



Bouvet island



Brazil

b Schneider Electric Brazil Ltda.

Avenida Das Nações Unidas 23223 Jurubatuba - CEP 04795-907 São Paulo-SP

Tel.: +55 55 24 52 33 Fax: +55 55 22 51 34

www.schneider-electric.com.br

Brunei (Darussalam)


Schneider Electric Singapore

Bulgaria


Expo 2000, Boulevard Vaptzarov 1407 Sofiav

Tel.: +3592 919 42 Fax: +3592 962 44 39

www.schneiderelectric.bg

Burkina Faso



Burundi


Schneider Electric Kenya

Cambodia


Schneider Electric Viet Nam

Cameroon

b Schneider Electric Cameroon

166, rue de l'Hôtel de Ville BP12087 - Douala

Tel.: +237 343 38 84 Fax: +237 343 11 94

Canada

b Schneider Canada

19, Waterman Avenue M4 B1Y2 Toronto - Ontario

Tel.: +1 416 752 8020 Fax: +1 416 752 4203

Cape Verde


Schneider Electric Senegal

Caribee



Cayman islands



Central African Republic


Schneider Electric Cameroon

Chad



Chile

b Schneider Electric Chile S.A.

Avda. Pdte Ed. Frei Montalva, 6001-31 Tel.: +56 2 444 3000 Conchali - Santiago Fax: +56 2 423 9335

www.schneider-electric.co.cl

China

b Schneider Beijing

Landmark bldg-Room 1801 8 North Dong Sanhuan Rd Chaoyang District 100004 Beijing

www.schneider-electric.com.cn

9/12

Tel.: +86 10 65 90 69 07 Fax: +86 10 65 90 00 13

www.schneider-electric.ca


0

Up-dated: 30-07-2003 Christmas island


Cocos (Keeling) islands


Schneider Electric Australia

Colombia

b Schneider Electric de Colombia

Calle 45A #102-48 Bogota DC

S.A.


Tel.: +57 1 426 97 00 Fax: +57 1 426 97 40

Comoros


Schneider Electric la Reunion

Congo



Cook islands



Costa Rica

b Schneider Centroamérica Ltda.

1.5 kmts oeste de la Embajada Americana, Pavas, San José, Costa Rica C.A. Apartado: 4123-1000 San Jose

Tel.: +506 232-60-55 Fax: +506 232-04-26

Croatia

b Schneider Electric SA

Fallerovo Setaliste 22 HR - 10000 Zagreb

Tel.: +385 1 367 100 Fax: +385 1 367 111

Cuba


Bureau de Liaison de La Havane Calle 36- N°306-Apto1 Entre 3ra y 5ta Avenida Miramar Playa Habana

Tel.: +53 724 15 59 Fax: +53 724 12 17

Cyprus

b Schneider Electric Cyprus

28 General Timayia Avenue Kyriakos Building, Block #A301 Larnaca 6046

Tel.: +00357 248 12646 Fax: +00357 246 37382

Czech Republic

b Schneider Electric CZ, s.r.o.

Thámova 13 Praha 8 - 186 00

Tel.: +420 2 810 88 111 Fax: +420 2 24 81 08 49

www.schneider-electric.cz

Tel.: +45 44 73 78 88 Fax: +45 44 68 5255

www.schneider-electric.dk

www.schneider-ca.com

Democratic Rep. of Congo



Denmark

b Schneider Electric A/S

Baltorpbakken 14 DK-2750 Ballerup

Djibouti


Schneider Electric Egypt

Dominican Republic


Calle Jacinto Manon Esq. Federico Geraldino Edificio D' Roca Plaza Suite 402, Ens. Paraiso - Santo Domingo

Ecuador

b Schneider Electric Ecuador SA

Av.Republica del Salvador 1082 y Nac Tel. : +593 2 224 42 42 Edificio Mansion Blanca-Quito Fax : +593 2 224 42 94

Egypt

b Schneider Electric Egypt sae

68, El Tayaran Street Nasr City, 11371 - Cairo

El Salvador


Schneider Electric USA

Equatorial Guinea



Eritrea



Estonia

b Lexel Electric

Ehitajate tee 110 EE 12618 Talinn

Ethiopia



Falkland islands


Schneider Electric Brazil

Faroe islands



Fiji



Finland

b Schneider Electric Oy

Sinimäentie 14 02630 Espoo

Tel. : +358 9 527 000 Fax : +358 9 5270 0376

www.schneider-electric.fi

France

b Schneider Electric SA

5, rue Nadar 92500 Rueil Malmaison

Tel.: +33 (0)1 41 29 82 00 Fax: +33 (0)1 47 51 80 20

www.schneider-electric.fr

French Polynesia



French West Indies



Gabon



Gambia



Georgia



Germany

b Schneider Electric GmbH

Gothaer Straße 29 D-40880 Ratingen

Tel.: +49210 240 40 Fax: +492 10 240 49 256

www.schneiderelectric.de

Ghana

b Schneider Electric Ghana

PMB Kia 3rd Floor Opeibea House Airport Commercial Center Liberation road - Accra

Tel. : +233 21 70 11 687 Fax : +233 21 77 96 22

Gilbraltar


Schneider Electric Spain

Greece

b Schneider Electric AE

14th km - RN Athens-Lamia GR - 14564 Kifissia

Greenland


Schneider Electric United States

Grenada



Guadeloupe


Schneider Electric Martinique

Guam



Tel.: +1 809 334 66 63 Fax: +1 809 334 66 68

Tel.: +20 24 01 01 19 Fax: +20 24 01 66 87

www.schneider.com.eg

Tel. : +372 650 97 00 Fax : +372 650 97 22

Tel.: +302 106 29 52 00 Fax: +302 106 29 52 10

9 www.schneider-electric.com.gr

9/13


0

Up-dated: 30-07-2003 Guatemala



Guinea-Bissau


Schneider Electric Sénégal

Guinea



Guyana



Haiti



Heard & Mac Donald isl.



Honduras



Hong Kong

b Schneider Electric (Hong Kong)

Room 3108-28, 31th Floor, Sun Hung Kai Centre, 30 Harbour Road, Wanchai

Tel.: +852 25 65 06 21 Fax: +852 28 11 10 29

Fehérvári út 108 – 112 H-1116 Budapest

Tel.: +36 1 382 26-06 Fax: +36 1 206 1429

www.schneider-electric.hu

Ltd

Hungary

b Schneider Electric Hungária Villamossági Rt.

Iceland


Schneider Electric Denmark

India

b Schneider Electric India

Max House, 1 Dr Jha Marg, Okhla 110 020 New Dehli

Tel. : +91 11 631 85 84 Tel. : +91 11 631 71 61

www.schneiderelectric-in.com

Indonesia

b P.T. Schneider Indonesia

Ventura Building 7th Floor Jalan R.A. Kartini Kav.26 Cilandak - 12430 Jakarta

Tel.: +62 +21 750 44 06 Fax: +62 +21 750 44 15/ 16

www.schneider-electric.co.id

Iran (Islamic Republic of)

b Telemecanique Iran

1047 Avenue VALI ASSR P.O. Box 15875-3547 15116 Teheran

Tel.: +98 218 71 01 42 Fax: +98 218 71 81 87

Irak


38050 Grenoble Cedex 9

Tel.: +33 04 76 60 54 27 Fax: +33 04 76 60 56 60

Ireland

b Schneider Electric Ireland

Maynooth Road Cellbridge - Co. Kildare

Tel.: +353+0 1 6012200 Fax: +353+0 1 6012201

www.schneiderelectric.ie

Italy

b Schneider Electric S.p.A.

Centro Direzionale Colleoni Palazzo Sirio - Viale Colleoni, 7 20041 Agrate Brianza (Mi)

Tel.: +39 39 655 8111 Fax: +39 39 605 6237

www.schneiderelectric.it

Ivory Coast

b Schneider Electric Afrique de

Rue Pierre et Marie Curie 18 BP 2027 Abidjan 18

Tel.: +225 21 75 00 10 Fax: +225 21 75 00 30

l'Ouest

Jamaica


Shop#5, Plaza Dunrobin 30 Dunrobin Avenue - Kingstown

Tel. : +1876 755 41 27 Tel. : +931 87 74

Japan

b Schneider Electric Japan Ltd

Torigoe F. Bldg 1-8-2, Torigoe Taito-Ku - 111-0054 Tokyo

Tel.: +81 358 35 35 81 Fax: +81 358 35 35 85

Jordan

b Schneider Electric Industr. Jordan Jordan University Street Abu Al Haj Commercial Complex 2nd Floor - Office # 202 - Amman

Kazakstan

b Schneider Electric Kazakhstan Liaison Office

9

Tel.: 962 65 16 78 87 Fax: 962 65 16 79 1

Prospekt Abaia 157 off 9 480009 Almaty

Tel. : +7 327 250 93 88 Tel. : +7 327 250 63 70 Tel. : +254 2.824.156 Fax : +254 2.824.157

Kenya

b Schneider East Africa

Power Technics Complex Monbasa Road - PO Box 46345 Nairobi

Kiribati



Korea

b Schneider Electric Korea Ltd

3Floor, Cheil Bldg., 94-46, 7-Ka Youngdeungpodong, Youngdeungpo-ku 150-037 Seoul

Tel. : +82 2 2630 9700 Fax : +82 2 2630 9800

Kuwait

b Schneider Electric Kuwait

Al Gaas Tower - Sharq 2nd Floor PO Box 20092 - 13 061 Safat

Tel.: +965 240 75 46 Fax: +965 240 75 06

Kyrgyz Republic



Laos


Schneider Electric Thailand

Latvia

b Lexel Electric

60A A.Deglava str. LV1035 Riga

Tel. : +371 780 23 74/75 Fax : +371 754 62 80

Lebanon

b Schneider Electric Liban

Tabaris, Avenue Charles Malek Immeuble Ashada, 8 P.O. Box 166223 - Beyrouth

Tel. : +961 1 20 46 20 Tel. : +961 1 20 31 19

Lesotho



Liberia


Schneider Electric Ghana

Libya


Schneider Electric Tunisia

Liechtenstein


Schneider Electric Switzerland

Lithuania

b Lexel Electric

44, Verkiu str. LT-2012 Vilnius

Loro Sae



Luxembourg

b Schneider Electric Industrie SAS

Agence de Metz 1, Rue Graham Bell - BP n° 35190 57075 Metz cedex 3 - France

Macau


Schneider Electric China

9/14

www.schneider-electric.co.jp

www.csinfo.co.kr/schneider/

Tel. : +370 278 59 59/61 Fax : +370 278 59 60

Tel.: 33 03 87 39 06 03 Fax: 33 03 87 74 25 96

www.schneider-electric.fr


0

Up-dated: 30-07-2003 Macedonia


Schneider Electric Bulgaria

Madagascar


Schneider Electric la Reunion

Malawi



Malaysia

b Schneider Electric (Malaysia) Sdn No.11 Jalan U1/19, Seksyen U1 Bhd

Hicom-Glenmarie Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan

Maldives


Schneider Electric Reunion

Mali



Malta


Schneider Electric Tunisia

Marshall islands



Martinique


Schneider Electric Immeuble Cottrell - ZI de la Lézarde 97232 Le Lamentin

Mauritania



Mauritius


Route côtière Calodyne - Mauritius

Mayotte



Mexico

b Groupe Schneider Mexico

Calz. Rojo Gomez N° 1121-A Col. Guadalupe del Moral México, D.F. - C.P. 09300

Micronesia



Moldova


Schneider Electric Romania

Monaco


Schneider Electric France

Mongolia



Montserrat



Morocco

b Schneider Electric Morocco

26, rue Ibnou Khalikane Quartier Palmiers 20100 Casablanca

Mozambique



Myanmar


Schneider Electric Singapore

Namibia



Nauru



Nepal



Netherlands

b Schneider Electric BV

Waarderweg 40 - Postbus 836 2003 RV Haarlem

Netherlands Antilles



New Caledonia



New Zealand

b Schneider Electric (NZ) Ltd

14 Charann Place Avondale P.O. Box 15355 - New Lynn Auckland

Nicaragua



Niger



Nigeria

b Schneider Electric Nigeria Limited Biro plaza - 8th Floor - Plot 634 Abeyemo Alakija Street Victoria Islan - Lagos

Niue



Norfolk island



North Korea


Schneider Electric China

Tel. : (603) 7883 6333 Fax : (603) 7883 6188

www.schneiderelectric.com.my

Tel.: +05 96 51 06 00 Fax: +05 96 51 11 26

Tel.: 230 282 18 83 Fax: 230 282 18 84

Tel.: +525 686 30 00 Fax: +525 686 24 09

www.schneiderelectric.com.mx

Tel.: +212 299 08 48 to 57 Fax: +212 299 08 67 and 69

www.schneider.co.ma

Tel.: +31 23 512 4124 Fax: +31 23 512 4100

www.schneider-electric.nl

Tel. : +64 9 829 04 90 Fax : +64 9 829 04 91

www.schneider-electric.co.nz

Tel. : +234 1 2702973 Fax : +234 1 2702976

Northern Mariana islands



Norway

b Schneider Electric Norge A/S

Solgaard Skog 2 Postboks 128 - 1501 Moss

Tel.: +47 6924 9700 Fax: +47 6925 7871

Oman

b Schneider Electric CA

c/o Arab Development Co PO Box 439 - 113 Muscat

Tel.: +968 77 163 64 Fax: +968 77 104 49

Pakistan

b Schneider Electric Pakistan

43-L, 2nd floor, M.M. Alam Road, Gulberg II - Lahore

Tel.: +92 42 5754471 à 73 Fax: +92 42 5754474

Palau



Panama



Papua New Guinea



Paraguay


Schneider Electric Uruguay

Peru

b Schneider Electric Peru S.A.

Los Telares n°231 Urb. Vulcano, Ate Lima 03

Tel.: +511 348 44 11 Fax: +511 348 05 23

www.schneider-electric.no

9

www.schneider-electric.com.pe

9/15


0

Up-dated: 30-07-2003 Philippines

b Schneider Electric Philippines, Inc 5th Floor, ALCO Building 391 Sen, Gil Puyat Avenue Makati 1209

Pitcairn


Poland

b Schneider Electric Polska Sp.zo.o. ul. Lubinowa 4a

Schneider Electric Australia 03-878 - Warszawa

Tel.: +48 22 511 8 200 Fax: +48 22 511 8 210

www.schneider-electric.pl

Tel.: +351 21 416 5800 Fax: +351 21 416 5857

www.schneiderelectric.pt

b Schneider Electric Portugal

Av.do Forte, 3 Edificio Suécia II, Piso 3-A CP 2028 Carnaxide 2795 Linda-A-Velha

Puerto Rico



Qatar

b Schneider Electric Qatar Branch

c/o Khalifa BinFahred Al Thani Trad.and Co - P.O. Box 4484 Doha

Tel.: +97 4424358 Fax: +97 4424358

Reunion


Immeuble Futura, 190, rue des 2 canons BP 646 - 97497 Sainte Clothilde

Tel.: +262 28 14 28 Fax: +262 28 39 37

Romania


Bd Ficusului n°42 Apimondia, Corp.A, et.1, Sector 1 Bucuresti

Tel.: +401 203 06 50 Fax: +401 232 15 98

www.schneider-electric.ro

Russian Federation

b Schneider Electric ZAO

Enisseyskaya 37 129 281 Moscow

Tel.: +7095 797 40 00 Fax: +7095 797 40 03

www.schneider-electric.ru

Rwanda



Samoa



San Marino


Schneider Electric Italy

Sandwich & Georgia island



Sao Tome & Principe



Saudi Arabia


Second Industrial City P.O. Box 89249 - 11682 Riyadh

Tel.: +966 1 265 1515 Fax: +966 1 265 1860

Senegal

b Schneider Electric Sénégal

BP 15952 - Dakar-Fann Rond point N'Gor - Dakar

Tel.: +221 820 68 05 Fax: +221 820 58 50

Seychelles



Sierra Leone


Schneider Electric Ghana

Singapore

b Schneider Electric Singapore Pte 10 Ang Mo Kio Street 65

Portugal

Ltd

Slovak Republic

b Schneider Electric Slovakia spol s.r.o.

Tel.: +65 484 78 77 Fax: +65 484 78 00

www.schneider-electric.com.sg

Borekova 10 SK-821 06 Bratislava

Tel. : +02 45 52 40 10 and 40 30 Fax : +02 45 52 40 00

www.schneider-electric.sk

Tel. : +386 1 23 63 555 Fax : +386 1 23 63 559

www.schneider-electric.si

#02-17/20 TechPoint Singapore 569059

Slovenia

b Schneider Electric, d.o.o.

Dunasjka 47 1000 Ljubljana

Solomon islands



Somalia



South Africa

b Schneider Electric South Africa

Private Bag X139 Halfway House 1685 - Midrand.

Tel.: +27 11 254 6400 Fax: +27 11 315 8830

www.schneider-electric.co.za

(PTY) Ltd

9

Tel. : +632 896 6063 Fax : +632 896 7229

Spain

b Schneider Electric España, S.A.

Pl. Dr. Letamendi, 5-7 08007 Barcelona

Tel.: +34 93 484 3100 Fax: +34 93 484 3308

www.schneiderelectric.es

Sri Lanka


Liaison office SRI Lanka Level 3B Valiant towers 46/7 Nawam Mawatha-Colombo 2

Tel. : +94 77 48 54 89

www.schneiderelectric-in.com

St Helena



St Kitts & Nevis



St Lucia



St Pierre et Miquelon



St Vincent & Grenadines



Sudan



Suriname



Svalbard & Jan Mayen isl.


Schneider Electric Denmark

Swaziland



Sweden

b Schneider Electric AB

Djupdalsvägen 17/19 19129 Sollentuna

Tel.: +46 8 623 84 00 Fax: +46 8 623 84 85

www.schneider-electric.se

Switzerland

b Schneider Electric (Switzerland)

Schermenwaldstrasse 11 CH - 3063 Ittigen

Tel.: +41 31 917 3333 Fax: +41 31 917 3355

www.schneider-electric.ch

Elba Street - Malki Gheibeh and Qassas bldg, 1st floor PO Box 33876-Damascus

Tel. : +963 11 37 49 88 00 Fax : +963 11 37 17 55 9

S.A.

Syrian Arab Republic

9/16

b Schneider Electric Syria


0

Up-dated: 30-07-2003 Taiwan, Republic of China

b Schneider Electric Taiwan Co Ltd 2FI., N°37, Ji-Hu Road, Nei-Hu Dist., Tel. : +886 2 8751 6388 Taipei 114

Tajikistan



Tanzania, United Rep. of



Thailand

b Schneider (Thailand) Ltd

20th Floor Richmond Building 75 Sukhumvit 26 Road, Klongtoey Bangkok 10110

Togo



Tokelau



Tonga



Trinidad & Tobago


6, 1st Street West Ext. Beaulieu Avenue Trincity Trinidad West Indies

Tel.: 1868 640 42 04 Fax: 1868 640 42 04

Tunisia

b Schneider Electric Tunisia

Rue du Lac Oubeira 1053 Les Berges du Lac - Tunis

Tel.: +216 71 960 477 Fax: +216 71 960 342

Turkey

b Schneider Elektrik Sanayi Ve

Tütüncü Mehmet Efendi Cad. N°:110 Tel.: +90 21 63 86 95 70 Kat 1-2 - 81080 Göztepe – Istanbul Fax: +90 21 63 86 38 75

Ticaret A.S.

Turkmenistan

b Schneider Electric Turkmenistan Liaison Office

www.schneider-electric.com.tw

Fax : +886 2 8751 6389

rue Neitralny Turkmenistan 28, off.326/327 74 000 Achgabad

Tel.: +662 204 9888 Fax: +662 204 9816

www.schneider-electric.co.th

www.schneiderelectric.com.tr

Tel. : +993 12 46 29 52 Fax : +993 12 46 29 52

Turks & Caicos islands



Tuvalu



Uganda



Ukraine


Rue Krechtchalik 2 252601 Kiev

Tel.: +380 44 462 04 25 Fax: +380 44 462 04 24

United Arab Emirates

b Schneider Electric Abu Dhabi

PO Box 29580 Office Floor 2/Lulu Street Al Marina Plaza Tower Abu Dhabi

Tel.: +9712 6 339444 Fax: +9712 6 316606

United Kingdom

b Schneider Electric Ltd

Braywick House East Windsor Road - Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 1 DN

Tel.: +44 (0)1 628 508 500 Fax: +44 (0)1 628 508 508

www.schneider.co.uk

United States


North American Division 1415 Roselle Road Palatine - IL 60067

Tel.: +1 847 397 2600 Fax: +1 847 925 7500

www.squared.com

Uruguay

b Schneider Electric Uruguay S.A.

Ramon Masini 3190 Montevideo

Tel. : +59 82 707 2392 Fax : +59 82 707 2184

Uzbekistan



Vanuatu



Vatican city St./Holy See



Venezuela

b Schneider Mg SD TE, S.A

Calle 162/ Piso 2 Edificio Centro Cynamid La Urbina, 1070 - 75319 Caracas

Tel.: +58 2 241 13 44 Fax: +58 2 243 60 09

Viet Nam

b R.R.O. of Schneider Electric

Unit 2.9, 2nd Floor, e-Town Building 364 Cong Hoa Street Tan Binh District - Ho Chi Minh City

Tel.: +84 8 8103 103 Fax: +84 8 8120 477

Industries S.A.S. in Viet Nam

Virgin islands



Wallis & Futuna islands



Western Sahara


Schneider Electric Morocco

Yemen


Schneider Electric U.A.E.

Yugoslavia

b Schneider Electric Jugoslavija

Ratarski put 27d 11186 Belgrade

Tel.: +381 11 192 414 Fax: +381 11 107 125

d.o.o.

Zambia

b Schneider Zambia

Zambia Office c/o Matipi Craft Center Building Plot 1036 - Accra Road PO Box 22792 - Kitwe

Tel.: +260 222 22 52 Fax: +260 222 83 89

Zimbabwe


Zimbabwe Liaison Office 75A Second Street (corner Livingstone Avenue) Harare

Tel.: +263 4 707 179/180 Fax: +263 4 707 176

www.schneider-electric.com.ua

www.schneider-electric.com.ve

9

9/17

Product reference index

0

, 0 043 509 383

5/91

110 110 XCA 282 01 110 XCA 282 02 110 XCA 282 03

6/27 6/27 6/27

140 140 NWM 100 00

5/21

170 170 DTN 110 00 170 EDI 346 00 170 EDO 346 00 170 ENO 396 00 170 INT 110 00 170 MCI 007 00 170 MCI 020 10 170 MCI 020 36 170 MCI 020 80 170 MCI 021 20 170 MCI 100 00 170 PNT 110 20 170 XTS 009 00 170 XTS 020 00 170 XTS 021 00 170 XTS 050 00

174 174 CEV 200 30 174 CEV 200 40 174 CEV 300 20

9

490 490 NAA 271 01 490 NAA 271 02 490 NAA 271 03 490 NAA 271 04 490 NAA 271 06 490 NAD 911 03 490 NAD 911 04 490 NAD 911 05 490 NOC 000 05 490 NOR 000 05 490 NOT 000 05 490 NTC 000 02 490 NTC 000 02U 490 NTC 000 05 490 NTC 000 05U 490 NTC 000 12 490 NTC 000 12U 490 NTC 000 40 490 NTC 000 40U 490 NTC 000 80 490 NTC 000 80U 490 NTW 000 02 490 NTW 000 02U 490 NTW 000 05 490 NTW 000 05U 490 NTW 000 12 490 NTW 000 12U 490 NTW 000 40 490 NTW 000 40U 490 NTW 000 80 490 NTW 000 80U

9/18

5/93 3/73 3/73 3/73 5/97 5/97 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/97 5/91 5/97 5/91 5/91 3/69, et 3/73

499 499 NEH 104 10 499 NEH 141 00 499 NES 171 00 499 NES 181 00 499 NES 251 00 499 NMS 251 01 499 NMS 251 02 499 NOH 105 10 499 NOS 171 00 499 NSS 251 01 499 NSS 251 02 499 NTR 100 10 499 NTR 101 00

5/46 5/46 5/49 5/49 5/48 5/48 5/48 5/46 5/49 5/48 5/48 5/47 5/47

8 870 USE 100 00

3/73

9 990 MCO 000 01 990 MCO 000 03 990 MCO 000 05 990 MCO 000 15 990 MCO 000 55 990 MCO 000 75 990 MCO 001 25 990 MCO KIT 00 990 MCO KIT 01 990 NAA 263 20 990 NAA 263 50

5/50 5/50 5/50

5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/93 5/93 5/93 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51 5/51

990 NAD 211 10 990 NAD 211 30 990 NAD 230 00 990 NAD 230 10 990 NAD 230 11 990 NAD 230 12 990 NAD 230 20 990 NAD 230 21 990 NAD 230 22 990 NAD 230 23

4/54 4/54 4/54 4/54 4/54 4/54 4/54 4/54 4/54 6/27, et 5/97 5/97, et 6/27 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91

ABE ABE 7ACC01 ABE 7ACC02 ABE 7ACC10 ABE 7ACC11 ABE 7ACC12 ABE 7ACC20 ABE 7ACC21 ABE 7ACC30 ABE 7ACC80 ABE 7ACC81 ABE 7ACC82 ABE 7ACC83 ABE 7ACC84 ABE 7ACC85 ABE 7BV10 ABE 7BV10E ABE 7BV20

ABE 7BV20E ABE 7CPA01

ABE 7CPA02 ABE 7CPA03 ABE 7CPA11

ABE 7CPA12 ABE 7CPA13 ABE 7CPA21 ABE 7CPA31 ABE 7CPA31E ABE 7FU012 ABE 7FU050 ABE 7FU100 ABE 7FU200 ABE 7FU400 ABE 7FU630 ABE 7H08R10 ABE 7H08R11 ABE 7H08R21 ABE 7H08S21 ABE 7H12R10 ABE 7H12R11 ABE 7H12R20 ABE 7H12R21 ABE 7H12R50 ABE 7H12S21 ABE 7H16C10 ABE 7H16C11 ABE 7H16C21 ABE 7H16C31 ABE 7H16CM11 ABE 7H16CM21 ABE 7H16F43 ABE 7H16R10 ABE 7H16R11 ABE 7H16R11E ABE 7H16R20

8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/15 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 4/19, 4/23, 4/37, et 8/17 8/17 4/19 4/23 4/41 et 8/17 3/27 et 8/16 3/27, et 8/16 4/23, 4/26, 4/41, et 8/16 3/27, et 8/16 4/8, et 8/16 3/27, et 8/16 3/27, et 8/16 3/27, et 8/16 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, 4/37, 4/41, et 8/11

ABE 7H16R21 ABE 7H16R21E ABE 7H16R23 ABE 7H16R30 ABE 7H16R31 ABE 7H16R50 ABE 7H16R50E ABE 7H16S21 ABE 7H16S21E ABE 7H16S43 ABE 7H20E100 ABE 7H20E200 ABE 7H20E300 ABE 7H32E150 ABE 7H32E300 ABE 7LOGF25 ABE 7LOGV10 ABE 7P08T330 ABE 7P08T330E ABE 7P16F310 ABE 7P16F310E ABE 7P16F312 ABE 7P16M111 ABE 7P16T111 ABE 7P16T210 ABE 7P16T212 ABE 7P16T214 ABE 7P16T215 ABE 7P16T230 ABE 7P16T230E ABE 7P16T318 ABE 7P16T318E ABE 7P16T330 ABE 7P16T330E ABE 7P16T332 ABE 7P16T334 ABE 7R08S111 ABE 7R08S111E ABE 7R08S210 ABE 7R08S210E ABE 7R08S216 ABE 7R08S216E ABE 7R16M111 ABE 7R16S111 ABE 7R16S111E ABE 7H16R30 ABE 7H16R31 ABE 7H16R50 ABE 7H16R50E ABE 7H16S21 ABE 7H16S21E ABE 7H16S43 ABE 7H20E100 ABE 7H20E200 ABE 7H20E300 ABE 7H32E150 ABE 7H32E300 ABE 7LOGF25 ABE 7LOGV10 ABE 7P08T330 ABE 7P08T330E ABE 7P16F310 ABE 7P16F310E ABE 7P16F312 ABE 7P16M111 ABE 7P16T111 ABE 7P16T210 ABE 7P16T212 ABE 7P16T214 ABE 7P16T215 ABE 7P16T230 ABE 7P16T230E ABE 7P16T318 ABE 7P16T318E ABE 7P16T330 ABE 7P16T330E

8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/17 8/17 8/14 8/14 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/13 8/12 8/12 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/11 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/17 8/17 8/14 8/14 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14

ABE 7P16T332 ABE 7P16T334 ABE 7R08S111 ABE 7R08S111E ABE 7R08S210 ABE 7R08S210E ABE 7R08S216 ABE 7R08S216E ABE 7R16M111 ABE 7R16S111 ABE 7R16S111E ABE 7R16S210 ABE 7R16S210E ABE 7R16S212 ABE 7R16S212E ABE 7R16T111 ABE 7R16T210 ABE 7R16T212 ABE 7R16T230 ABE 7R16T231 ABE 7R16T330 ABE 7R16T332 ABE 7R16T370 ABE 7S08S2B0 ABE 7S08S2B0E ABE 7S08S2B1 ABE 7S08S2B1E ABE 7S16E2B1 ABE 7S16E2B1E ABE 7S16E2E0 ABE 7S16E2E0E ABE 7S16E2E1 ABE 7S16E2E1E ABE 7S16E2F0 ABE 7S16E2F0E ABE 7S16E2M0 ABE 7P16F312 ABE 7P16M111 ABE 7P16T111 ABE 7P16T210 ABE 7P16T212 ABE 7P16T214 ABE 7P16T215 ABE 7P16T230 ABE 7P16T230E ABE 7P16T318 ABE 7P16T318E ABE 7P16T330 ABE 7P16T330E ABE 7P16T332 ABE 7P16T334 ABE 7R08S111 ABE 7R08S111E ABE 7R08S210 ABE 7R08S210E ABE 7R08S216 ABE 7R08S216E ABE 7R16M111 ABE 7R16S111 ABE 7R16S111E ABE 7R16S210 ABE 7R16S210E ABE 7R16S212 ABE 7R16S212E ABE 7R16T111 ABE 7R16T210 ABE 7R16T212 ABE 7R16T230 ABE 7R16T231 ABE 7R16T330 ABE 7R16T332 ABE 7R16T370 ABE 7S08S2B0 ABE 7S08S2B0E ABE 7S08S2B1 ABE 7S08S2B1E

8/14 8/14 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/13 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/13 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/14 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/13 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/13 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12


ABE 7S16E2B1 ABE 7S16E2B1E ABE 7S16E2E0 ABE 7S16E2E0E ABE 7S16E2E1 ABE 7S16E2E1E ABE 7S16E2F0 ABE 7S16E2F0E ABE 7S16E2M0 ABE 7S16E2M0E ABE 7S16S1B2 ABE 7S16S1B2E ABE 7S16S2B0 ABE 7S16S2B0E ABE 7TES160

ABF ABF C08R02B ABF C08R02R ABF C08R02W ABF C08R12B ABF C08R12R ABF C08R12W ABF Y25S150 ABF Y25S200 ABF Y25S300 ABF Y25S500 ABL ABL 7CEM24003 ABL 7CEM24006 ABL 7CEM24012 ABL 7RE2402 ABL 7RE2403 ABL 7RE2405 ABL 7RE2410 ABL 7REQ24050 ABL 7REQ24100 ABL 7RP1205 ABL 7RP2403 ABL 7RP2405 ABL 7RP2410 ABL 7RP4803 ABL 7UEQ24100 ABL 7UEQ24200 ABL 7UES24050 ABL 7UPS24100 ABL 7UPS24200 ABL 7UPS24400

8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 8/12 3/16, et 8/17

8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 8/17 3/27 3/27 3/27 3/27

8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 4/13, et 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31 8/31

ABR ABR 7S11 ABR 7S21 ABR 7S23 ABR 7S33 ABR 7S33E ABR 7S37

8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15

ABS ABS 7EA3E5 ABS 7EA3F5 ABS 7EA3M5 ABS 7EC3AL ABS 7EC3B2 ABS 7EC3E2 ABS 7SA2M ABS 7SA3MA ABS 7SC1B ABS 7SC2E ABS 7SC3BA ABS 7SC3E

8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15 8/15

AR1 AR1 SB3

8/17

ASp AS MBKT 185 ASI ABLB3002 ASI ABLB3004 ASI ABLD3002 ASI ABLD3004 ASI ABLM3024

5/91 5/63 5/63 5/63 5/63 5/63

O OZD FIP G3

5/81

SF3 SF3 CPY005 SF3 CPY010 SF3 CPY015 SF3 CPY020 SF3 CPY025 SF3 CPY030 SF3 PY32003 SF3 PY32010 SF3 PY32020 SF3 PY32030 SF3 PY32040 SF3 PY32050 SF3 PY32060 SF3 PY32080 SF3 PY32120 SF3 PY32200 SF3 PY32300 SM1 SM1 PS371 SM1 PS381 SM1 PY52 STB STB NDP 2112 STB NIB 2212 STB NMP 2212 SYC SPU LFF CD28M SPU LFG CD28M SPU LFT CD28M SPU LFU CD28M SPU LRU CD28M SPU LUF CD28M SPU LUG CD28M SPU LUT CD28M

T T FTX CB1 020 T FTX CB1 050 T PCX 57 203M T PCX 57 353M

4/60 4/60 4/60 4/60 4/60 4/60 4/61 4/61 4/61 4/61 4/61 4/61 4/61 4/61 4/61 4/61 4/61

4/60 4/60 4/60

5/93 5/97 5/91

5/55, et 5/93 5/55, et 5/93 5/55, et 5/93 5/55, et 5/93 5/55, et 5/93 5/55, et 5/93 5/55, et 5/93 5/55, et 5/93

5/110 5/110 1/35 1/35

0

TBX TBX AES 400 TBX AMS 620 TBX ASS 200 TBX BAS 10 TBX BLP 01

TBX CBS 010 TBX CEP 1622 TBX CSP 1622 TBX CSP 1625 TBX DES 1622 TBX DES 1633 TBX DES 16C22 TBX DES 16F22 TBX DES 16S04 TBX DMS 1025 TBX DMS 1625 TBX DMS 16C22 TBX DMS 16C222 TBX DMS 16P22 TBX DMS 16S44 TBX DSS 1235 TBX DSS 1622 TBX DSS 1625 TBX DSS 16C22 TBX EEP 08C22 TBX EEP 1622 TBX ESP 08C22 TBX ESP 1622 TBX FP ACC 10 TBX GND 015 TBX LEP 020 TBX LEP 030 TBX LEP 030 TBX RV 015 TBX SEP 08 TBX SSP 08 TBX SUP 10 TLX CD 10OFS 30M CD OFS 30M CD DRV 20 M CD FCHMI V1M CD GTW 10M CD PL7 DIF 41 CD PL7J p44M CD PL7M p44M CD PL7M PC44M CD PL7P p44M CD3 PL7 DIF 41 CD3 PL7J p44M CD3 PL7M p44M CD3 PL7P p44M CD TCPA33E CD UNOFS 30M CD WSBY P40F CD10 GTW 10M CD3 WSBY P40F CDUNT GTW 10M DOC PL7 44F LIBS CNVF LSDKC PL741M L PL7 FUZ 34M SDKC PL7 41M OS PL7P P44M OT PL7M P44M

3/51 3/51 3/51 3/58, et 3/73 3/41, 3/51, et 3/58 3/41 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/40 3/58 3/58 3/58 3/58 3/58 3/41 3/41 3/41 3/51 3/41 3/41 3/41 3/41

7/13 7/13 5/79, et 6/71 5/39, et 5/21 1/21, et 1/35 6/77 6/70 6/70 6/70 6/71 6/77 6/70 6/70 6/71 5/39 7/13 4/66 1/21, et 1/35 4/66 1/21, et 1/35 6/71 5/97 5/39 6/75 6/73 6/71 6/71

OT PL7P P44M RCD PL7J P44M RCD PL7M P44M RCD PL7M PC44M RCD PL7P P44M RCD3 PL7J P44M RCD3 PL7M P44M RCD3 PL7P P44M S PL7P P44M UCD PL7J P44M UCD PL7P P44M UCD3 PL7J P44M UCD3 PL7P P44M TSX TSX AAK2 TSX ACC VA625 TSX ACC VA625 TSX AEY 1600 TSX AEY 1614 TSX AEY 414 TSX AEY 420 TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 810 TSX ASY 410 TSX ASY 800 TSX BAT M02 TSX BAT M03 TSX BLY 01 TSX CAP 030 TSX CAP S15

TSX CAP S9 TSX CAY 21 TSX CAY 22 TSX CAY 33 TSX CAY 41 TSX CAY 42 TSX CBRY 2500 TSX CBRY 2500F TSX CBRY K5 TSX CBY 010K TSX CBY 030K TSX CBY 050K TSX CBY 1000 TSX CBY 1000K TSX CBY 120K TSX CBY 180K TSX CBY 280K TSX CBY 380K TSX CBY 500K TSX CBY 720K TSX CBY ACC 10 TSX CBY K9 TSX CCP 301 TSX CCP S15

TSX CCP S15 050

TSX CCP S15 100

6/71 6/70 6/70 6/70

TSX CCT 200 TSX CCY 1128 TSX CD DRV 20M TSX CDP 053

6/71 6/70 6/70 6/71 6/71 6/70 6/71 6/70 6/71

3/27, et 3/51 2/10 2/7 3/26 3/26 3/26 3/26 3/26 3/26 3/26 3/26 1/23, et 1/37 1/23, et 1/37 3/16, et 3/27 3/27 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, 4/37, et 4/41 4/41 4/41 4/41 4/41 4/41 4/41 2/13 2/13 2/13 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 2/10 4/23 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, et 4/42 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, 4/42, 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, et 4/42

TSX CDP 1001

TSX CDP 1003 TSX CDP 102

TSX CDP 103

TSX CDP 202

TSX CDP 203

TSX CDP 301

TSX CDP 302

TSX CDP 303

TSX CDP 501

TSX CDP 503

TSX CDP 611 TSX CFY 11 TSX CFY 21 TSX CPP 102 TSX CPP 110 TSX CPP 202 TSX CPP 301 TSX CPP 302 TSX CSA 100 TSX CSA 200 TSX CSA 500 TSX CSY 164 TSX CSY 84 TSX CTC 07 TSX CTC 10

4/54 4/26 5/105 3/16, 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, 4/37, et 4/42 3/16, 4/19, 4/23, et 4/37 3/16 3/16, 4/19, et 4/23 3/16, 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, 4/37, et 4/42 3/16, 4/19, et 4/23 3/16, 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, 4/37, et 4/42 3/16, 4/19, 4/26, 4/37, et 4/42 3/16, 4/19, et 4/23 3/16, 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, 4/37, et 4/42 3/16, 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, et 4/42 3/16, 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, 4/37, et 4/42 4/42 4/37 4/37 4/8 5/55 4/8 4/8 4/8 5/101, et 5/105 5/101, et 5/105 5/101, et 5/105 4/54 4/54 5/111 5/111

9/19

9


9

TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 2C TSX CTY 4A TSX CXP 213 TSX CXP 223 TSX CXP 233 TSX CXP 235 TSX CXP 243 TSX CXP 245 TSX CXP 263 TSX CXP 273 TSX CXP 613 TSX CXP 633 TSX CXP 635 TSX CXP 643 TSX CXP 645 TSX CXP 663 TSX CXP 673 TSX DEY 08D2 TSX DEY 16A2 TSX DEY 16A3 TSX DEY 16A4 TSX DEY 16A5 TSX DEY 16D2 TSX DEY 16D3 TSX DEY 16FK TSX DEY 32D2K TSX DEY 32D3K TSX DEY 64D2K TSX CTC 07 TSX CTC 10 TSX CTY 2A TSX CTY 2C TSX CTY 4A TSX CXP 213 TSX CXP 223 TSX CXP 233 TSX CXP 235 TSX CXP 243 TSX CXP 245 TSX CXP 263 TSX CXP 273 TSX CXP 613 TSX CXP 633 TSX CXP 635 TSX CXP 643 TSX CXP 645 TSX CXP 663 TSX CXP 673 TSX DEY 08D2 TSX DEY 16A2 TSX DEY 16A3 TSX DEY 16A4 TSX DEY 16A5 TSX DEY 16D2 TSX DEY 16D3 TSX DEY 16FK TSX DEY 32D2K TSX DEY 32D3K TSX DEY 64D2K TSX DMY 28FK TSX DMY 28RFK TSX DSY 08R4D TSX DSY 08R5 TSX DSY 08R5A TSX DSY 08S5 TSX DMY 28FK TSX DMY 28RFK TSX DSY 08R4D TSX DSY 08R5 TSX DSY 08R5A TSX DSY 08T2 TSX DSY 08T22 TSX DSY 08T31 TSX DSY 16R5 TSX DSY 16S4

9/20

4/19 4/23 4/19 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/37 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/37 4/42 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 5/111 5/111 4/19 4/23 4/19 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/37 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/42 4/37 4/42 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/14 3/16 3/16 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/16 3/16 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15

TSX DSY 16S5 TSX DSY 16T2 TSX DSY 16T3 TSX DSY 32T2K TSX DSY 64T2K TSX EEF 08D2 TSX EEF 16D2 TSX EF ACC 2002 TSX EF ACC 2010 TSX EF ACC 20120 TSX EF ACC 20250 TSX EF ACC 2030 TSX EF ACC 2070 TSX EF ACC 7

3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/15 3/68 3/68 3/69 3/69 3/69 3/69 3/69 3/69 3/68, et 5/84 TSX EF ACC 99 3/68, et 5/84 TSX EF CF 01 3/68 TSX EF CF 02 3/68 TSX EF CF 03 3/68 TSX EF CM 01 3/68 TSX EF CM 03 3/68 TSX EF CT 03 3/68 TSX EMF 16DT2 3/68 TSX ESF 08T22 3/68 TSX ETH ACC 10M 5/87 TSX ETH ACC 2 5/87 TSX ETH ACC 3 5/87 TSX ETH ACC 4 5/87 TSX ETH ACC 5 5/87 TSX ETH CA 020 5/87 TSX ETH CA 100 5/87 TSX ETH CA 200 5/87 TSX ETH CC 005 5/87 TSX ETH CC 010 5/87 TSX ETH CC 020 5/87 TSX ETH CD 025 5/87 TSX ETH NTR1 5/87 TSX ETY 110 5/39 TSX ETY 110 WS 5/39 TSX ETY 210 4/66 TSX ETY 4103 5/39 TSX ETY 5103 5/39 TSX ETY CB 005 5/87 TSX ETY CB 010 5/87 TSX ETY CB 020 5/87 TSX FAN A4P 2/5 TSX FAN A5P 2/5 TSX FAN D2P 2/5 TSX FP ACC12 5/84 TSX FP ACC12 3/68, et 5/71 TSX FP ACC14 5/84 TSX FP ACC2 3/68, 5/75, et 5/84 TSX FP ACC3 5/75, et 5/84 TSX FP ACC4 3/58, 5/71, et 5/84 TSX FP ACC6 5/84 TSX FP ACC7 3/68 TSX FP ACC8M 5/84 TSX FP ACC9 5/84 TSX FP C100 5/85 TSX FP C200 5/85 TSX FP C500 5/85 TSX FP CA 100 3/69, et 5/85 TSX FP CA 200 3/69, et 5/85 TSX FP CA 500 5/85 TSX FP CC 100 3/69, et 5/85

TSX FP CC 200 TSX FP CC 500 TSX FP CE 030 TSX FP CG 010 TSX FP CG 030 TSX FP CP 100 TSX FP CP 500 TSX FP CP 500 TSX FP CR 100 TSX FP CR 200 TSX FP CR 500 TSX FP JF020 TSX FPC10M TSX FPP 10 TSX FPP 20 TSX FPP OZD 200 TSX IBI CP DD9 004 TSX IBI CP DD9 010 TSX IBI CP DD9 030 TSX IBI CP DD9 070 TSX IBI CP DD9 120 TSX IBI CP DD9 250 TSX IBS CA 100 TSX IBS CA 400 TSX IBX 100 TSX IBY 100 TSX ISP Y101 TSX ISP Y111 TSX JNP 112 TSX JNP 114 TSX MBP 100 TSX MBP CE 002 TSX MBP CE 030 TSX MBP CE 060 TSX MCP C002M TSX MCP C224K TSX MCP C224K TSX MCP C512K TSX MFP 0128P TSX MFP 032P TSX MFP 064P TSX MFP 232P TSX MFP 232P/264P TSX MFP 264P TSX MFP B096K TSX MFP BAK 032P TSX MFP C384K TSX MFP P001M TSX MFP P002M TSX MFP P004M TSX MFP P004M TSX MFP P128K

TSX MFP P224K

TSX MFP P384K TSX MFP P512K TSX MRP 0128P TSX MRP 0256P

3/69, et 5/85 3/69, et 5/85 5/85 5/75, et 5/79 5/75, et 5/79 3/69, et 5/85 3/69, et 5/85 3/69 3/69 3/69 5/85 5/84 5/75, et 5/81 5/79 5/81 3/73 3/73 3/73 3/73 3/73 3/73 5/97 5/97 5/97 5/97 4/60 4/60 5/107 5/107 5/91 5/91 5/91 5/91 1/23 1/36, et 1/37 1/23 1/23 1/36, et 1/37 1/36, et 1/37 1/36, et 1/37 1/36 1/37 1/36 1/23, et 1/37 1/37 1/37 1/23 1/23 1/37 1/23 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 1/23, et 1/36 1/23 1/36, et 1/37 1/36, et 1/37

TSX MRP 032P TSX MRP 0512P TSX MRP 064P TSX MRP 2128P TSX MRP 232P TSX MRP 232P/264P TSX MRP 264P TSX MRP 3256P

1/36, et 1/37 1/36, et 1/37 1/36, et 1/37 1/36, et 1/37 1/36 1/37

1/36 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP 3384P 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP C001M 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP C002M 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP C003M 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP C007M 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP C01M7 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP C448K 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP C768K 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP DS 2048P 1/37 TSX MRP F004M 1/23 TSX MRP F008M 1/23 TSX MRP P128K 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRPP 224K 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX MRP P384K 1/23, 1/36, et 1/37 TSX P ACC 01 5/100, 5/105, 5/109 TSX P CAP 1/23 et1/37 TSX P57 103M 1/31 TSX P57 153M 1/31 TSX P57 1634M 5/38 TSX P57 203M 1/31 TSX P57 253M 1/31 TSX P57 2623M 1/31, et 5/38 TSX P57 2634M 5/38 TSX P57 2823M 1/31, et 5/38 TSX P57 303M 1/31 TSX P57 3623M 1/31, et 5/38 TSX P57 3634M 5/38 TSX P57 453M 1/31 TSX P57 4634M 5/38 TSX P57 4823M 1/31 5/38 TSX P57 5634M 5/38 TSX PAY 262 4/8 TSX PAY 282 4/8

TSX PBS CA 100 TSX PBY 100 TSX PCI 57 204M TSX PCI 57 354M TSX PCI ACC1 TSX PCX 1031

TSX PCX 1130 TSX PCX 3030

TSX PLP 01 TSX PLP 101 TSX PSI 2010 TSX PSY 1610M TSX PSY 2600M TSX PSY 3610M TSX PSY 5500M TSX PSY 5520M TSX PSY 8500M TSX REY 200 TSX RKA 02 TSX RKY 12 TSX RKY 12EX TSX RKY 4EX TSX RKY 6 TSX RKY 6EX TSX RKY 8 TSX RKY 8EX TSX SAY 100 TSX SAY 1000 TSX SCA 10 TSX SCA 50

TSX SCA 62 TSX SCA 64 TSX SCA 72 TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114

TSX SCP CC 1030

TSX SCP CD 1030

TSX SCP CD 1100

TSX SCP CM 4030

TSX SCP CU 4530

5/93 5/93 1/21 1/21 1/21 4/13, 5/105, 5/109, 5/110, 5/111, 6/27, et 6/71 5/111 5/105, 5/109, 5/110, 5/111, 6/27, et 6/71 1/21, et 2/5 1/21, et 2/5 1/21 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/5 2/13 2/7, et 2/10 2/7 2/10 2/10 2/7 2/10 2/7 2/10 5/57 5/57 5/100 5/107 5/100, 5/105, et 5/107 5/105 5/100, et 5/107 5/100 et 5/105 5/100, 5/105, et 5/109 5/100, 5/105, et 5/109 5/100, 5/105, et 5/109 5/101, 5/109, et 5/110 5/101, 5/109, et 5/110 5/101, 5/109, et 5/110 5/101, 5/107, et 5/110 5/105, et 5/110


TSX SCP CX 2030

TSX SCP CX 4030

TSX SCY 11601 TSX SCY 21601

TSX SCY CM 6030 TSX SCY CM 6530 TSX SCY CU 6030

TSX SCY CU 6530 TSX TAP MAS TSX TAP S15 05

TSX TAP S15 24

TSX TLY EX TSX WMY 100 TSX XBT H100

5/101, 5/107, 5/109, et 5/110 5/101, 5/109, et 5/110 5/100 5/79, 5/100, 5/105, et 5/109 5/101, et 5/111 5/101 5/105, 5/109, et 5/111 5/105, et 5/111 4/41 4/19, 4/23, 4/26, et 4/41 4/19, 4/23, et 4/26 2/10, et 2/13 5/21, et 5/39 4/60, et 5/39

UAG SEW LFFCD 21 SEW LFUCD 21 SEW MFFCD 21 SEW MFUCD 21

6/47 6/47 6/47 6/47

UNY CSP SPU ZBU SDU MFF CD20 SDU MFT CD20 SDU MFU CD20 SEW LFF CD20 SEW LFG CD20 SEW LFT CD20 SEW LFU CD20 SEW LYU CD20 SEW XFU CD20D SEW XFU CD20E SEW XFU CD20F SEW XFU CD20S SEW XFU CD20T SPU EFF CD 20 SPU EFG CD 20 SPU EFT CD 20 SPU EFU CD 20 SPU EZF CD 20 SPU EZG CD 20 SPU EZT CD 20 SPU EZU CD 20 SPU LFF CD 20 SPU LFG CD 20 SPU LFT CD 20 SPU LFU CD 20 SPU LZF CD 20 SPU LZG CD 20 SPU LZT CD 20 SPU LZU CD 20 SPU MFG CD 20 SPU MFU CD 20 SPU MZG CD 20 SPU MZU CD 20

6/29 6/33 6/33 6/33 6/41 6/41 6/41 6/41 6/41 6/41 6/41 6/41 6/41 6/41 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27 6/27

SPU ZFU CD 20E USE 10010 V11E USE 20110 V20E USE 20910 V10M USE 40010 V20E USE 909 CD M XCA USB 033

6/29 9/3 9/2 9/2 6/27 6/27 6/27

V VY1 X411CA15

4/42

X XBT Z968 XBT Z9681 XPS MC16X XPS MC32X XPS MCCPC XPS MCTC16 XPS MCTC32 XPS MCTS16 XPS MCTS32 XPS MCWIN XZ LG101 XZ LG102 XZ-CB10201 XZ-CB10501 XZ-CB11001

4/13, et 5/111 5/111 4/13 4/13 4/13 4/13 4/13 4/13 4/13 4/13 3/69 3/69 5/57 5/57 5/57

9

9/21

Automation & Control Modicon Premium automation platform

Schneider Electric Industries SAS Headquarters

ART. 802625

89, bd Franklin Roosevelt F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex

Owing to changes in standards and equipment, the characteristics given in the text and images in this document are not binding us until they have been confirmed with us.

http://www.schneider-electric.com http://www.telemecanique.com

Production: Schneider Electric Industries Photos: Schneider Electric Industries Printed by: Pozzo Gros Monti - Italy July 2004

MKTED204072EN


07-04

Unity & PL7 Catalogue July

04